Relion® 650 SERIES

Bay control REC650

Version 1.3 ANSI
Technical manual
 Document ID: 1MRK 511 287-UUS
Issued: November 2019
Revision: B
Product version: 1.3

© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written permission
from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party, nor used for any
unauthorized purpose.

The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and may be
used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)

This product includes cryptographic software written/developed by: Eric Young

([email protected]) and Tim Hudson ([email protected]).

Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or product names
mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
holders.

Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.

ABB AB
Grid Automation Products
SE-721 59 Västerås
Sweden
Telephone: +46 (0) 21 32 50 00
Facsimile: +46 (0) 21 14 69 18
http://www.abb.com/protection-control
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or product
description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties. All persons
responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must satisfy themselves that
each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including that any applicable safety or other
operational requirements are complied with. In particular, any risks in applications where a system
failure and/or product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but
not limited to personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entity
applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure that all
measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.

This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be completely ruled out.
In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to notify the manufacturer. Other
than under explicit contractual commitments, in no event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any
loss or damage resulting from the use of this manual or the application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC
Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specified voltage
limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB
in accordance with the product standards EN 50263 and EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and
with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The product
is designed in accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series and ANSI
C37.90.
 Table of contents

Table of contents

Section 1 Introduction....................................................................................................... 29
1.1 This manual........................................................................................................................................ 29
1.2 Intended audience............................................................................................................................ 29
1.3 Product documentation.................................................................................................................. 30
1.3.1 Product documentation set......................................................................................................... 30
1.3.2 Document revision history............................................................................................................ 31
1.3.3 Related documents......................................................................................................................... 31
1.4 Symbols and conventions................................................................................................................32
1.4.1 Symbols.............................................................................................................................................32
1.4.2 Document conventions..................................................................................................................32

Section 2 Available functions............................................................................................ 35

2.1 Control and monitoring functions.................................................................................................35
2.2 Back-up protection functions.........................................................................................................39
2.3 Station communication...................................................................................................................40
2.4 Basic IED functions........................................................................................................................... 41

Section 3 Analog inputs..................................................................................................... 43

3.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................... 43
3.2 Operation principle...........................................................................................................................43
3.3 Presumptions for technical data................................................................................................... 44
3.4 Settings...............................................................................................................................................44

Section 4 Binary input and output modules.................................................................... 51

4.1 Binary input.........................................................................................................................................51
4.1.1 Binary input debounce filter......................................................................................................... 51
4.1.2 Oscillation filter............................................................................................................................... 51
4.1.3 Settings.............................................................................................................................................52
4.1.3.1 Setting parameters for binary input modules.....................................................................52
4.1.3.2 Setting parameters for communication module................................................................ 53

Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI............................................................57

5.1 Local HMI screen behaviour............................................................................................................ 57
5.1.1 Identification................................................................................................................................... 57
5.1.2 Settings.............................................................................................................................................57
5.2 Local HMI signals...............................................................................................................................57
5.2.1 Identification................................................................................................................................... 57
5.2.2 Function block................................................................................................................................. 57
5.2.3 Signals...............................................................................................................................................58

Bay control REC650 1

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Table of contents

5.3 Basic part for LED indication module........................................................................................... 58

5.3.1 Identification................................................................................................................................... 58
5.3.2 Function block................................................................................................................................. 59
5.3.3 Signals...............................................................................................................................................59
5.3.4 Settings............................................................................................................................................ 60
5.4 LCD part for HMI function keys control module.........................................................................60
5.4.1 Identification................................................................................................................................... 60
5.4.2 Function block.................................................................................................................................60
5.4.3 Signals............................................................................................................................................... 61
5.4.4 Settings............................................................................................................................................. 61
5.5 Operation principle...........................................................................................................................62
5.5.1 Local HMI.......................................................................................................................................... 62
5.5.1.1 Display......................................................................................................................................... 62
5.5.1.2 LEDs............................................................................................................................................. 65
5.5.1.3 Keypad.........................................................................................................................................65
5.5.2 LED.....................................................................................................................................................66
5.5.2.1 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 66
5.5.2.2 Status LEDs................................................................................................................................ 67
5.5.2.3 Indication LEDs.......................................................................................................................... 67
5.5.3 Function keys...................................................................................................................................74
5.5.3.1 Functionality...............................................................................................................................74
5.5.3.2 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 74

Section 6 Current protection.............................................................................................77

6.1 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output PHPIOC (50).........................77
6.1.1 Identification ...................................................................................................................................77
6.1.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................... 77
6.1.3 Function block................................................................................................................................. 77
6.1.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................... 77
6.1.5 Settings.............................................................................................................................................78
6.1.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................................78
6.1.7 Operation principle.........................................................................................................................78
6.1.8 Technical data..................................................................................................................................79
6.2 Four step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output OC4PTOC (51/67)....................... 79
6.2.1 Identification .................................................................................................................................. 79
6.2.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................... 79
6.2.3 Function block.................................................................................................................................80
6.2.4 Signals...............................................................................................................................................80
6.2.5 Settings.............................................................................................................................................81
6.2.6 Monitored data............................................................................................................................... 83
6.2.7 Operation principle........................................................................................................................ 83
6.2.8 Second harmonic blocking element............................................................................................87
6.2.9 Technical data................................................................................................................................. 88

2 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
 Table of contents

6.3 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC (50N)............................................... 88

6.3.1 Identification .................................................................................................................................. 88
6.3.2 Functionality....................................................................................................................................89
6.3.3 Function block.................................................................................................................................89
6.3.4 Signals...............................................................................................................................................89
6.3.5 Settings............................................................................................................................................ 89
6.3.6 Monitored data............................................................................................................................... 90
6.3.7 Operation principle........................................................................................................................ 90
6.3.8 Technical data................................................................................................................................. 90
6.4 Four step residual overcurrent protection, zero, negative sequence direction
EF4PTOC (51N/67N).........................................................................................................................90
6.4.1 Identification ...................................................................................................................................91
6.4.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................... 91
6.4.3 Function block................................................................................................................................. 92
6.4.4 Signals...............................................................................................................................................92
6.4.5 Settings.............................................................................................................................................93
6.4.6 Monitored data............................................................................................................................... 96
6.4.7 Operation principle........................................................................................................................ 96
6.4.7.1 Operating quantity within the function............................................................................... 96
6.4.7.2 Internal polarizing..................................................................................................................... 97
6.4.7.3 External polarizing for ground-fault function................................................................... 100
6.4.7.4 Base quantities within the protection................................................................................100
6.4.7.5 Internal ground-fault protection structure........................................................................100
6.4.7.6 Four residual overcurrent steps...........................................................................................100
6.4.7.7 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison function. 101
6.4.8 Second harmonic blocking element..........................................................................................105
6.4.9 Technical data............................................................................................................................... 106
6.5 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection SDEPSDE (67N)........... 107
6.5.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 107
6.5.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 107
6.5.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 108
6.5.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................................108
6.5.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 109
6.5.6 Monitored data..............................................................................................................................110
6.5.7 Operation principle ...................................................................................................................... 110
6.5.7.1 Function inputs........................................................................................................................ 110
6.5.7.2 Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0·cos φ......................................... 111
6.5.7.3 Directional residual power protection measuring 3I0 · 3V0 · cos φ................................114
6.5.7.4 Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 and φ.........................................115
6.5.7.5 Directional functions...............................................................................................................115
6.5.7.6 Non-directional ground fault current protection..............................................................116
6.5.7.7 Residual overvoltage release and protection.....................................................................116
6.5.8 Technical data................................................................................................................................ 118

Bay control REC650 3

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Table of contents

6.6 Thermal overload protection, one time constant Fahrenheit/Celsius LFPTTR/

LCPTTR (26)...................................................................................................................................... 119
6.6.1 Identification .................................................................................................................................119
6.6.2 Functionality...................................................................................................................................119
6.6.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 120
6.6.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................. 120
6.6.5 Settings........................................................................................................................................... 122
6.6.6 Monitored data.............................................................................................................................. 123
6.6.7 Operation principle....................................................................................................................... 123
6.6.8 Technical data................................................................................................................................ 127
6.7 Breaker failure protection 3-phase activation and output CCRBRF (50BF)........................ 127
6.7.1 Identification..................................................................................................................................127
6.7.2 Functionality...................................................................................................................................127
6.7.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 128
6.7.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................. 128
6.7.5 Settings...........................................................................................................................................129
6.7.6 Monitored data..............................................................................................................................129
6.7.7 Operation principle.......................................................................................................................130
6.7.8 Technical data................................................................................................................................132
6.8 Stub protection STBPTOC (50STB)..............................................................................................133
6.8.1 Identification .................................................................................................................................133
6.8.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 133
6.8.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 133
6.8.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................. 133
6.8.5 Settings...........................................................................................................................................134
6.8.6 Monitored data..............................................................................................................................134
6.8.7 Operation principle.......................................................................................................................134
6.8.8 Technical data................................................................................................................................135
6.9 Pole discrepancy protection CCRPLD (52PD)............................................................................ 135
6.9.1 Identification .................................................................................................................................135
6.9.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 136
6.9.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 136
6.9.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................. 136
6.9.5 Settings........................................................................................................................................... 137
6.9.6 Monitored data.............................................................................................................................. 137
6.9.7 Operation principle....................................................................................................................... 137
6.9.7.1 Pole discrepancy signaling from circuit breaker...............................................................139
6.9.7.2 Unsymmetrical current detection........................................................................................ 139
6.9.8 Technical data................................................................................................................................139
6.10 Broken conductor check BRCPTOC (46).....................................................................................140
6.10.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 140
6.10.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 140
6.10.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 140

4 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
 Table of contents

6.10.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................................140
6.10.5 Settings........................................................................................................................................... 141
6.10.6 Monitored data.............................................................................................................................. 141
6.10.7 Operation principle....................................................................................................................... 141
6.10.8 Technical data................................................................................................................................142
6.11 Directional over-/under-power protection GOPPDOP/GUPPDUP (32/37)..........................143
6.11.1 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 143
6.11.2 Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP (32)..................................................................143
6.11.2.1 Identification............................................................................................................................ 143
6.11.2.2 Function block..........................................................................................................................143
6.11.2.3 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 144
6.11.2.4 Settings..................................................................................................................................... 144
6.11.2.5 Monitored data........................................................................................................................ 145
6.11.3 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP (37)............................................................... 145
6.11.3.1 Identification............................................................................................................................146
6.11.3.2 Function block..........................................................................................................................146
6.11.3.3 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 146
6.11.3.4 Settings..................................................................................................................................... 147
6.11.3.5 Monitored data........................................................................................................................ 148
6.11.4 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 148
6.11.4.1 Low pass filtering....................................................................................................................150
6.11.5 Technical data............................................................................................................................... 150
6.12 Negative sequence based overcurrent function DNSPTOC (46)........................................... 151
6.12.1 Identification..................................................................................................................................151
6.12.2 Functionality...................................................................................................................................151
6.12.3 Function block................................................................................................................................151
6.12.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................. 152
6.12.5 Settings........................................................................................................................................... 152
6.12.6 Monitored data..............................................................................................................................153
6.12.7 Operation principle.......................................................................................................................154
6.12.8 Technical data................................................................................................................................154

Section 7 Voltage protection.......................................................................................... 155

7.1 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27)....................................................................155
7.1.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 155
7.1.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 155
7.1.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 155
7.1.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................. 156
7.1.5 Settings...........................................................................................................................................156
7.1.6 Monitored data..............................................................................................................................157
7.1.7 Operation principle.......................................................................................................................157
7.1.7.1 Measurement principle.......................................................................................................... 158
7.1.7.2 Time delay................................................................................................................................. 158

Bay control REC650 5

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Table of contents

7.1.7.3 Blocking..................................................................................................................................... 159

7.1.7.4 Design........................................................................................................................................ 159
7.1.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................... 160
7.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59)......................................................................161
7.2.1 Identification..................................................................................................................................161
7.2.2 Functionality...................................................................................................................................161
7.2.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 162
7.2.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................. 162
7.2.5 Settings...........................................................................................................................................163
7.2.6 Monitored data............................................................................................................................. 164
7.2.7 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 164
7.2.7.1 Measurement principle.......................................................................................................... 164
7.2.7.2 Time delay................................................................................................................................. 165
7.2.7.3 Blocking.....................................................................................................................................166
7.2.7.4 Design........................................................................................................................................166
7.2.8 Technical data................................................................................................................................167
7.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N)................................................ 168
7.3.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 168
7.3.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 168
7.3.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 168
7.3.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................................169
7.3.5 Settings...........................................................................................................................................169
7.3.6 Monitored data..............................................................................................................................170
7.3.7 Operation principle.......................................................................................................................170
7.3.7.1 Measurement principle...........................................................................................................170
7.3.7.2 Time delay..................................................................................................................................171
7.3.7.3 Blocking......................................................................................................................................171
7.3.7.4 Design.........................................................................................................................................171
7.3.8 Technical data................................................................................................................................ 172
7.4 Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27)........................................................................................... 172
7.4.1 Identification..................................................................................................................................172
7.4.2 Functionality...................................................................................................................................172
7.4.3 Function block................................................................................................................................173
7.4.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................. 173
7.4.5 Settings........................................................................................................................................... 173
7.4.6 Operation principle.......................................................................................................................174
7.4.7 Technical data................................................................................................................................175

Section 8 Frequency protection...................................................................................... 177

8.1 Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81)....................................................................................177
8.1.1 Identification..................................................................................................................................177
8.1.2 Functionality...................................................................................................................................177
8.1.3 Function block................................................................................................................................177

6 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
 Table of contents

8.1.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................. 177

8.1.5 Settings...........................................................................................................................................178
8.1.6 Monitored data..............................................................................................................................178
8.1.7 Operation principle.......................................................................................................................178
8.1.7.1 Measurement principle...........................................................................................................178
8.1.7.2 Time delay................................................................................................................................. 179
8.1.7.3 Blocking..................................................................................................................................... 179
8.1.7.4 Design........................................................................................................................................180
8.1.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................... 180
8.2 Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81)..................................................................................... 180
8.2.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 180
8.2.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 180
8.2.3 Function block................................................................................................................................181
8.2.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................. 181
8.2.5 Settings........................................................................................................................................... 181
8.2.6 Monitored data..............................................................................................................................182
8.2.7 Operation principle.......................................................................................................................182
8.2.7.1 Measurement principle...........................................................................................................182
8.2.7.2 Time delay................................................................................................................................. 183
8.2.7.3 Blocking..................................................................................................................................... 183
8.2.7.4 Design........................................................................................................................................ 183
8.2.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................... 184
8.3 Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81)................................................................. 184
8.3.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 184
8.3.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 184
8.3.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 185
8.3.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................. 185
8.3.5 Settings...........................................................................................................................................185
8.3.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 186
8.3.6.1 Measurement principle.......................................................................................................... 186
8.3.6.2 Time delay.................................................................................................................................186
8.3.6.3 Design........................................................................................................................................ 187
8.3.7 Technical data................................................................................................................................187

Section 9 Secondary system supervision...................................................................... 189

9.1 Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF (87).................................................................................. 189
9.1.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 189
9.1.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 189
9.1.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 189
9.1.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................................190
9.1.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 190
9.1.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 190
9.1.7 Technical data................................................................................................................................192

Bay control REC650 7

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Table of contents

9.2 Fuse failure supervision SDDRFUF.............................................................................................. 192

9.2.1 Identification..................................................................................................................................192
9.2.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 193
9.2.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 193
9.2.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................. 193
9.2.5 Settings...........................................................................................................................................194
9.2.6 Monitored data..............................................................................................................................195
9.2.7 Operation principle.......................................................................................................................195
9.2.7.1 Zero and negative sequence detection.............................................................................. 195
9.2.7.2 Delta current and delta voltage detection......................................................................... 196
9.2.7.3 Dead line detection................................................................................................................. 199
9.2.7.4 Main logic.................................................................................................................................. 199
9.2.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................... 202
9.3 Breaker close/trip circuit monitoring TCSSCBR...................................................................... 202
9.3.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 202
9.3.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 202
9.3.3 Function block...............................................................................................................................202
9.3.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................................203
9.3.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 203
9.3.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 203
9.3.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................... 204

Section 10 Control.............................................................................................................. 205

10.1 Synchronism check, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN (25)...........................205
10.1.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 205
10.1.2 Functionality..................................................................................................................................205
10.1.3 Function block...............................................................................................................................206
10.1.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................ 206
10.1.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 208
10.1.6 Monitored data..............................................................................................................................210
10.1.7 Operation principle.......................................................................................................................210
10.1.7.1 Basic functionality...................................................................................................................210
10.1.7.2 Synchronism check.................................................................................................................. 211
10.1.7.3 Synchronizing........................................................................................................................... 212
10.1.7.4 Energizing check...................................................................................................................... 213
10.1.7.5 Fuse failure supervision......................................................................................................... 214
10.1.7.6 Voltage selection..................................................................................................................... 214
10.1.7.7 Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double busbars..............................215
10.1.7.8 Voltage selection for a breaker-and-a-half circuit breaker arrangement.................... 215
10.1.8 Technical data................................................................................................................................219
10.2 Autorecloser for 3-phase operation SMBRREC (79)................................................................. 219
10.2.1 Identification..................................................................................................................................219
10.2.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 220

8 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
 Table of contents

10.2.3 Function block...............................................................................................................................220

10.2.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................................220
10.2.5 Settings........................................................................................................................................... 221
10.2.6 Operation principle.......................................................................................................................222
10.2.6.1 Initiate auto-reclosing and conditions for initiation of a reclosing cycle....................222
10.2.6.2 Control of the auto-reclosing open time............................................................................224
10.2.6.3 Long trip signal........................................................................................................................224
10.2.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................... 228
10.3 Apparatus control........................................................................................................................... 229
10.3.1 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 229
10.3.2 Switch controller SCSWI.............................................................................................................. 229
10.3.2.1 Identification ...........................................................................................................................229
10.3.2.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................229
10.3.2.3 Function block......................................................................................................................... 230
10.3.2.4 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 230
10.3.2.5 Settings..................................................................................................................................... 231
10.3.3 Circuit breaker SXCBR.................................................................................................................. 231
10.3.3.1 Identification ........................................................................................................................... 231
10.3.3.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................. 231
10.3.3.3 Function block..........................................................................................................................232
10.3.3.4 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 232
10.3.3.5 Settings..................................................................................................................................... 233
10.3.4 Circuit switch SXSWI.................................................................................................................... 233
10.3.4.1 Identification ........................................................................................................................... 233
10.3.4.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................233
10.3.4.3 Function block......................................................................................................................... 234
10.3.4.4 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 234
10.3.4.5 Settings..................................................................................................................................... 235
10.3.5 Bay control QCBAY....................................................................................................................... 235
10.3.5.1 Identification ...........................................................................................................................235
10.3.5.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................235
10.3.5.3 Function block......................................................................................................................... 236
10.3.5.4 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 236
10.3.5.5 Settings..................................................................................................................................... 236
10.3.6 Local remote LOCREM................................................................................................................. 237
10.3.6.1 Identification ........................................................................................................................... 237
10.3.6.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................237
10.3.6.3 Function block..........................................................................................................................237
10.3.6.4 Signals........................................................................................................................................237
10.3.6.5 Settings..................................................................................................................................... 238
10.3.7 Local remote control LOCREMCTRL......................................................................................... 238
10.3.7.1 Identification ...........................................................................................................................238
10.3.7.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................ 238

Bay control REC650 9

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Table of contents

10.3.7.3 Function block......................................................................................................................... 238

10.3.7.4 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 239
10.3.7.5 Settings..................................................................................................................................... 239
10.3.8 Select release SELGGIO............................................................................................................... 240
10.3.8.1 Identification........................................................................................................................... 240
10.3.8.2 Function block......................................................................................................................... 240
10.3.8.3 Signals.......................................................................................................................................240
10.3.8.4 Settings..................................................................................................................................... 241
10.3.9 Operation principle.......................................................................................................................241
10.3.9.1 Switch controller SCSWI.........................................................................................................241
10.3.9.2 Circuit breaker SXCBR............................................................................................................ 245
10.3.9.3 Circuit switch SXSWI ............................................................................................................. 249
10.3.9.4 Bay control QCBAY.................................................................................................................. 252
10.3.9.5 Local remote/Local remote control LOCREM/LOCREMCTRL....................................... 254
10.4 Interlocking...................................................................................................................................... 254
10.4.1 Functionality..................................................................................................................................254
10.4.2 Logical node for interlocking SCILO (3)................................................................................... 255
10.4.2.1 Identification............................................................................................................................255
10.4.2.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................ 255
10.4.2.3 Function block......................................................................................................................... 255
10.4.2.4 Logic diagram.......................................................................................................................... 255
10.4.2.5 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 256
10.4.2.6 Settings.....................................................................................................................................256
10.4.3 Interlocking for busbar grounding switch BB_ES (3)............................................................ 256
10.4.3.1 Identification............................................................................................................................257
10.4.3.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................257
10.4.3.3 Function block..........................................................................................................................257
10.4.3.4 Logic diagram.......................................................................................................................... 257
10.4.3.5 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 258
10.4.3.6 Settings.....................................................................................................................................258
10.4.4 Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS (3)..................................................................258
10.4.4.1 Identification............................................................................................................................258
10.4.4.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................ 258
10.4.4.3 Function block......................................................................................................................... 259
10.4.4.4 Logic diagram..........................................................................................................................260
10.4.4.5 Signals........................................................................................................................................261
10.4.4.6 Settings..................................................................................................................................... 263
10.4.5 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC (3)....................................................... 263
10.4.5.1 Identification............................................................................................................................263
10.4.5.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................ 263
10.4.5.3 Function block......................................................................................................................... 264
10.4.5.4 Logic diagram..........................................................................................................................264
10.4.5.5 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 265

10 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
 Table of contents

10.4.5.6 Settings.....................................................................................................................................266
10.4.6 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC (3)..........................................................................266
10.4.6.1 Identification........................................................................................................................... 266
10.4.6.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................ 266
10.4.6.3 Function block......................................................................................................................... 268
10.4.6.4 Logic diagram..........................................................................................................................269
10.4.6.5 Signals........................................................................................................................................271
10.4.6.6 Settings..................................................................................................................................... 273
10.4.7 Interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter BH (3)............................................................. 273
10.4.7.1 Identification............................................................................................................................274
10.4.7.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................274
10.4.7.3 Function block..........................................................................................................................275
10.4.7.4 Logic diagrams........................................................................................................................ 277
10.4.7.5 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 282
10.4.7.6 Settings.....................................................................................................................................286
10.4.8 Interlocking for double CB bay DB (3)...................................................................................... 286
10.4.8.1 Identification........................................................................................................................... 286
10.4.8.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................287
10.4.8.3 Function block......................................................................................................................... 288
10.4.8.4 Logic diagrams........................................................................................................................290
10.4.8.5 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 293
10.4.8.6 Settings..................................................................................................................................... 297
10.4.9 Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE (3)...................................................................................... 297
10.4.9.1 Identification............................................................................................................................297
10.4.9.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................297
10.4.9.3 Function block......................................................................................................................... 298
10.4.9.4 Logic diagram..........................................................................................................................299
10.4.9.5 Signals.......................................................................................................................................304
10.4.9.6 Settings.....................................................................................................................................306
10.4.10 Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO (3).................................................................... 306
10.4.10.1 Identification............................................................................................................................307
10.4.10.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................ 307
10.4.10.3 Function block......................................................................................................................... 308
10.4.10.4 Logic diagram..........................................................................................................................309
10.4.10.5 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 310
10.4.10.6 Settings..................................................................................................................................... 312
10.4.11 Position evaluation POS_EVAL................................................................................................... 312
10.4.11.1 Identification............................................................................................................................ 312
10.4.11.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................. 312
10.4.11.3 Function block.......................................................................................................................... 312
10.4.11.4 Logic diagram...........................................................................................................................313
10.4.11.5 Signals........................................................................................................................................313
10.4.11.6 Settings..................................................................................................................................... 313

Bay control REC650 11

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Table of contents

10.4.12 Operation principle.......................................................................................................................313

10.5 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGGIO...................316
10.5.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 316
10.5.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 316
10.5.3 Function block................................................................................................................................317
10.5.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................. 317
10.5.5 Settings...........................................................................................................................................318
10.5.6 Monitored data..............................................................................................................................319
10.5.7 Operation principle.......................................................................................................................319
10.6 Selector mini switch VSGGIO........................................................................................................ 319
10.6.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 319
10.6.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 319
10.6.3 Function block...............................................................................................................................320
10.6.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................................320
10.6.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 320
10.6.6 Operation principle....................................................................................................................... 321
10.7 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions DPGGIO..................................................... 321
10.7.1 Identification..................................................................................................................................321
10.7.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 322
10.7.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 322
10.7.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................. 322
10.7.5 Settings...........................................................................................................................................322
10.7.6 Operation principle.......................................................................................................................322
10.8 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GGIO.................................................................... 323
10.8.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 323
10.8.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 323
10.8.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 323
10.8.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................. 323
10.8.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 324
10.8.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 324
10.9 Automation bits AUTOBITS.......................................................................................................... 325
10.9.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 325
10.9.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 325
10.9.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 326
10.9.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................................326
10.9.5 Settings...........................................................................................................................................327
10.9.6 Operation principle.......................................................................................................................327
10.10 Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD................................................................ 328
10.10.1 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 328
10.10.2 Function block............................................................................................................................... 328
10.10.3 Signals.............................................................................................................................................328
10.10.4 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 329
10.11 IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD.................................................................... 329

12 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
 Table of contents

10.11.1 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 329

10.11.2 Function block............................................................................................................................... 329
10.11.3 Signals.............................................................................................................................................329
10.11.4 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 330
10.12 Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103 I103USRCMD.................................330
10.12.1 Functionality..................................................................................................................................330
10.12.2 Function block...............................................................................................................................330
10.12.3 Signals.............................................................................................................................................330
10.12.4 Settings........................................................................................................................................... 331
10.13 Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103 I103GENCMD.......................................... 331
10.13.1 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 331
10.13.2 Function block............................................................................................................................... 332
10.13.3 Signals............................................................................................................................................. 332
10.13.4 Settings...........................................................................................................................................332
10.14 IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103 I103POSCMD......................332
10.14.1 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 332
10.14.2 Function block............................................................................................................................... 333
10.14.3 Signals.............................................................................................................................................333
10.14.4 Settings...........................................................................................................................................333

Section 11 Logic.................................................................................................................. 335

11.1 Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC (94)......................................................... 335
11.1.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 335
11.1.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 335
11.1.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 335
11.1.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................................335
11.1.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 336
11.1.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 336
11.1.7 Technical data................................................................................................................................337
11.2 Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO............................................................................................................337
11.2.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 337
11.2.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 337
11.2.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 338
11.2.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................................338
11.2.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 339
11.2.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 340
11.3 Configurable logic blocks.............................................................................................................. 341
11.3.1 Standard configurable logic blocks.......................................................................................... 341
11.3.1.1 Functionality.............................................................................................................................341
11.3.1.2 OR function block....................................................................................................................343
11.3.1.3 Inverter function block INVERTER....................................................................................... 344
11.3.1.4 PULSETIMER function block .................................................................................................345
11.3.1.5 Controllable gate function block GATE.............................................................................. 346

Bay control REC650 13

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Table of contents

11.3.1.6 Exclusive OR function block XOR......................................................................................... 346

11.3.1.7 Loop delay function block LOOPDELAY..............................................................................347
11.3.1.8 Timer function block TIMERSET...........................................................................................348
11.3.1.9 AND function block ................................................................................................................ 349
11.3.1.10 Set-reset memory function block SRMEMORY................................................................. 350
11.3.1.11 Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY........................................................ 351
11.3.2 Configurable logic Q/T................................................................................................................ 353
11.3.2.1 Functionality.............................................................................................................................353
11.3.2.2 ORQT function block ..............................................................................................................353
11.3.2.3 INVERTERQT function block .................................................................................................354
11.3.2.4 Pulse timer function block PULSTIMERQT......................................................................... 354
11.3.2.5 XORQT function block............................................................................................................ 355
11.3.2.6 Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT......................................................................356
11.3.2.7 ANDQT function block ...........................................................................................................358
11.3.2.8 Set-reset function block SRMEMORYQT............................................................................ 359
11.3.2.9 Reset-set function block RSMEMORYQT ...........................................................................360
11.3.2.10 INVALIDQT function block..................................................................................................... 361
11.3.2.11 Indication combining single position function block INDCOMBSPQT.........................363
11.3.2.12 Indication extractor single position function block INDEXTSPQT................................364
11.3.3 Technical data............................................................................................................................... 365
11.4 Fixed signals FXDSIGN...................................................................................................................366
11.4.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 366
11.4.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 367
11.4.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 367
11.4.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................................367
11.4.5 Settings...........................................................................................................................................367
11.4.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 367
11.5 Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I....................................................................................... 368
11.5.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 368
11.5.2 Functionality..................................................................................................................................368
11.5.3 Function block...............................................................................................................................368
11.5.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................................369
11.5.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 369
11.5.6 Monitored data............................................................................................................................. 369
11.5.7 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 370
11.6 Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation B16IFCVI...................... 371
11.6.1 Identification..................................................................................................................................371
11.6.2 Functionality...................................................................................................................................371
11.6.3 Function block................................................................................................................................371
11.6.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................. 371
11.6.5 Settings...........................................................................................................................................372
11.6.6 Monitored data..............................................................................................................................372
11.6.7 Operation principle.......................................................................................................................372

14 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
 Table of contents

11.7 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A..................................................................................... 373

11.7.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 373
11.7.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 373
11.7.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 374
11.7.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................................374
11.7.5 Settings...........................................................................................................................................375
11.7.6 Operation principle.......................................................................................................................375
11.8 Integer to boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation IB16FCVB.................... 376
11.8.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 376
11.8.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 376
11.8.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 376
11.8.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................. 377
11.8.5 Settings...........................................................................................................................................377
11.8.6 Operation principle.......................................................................................................................377
11.9 Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow supervision TEIGGIO.... 379
11.9.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 379
11.9.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 379
11.9.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 379
11.9.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................................379
11.9.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 380
11.9.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 380
11.9.6.1 Operation Accuracy................................................................................................................ 382
11.9.6.2 Memory storage...................................................................................................................... 382
11.9.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................... 382

Section 12 Monitoring........................................................................................................383
12.1 Measurements.................................................................................................................................383
12.1.1 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 383
12.1.2 Measurements CVMMXN............................................................................................................ 384
12.1.2.1 Identification .......................................................................................................................... 384
12.1.2.2 Function block......................................................................................................................... 384
12.1.2.3 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 385
12.1.2.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................................386
12.1.2.5 Monitored data........................................................................................................................389
12.1.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU...................................................................................... 390
12.1.3.1 Identification .......................................................................................................................... 390
12.1.3.2 Function block......................................................................................................................... 390
12.1.3.3 Signals.......................................................................................................................................390
12.1.3.4 Settings..................................................................................................................................... 391
12.1.3.5 Monitored data........................................................................................................................392
12.1.4 Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU.......................................................................... 392
12.1.4.1 Identification ...........................................................................................................................392
12.1.4.2 Function block......................................................................................................................... 392

Bay control REC650 15

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Table of contents

12.1.4.3 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 393

12.1.4.4 Settings..................................................................................................................................... 393
12.1.4.5 Monitored data........................................................................................................................394
12.1.5 Current sequence component measurement CMSQI........................................................... 394
12.1.5.1 Identification .......................................................................................................................... 394
12.1.5.2 Function block......................................................................................................................... 394
12.1.5.3 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 395
12.1.5.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................................395
12.1.5.5 Monitored data........................................................................................................................ 397
12.1.6 Voltage sequence measurement VMSQI.................................................................................. 397
12.1.6.1 Identification ...........................................................................................................................397
12.1.6.2 Function block..........................................................................................................................397
12.1.6.3 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 398
12.1.6.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................................398
12.1.6.5 Monitored data....................................................................................................................... 400
12.1.7 Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU.....................................................................400
12.1.7.1 Identification .......................................................................................................................... 400
12.1.7.2 Function block.........................................................................................................................400
12.1.7.3 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 401
12.1.7.4 Settings..................................................................................................................................... 401
12.1.7.5 Monitored data........................................................................................................................402
12.1.8 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 402
12.1.8.1 Measurement supervision.....................................................................................................402
12.1.8.2 Measurements CVMMXN.......................................................................................................406
12.1.8.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU..................................................................................411
12.1.8.4 Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU, VNMMXU..............411
12.1.8.5 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI...................................... 411
12.1.9 Technical data................................................................................................................................412
12.2 Event Counter CNTGGIO................................................................................................................412
12.2.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 412
12.2.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 412
12.2.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 412
12.2.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................. 413
12.2.5 Settings...........................................................................................................................................413
12.2.6 Monitored data..............................................................................................................................413
12.2.7 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 414
12.2.7.1 Reporting.................................................................................................................................. 414
12.2.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................... 414
12.3 Function description...................................................................................................................... 414
12.3.1 Limit counter L4UFCNT............................................................................................................... 415
12.3.2 Introduction................................................................................................................................... 415
12.3.3 Principle of operation.................................................................................................................. 415
12.3.3.1 Design........................................................................................................................................ 415

16 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
 Table of contents

12.3.3.2 Reporting.................................................................................................................................. 416

12.3.4 Function block............................................................................................................................... 416
12.3.5 Signals............................................................................................................................................. 417
12.3.6 Settings...........................................................................................................................................417
12.3.7 Monitored data............................................................................................................................. 418
12.3.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................... 418
12.4 Disturbance report......................................................................................................................... 418
12.4.1 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 418
12.4.2 Disturbance report DRPRDRE.....................................................................................................419
12.4.2.1 Identification............................................................................................................................419
12.4.2.2 Function block..........................................................................................................................419
12.4.2.3 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 419
12.4.2.4 Settings..................................................................................................................................... 419
12.4.2.5 Monitored data........................................................................................................................420
12.4.3 Analog input signals AxRADR..................................................................................................... 423
12.4.3.1 Identification............................................................................................................................423
12.4.3.2 Function block......................................................................................................................... 424
12.4.3.3 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 424
12.4.3.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................................425
12.4.4 Analog input signals A4RADR.....................................................................................................428
12.4.4.1 Identification........................................................................................................................... 428
12.4.4.2 Function block......................................................................................................................... 428
12.4.4.3 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 429
12.4.4.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................................429
12.4.5 Binary input signals BxRBDR...................................................................................................... 433
12.4.5.1 Identification............................................................................................................................433
12.4.5.2 Function block......................................................................................................................... 433
12.4.5.3 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 433
12.4.5.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................................434
12.4.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 439
12.4.6.1 Disturbance information....................................................................................................... 441
12.4.6.2 Indications ............................................................................................................................... 441
12.4.6.3 Event recorder .........................................................................................................................441
12.4.6.4 Sequential of events .............................................................................................................. 441
12.4.6.5 Trip value recorder ................................................................................................................. 441
12.4.6.6 Disturbance recorder .............................................................................................................441
12.4.6.7 Time tagging............................................................................................................................ 441
12.4.6.8 Recording times...................................................................................................................... 442
12.4.6.9 Analog signals..........................................................................................................................442
12.4.6.10 Binary signals...........................................................................................................................444
12.4.6.11 Trigger signals.........................................................................................................................444
12.4.6.12 Post Retrigger......................................................................................................................... 445
12.4.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................... 445

Bay control REC650 17

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Table of contents

12.5 Indications....................................................................................................................................... 446

12.5.1 Functionality..................................................................................................................................446
12.5.2 Function block.............................................................................................................................. 446
12.5.3 Signals............................................................................................................................................ 446
12.5.3.1 Input signals............................................................................................................................ 446
12.5.4 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 446
12.5.5 Technical data............................................................................................................................... 447
12.6 Event recorder ................................................................................................................................ 447
12.6.1 Functionality..................................................................................................................................447
12.6.2 Function block.............................................................................................................................. 448
12.6.3 Signals............................................................................................................................................ 448
12.6.3.1 Input signals............................................................................................................................ 448
12.6.4 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 448
12.6.5 Technical data...............................................................................................................................448
12.7 Sequential of events...................................................................................................................... 449
12.7.1 Functionality..................................................................................................................................449
12.7.2 Function block.............................................................................................................................. 449
12.7.3 Signals............................................................................................................................................ 449
12.7.3.1 Input signals............................................................................................................................ 449
12.7.4 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 449
12.7.5 Technical data............................................................................................................................... 449
12.8 Trip value recorder......................................................................................................................... 450
12.8.1 Functionality................................................................................................................................. 450
12.8.2 Function block.............................................................................................................................. 450
12.8.3 Signals............................................................................................................................................ 450
12.8.3.1 Input signals............................................................................................................................ 450
12.8.4 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 450
12.8.5 Technical data................................................................................................................................451
12.9 Disturbance recorder..................................................................................................................... 451
12.9.1 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 451
12.9.2 Function block............................................................................................................................... 451
12.9.3 Signals............................................................................................................................................. 451
12.9.4 Settings...........................................................................................................................................451
12.9.5 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 452
12.9.5.1 Memory and storage.............................................................................................................. 452
12.9.6 Technical data............................................................................................................................... 453
12.10 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions SPGGIO.....................................................454
12.10.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................454
12.10.2 Functionality..................................................................................................................................454
12.10.3 Function block...............................................................................................................................454
12.10.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................ 454
12.10.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 454
12.10.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 454

18 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
 Table of contents

12.11 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16 inputs SP16GGIO...............................455

12.11.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 455
12.11.2 Functionality..................................................................................................................................455
12.11.3 Function block...............................................................................................................................455
12.11.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................ 455
12.11.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 456
12.11.6 MonitoredData..............................................................................................................................456
12.11.7 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 457
12.12 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions MVGGIO....................................................457
12.12.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 457
12.12.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 457
12.12.3 Function block...............................................................................................................................458
12.12.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................ 458
12.12.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 458
12.12.6 Monitored data............................................................................................................................. 459
12.12.7 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 459
12.13 Measured value expander block MVEXP.................................................................................... 459
12.13.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................459
12.13.2 Functionality..................................................................................................................................459
12.13.3 Function block.............................................................................................................................. 460
12.13.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................ 460
12.13.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 460
12.13.6 Operation principle......................................................................................................................460
12.14 Fault locator LMBRFLO.................................................................................................................. 461
12.14.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 461
12.14.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 461
12.14.3 Function block...............................................................................................................................462
12.14.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................................462
12.14.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 463
12.14.6 Monitored data............................................................................................................................. 464
12.14.7 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 464
12.14.7.1 Measuring Principle................................................................................................................ 465
12.14.7.2 Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault............................................ 465
12.14.7.3 The non-compensated impedance model......................................................................... 468
12.14.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................... 469
12.15 Station battery supervision SPVNZBAT..................................................................................... 469
12.15.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................469
12.15.2 Function block...............................................................................................................................469
12.15.3 Functionality..................................................................................................................................469
12.15.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................ 470
12.15.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 470
12.15.6 Measured values........................................................................................................................... 470
12.15.7 Monitored Data............................................................................................................................. 471

Bay control REC650 19

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Table of contents

12.15.8 Operation principle ......................................................................................................................471

12.15.9 Technical data............................................................................................................................... 472
12.16 Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG (63)....................................................................... 472
12.16.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 472
12.16.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 472
12.16.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 473
12.16.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................................473
12.16.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 474
12.16.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 474
12.16.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................... 474
12.17 Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML (71).....................................................................475
12.17.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 475
12.17.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 475
12.17.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 475
12.17.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................................475
12.17.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 476
12.17.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 476
12.17.7 Technical data................................................................................................................................477
12.18 Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR............................................................................477
12.18.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 477
12.18.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 477
12.18.3 Function block...............................................................................................................................478
12.18.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................................478
12.18.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 479
12.18.6 Monitored data.............................................................................................................................480
12.18.7 Operation principle......................................................................................................................480
12.18.7.1 Circuit breaker status.............................................................................................................481
12.18.7.2 Circuit breaker operation monitoring................................................................................ 482
12.18.7.3 Breaker contact travel time.................................................................................................. 483
12.18.7.4 Operation counter.................................................................................................................. 484
12.18.7.5 Accumulation of Iyt................................................................................................................. 485
12.18.7.6 Remaining life of the circuit breaker.................................................................................. 486
12.18.7.7 Circuit breaker spring charged indication......................................................................... 487
12.18.7.8 Gas pressure supervision...................................................................................................... 487
12.18.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................... 488
12.19 Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS............................................................................. 488
12.19.1 Functionality..................................................................................................................................488
12.19.2 Function block...............................................................................................................................489
12.19.3 Signals............................................................................................................................................ 490
12.19.4 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 490
12.20 Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEASUSR................................ 491
12.20.1 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 491
12.20.2 Function block............................................................................................................................... 491

20 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
 Table of contents

12.20.3 Signals.............................................................................................................................................491
12.20.4 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 492
12.21 Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR................................................... 492
12.21.1 Functionality..................................................................................................................................492
12.21.2 Function block...............................................................................................................................492
12.21.3 Signals............................................................................................................................................ 493
12.21.4 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 493
12.22 Function status ground-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF.....................................................493
12.22.1 Functionality..................................................................................................................................493
12.22.2 Function block...............................................................................................................................493
12.22.3 Signals............................................................................................................................................ 493
12.22.4 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 494
12.23 Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103 I103FLTPROT.................................. 494
12.23.1 Functionality..................................................................................................................................494
12.23.2 Function block.............................................................................................................................. 494
12.23.3 Signals............................................................................................................................................ 495
12.23.4 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 496
12.24 IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED..................................................................................... 496
12.24.1 Functionality..................................................................................................................................496
12.24.2 Function block...............................................................................................................................496
12.24.3 Signals............................................................................................................................................ 496
12.24.4 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 497
12.25 Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV...............................................................497
12.25.1 Functionality..................................................................................................................................497
12.25.2 Function block...............................................................................................................................497
12.25.3 Signals.............................................................................................................................................497
12.25.4 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 498
12.26 Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 I103USRDEF....................................... 498
12.26.1 Functionality..................................................................................................................................498
12.26.2 Function block...............................................................................................................................498
12.26.3 Signals............................................................................................................................................ 499
12.26.4 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 499

Section 13 Metering........................................................................................................... 501

13.1 Pulse counter PCGGIO....................................................................................................................501
13.1.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 501
13.1.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 501
13.1.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 501
13.1.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................................501
13.1.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 502
13.1.6 Monitored data............................................................................................................................. 502
13.1.7 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 503
13.1.8 Technical data...............................................................................................................................504

Bay control REC650 21

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Table of contents

13.2 Energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR..............................................................504

13.2.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................504
13.2.2 Functionality................................................................................................................................. 504
13.2.3 Function block...............................................................................................................................505
13.2.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................ 505
13.2.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 506
13.2.6 Monitored data............................................................................................................................. 507
13.2.7 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 507
13.2.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................... 508

Section 14 Station communication..................................................................................509

14.1 DNP3 protocol................................................................................................................................. 509
14.2 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol ....................................................................................509
14.2.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................509
14.2.2 Functionality..................................................................................................................................509
14.2.3 Communication interfaces and protocols...............................................................................510
14.2.4 Settings...........................................................................................................................................510
14.2.5 Technical data............................................................................................................................... 510
14.3 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking.......................................................... 511
14.3.1 Identification..................................................................................................................................511
14.3.2 Function block............................................................................................................................... 512
14.3.3 Signals............................................................................................................................................. 512
14.3.4 Settings...........................................................................................................................................514
14.4 Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV.......................................................................................... 514
14.4.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 514
14.4.2 Function block............................................................................................................................... 515
14.4.3 Signals............................................................................................................................................. 515
14.4.4 Settings...........................................................................................................................................516
14.4.5 Operation principle.......................................................................................................................516
14.5 GOOSE function block to receive a double point value GOOSEDPRCV................................ 517
14.5.1 Identification..................................................................................................................................517
14.5.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 517
14.5.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 517
14.5.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................. 517
14.5.5 Settings...........................................................................................................................................518
14.5.6 Operation principle ......................................................................................................................518
14.6 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value GOOSEINTRCV.......................................518
14.6.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 518
14.6.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 519
14.6.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 519
14.6.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................. 519
14.6.5 Settings...........................................................................................................................................519
14.6.6 Operation principle ......................................................................................................................519

22 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
 Table of contents

14.7 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value GOOSEMVRCV..................................520

14.7.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 520
14.7.2 Functionality..................................................................................................................................520
14.7.3 Function block...............................................................................................................................520
14.7.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................................520
14.7.5 Settings........................................................................................................................................... 521
14.7.6 Operation principle ......................................................................................................................521
14.8 GOOSE function block to receive a single point value GOOSESPRCV.................................. 521
14.8.1 Identification..................................................................................................................................521
14.8.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 522
14.8.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 522
14.8.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................................522
14.8.5 Settings...........................................................................................................................................522
14.8.6 Operation principle ......................................................................................................................522
14.9 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol................................................................................ 523
14.9.1 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 523
14.9.2 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 524
14.10 IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication........................................................... 524
14.10.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................................. 525
14.10.2 Principle of operation.................................................................................................................. 525
14.10.3 Function block...............................................................................................................................526
14.10.4 Setting parameters...................................................................................................................... 527
14.11 Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG..................................................................................... 527
14.11.1 Activity logging ACTIVLOG..........................................................................................................527
14.11.2 Settings...........................................................................................................................................527
14.12 Generic security application component AGSAL......................................................................528
14.12.1 Generic security application AGSAL..........................................................................................528
14.13 Security events on protocols SECALARM...................................................................................528
14.13.1 Security alarm SECALARM.......................................................................................................... 528
14.13.2 Signals.............................................................................................................................................528
14.13.3 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 528

Section 15 Basic IED functions..........................................................................................529

15.1 Self supervision with internal event list .................................................................................... 529
15.1.1 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 529
15.1.2 Internal error signals INTERRSIG............................................................................................... 529
15.1.2.1 Identification............................................................................................................................529
15.1.2.2 Function block......................................................................................................................... 529
15.1.2.3 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 529
15.1.2.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................................530
15.1.3 Internal event list SELFSUPEVLST.............................................................................................530
15.1.3.1 Identification........................................................................................................................... 530
15.1.3.2 Settings.....................................................................................................................................530

Bay control REC650 23

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Table of contents

15.1.4 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 530

15.1.4.1 Internal signals.........................................................................................................................532
15.1.4.2 Run-time model....................................................................................................................... 534
15.1.5 Technical data............................................................................................................................... 535
15.2 Time synchronization.....................................................................................................................535
15.2.1 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 535
15.2.2 Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN................................................................................... 535
15.2.2.1 Identification............................................................................................................................535
15.2.2.2 Settings.....................................................................................................................................536
15.2.3 Time synchronization via SNTP................................................................................................. 536
15.2.3.1 Identification............................................................................................................................536
15.2.3.2 Settings.....................................................................................................................................536
15.2.4 Time system, summer time begin DSTBEGIN.........................................................................536
15.2.4.1 Identification............................................................................................................................536
15.2.4.2 Settings..................................................................................................................................... 537
15.2.5 Time system, summer time ends DSTEND.............................................................................. 537
15.2.5.1 Identification............................................................................................................................537
15.2.5.2 Settings.....................................................................................................................................538
15.2.6 Time zone from UTC TIMEZONE................................................................................................538
15.2.6.1 Identification............................................................................................................................538
15.2.6.2 Settings.....................................................................................................................................538
15.2.7 Time synchronization via IRIG-B................................................................................................ 539
15.2.7.1 Identification............................................................................................................................539
15.2.7.2 Settings.....................................................................................................................................539
15.2.8 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 539
15.2.8.1 General concepts.....................................................................................................................539
15.2.8.2 Real-time clock (RTC) operation.......................................................................................... 540
15.2.8.3 Synchronization alternatives................................................................................................ 541
15.2.9 Technical data............................................................................................................................... 542
15.3 Parameter setting group handling..............................................................................................542
15.3.1 Functionality..................................................................................................................................542
15.3.2 Setting group handling SETGRPS............................................................................................. 543
15.3.2.1 Identification........................................................................................................................... 543
15.3.2.2 Settings.....................................................................................................................................543
15.3.3 Parameter setting groups ACTVGRP........................................................................................ 543
15.3.3.1 Identification........................................................................................................................... 543
15.3.3.2 Function block......................................................................................................................... 543
15.3.3.3 Signals.......................................................................................................................................544
15.3.3.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................................544
15.3.4 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 544
15.4 Test mode functionality TESTMODE.......................................................................................... 545
15.4.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 545
15.4.2 Functionality..................................................................................................................................545

24 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
 Table of contents

15.4.3 Function block...............................................................................................................................546

15.4.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................ 546
15.4.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 546
15.4.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 547
15.5 Change lock function CHNGLCK .................................................................................................548
15.5.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................548
15.5.2 Functionality..................................................................................................................................548
15.5.3 Function block...............................................................................................................................548
15.5.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................ 548
15.5.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 549
15.5.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 549
15.6 IED identifiers TERMINALID..........................................................................................................549
15.6.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................549
15.6.2 Functionality..................................................................................................................................549
15.6.3 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 550
15.7 Product information ..................................................................................................................... 550
15.7.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................550
15.7.2 Functionality..................................................................................................................................550
15.7.3 Settings...........................................................................................................................................551
15.8 Primary system values PRIMVAL.................................................................................................. 551
15.8.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 551
15.8.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 551
15.8.3 Settings...........................................................................................................................................551
15.9 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI..........................................................................................551
15.9.1 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 551
15.9.2 Identification................................................................................................................................. 552
15.9.3 Function block............................................................................................................................... 552
15.9.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................................552
15.9.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 554
15.9.6 Operation principle ..................................................................................................................... 556
15.10 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM............................................................................................ 559
15.10.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 559
15.10.2 Functionality..................................................................................................................................559
15.10.3 Function block...............................................................................................................................559
15.10.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................................559
15.10.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 560
15.10.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 560
15.11 Global base values GBASVAL........................................................................................................560
15.11.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................560
15.11.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 561
15.11.3 Settings...........................................................................................................................................561
15.12 Authority check ATHCHCK............................................................................................................ 561
15.12.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 561

Bay control REC650 25

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Table of contents

15.12.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................. 561

15.12.3 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 562
15.12.4 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 562
15.12.4.1 Authorization handling in the IED........................................................................................563
15.13 Authority management AUTHMAN............................................................................................. 563
15.13.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 563
15.13.2 AUTHMAN...................................................................................................................................... 564
15.13.3 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 564
15.14 FTP access with password FTPACCS......................................................................................... 564
15.14.1 Identification.................................................................................................................................564
15.14.2 FTP access with SSL FTPACCS...................................................................................................564
15.14.3 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 565
15.15 Authority status ATHSTAT............................................................................................................ 565
15.15.1 Identification................................................................................................................................. 565
15.15.2 Functionality..................................................................................................................................565
15.15.3 Function block...............................................................................................................................565
15.15.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................................565
15.15.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 566
15.15.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 566
15.16 Denial of service..............................................................................................................................566
15.16.1 Functionality..................................................................................................................................566
15.16.2 Denial of service, frame rate control for front port DOSFRNT............................................566
15.16.2.1 Identification........................................................................................................................... 566
15.16.2.2 Function block......................................................................................................................... 566
15.16.2.3 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 567
15.16.2.4 Settings..................................................................................................................................... 567
15.16.2.5 Monitored data........................................................................................................................567
15.16.3 Denial of service, frame rate control for LAN1 port DOSLAN1.............................................567
15.16.3.1 Identification............................................................................................................................567
15.16.3.2 Function block......................................................................................................................... 568
15.16.3.3 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 568
15.16.3.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................................568
15.16.3.5 Monitored data........................................................................................................................568
15.16.4 Operation principle...................................................................................................................... 569

Section 16 IED physical connections................................................................................ 571

16.1 Protective ground connections.................................................................................................... 571
16.2 Inputs................................................................................................................................................. 571
16.2.1 Measuring inputs.......................................................................................................................... 571
16.2.2 Auxiliary supply voltage input.................................................................................................... 572
16.2.3 Binary inputs.................................................................................................................................. 573
16.3 Outputs............................................................................................................................................. 576
16.3.1 Outputs for tripping, controlling and signalling.................................................................... 576

26 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
 Table of contents

16.3.2 Outputs for signalling..................................................................................................................578

16.3.3 IRF....................................................................................................................................................580
16.4 Communication connections........................................................................................................581
16.4.1 Ethernet RJ-45 front connection............................................................................................... 581
16.4.2 Station communication rear connection................................................................................. 581
16.4.3 Optical serial rear connection.................................................................................................... 582
16.4.4 EIA-485 serial rear connection................................................................................................... 582
16.4.5 Communication interfaces and protocols...............................................................................582
16.4.6 Recommended industrial Ethernet switches..........................................................................583
16.5 Connection diagrams.....................................................................................................................583

Section 17 Labels................................................................................................................585
17.1 Labels on IED................................................................................................................................... 585

Section 18 Technical data..................................................................................................587

18.1 Dimensions.......................................................................................................................................587
18.2 Power supply....................................................................................................................................587
18.3 Energizing inputs............................................................................................................................588
18.4 Binary inputs....................................................................................................................................588
18.5 Signal outputs................................................................................................................................. 589
18.6 Power outputs.................................................................................................................................589
18.7 Data communication interfaces..................................................................................................590
18.8 Enclosure class................................................................................................................................ 591
18.9 Ingress protection.......................................................................................................................... 591
18.10 Environmental conditions and tests...........................................................................................592

Section 19 IED and functionality tests............................................................................ 593

19.1 Electromagnetic compatibility tests.......................................................................................... 593
19.2 Insulation tests............................................................................................................................... 595
19.3 Mechanical tests............................................................................................................................. 595
19.4 Product safety................................................................................................................................. 595
19.5 EMC compliance..............................................................................................................................596

Section 20 Time inverse characteristics..........................................................................597

20.1 Application....................................................................................................................................... 597
20.2 Operation principle........................................................................................................................ 599
20.2.1 Mode of operation........................................................................................................................599
20.3 Inverse time characteristics......................................................................................................... 602

Section 21 Glossary............................................................................................................ 627

Bay control REC650 27

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
28
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 1
Introduction

Section 1 Introduction
1.1 This manual GUID-AB423A30-13C2-46AF-B7FE-A73BB425EB5F v14

The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists function blocks,
logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data, sorted per
function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,
installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.

1.2 Intended audience GUID-C9B8127F-5748-4BEA-9E4F-CC762FE28A3A v9

This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning personnel, who use
technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and in normal service.

The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems, protection
equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logic in the IEDs. The installation
and commissioning personnel must have a basic knowledge in handling electronic equipment.

Bay control REC650 29

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 1 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Introduction

1.3 Product documentation

1.3.1 Product documentation set GUID-3AA69EA6-F1D8-47C6-A8E6-562F29C67172 v12

Deinstalling & disposal

Planning & purchase

Decommissioning
Commissioning

Maintenance
Engineering

Operation
Installing
Engineering manual
Installation manual

Commissioning manual
Operation manual

Application manual

Technical manual
Communication
protocol manual

IEC07000220-3-en.vsd
IEC07000220 V3 EN-US

Figure 1: The intended use of manuals throughout the product lifecycle

The engineering manual contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using the various tools
available within the PCM600 software. The manual provides instructions on how to set up a
PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project structure. The manual also recommends a sequence
for the engineering of protection and control functions, LHMI functions as well as communication
engineering for IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850 and DNP 3.0.

The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED. The manual provides
procedures for mechanical and electrical installation. The chapters are organized in the
chronological order in which the IED should be installed.

The commissioning manual contains instructions on how to commission the IED. The manual can
also be used by system engineers and maintenance personnel for assistance during the testing
phase. The manual provides procedures for the checking of external circuitry and energizing the
IED, parameter setting and configuration as well as verifying settings by secondary injection. The
manual describes the process of testing an IED in a substation which is not in service. The
chapters are organized in the chronological order in which the IED should be commissioned. The
relevant procedures may be followed also during the service and maintenance activities.

The operation manual contains instructions on how to operate the IED once it has been
commissioned. The manual provides instructions for the monitoring, controlling and setting of the

30 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 1
Introduction

IED. The manual also describes how to identify disturbances and how to view calculated and
measured power grid data to determine the cause of a fault.

The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines sorted per
function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical protection
function can be used. The manual can also provides assistance for calculating settings.

The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists function blocks,
logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data, sorted per
function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,
installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.

The communication protocol manual describes the communication protocols supported by the
IED. The manual concentrates on the vendor-specific implementations.

The point list manual describes the outlook and properties of the data points specific to the IED.
The manual should be used in conjunction with the corresponding communication protocol
manual.

1.3.2 Document revision history GUID-52A4699C-F83B-48F8-BF4E-D853043AB731 v5.1.1.1.1

Document revision/date History

-/March 2013 First release
A/October 2016 Minor corrections made
B/November 2019 Maintenance release - Updated safety information and bug corrections

1.3.3 Related documents GUID-DEA16B32-29D9-40B2-BC9F-12F3AEA90245 v7

Documents related to REC650 Identity number

Application manual 1MRK 511 286-UUS
Technical manual 1MRK 511 287-UUS
Commissioning manual 1MRK 511 288-UUS
Product Guide 1MRK 511 289-BUS
Type test certificate 1MRK 511 289-TUS

650 series manuals Identity number

Communication protocol manual, DNP 3.0 1MRK 511 280-UUS
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850–8–1 1MRK 511 281-UUS
Communication protocol manual, IEC 60870-5-103 1MRK 511 282-UUS
Cyber Security deployment guidelines 1MRK 511 285-UUS
Point list manual, DNP 3.0 1MRK 511 283-UUS
Engineering manual 1MRK 511 284-UUS
Operation manual 1MRK 500 096-UUS
Installation manual 1MRK 514 016-UUS
Accessories, 650 series 1MRK 513 023-BUS
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 31

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 1 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Introduction

650 series manuals Identity number

MICS 1MRG 010 656
PICS 1MRG 010 660
PIXIT 1MRG 010 658

1.4 Symbols and conventions

1.4.1 Symbols GUID-2945B229-DAB0-4F15-8A0E-B9CF0C2C7B15 v9

The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in
electrical shock.

The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in personal
injury.

The caution icon indicates important information or warning related to the

concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a hazard which
could result in corruption of software or damage to equipment or property.

The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and conditions.

The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your project or how to
use a certain function.

Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand that under
certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result in degraded process
performance leading to personal injury or death. It is important that the user fully complies with all
warning and cautionary notices.

1.4.2 Document conventions GUID-96DFAB1A-98FE-4B26-8E90-F7CEB14B1AB6 v2

• Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The glossary also
contains definitions of important terms.
• Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the push button
icons.
For example, to navigate between the options, use and .
• HMI menu paths are presented in bold.
For example, select Main menu/Settings.
• LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.

32 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 1
Introduction

For example, to save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press .
• Parameter names are shown in italics.
For example, the function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
• Each function block symbol shows the available input/output signal.
• the character ^ in front of an input/output signal name indicates that the signal name
may be customized using the PCM600 software.
• the character * after an input/output signal name indicates that the signal must be
connected to another function block in the application configuration to achieve a valid
application configuration.
• Dimensions are provided both in inches and mm. If it is not specifically mentioned then the
dimension is in mm.

Bay control REC650 33

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
34
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 2
Available functions

Section 2 Available functions

2.1 Control and monitoring functions GUID-C4EC0541-2883-4185-90AB-BAEB25A5E249 v7

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Bay

Function name

REC650 (A02A)

REC650 (A07A)
REC650 (A01A)
REC650

3Ph/1CBAB
3Ph/1CBA

BCAB
Control
SESRSYN 25 Synchrocheck, energizing check, and 0–1 1 1 1
synchronizing
SMBRREC 79 Autorecloser for 3–phase operation 0–1 1 1 1
SLGGIO Logic Rotating Switch for function selection 15 15 15 15
and LHMI presentation
VSGGIO Selector mini switch 20 20 20 20
DPGGIO IEC 61850 generic communication I/O 16 16 16 16
functions double point
SPC8GGIO Single point generic control 8 signals 5 5 5 5
AUTOBITS AutomationBits, command function for 3 3 3 3
DNP3.0
I103CMD Function commands for IEC60870-5-103 1 1 1 1
I103IEDCMD IED commands for IEC60870-5-103 1 1 1 1
I103USRCMD Function commands user defined for 4 4 4 4
IEC60870-5-103
I103GENCMD Function commands generic for 50 50 50 50
IEC60870-5-103
I103POSCMD IED commands with position and select for 50 50 50 50
IEC60870-5-103
Apparatus control and Interlocking
APC8 Apparatus control for single bay, max 8 app. 1 1 1 1
(1CB) incl. interlocking
SCILO 3 Logical node for interlocking 8 8 8 8
BB_ES 3 Interlocking for busbar earthing switch 3 3 3 3
A1A2_BS 3 Interlocking for bus-section breaker 2 2 2 2
A1A2_DC 3 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector 3 3 3 3
ABC_BC 3 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay 1 1 1 1
BH_CONN 3 Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter 1 1 1 1
BH_LINE_A 3 Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter 1 1 1 1
BH_LINE_B 3 Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter 1 1 1 1
DB_BUS_A 3 Interlocking for double CB bay 1 1 1 1
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 35

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 2 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Available functions

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Bay

Function name

REC650 (A02A)

REC650 (A07A)
REC650 (A01A)
REC650

3Ph/1CBAB
3Ph/1CBA

BCAB
DB_BUS_B 3 Interlocking for double CB bay 1 1 1 1
DB_LINE 3 Interlocking for double CB bay 1 1 1 1
ABC_LINE 3 Interlocking for line bay 1 1 1 1
AB_TRAFO 3 Interlocking for transformer bay 1 1 1 1
SCSWI Switch controller 8 8 8 8
SXCBR Circuit breaker 3 3 3 3
SXSWI Circuit switch 7 7 7 7
POS_EVAL Evaluation of position indication 8 8 8 8
SELGGIO Select release 1 1 1 1
QCBAY Bay control 1 1 1 1
LOCREM Handling of LR-switch positions 1 1 1 1
LOCREMCTRL LHMI control of Permitted Source To Operate 1 1 1 1
(PSTO)
Secondary system supervision
CCSRDIF 87 Current circuit supervision 0–1 1 1 1
SDDRFUF Fuse failure supervision 0–1 1 1 1
TCSSCBR Breaker close/trip circuit monitoring 3 3 3 3
Logic
SMPPTRC 94 Tripping logic, common 3–phase output 1 1 1 1
TMAGGIO Trip matrix logic 12 12 12 12
OR Configurable logic blocks 283 283 283 283
INVERTER Configurable logic blocks 140 140 140 140
PULSETIMER Configurable logic blocks 40 40 40 40
GATE Configurable logic blocks 40 40 40 40
XOR Configurable logic blocks 40 40 40 40
LOOPDELAY Configurable logic blocks 40 40 40 40
TIMERSET Configurable logic blocks 40 40 40 40
AND Configurable logic blocks 280 280 280 280
SRMEMORY Configurable logic blocks 40 40 40 40
RSMEMORY Configurable logic blocks 40 40 40 40
Q/T Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0–1
ANDQT Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0–120 120 120 120
ORQT Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0–120 120 120 120
INVERTERQT Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0–120 120 120 120
XORQT Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0–40 40 40 40
Table continues on next page

36 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Bay

Function name

REC650 (A02A)

REC650 (A07A)
REC650 (A01A)
REC650

3Ph/1CBAB
3Ph/1CBA

BCAB
SRMEMORYQT Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0–40 40 40 40
RSMEMORYQT Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0–40 40 40 40
TIMERSETQT Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0–40 40 40 40
PULSETIMERQT Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0–40 40 40 40
INVALIDQT Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0–12 12 12 12
INDCOMBSPQT Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0–20 20 20 20
INDEXTSPQT Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0–20 20 20 20
FXDSIGN Fixed signal function block 1 1 1 1
B16I Boolean 16 to Integer conversion 16 16 16 16
B16IFCVI Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic 16 16 16 16
node representation
IB16A Integer to Boolean 16 conversion 16 16 16 16
IB16FCVB Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic 16 16 16 16
node representation
TEIGGIO Elapsed time integrator with limit 12 12 12 12
transgression and overflow supervision
Monitoring
CVMMXN Measurements 6 6 6 6
CMMXU Phase current measurement 10 10 10 10
VMMXU Phase-phase voltage measurement 6 6 6 6
CMSQI Current sequence component measurement 6 6 6 6
VMSQI Voltage sequence measurement 6 6 6 6
VNMMXU Phase-neutral voltage measurement 6 6 6 6
AISVBAS Function block for service values presentation 1 1 1 1
of the analog inputs
TM_P_P2 Function block for service values presentation 1 1 1 1
of primary analog inputs 600TRM
AM_P_P4 Function block for service values presentation 1 1 1 1
of primary analog inputs 600AIM
TM_S_P2 Function block for service values presentation 1 1 1 1
of secondary analog inputs 600TRM
AM_S_P4 Function block for service values presentation 1 1 1 1
of secondary analog inputs 600AIM
CNTGGIO Event counter 5 5 5 5
L4UFCNT Event counter with limit supervision 12 12 12 12
DRPRDRE Disturbance report 1 1 1 1
AnRADR Analog input signals 4 4 4 4
BnRBDR Binary input signals 6 6 6 6
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 37

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 2 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Available functions

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Bay

Function name

REC650 (A02A)

REC650 (A07A)
REC650 (A01A)
REC650

3Ph/1CBAB
3Ph/1CBA

BCAB
SPGGIO IEC 61850 generic communication I/O 64 64 64 64
functions
SP16GGIO IEC 61850 generic communication I/O 16 16 16 16
functions 16 inputs
MVGGIO IEC 61850 generic communication I/O 16 16 16 16
functions
MVEXP Measured value expander block 66 66 66 66
LMBRFLO Fault locator 0–1 1 1
SPVNZBAT Station battery supervision 0–1 1 1 1
SSIMG 63 Insulation gas monitoring function 0–1 1 1 1
SSIML 71 Insulation liquid monitoring function 0–1 1 1 1
SSCBR Circuit breaker condition monitoring 0–1 1 1 1
I103MEAS Measurands for IEC60870-5-103 1 1 1 1
I103MEASUSR Measurands user defined signals for 3 3 3 3
IEC60870-5-103
I103AR Function status auto-recloser for 1 1 1 1
IEC60870-5-103
I103EF Function status ground-fault for 1 1 1 1
IEC60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT Function status fault protection for 1 1 1 1
IEC60870-5-103
I103IED IED status for IEC60870-5-103 1 1 1 1
I103SUPERV Supervison status for IEC60870-5-103 1 1 1 1
I103USRDEF Status for user defined signals for 20 20 20 20
IEC60870-5-103
Metering
PCGGIO Pulse counter 16 16 16 16
ETPMMTR Function for energy calculation and demand 3 3 3 3
handling

38 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 2
Available functions

2.2 Back-up protection functions GUID-47D5EAC9-5F4A-4A3D-B813-4E50A2BCCDC3 v7.1.1

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Bay

Function name

REC650 (A02A)

REC650 (A07A)
REC650 (A01A)
REC650

3Ph/1CBAB
3Ph/1CBA

BCAB
Current protection
PHPIOC 50 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection, 3– 0–1 1 1 1
phase output
OC4PTOC 51/67 Four step phase overcurrent protection, 3-phase 0–1 1 1 1
output
EFPIOC 50N Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection 0–1 1 1 1
EF4PTOC 51N/67 Four step residual overcurrent protection, zero/ 0–1 1 1 1
N negative sequence direction
SDEPSDE 67N Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and 0–1 1 1 1
power protection
LCPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, one time constant, 0–1 1 1 1
Celsius
LFPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, one time constant, 0–1 1 1 1
Fahrenheit
CCRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection, 3–phase activation 0–1 1 1 1
and output
STBPTOC 50STB Stub protection 0–1 1 1 1
CCRPLD 52PD Pole discordance protection 0–1 1 1 1
BRCPTOC 46 Broken conductor check 0–1 1 1 1
GUPPDUP 37 Directional underpower protection 0–1 1 1 1
GOPPDOP 32 Directional overpower protection 0–1 1 1 1
DNSPTOC 46 Negative sequence based overcurrent function 0–1 1 1 1
Voltage protection
UV2PTUV 27 Two step undervoltage protection 0–1 1 1 1
OV2PTOV 59 Two step overvoltage protection 0–1 1 1 1
ROV2PTOV 59N Two step residual overvoltage protection 0–1 1 1 1
LOVPTUV 27 Loss of voltage check 0–1 1 1 1
Frequency protection
SAPTUF 81 Underfrequency function 0–2 2 2 2
SAPTOF 81 Overfrequency function 0–2 2 2 2
SAPFRC 81 Rate-of-change frequency protection 0–2 2 2 2

Bay control REC650 39

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 2 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Available functions

2.3 Station communication GUID-22F345AB-6250-40E7-9B80-36EA4D8EDA62 v6

IEC 61850 or Function ANSI Function description Bay

name

REC650 (A02A)

REC650 (A07A)
REC650 (A01A)

3Ph/1CBAB
3Ph/1CBA
REC650

BCAB
Station communication
IEC61850-8-1 IEC 61850 communication protocol 1 1 1 1
DNPGEN DNP3.0 communication general protocol 1 1 1 1
RS485DNP DNP3.0 for RS-485 communication 1 1 1 1
protocol
CH1TCP DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication 1 1 1 1
protocol
CH2TCP DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication 1 1 1 1
protocol
CH3TCP DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication 1 1 1 1
protocol
CH4TCP DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication 1 1 1 1
protocol
OPTICALDNP DNP3.0 for optical RS-232 communication 1 1 1 1
protocol
MSTSERIAL DNP3.0 for serial communication protocol 1 1 1 1
MST1TCP DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication 1 1 1 1
protocol
MST2TCP DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication 1 1 1 1
protocol
MST3TCP DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication 1 1 1 1
protocol
MST4TCP DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication 1 1 1 1
protocol
RS485GEN RS485 1 1 1 1
OPTICALPROT Operation selection for optical serial 1 1 1 1
RS485PROT Operation selection for RS485 1 1 1 1
DNPFREC DNP3.0 fault records for TCP/IP 1 1 1 1
communication protocol
OPTICAL103 IEC60870-5-103 Optical serial 1 1 1 1
communication
RS485103 IEC60870-5-103 serial communication for 1 1 1 1
RS485
GOOSEINTLKRCV Horizontal communication via GOOSE for 59 59 59 59
interlocking
GOOSEBINRCV GOOSE binary receive 4 4 4 4
Table continues on next page

40 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850 or Function ANSI Function description Bay

name

REC650 (A02A)

REC650 (A07A)
REC650 (A01A)

3Ph/1CBAB
3Ph/1CBA
REC650

BCAB
ETHFRNT Ethernet configuration of front port, LAN1 1 1 1 1
ETHLAN1 port and gateway
GATEWAY
ETHLAN1_AB Ethernet configuration of LAN1 port 1
PRPSTATUS System component for parallell redundancy 1
protocol
CONFPROT IED Configuration Protocol 1 1 1 1
ACTIVLOG Activity logging parameters 1 1 1 1
SECALARM Component for mapping security events on 1 1 1 1
protocols such as DNP3 and IEC103
AGSAL Generic security application component 1 1 1 1
GOOSEDPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a double 32 32 32 32
point value
GOOSEINTRCV GOOSE function block to receive an integer 32 32 32 32
value
GOOSEMVRCV GOOSE function block to receive a 16 16 16 16
measurand value
GOOSESPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a single 64 64 64 64
point value

2.4 Basic IED functions GUID-1DA8FC6E-D726-407B-84D3-0796B00D636F v5

IEC 61850/Function Function description

block name
Basic functions included in all products
INTERRSIG Self supervision with internal event list 1
SELFSUPEVLST Self supervision with internal event list 1
TIMESYNCHGEN Time synchronization 1
SNTP Time synchronization 1
DTSBEGIN, DTSEND, Time synchronization, daylight saving 1
TIMEZONE
IRIG-B Time synchronization 1
SETGRPS Setting group handling 1
ACTVGRP Parameter setting groups 1
TESTMODE Test mode functionality 1
CHNGLCK Change lock function 1
PRIMVAL Primary system values 1
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 41

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 2 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Available functions

IEC 61850/Function Function description

block name
SMAI_20_1 - Signal matrix for analog inputs 2
SMAI_20_12
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase 12
GBASVAL Global base values for settings 6
ATHSTAT Authority status 1
ATHCHCK Authority check 1
AUTHMAN Authority management 1
FTPACCS FTPS access with password 1
DOSFRNT Denial of service, frame rate control for front port 1
DOSLAN1 Denial of service, frame rate control for LAN1A and LAN1B ports 1
DOSSCKT Denial of service, socket flow control 1

42 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 3
Analog inputs

Section 3 Analog inputs SEMOD55010-1 v3

3.1 Introduction SEMOD55003-5 v10

Analog input channels in the IED must be set properly in order to get correct measurement results
and correct protection operations. For power measuring and all directional and differential
functions the directions of the input currents must be defined in order to reflect the way the
current transformers are installed/connected in the field ( primary and secondary connections ).
Measuring and protection algorithms in the IED use primary system quantities. Consequently the
setting values are expressed in primary quantities as well and therefore it is important to set the
transformation ratio of the connected current and voltage transformers properly.

The availability of CT and VT inputs, as well as setting parameters depends on the ordered IED.

A reference PhaseAngleRef must be defined to facilitate service values reading. This analog
channels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and all other angle information will be
shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and commissioning of the IED the reference
channel can be changed to facilitate testing and service values reading.

3.2 Operation principle SEMOD55028-5 v7

The direction of a current depends on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are typically star
(WYE) connected and can be connected with the Star (WYE) point towards the object or away from
the object. This information must be set in the IED.

The convention of the directionality is defined as follows:

• Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction into the object.
• Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction out from the
object.

For directional functions the directional conventions are defined as follows (see figure 2)

• Forward means the direction is into the object.

• Reverse means the direction is out from the object.

Bay control REC650 43

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 3 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Analog inputs

Definition of direction Definition of direction

for directional functions for directional functions
Reverse Forward Forward Reverse

Protected Object
Line , transformer , etc
e.g . P , Q , I e.g . P , Q , I
Measured quantity is Measured quantity is
positive when flowing positive when flowing
towards the object towards the object

Set parameter Set parameter

CT_ WyePoint CT_ WyePoint
Correct Setting is Correct Setting is
" ToObject" " FromObject"

ANSI11000275-1.vsd
ANSI11000275 V1 EN-US

Figure 2: Internal convention of the directionality in the IED

If the settings of the primary CT is correct, that is CTStarPoint set as FromObject or ToObject
according to the plant condition, then a positive quantity always flows towards the protected
object, and a Forward direction always looks towards the protected object.

The settings of the IED is performed in primary values. The ratios of the main CTs and VTs are
therefore basic data for the IED. The user has to set the rated secondary and primary currents and
voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the IED with their rated ratios.

The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under Main menu/Hardware/
Analog modules in the Parameter Settings tool or on the HMI.

3.3 Presumptions for technical data GUID-A804AF1F-90DC-40AB-B731-6C58E95651E7 v1

The technical data stated in this document are only valid under the following circumstances:

• CT and VT ratios in the IED are set in accordance with the associated main instrument
transformers. Note that for functions which measure an analogue signal which do not have
corresponding primary quantity, the 1:1 ratio shall be set for the used analogue inputs on the
IED, For example, HZPDIF.
• Parameter IBase used by the tested function is set equal to the rated CT primary current.
• Parameter UBase used by the tested function is set equal to the rated primary phase-to-phase
voltage.
• Parameter SBase used by the tested function is set equal to sqrt(3)* IBase* UBase for three-
phase power system.

3.4 Settings SEMOD55040-1 v2

SEMOD129840-4 v2
Dependent on ordered IED type.

44 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 3
Analog inputs

PID-3583-SETTINGS v2

Table 1: AISVBAS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PhaseAngleRef TRM - Channel 1 - - TRM - Channel 1 Reference channel for phase angle
TRM - Channel 2 presentation
TRM - Channel 3
TRM - Channel 4
TRM - Channel 5
TRM - Channel 6
TRM - Channel 7
TRM - Channel 8
TRM - Channel 9
TRM - Channel 10
AIM - Channel 1
AIM - Channel 2
AIM - Channel 3
AIM - Channel 4
AIM - Channel 5
AIM - Channel 6
AIM - Channel 7
AIM - Channel 8
AIM - Channel 9
AIM - Channel 10

PID-3619-SETTINGS v1

Table 2: TRM_6I_4U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 45

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 3 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec7 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim7 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage

PID-3620-SETTINGS v1

Table 3: TRM_8I_2U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
Table continues on next page

46 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 3
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTStarPoint8 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec8 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim8 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage

PID-3621-SETTINGS v1

Table 4: TRM_4I_1I_5U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec6 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim6 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec7 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim7 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage

Bay control REC650 47

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 3 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Analog inputs

PID-3622-SETTINGS v1

Table 5: TRM_4I_6U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec5 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim5 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec6 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim6 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec7 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim7 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage

PID-3623-SETTINGS v1

Table 6: AIM_6I_4U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
Table continues on next page

48 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 3
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec7 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim7 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage

PID-3625-SETTINGS v1

Table 7: AIM_4I_1I_5U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 49

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 3 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec6 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim6 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec7 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim7 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage

50 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 4
Binary input and output modules

Section 4 Binary input and output modules

4.1 Binary input

4.1.1 Binary input debounce filter GUID-AE43976C-E966-484C-AF39-89B2B12F56DC v3

The debounce filter eliminates bounces and short disturbances on a binary input.

A time counter is used for filtering. The time counter is increased once in a millisecond when a
binary input is high, or decreased when a binary input is low. A new debounced binary input signal
is forwarded when the time counter reaches the set DebounceTime value and the debounced input
value is high or when the time counter reaches 0 and the debounced input value is low. The default
setting of DebounceTime is 5 ms.

The binary input ON-event gets the time stamp of the first rising edge, after which the counter
does not reach 0 again. The same happens when the signal goes down to 0 again.

Each binary input has a filter time parameter DebounceTimex, where x is the number of the binary
input of the module in question (for example DebounceTime1).

The debounce time should be set to the same value for all channels on the board.

4.1.2 Oscillation filter GUID-41B89E6F-50C3-44BF-9171-3CC82EB5CA15 v3

Binary input wiring can be very long in substations and there are electromagnetic fields from for
example nearby breakers. Floating input lines can result in disturbances to binary inputs. These
disturbances are unwanted in the system. An oscillation filter is used to reduce the disturbance
from the system when a binary input starts oscillating.

Each debounced input signal change increments of an oscillation counter. Every time the
oscillation time counter reaches the set OscillationTime, the oscillation counter is checked and
both the time counter and the oscillation counter are reset. If the counter value is above the set
OscillationCount value the signal is declared as oscillating and not valid. If the value is below the
set OscillationCount value, the signal is declared as valid again. During counting of the oscillation
time the status of the signal remains unchanged, leading to a fixed delay in the status update,
even if the signal has attained normal status again.

Each binary input has an oscillation count parameter OscillationCountx and an oscillation time
parameter OscillationTimex, where x is the number of the binary input of the module in question.

Bay control REC650 51

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 4 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Binary input and output modules

4.1.3 Settings

4.1.3.1 Setting parameters for binary input modules

PID-1900-SETTINGS v13

Table 8: BIO_9BI Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
BatteryVoltage 24 - 250 V 1 110 Station battery voltage

Table 9: BIO_9BI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Threshold1 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 1
DebounceTime1 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 1
OscillationCount1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 1
OscillationTime1 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 1
Threshold2 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 2
DebounceTime2 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 2
OscillationCount2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 2
OscillationTime2 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 2
Threshold3 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 3
DebounceTime3 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 3
OscillationCount3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 3
OscillationTime3 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 3
Threshold4 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 4
DebounceTime4 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 4
OscillationCount4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 4
OscillationTime4 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 4
Threshold5 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 5
DebounceTime5 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 5
OscillationCount5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 5
OscillationTime5 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 5
Threshold6 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 6
DebounceTime6 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 6
OscillationCount6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 6
OscillationTime6 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 6
Table continues on next page

52 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 4
Binary input and output modules

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Threshold7 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 7
DebounceTime7 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 7
OscillationCount7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 7
OscillationTime7 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 7
Threshold8 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 8
DebounceTime8 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 8
DebounceTime8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 8
OscillationTime8 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 8
Threshold9 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 9
DebounceTime9 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 9
OscillationCount9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 9
OscillationTime9 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 9

4.1.3.2 Setting parameters for communication module

PID-2945-SETTINGS v3

Table 10: COM05_12BI Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
BatteryVoltage 24 - 250 V 1 110 Station battery voltage

Table 11: COM05_12BI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Threshold1 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 1
DebounceTime1 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 1
OscillationCount1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 1
OscillationTime1 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 1
Threshold2 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 2
DebounceTime2 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 2
OscillationCount2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 2
OscillationTime2 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 2
Threshold3 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 3
DebounceTime3 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 3
OscillationCount3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 3
OscillationTime3 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 3
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 53

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 4 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Binary input and output modules

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Threshold4 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 4
DebounceTime4 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 4
OscillationCount4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 4
OscillationTime4 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 4
Threshold5 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 5
DebounceTime5 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 5
OscillationCount5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 5
OscillationTime5 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 5
Threshold6 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 6
DebounceTime6 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 6
OscillationCount6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 6
OscillationTime6 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 6
Threshold7 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 7
DebounceTime7 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 7
OscillationCount7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 7
OscillationTime7 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 7
Threshold8 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 8
DebounceTime8 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 8
DebounceTime8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 8
OscillationTime8 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 8
Threshold9 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 9
DebounceTime9 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 9
OscillationCount9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 9
OscillationTime9 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 9
Threshold10 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 10
Threshold10 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 10
OscillationCount10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 10
OscillationTime10 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 10
Threshold11 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 11
DebounceTime11 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 11
OscillationCount11 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 11
OscillationTime11 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 11
Threshold12 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 12
Table continues on next page

54 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 4
Binary input and output modules

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

DebounceTime12 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 12
OscillationCount12 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 12
OscillationTime12 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 12

Bay control REC650 55

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
56
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.1 Local HMI screen behaviour

5.1.1 Identification
GUID-84392EFF-4D3F-4A67-A6ED-34C6E98574D6 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Local HMI screen behaviour SCREEN - -

5.1.2 Settings
PID-3599-SETTINGS v1

Table 12: SCREEN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DisplayTimeout 10 - 120 Min 10 60 Local HMI display timeout
ContrastLevel -100 - 100 % 10 0 Contrast level for display
DefaultScreen 0-0 - 1 0 Default screen
EvListSrtOrder Latest on top - - Latest on top Sort order of event list
Oldest on top
AutoIndicationDRP Disabled - - Disabled Automatic indication of disturbance report
Enabled
SubstIndSLD No - - No Substitute indication on single line
Yes diagram
InterlockIndSLD No - - No Interlock indication on single line diagram
Yes
BypassCommands No - - No Enable bypass of commands
Yes

5.2 Local HMI signals

5.2.1 Identification
GUID-03AB7AEE-87D3-4F3C-B6B9-B1EB1B538E38 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Local HMI signals LHMICTRL - -

5.2.2 Function block GUID-A8AC51E9-5BD7-4A80-9576-4816F14DD08D v2

Bay control REC650 57

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 5 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

LHMICTRL
CLRLEDS HMI-ON
RED-S
YELLOW-S
YELLOW-F
CLRPULSE
LEDSCLRD

IEC09000320-1-en.vsd
IEC09000320 V1 EN-US

Figure 3: LHMICTRL function block

5.2.3 Signals
PID-3392-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 13: LHMICTRL Input signals

Name Type Default Description
CLRLEDS BOOLEAN 0 Input to reset the LCD-HMI LEDs

PID-3392-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 14: LHMICTRL Output signals

Name Type Description
HMI-ON BOOLEAN Backlight of the LCD display is active
RED-S BOOLEAN Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-S BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-F BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing
CLRPULSE BOOLEAN A reset pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are
cleared
LEDSCLRD BOOLEAN Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not ON

5.3 Basic part for LED indication module

5.3.1 Identification
GUID-6E36C0BC-F284-4C88-A4A8-9535D3BE8B14 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Basic part for LED indication module LEDGEN - -
Basic part for LED indication module GRP1_LED1 - - -
GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1 -
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1 -
GRP3_LED15

58 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.3.2 Function block GUID-BDB5797F-F27E-4FEE-9FDB-1C9E2F572BB6 v2

LEDGEN
BLOCK NEWIND
RESET ACK

IEC09000321-1-en.vsd
IEC09000321 V1 EN-US

Figure 4: LEDGEN function block

GRP1_LED1
^HM1L01R
^HM1L01Y
^HM1L01G
IEC09000322 V1 EN-US

Figure 5: GRP1_LED1 function block

The GRP1_LED1 function block is an example, all 15 LED in each of group 1 - 3 has a similar function
block.

5.3.3 Signals
GUID-87AE1A69-D17C-4D60-92D5-91CF7A98AFAE v1

Table 15: LEDGEN Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Input to block the operation of the LEDs
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input to acknowledge/reset the indication LEDs

GUID-F50D9CF2-9079-48B8-ACC8-C8A2E83AD40C v1

Table 16: GRP1_LED1 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
HM1L01R BOOLEAN 0 Red indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01Y BOOLEAN 0 Yellow indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01G BOOLEAN 0 Green indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1

GUID-A5971612-5C71-476B-B8AB-FA3BDA24FB92 v1

Table 17: LEDGEN Output signals

Name Type Description
NEWIND BOOLEAN New indication signal if any LED indication input is set
ACK BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs are acknowledged

Bay control REC650 59

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 5 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.3.4 Settings
GUID-B247DF07-2948-4A49-B7FA-BC856891D914 v1

Table 18: LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
tRestart 0.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 0.0 Defines the disturbance length
tMax 0.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 0.0 Maximum time for the definition of a
disturbance

GUID-DFA7DA32-A6B9-40CC-AD26-B9738C1AE260 v1

Table 19: GRP1_LED1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SequenceType Follow-S - - Follow-S Sequence type for LED 1, local HMI alarm
Follow-F group 1
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_OFF Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is off
LabelRed 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_RED Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is red
LabelYellow 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_YELLOW Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is yellow
LabelGreen 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_GREEN Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is green

5.4 LCD part for HMI function keys control module GUID-EECAE7FA-7078-472C-A429-F7607DB884EB v1

5.4.1 Identification
GUID-E6611022-5EA3-420D-ADCD-9D1E7604EFEB v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
LCD part for HMI Function Keys FNKEYMD1 - - -
Control module FNKEYMD5

5.4.2 Function block

GUID-A803A728-5CFC-4606-98E4-793E873B99D4 v2

FNKEYMD1
^LEDCTL1 ^FKEYOUT1
IEC09000327 V1 EN-US

Figure 6: FNKEYMD1 function block

60 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Only the function block for the first button is shown above. There is a similar block for every
function button.

5.4.3 Signals
GUID-49DDD182-19DC-404E-8ABC-DD18AF91F476 v1

Table 20: FNKEYMD1 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
LEDCTL1 BOOLEAN 0 LED control input for function key

GUID-67FC7B76-A3B5-4CC8-ADC3-ACB4F6D5BDF5 v1

Table 21: FNKEYMD1 Output signals

Name Type Description
FKEYOUT1 BOOLEAN Output controlled by function key

5.4.4 Settings
GUID-50246525-FC46-456B-A885-4F7FC3D6F275 v1

Table 22: FNKEYMD1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Mode Off - - Off Output operation mode
Toggle
Pulsed
PulseTime 0.001 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse time for output controlled by LCDFn1
LabelOn 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_ON Label for LED on state
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_OFF Label for LED off state

PID-3602-SETTINGS v1

Table 23: FNKEYTY1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Type Disabled - - Disabled Function key type
Menu shortcut
Control
MenuShortcut Menu shortcut for
function key

Bay control REC650 61

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 5 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.5 Operation principle

5.5.1 Local HMI AMU0600442 v10

ANSI12000175 V1 EN-US

Figure 7: Local human-machine interface

The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements:

• Display (LCD)
• Buttons
• LED indicators
• Communication port for PCM600

The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.

5.5.1.1 Display GUID-55739D4F-1DA5-4112-B5C7-217AAF360EA5 v7

The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome display with a resolution of 320 x 240 pixels. The
character size can vary.

The display view is divided into four basic areas.

62 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

IEC13000063-1-en.vsd
IEC13000063 V1 EN-US

Figure 8: Display layout

1 Path
2 Content
3 Status
4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)

• The path shows the current location in the menu structure. If the path is too long to be shown,
it is truncated from the beginning, and the truncation is indicated with three dots.
• The content area shows the menu content.
• The status area shows the current IED time, the user that is currently logged in and the object
identification string which is settable via the LHMI or with PCM600.
• If text, pictures or other items do not fit in the display, a vertical scroll bar appears on the
right. The text in content area is truncated from the beginning if it does not fit in the display
horizontally. Truncation is indicated with three dots.

Bay control REC650 63

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 5 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

IEC13000045-1-en.vsd
IEC13000045 V1 EN-US

Figure 9: Truncated path

The number before the function instance, for example ETHFRNT:1, indicates the instance number.

The function button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the function buttons.
Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a feedback signal for the function
button control action. The LED is connected to the required signal with PCM600.

ANSI12000025-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000025 V1 EN-US

Figure 10: Function button panel

The alarm LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the alarm LEDs. Three alarm LED
pages are available.

64 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

GUID-D20BB1F1-FDF7-49AD-9980-F91A38B2107D V1 EN-US

Figure 11: Alarm LED panel

The function button and alarm LED panels are not visible at the same time. Each panel is shown by
pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button. Pressing the ESC button clears the
panel from the display. Both the panels have dynamic width that depends on the label string
length that the panel contains.

5.5.1.2 LEDs AMU0600427 v9

The LHMI includes three protection status LEDs above the display: Normal, Pickup and Trip.

There are 15 programmable alarm LEDs on the front of the LHMI. Each LED can indicate three
states with the colors: green, yellow and red. The alarm texts related to each three-color LED are
divided into three pages.

There are 3 separate pages of LEDs available. The 15 physical three-color LEDs in one LED group
can indicate 45 different signals. Altogether, 135 signals can be indicated since there are three LED
groups. The LEDs can be configured with PCM600 and the operation mode can be selected with
the LHMI or PCM600.

There are two additional LEDs which are embedded into the control buttons and . They
represent the status of the circuit breaker.

5.5.1.3 Keypad AMU0600428 v14

The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different views or menus.
With the push-buttons you can give open or close commands to one primary object, for example, a
circuit breaker, disconnector or a grounding switch. The push-buttons are also used to
acknowledge alarms, reset indications, provide help and switch between local and remote control
mode.

The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons that can be configured either as menu
shortcut or control buttons.

Bay control REC650 65

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 5 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

ANSI11000247 V2 EN-US

Figure 12: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push buttons and
RJ-45 communication port

1...5 Function button

6 Close
7 Open
8 Escape
9 Left
10 Down
11 Up
12 Right
13 User Log on
14 Enter
15 Remote/Local
16 Uplink LED
17 Ethernet communication port (RJ-45)
18 Multipage
19 Menu
20 Clear
21 Help
22 Programmable alarm LEDs
23 Protection status LEDs

5.5.2 LED

5.5.2.1 Functionality GUID-1A03E0EF-C10F-4797-9D9F-5CCA86CA29EB v3

The function blocks LEDGEN and GRP1_LEDx, GRP2_LEDx and GRP3_LEDx (x=1-15) controls and
supplies information about the status of the indication LEDs. The input and output signals of the
function blocks are configured with PCM600. The input signal for each LED is selected individually
using SMT or ACT. Each LED is controlled by a GRP1_LEDx function block, that controls the color
and the operating mode.

66 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Each indication LED on local HMI can be set individually to operate in 6 different sequences; two as
follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence types are intended to be used as a
protection indication system, either in collecting or restarting mode, with reset functionality. The
other two are intended to be used as signalling system in collecting mode with acknowledgment
functionality.

5.5.2.2 Status LEDs GUID-4822DF9C-E343-442B-B3F1-3FA8CD8DF234 v3

There are three status LEDs above the LCD in the front of the IED, green, yellow and red.

The green LED has a fixed function that present the healthy status of the IED. The yellow and red
LEDs are user configured. The yellow LED can be used to indicate that a disturbance report is
triggered (steady) or that the IED is in test mode (flashing). The red LED can be used to indicate a
trip command.

The yellow and red status LEDs are configured in the disturbance recorder function, DRPRDRE, by
connecting a start or trip signal from the actual function to a BxRBDR binary input function block
using the PCM600 and configure the setting to Off, Start or Trip for that particular signal.

5.5.2.3 Indication LEDs

Operating modes GUID-B67F1ED3-900B-4D34-8EEB-A3005999CE50 v3

Collecting mode

• LEDs, which are used in collecting mode of operation, are accumulated continuously until the
unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable when the LEDs are used as a simplified
alarm system.

Re-starting mode

• In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active LEDs and
activates only those, which appear during one disturbance. Only LEDs defined for re-starting
mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a restart at a
new disturbance. A disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the reset of the
activated input signals or when the maximum time limit has elapsed.

Acknowledgment/reset GUID-E6727E8F-C28B-4295-AE21-BC5643363805 v2

• From local HMI

• The active indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual acknowledgment
and manual reset have the same meaning and is a common signal for all the operating
sequences and LEDs. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. The
acknowledgment/reset is performed via the button and menus on the LHMI.

• From function input

• The active indications can also be acknowledged/reset from an input, ACK_RST, to the
function. This input can for example be configured to a binary input operated from an
external push button. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. This
means that even if the button is continuously pressed, the acknowledgment/reset only
affects indications active at the moment when the button is first pressed.

Bay control REC650 67

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 5 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

• Automatic reset
• The automatic reset can only be performed for indications defined for re-starting mode
with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When the automatic reset of the
LEDs has been performed, still persisting indications will be indicated with a steady
light.

Operating sequence GUID-DFCA880B-308C-4334-94DF-97C7765E8C13 v4

The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type the LED follow the input
signal completely. For the Latched type each LED latches to the corresponding input signal until it
is reset.

The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED separately.
For sequence 1 and 2 Follow type, the acknowledgment/reset function is not applicable. Sequence
3 and 4 Latched type with acknowledgement are only working in collecting mode. Sequence 5 is
working according to Latched type and collecting mode while Sequence 6 is working according to
Latched type and re-starting mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning S
= Steady and F = Flash.

At the activation of the input signal, the indication obtains corresponding color corresponding to
the activated input and operates according to the selected sequence diagrams below.

In the sequence diagrams the LEDs have the following characteristics:

= No indication = Steady light = Flash

G= Green Y= Yellow R= Red

IEC09000311.vsd
IEC09000311 V1 EN-US

Figure 13: Symbols used in the sequence diagrams

Sequence 1 (Follow-S) SEMOD56072-39 v3

This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding input signals. It does not
react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.

Activating
signal

LED

IEC01000228_2_en.vsd
IEC01000228 V2 EN-US

Figure 14: Operating Sequence 1 (Follow-S)

GUID-107FE952-3B4C-4C01-831A-3147E652327C v2
If inputs for two or more colors are active at the same time to one LED the priority is as described
above. An example of the operation when two colors are activated in parallel is shown in Figure 15.

68 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

LED G G R G

IEC09000312_1_en.vsd
IEC09000312 V1 EN-US

Figure 15: Operating sequence 1, two colors

Sequence 2 (Follow-F) SEMOD56072-47 v2

This sequence is the same as Sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead of showing
steady light.

Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S SEMOD56072-50 v2

This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is independent of
the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal, the indication starts flashing.
After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the signal is not present any more. If the signal
is still present after acknowledgment it gets a steady light.

Activating
signal

LED

Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
IEC01000231 V1 EN-US

Figure 16: Operating Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S

GUID-CC607709-5344-4C88-AA97-6395FD335E55 v3
When an acknowledgment is performed, all indications that appear before the indication with
higher priority has been reset, will be acknowledged, independent of if the low priority indication
appeared before or after acknowledgment. In Figure 17 it is shown the sequence when a signal of
lower priority becomes activated after acknowledgment has been performed on a higher priority
signal. The low priority signal will be shown as acknowledged when the high priority signal resets.

Bay control REC650 69

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 5 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

R R G
LED

Acknow
IEC09000313_1_en.vsd
IEC09000313 V1 EN-US

Figure 17: Operating Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S), 2 colors involved

GUID-A652A49D-F016-472D-8D38-6D3E75DAB1DB v2
If all three signals are activated the order of priority is still maintained. Acknowledgment of
indications with higher priority will acknowledge also low priority indications, which are not visible
according to Figure 18.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED

LED G Y R R Y

Acknow.
IEC09000314-1-en.vsd
IEC09000314 V1 EN-US

Figure 18: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 1

GUID-071B9EB5-A1D2-49C5-9458-4D21B7E068BE v2
If an indication with higher priority appears after acknowledgment of a lower priority indication
the high priority indication will be shown as not acknowledged according to Figure 19.

70 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED

LED G G R R Y

Acknow.
IEC09000315-1-en.vsd
IEC09000315 V1 EN-US

Figure 19: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 2

Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F) SEMOD56072-64 v1

This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light have been
alternated.

Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S SEMOD56072-67 v4

This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation of the input
signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to sequence 3 and 4 is that
indications that are still activated will not be affected by the reset that is, immediately after the
positive edge of the reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is
performed. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.

Activating
signal

LED

Reset

IEC01000235_2_en.vsd
IEC01000235 V2 EN-US

Figure 20: Operating Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S

GUID-4D52D221-F54F-4966-95B1-6ED6C536CEC9 v2
That means if an indication with higher priority has reset while an indication with lower priority
still is active at the time of reset, the LED will change color according to Figure 21.

Bay control REC650 71

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 5 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

R G
LED

Reset
IEC09000316_1_en.vsd
IEC09000316 V1 EN-US

Figure 21: Operating sequence 5, two colors

Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S SEMOD56072-75 v4

In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are automatically
reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other LEDs set to Sequence 6
LatchedReset-S. Also in this case indications that are still activated will not be affected by manual
reset, that is, immediately after the positive edge of that the manual reset has been executed a
new reading and storing of active signals is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely
independent in its operation of LEDs set for other sequences.

Timing diagram for sequence 6 SEMOD56072-86 v3

Figure 22 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.

Disturbance
tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000239_2-en.vsd
IEC01000239 V2 EN-US

Figure 22: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same disturbance
Figure 23 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed.

72 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Disturbance Disturbance

tRestart tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000240_2_en.vsd
IEC01000240 V2 EN-US

Figure 23: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances

Figure 24 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one has reset
but before tRestart has elapsed.

Disturbance

tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000241_2_en.vsd
IEC01000241 V2 EN-US

Figure 24: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same disturbance
but with reset of activating signal between
Figure 25 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.

Bay control REC650 73

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 5 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Disturbance

tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000242_2_en.vsd
IEC01000242 V2 EN-US

Figure 25: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset

5.5.3 Function keys

5.5.3.1 Functionality GUID-BED38E9A-C90D-4B7F-AA20-42821C4F6A1C v2

Local Human-Machine-Interface (LHMI) has five function buttons, directly to the left of the LCD,
that can be configured either as menu shortcut or control buttons. Each button has an indication
LED that can be configured in the application configuration.

When used as a menu shortcut, a function button provides a fast way to navigate between default
nodes in the menu tree. When used as a control, the button can control a binary signal.

5.5.3.2 Operation principle GUID-977C3829-B19B-457E-8A4D-45317226EF22 v2

Each output on the FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function blocks can be controlled from the LHMI
function keys. By pressing a function button on the LHMI, the output status of the actual function
block will change. These binary outputs can in turn be used to control other function blocks, for
example, switch control blocks, binary I/O outputs etc.

FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function block also has a number of settings and parameters that control
the behavior of the function block. These settings and parameters are normally set using the PST.

Operating sequence GUID-84CA7C61-4F83-4F86-A07F-BF9EC4E309BF v4

The operation mode is set individually for each output, either OFF, TOGGLE or PULSED.

Setting OFF

This mode always gives the output the value. A change of the input value does not affect the
output value.

74 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Input value

Output value

IEC09000330-1-en.vsd
IEC09000330 V1 EN-US

Figure 26: Sequence diagram for setting OFF

Setting TOGGLE

In this mode the output toggles each time the function block detects that the input has been
written (the input has completed a pulse). Note that the input attribute is reset each time the
function block executes. The function block execution is marked with a dotted line below.

Input value

Output value

IEC09000331_1_en.vsd
IEC09000331 V1 EN-US

Figure 27: Sequence diagram for setting TOGGLE

Setting PULSED

In this mode the output will be high for as long as the setting pulse time. After this time the
output will go back to 0. The input attribute is reset when the function block detects it being high
and there is no output pulse.

Note that the third positive edge on the input attribute does not cause a pulse, since the edge was
applied during pulse output. A new pulse can only begin when the output is zero; else the trigger
edge is lost.

Input value

Output value
tpulse tpulse
IEC09000332_1_en.vsd
IEC09000332 V1 EN-US

Figure 28: Sequence diagram for setting PULSED

Input function GUID-8EA4AE21-7A74-403A-84AE-D5CEF9292A63 v1

All inputs work the same way: When the LHMI is configured so that a certain function button is of
type CONTROL, then the corresponding input on this function block becomes active, and will light
the yellow function button LED when high. This functionality is active even if the function block
operation setting is set to off.

There is an exception for the optional extension EXT1 function keys 7 and 8, since they are tri-color
(they can be red, yellow or green). Each of these LEDs are controlled by three inputs, which are
prioritized in the following order: Red - Yellow - Green

Bay control REC650 75

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 5 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

INPUT OUTPUT
RED YELLOW GREEN Function key LED color
1 0/1 0/1 red
- 1 0/1 yellow
- - 1 green
0 0 0 off

76 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

Section 6 Current protection

6.1 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase
output PHPIOC (50) IP14506-1 v5

6.1.1 Identification
M14880-1 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Instantaneous phase overcurrent PHPIOC 50
protection 3-phase output
3I>>

SYMBOL-Z V1 EN-US

6.1.2 Functionality M12910-3 v9

The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and short
tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit protection function.

6.1.3 Function block M12602-3 v5

PHPIOC (50)
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK

ANSI08000001-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000001 V1 EN-US

Figure 29: PHPIOC (50) function block

6.1.4 Signals
PID-1097-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 24: PHPIOC (50) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

PID-1097-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 25: PHPIOC (50) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal

Bay control REC650 77

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

6.1.5 Settings
PID-1097-SETTINGS v13

Table 26: PHPIOC (50) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
Pickup 5 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Phase current pickup in % of IBase

Table 27: PHPIOC (50) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

6.1.6 Monitored data

PID-1097-MONITOREDDATA v15

Table 28: PHPIOC (50) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
I_A REAL - A Current in phase A
I_B REAL - A Current in phase B
I_C REAL - A Current in phase C

6.1.7 Operation principle M12913-3 v5

The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. The
RMS value of each phase current is derived from the fundamental frequency components, as well
as sampled values of each phase current. These phase current values are fed to the instantaneous
phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output function PHPIOC (50). In a comparator the RMS
values are compared to the set operation current value of the function Pickup. If a phase current is
larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator for this phase is set to true.
This signal will, without delay, activate the TRIP signal that is common for all three phases.

PHPIOC (50) can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.

78 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

6.1.8 Technical data

M12336-1 v8

Table 29: PHPIOC (50) technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ± 1.0% of In at I £ In
± 1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio > 95% -

Operate time 20 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Reset time 30 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Operate time 10 ms typically at 0 to 5 x Iset -

Reset time 40 ms typically at 5 to 0 x Iset -

Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 5 x Iset -

Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -

6.2 Four step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output

OC4PTOC (51/67) SEMOD129998-1 v5

6.2.1 Identification
M14885-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Four step phase overcurrent OC4PTOC 51/67
3I>
protection 3-phase output
4
alt
4
TOC-REVA V1 EN-US

6.2.2 Functionality M12846-3 v12

The four step phase overcurrent protection function, 3-phase output OC4PTOC (51/67) has
independent inverse time delay settings for step 1 and 4. Step 2 and 3 are always definite time
delayed.

All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available.

The directional function is voltage polarized with memory. The function can be set to be
directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.

Second harmonic blocking level can be set for the function and can be used to block each step
individually

Bay control REC650 79

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

6.2.3 Function block M12609-3 v6

OC4PTOC (51_67)
I3P* TRIP
V3P* TRST1
BLOCK TRST2
BLK1 TRST3
BLK2 TRST4
BLK3 PICKUP
BLK4 PU_ST1
PU_ST2
PU_ST3
PU_ST4
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
2NDHARM

ANSI08000002-2-en.vsd

ANSI08000002 V2 EN-US

Figure 30: OC4PTOC (51/67) function block

6.2.4 Signals
PID-3385-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 30: OC4PTOC (51_67) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2
BLKST3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 3
BLKST4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 4

PID-3385-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 31: OC4PTOC (51_67) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TR1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TR2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
TR3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 3
TR4 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 4
START BOOLEAN General pickup signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Pick up signal from step 1
ST2 BOOLEAN Pick up signal from step 2
Table continues on next page

80 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

Name Type Description

ST3 BOOLEAN Pickup signal step 3
ST4 BOOLEAN Pickup signal step 4
STL1 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase A
STL2 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase B
STL3 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase C
ST2NDHRM BOOLEAN Second harmonic detected

6.2.5 Settings
PID-3385-SETTINGS v2

Table 32: OC4PTOC (51_67) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
DirMode1 Disabled - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 off / non-
Non-directional directional / forward / reverse
Forward
Reverse
Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for step
ANSI Very inv. 1
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
RI type
RD type
I1> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 1000 Phase current operate level for step1 in %
of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Definite time delay of step 1
k1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
IMin1 5 - 10000 %IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1in% of
IBase
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
DirMode2 Disabled - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 off / non-
Non-directional directional / forward / reverse
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 81

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

I2> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 500 Phase current operate level for step 2 in %
of IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Definite time delay of step 2
DirMode3 Disabled - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 3 off / non-
Non-directional directional / forward / reverse
Forward
Reverse
I3> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 250 Phase current operate level for step3 in %
of IBase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Definite time delay of step 3
DirMode4 Disabled - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 4 off / non-
Non-directional directional / forward / reverse
Forward
Reverse
Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for step
ANSI Very inv. 4
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
RI type
RD type
I4> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 175 Phase current operate level for step 4 in %
of IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Definite time delay of step 4
k4 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 4
IMin4 5 - 10000 %IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step4 in % of
IBase
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 4

Table 33: OC4PTOC (51_67) Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
HarmRestrain Disabled - - Disabled Enable block from harmonic restrain
Enabled
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 %IFund 1 20 Pickup of second harm restraint in % of
Fundamental
HarmRestrain1 Disabled - - Disabled Enable block of step 1 from harmonic
Enabled restrain
Table continues on next page

82 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

HarmRestrain2 Disabled - - Disabled Enable block of step 2 from harmonic
Enabled restrain
HarmRestrain3 Disabled - - Disabled Enable block of step3 from harmonic
Enabled restrain
HarmRestrain4 Disabled - - Disabled Enable block of step 4 from harmonic
Enabled restrain

Table 34: OC4PTOC (51_67) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
MeasType DFT - - DFT Selection between DFT and RMS
RMS measurement

6.2.6 Monitored data

PID-3385-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 35: OC4PTOC (51_67) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
DIRL1 INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction for phase A
2=Reverse
0=No direction
DIRL2 INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction for phase B
2=Reverse
0=No direction
DIRL3 INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction for phase C
2=Reverse
0=No direction
IL1 REAL - A Current in phase A
IL2 REAL - A Current in phase B
IL3 REAL - A Current in phase C

6.2.7 Operation principle M12883-3 v7

The protection design can be divided in four parts:

• The direction element

• The harmonic Restraint Blocking function
• The four step over current function
• The mode selection

If VT inputs are not available or not connected, setting parameter DirModeSelx

shall be left to default value, Non-directional.

Bay control REC650 83

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

4 step over current

Direction dirPhAFlt element faultState
faultState
Element One element for each
dirPhBFlt step
I3P dirPhCFlt PICKUP

V3P

TRIP

Harmonic harmRestrBlock
Restraint
Element

enableDir
Mode Selection
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4

ANSI05000740-2-en.vsd

ANSI05000740 V2 EN-US

Figure 31: Functional overview of OC4PTOC (51/67)

M12883-16 v8
The sampled analog phase currents are processed in a pre-processing function block. Using a
parameter setting MeasType within the general settings for the four step phase overcurrent
protection 3-phase output function OC4PTOC (51/67), it is possible to select the type of the
measurement used for all overcurrent stages. It is possible to select either discrete Fourier filter
(DFT) or true RMS filter (RMS).

If DFT option is selected then only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency components of
each phase current is derived. Influence of DC current component and higher harmonic current
components are almost completely suppressed. If RMS option is selected then the true RMS values
is used. The true RMS value in addition to the fundamental frequency component includes the
contribution from the current DC component as well as from higher current harmonic. The
selected current values are fed to OC4PTOC (51/67).

In a comparator, for each phase current, the DFT or RMS values are compared to the set operation
current value of the function (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3, Pickup4). If a phase current is larger than
the set operation current, outputs PICKUP, PU_STx, PU_A, PU_B and PU_C are, without delay,
activated. Output signals PU_A, PU_B and PU_C are common for all steps. This means that the
lowest set step will initiate the activation. The PICKUP signal is common for all three phases and all
steps. It shall be noted that the selection of measured value (DFT or RMS) do not influence the
operation of directional part of OC4PTOC (51/67) .

84 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

Service value for individually measured phase currents are also available on the local HMI for
OC4PTOC (51/67) function, which simplifies testing, commissioning and in service operational
checking of the function.

A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in relation to the
fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from the pre-processing of the
phase currents and the relation is compared to a set restrain current level.

The function can be directional. The direction of the fault current is given as current angle in
relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for the directional function is
dependent of the fault type. To enable directional measurement at close in faults, causing low
measured voltage, the polarization voltage is a combination of the apparent voltage (85%) and a
memory voltage (15%). The following combinations are used.

Phase-phase short circuit:

Vref _ AB = V A - VB I dir _ AB = I A - I B
GUID-4F361BC7-6D91-47B5-8119-A27009C0AD6A V1 EN-US (Equation 1)

Vref _ BC = VB - VC I dir _ BC = I B - IC
ANSIEQUATION1450 V1 EN-US (Equation 2)

Vref _ CA = VC - VA I dir _ CA = IC - I A
ANSIEQUATION1451 V1 EN-US (Equation 3)

Phase-ground short circuit:

Vref _ A = VA I dir _ A = I A
ANSIEQUATION1452 V1 EN-US (Equation 4)

Vref _ B = VB I dir _ B = I B
ANSIEQUATION1453 V1 EN-US (Equation 5)

Vref _ C = VC I dir _ C = I C
ANSIEQUATION1454 V1 EN-US (Equation 6)

Bay control REC650 85

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

Vref

2
4

Idir

ANSI09000636-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000636 V1 EN-US

Figure 32: Directional characteristic of the phase overcurrent protection

1 RCA = Relay characteristic angle 55°

2 ROA = Relay operating angle 80°
3 Reverse
4 Forward

If no blockings are given the pickup signals will start the timers of the step. The time characteristic
for step 1 and 4 can be chosen as definite time delay or inverse time characteristic. Step 2 and 3
are always definite time delayed. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics is
available. The possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in section "Inverse time
characteristics".

All four steps in OC4PTOC (51/67) can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The binary input
BLKx (x=1, 2, 3 or 4) blocks the operation of respective step.

86 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

Characteristx=DefTime
|IOP| AND
a
a>b
OR 0-tx
Pickupx b
0
PUx
STx
AND

0-txMin
0 AND

Inve rse

Characteristx=Inve rse

DirModeSelx=Disa bled OR STAGE x_DIR_Int

DirModeSelx=Non-dire ctional
DirModeSelx=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModeSelx=Reverse

AND
REVERSE_Int

ANSI12000008-3-en.vsd
ANSI12000008-3-en.vsd

ANSI12000008 V3 EN-US

Figure 33: Simplified logic diagram for OC4PTOC

6.2.8 Second harmonic blocking element GUID-E3980B2D-EEDA-4BF1-A07D-E7B721130554 v1.1.1

A harmonic restrain of the Four step overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC 51_67 can be
chosen. Any of the four overcurrent stages can be selectively blocked by parameter HarmRestrainx
setting. When second harmonic restraint feature is active, the OC4PTOC 51_67 function output
signal 2NDHARM will be set to logical value one if following conditions are fulfilled:

• Magnitude of fundamental frequency component in a phase current is above 7.0% IB

• Magnitude of second harmonic component in a phase current is above 7.0% IB
• Magnitude of second harmonic component in a phase current exceeds the preset level defined
by the setting 2ndHarmStab multiplied by the magnitude of fundamental frequency
component in a phase current

BLOCK

a
a>b
0.07*IBase b

a
a>b
b
Extract second AND
IOP
harmonic current a
a>b
component b

2ndH_BLOCK_Int
Extract
fundamental
current component
X
2ndHarmStab

IEC13000014-1-en.vsd

IEC13000014 V1.1.1 EN-US

Figure 34: Second harmonic blocking

Bay control REC650 87

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

6.2.9 Technical data

M12342-1 v12.1.1

Table 36: OC4PTOC (51/67) technical data

Function Setting range Accuracy
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ± 1.0% of In at I ≤ In
± 1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of lBase -

Min. operating current (5-10000)% of lBase ± 1.0% of In at I ≤ In
±1.0% of I at I > In

2nd harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ± 2.0% of In

Independent time delay (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ±25 ms

Minimum operate time for (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ±25 ms
inverse characteristics
Inverse characteristics, see 15 curve types 1)ANSI/IEEE C37.112
table 573, table 574 and table IEC 60255–151
575 ±3% or ±40 ms
0.10 ≤ k ≤ 3.00
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset

Operate time, nondirectional 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

pickup function
Reset time, pickup function 35 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Operate time, directional 50 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

pickup function
Reset time, directional pickup 35 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -
function
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

1) Note: Timing accuracy only valid when 2nd harmonic blocking is turned off

6.3 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC

(50N) IP14508-1 v3

6.3.1 Identification
M14887-1 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Instantaneous residual overcurrent EFPIOC 50N
protection
IN>>

IEF V1 EN-US

88 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

6.3.2 Functionality M12701-3 v9

The Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC (50N) has a low transient overreach
and short tripping times to allow the use for instantaneous ground-fault protection, with the
reach limited to less than the typical eighty percent of the line at minimum source impedance.
EFPIOC (50N) is configured to measure the residual current from the three-phase current inputs
and can be configured to measure the current from a separate current input. EFPIOC (50N) can be
blocked by activating the input BLOCK.

6.3.3 Function block M12614-3 v5

EFPIOC (50N)
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK

ANSI08000003-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000003 V1 EN-US

Figure 35: EFPIOC (50N) function block

6.3.4 Signals
PID-1119-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 37: EFPIOC (50N) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

PID-1119-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 38: EFPIOC (50N) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal

6.3.5 Settings
PID-1119-SETTINGS v13

Table 39: EFPIOC (50N) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
Pickup 1 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate residual current level in % of IBase

Table 40: EFPIOC (50N) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

Bay control REC650 89

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

6.3.6 Monitored data

PID-1119-MONITOREDDATA v14

Table 41: EFPIOC (50N) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IN REAL - A Residual current

6.3.7 Operation principle M12704-3 v5

The sampled analog residual currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block.
From the fundamental frequency components of the residual current, as well as from the sample
values the equivalent RMS value is derived. This current value is fed to the Instantaneous residual
overcurrent protection (EFPIOC,50N). In a comparator the RMS value is compared to the set
operation current value of the function (Pickup). If the residual current is larger than the set
operation current a signal from the comparator is set to true. This signal will, without delay,
activate the output signal TRIP.

6.3.8 Technical data

M12340-2 v5

Table 42: EFPIOC (50N) technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (1-2500)% of lBase ± 1.0% of In at I £ In
± 1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio > 95% -

Operate time 20 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Reset time 30 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Operate time 10 ms typically at 0 to 5x Iset -

Reset time 40 ms typically at 5 to 0x Iset -

Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 5 x Iset -

Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -

6.4 Four step residual overcurrent protection, zero, negative

sequence direction EF4PTOC (51N/67N) IP14509-1 v5

90 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

6.4.1 Identification
M14881-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Four step residual overcurrent EF4PTOC 51N/67N
protection, zero or negative
sequence direction 2

IEC11000263 V1 EN-US

6.4.2 Functionality M13667-3 v13

The four step residual overcurrent protection, zero or negative sequence direction (EF4PTOC,
51N/67N) has independent inverse time delay settings for step 1 and 4. Step 2 and 3 are always
definite time delayed.

All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available.

EF4PTOC (51N/67N) can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.

The directional part of the function can be set to operate on following combinations:

• Directional current (I3PDir) versus Polarizing voltage (V3PPol)

• Directional current (I3PDir) versus Polarizing current (I3PPol)
• Directional current (I3PDir) versus Dual polarizing (VPol+ZPol x IPol) where ZPol = RPol + jXPol

IDir, VPol and IPol can be independently selected to be either zero sequence or negative sequence.

Other setting combinations are possible, but not recommended.

Second harmonic blocking level can be set for the function and can be used to block each step
individually.

EF4PTOC (51N/67N) can be used as main protection for phase-to-ground faults.

EF4PTOC (51N/67N) can also be used to provide a system back-up for example, in the case of the
primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer circuit
failure.

Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication logic in

permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. Current reversal and weak-end infeed functionality
are available as well.

Bay control REC650 91

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

6.4.3 Function block M12619-3 v6

EF4PTOC (51N_67N)
I3P* TRIP
V3P* TRST1
I3PPOL* TRST2
I3PDIR* TRST3
BLOCK TRST4
BLK1 BFI_3P
BLK2 PU_ST1
BLK3 PU_ST2
BLK4 PU_ST3
PU_ST4
PUFW
PUREV
2NDHARMD

ANSI08000004-2-en.vsd

ANSI08000004 V2 EN-US

Figure 36: EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function block

6.4.4 Signals
PID-2948-INPUTSIGNALS v12

Table 43: EF4PTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for polarizing voltage inputs
SIGNAL
I3PPOL GROUP - Three phase group signal for polarizing current inputs
SIGNAL
I3PDIR GROUP - Three phase group signal for operating directional inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 (start and trip)
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 (start and trip)
BLKST3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 3 (start and trip)
BLKST4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 4 (start and trip)

PID-2948-OUTPUTSIGNALS v12

Table 44: EF4PTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TR1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TR2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
TR3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 3
TR4 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 4
START BOOLEAN General start signal
Table continues on next page

92 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

Name Type Description

ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal step 1
ST2 BOOLEAN Start signal step 2
ST3 BOOLEAN Start signal step 3
ST4 BOOLEAN Start signal step 4
STFW BOOLEAN Forward directional start signal
STRV BOOLEAN Reverse directional start signal
2NDHARMD BOOLEAN 2nd harmonic block signal

6.4.5 Settings
PID-2948-SETTINGS v13

Table 45: EF4PTOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
EnaDir Disable - - Enable Enabling the Directional calculation
Enable
AngleRCA -180 - 180 Deg 1 65 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
polMethod Voltage - - Voltage Type of polarization
Current
Dual
UPolMin 1 - 100 %UB 1 1 Minimum voltage level for polarization (UN
or U2) in % of UBase
IPolMin 2 - 100 %IB 1 5 Minimum current level for polarization (IN
or I2) in % of IBase
RPol 0.50 - 1000.00 ohm 0.01 5.00 Real part of source Z to be used for current
polarisation
XPol 0.50 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Imaginary part of source Z to be used for
current polarisation
I>Dir 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Current level (IN or I2) for direction release
in % of IBase
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 % 1 20 Second harmonic restrain operation in %
of IN amplitude
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (off, non-
Non-directional directional, forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 93

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay curve type for step 1
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
RI type
RD type
IN1> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 100 Operate residual current level for step 1 in
% of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Independent (definite) time delay of step 1
k1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for step 1
IMin1 1 - 10000 %IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1 in % of
IBase
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
HarmRestrain1 Off - - On Enable block of step 1 from harmonic
On restrain
DirMode2 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 (off, non-
Non-directional directional, forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
IN2> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 50 Operate residual current level for step 2 in
% of IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Independent (definite) time delay of step 2
IMin2 1 - 10000 %IB 1 50 Minimum operate current for step 2 in %
of IBase
HarmRestrain2 Off - - On Enable block of step 2 from harmonic
On restrain
DirMode3 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 3 (off, non-
Non-directional directional, forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
IN3> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 33 Operate residual current level for step 3 in
% of IBase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Independent (definite) time delay of step 3
IMin3 1 - 10000 %IB 1 33 Minimum operate current for step 3 in %
of IBase
HarmRestrain3 Off - - On Enable block of step 3 from harmonic
On restrain
Table continues on next page

94 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

DirMode4 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 4 (off, non-
Non-directional directional, forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay curve type for step 4
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
RI type
RD type
IN4> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 17 Operate residual current level for step 4 in
% of IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Independent (definite) time delay of step 4
k4 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for step 4
IMin4 1 - 10000 %IB 1 17 Minimum operate current for step 4 in %
of IBase
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time in inverse curves
step 4
HarmRestrain4 Off - - On Enable block of step 4 from harmonic
On restrain

Table 46: EF4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
SeqTypeUPol ZeroSeq - - ZeroSeq Choice of measurand for polarizing
NegSeq voltage
SeqTypeIPol ZeroSeq - - ZeroSeq Choice of measurand for polarizing current
NegSeq
SeqTypeIDir ZeroSeq - - ZeroSeq Choice of measurand for directional
NegSeq current

Bay control REC650 95

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

6.4.6 Monitored data

PID-2948-MONITOREDDATA v9

Table 47: EF4PTOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STDIR INTEGER 3=Both - Fault direction coded as integer
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
IOp REAL - A Operating current level
UPol REAL - kV Polarizing voltage level
IPol REAL - A Polarizing current level
UPOLIANG REAL - deg Angle between polarizing voltage and
operating current
IPOLIANG REAL - deg Angle between polarizing current and
operating current
IOPDIR REAL - A Amplitude of the directional operating
quantity

6.4.7 Operation principle

M13941-51 v3
Four step residual overcurrent protection, zero or negative sequence direction EF4PTOC (51N/
67N) function has the following four “Analog Inputs” on its function block in the configuration tool:

1. I3P, input used for “Operating Quantity”.

2. V3P, input used for “Voltage Polarizing Quantity”.
3. I3PPOL, input used for “Current Polarizing Quantity”.
4. I3PDIR, input used for “Operating Directional Quantity”.

These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in the
Configuration Tool within PCM600.

6.4.7.1 Operating quantity within the function M13941-58 v5

If the function is set to measure zero sequence, it uses Residual Current (3I0) for its operating
quantity. The residual current can be:

1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to the
fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function
input I3P). This dedicated IED CT input can be for example, connected to:

96 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

• parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases (Holm-Green

connection).
• one single core balance, current instrument transformer (cable CT).
• one single current instrument transformer located between power system WYE point
and ground (that is, current transformer located in the neutral grounding of a WYE
connected transformer winding).
• one single current instrument transformer located between two parts of a protected
object (that is, current transformer located between two WYE points of double WYE
shunt capacitor bank).
2. calculated from three-phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog input into
the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function Analog Input I3P is not
connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600). In such case the pre-processing
block will calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the
following formula (will take I2 from same SMAI AI3P connected to I3PDIR input (same SMAI
AI3P connected to I3P input)):

If zero sequence current is selected,

I op = 3 × Io = IA + IB + IC
EQUATION2011-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 7)

where:
IA, IB, IC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. The phasor magnitude is
used within the EF4PTOC (51N/67N) protection to compare it with the set operation current value
of the four steps (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3 or Pickup4). If the residual current is larger than the
set operation current and the step is used in non-directional mode a signal from the comparator
for this step is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal PU_STx
(x=step 1-4) for this step and a common PICKUP signal.

6.4.7.2 Internal polarizing M13941-82 v8

A polarizing quantity is used within the protection in order to determine the direction to the
ground fault (Forward/Reverse).

The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing.

Voltage polarizing
When voltage polarizing is selected the protection will use either the residual voltage 3V0 or the
negative sequence voltage V2 as polarizing quantity V3P.

The residual voltage can be:

1. directly measured (when a dedicated VT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to the fourth
analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function input
V3P). This dedicated IED VT input shall be then connected to open delta winding of a three
phase main VT.
2. calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED (when the fourth analog input into
the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) analog function input V3P is NOT

Bay control REC650 97

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

connected to a dedicated VT input of the IED in PCM600). In such case the pre-processing
block will calculate 3V0 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the
following formula:

VPol=3V0=(VA +VB +VC)

ANSIEQUATION2407 V1 EN-US (Equation 9)

where:
VA, VB, VC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.

In order to use this, all three phase-to-ground voltages must be connected to three
IED VT inputs.

The residual voltage is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus, the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the residual voltage is derived.

The negative sequence voltage is calculated from the three-phase voltage input within the IED by
using the pre-processing block. The preprocessing block will calculate the negative sequence
voltage from the three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:

VPol = (VA+ alpha ×VB + alpha ×VC)/3

GUID-F09A69D7-A8A6-4354-B0B8-F4EC7BBE603F V2 EN-US (Equation 10)

where:
VA, VB, VC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.
alpha unit phasor with an angle of 120 degrees.

The polarizing phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating directional current, in
order to determine the direction to the ground fault (Forward/Reverse). In order to enable voltage
polarizing the magnitude of polarizing voltage shall be bigger than a minimum level defined by
setting parameter VpolMin.

It shall be noted that residual voltage (Vn) or negative sequence voltage (V2) is used to determine
the location of the ground fault. This insures the required inversion of the polarizing voltage within
the ground-fault function.

Current polarizing
When current polarizing is selected the function will use an external residual current (3I0) or the
calculated negative sequence current (I2) as polarizing quantity IPol. The user can select the
required current.

The residual current can be:

1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to the
fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function
input I3PPOL). This dedicated IED CT input is then typically connected to one single current
transformer located between power system WYE point and ground (current transformer
located in the WYE point of a WYE connected transformer winding).

98 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

• For some special line protection applications this dedicated IED CT input can be
connected to parallel connection of current transformers in all three phases (Holm-
Green connection).
2. calculated from three phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog input into
the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function analog input I3PPOL is
NOT connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600). In such case the pre-
processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by
using the following formula:

I Pol = 3 × Io = IA + IB + IC
EQUATION2019-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 11)

where:
IA, IB and IC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

The negative sequence current can be calculated from the three-phase current input within the IED
by using the pre-processing block. The pre-processing block will calculate the negative sequence
current from the three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:

Ipol = (IA+alpha 2 × IB+alpha × IC)/3

ANSIEQUATION2406 V2 EN-US (Equation 12)

where:
IA, IB and IC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
alpha phasor with an angle of 120 degrees.

The polarizing current is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the polarizing current is derived. This phasor is then
multiplied with pre-set equivalent zero-sequence source Impedance in order to calculate
equivalent polarizing voltage VIPol in accordance with the following formula:

VIPol = Zo S × I Pol = ( RNPol + j × XNPOL ) × I Pol

EQUATION2013-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 13)

which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating directional current, in order to
determine the direction to the ground fault (Forward/Reverse).

In order to enable current polarizing the magnitude of polarizing current shall be bigger than a
minimum level defined by setting parameter IPolMin.

Dual polarizing
When dual polarizing is selected the function will use the vectorial sum of the voltage based and
current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:

VTotPol=VVPol + VIPol=VPol + Z 0s × IPol = VPol + ( RNPol + jXNPol ) × Ipol

ANSIEQUATION2408 V1 EN-US (Equation 14)

Bay control REC650 99

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

Vpol and Ipol can be either zero sequence component or negative sequence component depending
upon the user selection.

Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage VTotPol will be used, together with the phasor of
the operating current, to determine the direction of the ground fault (Forward/Reverse).

6.4.7.3 External polarizing for ground-fault function M13941-144 v3

The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this setting is
selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKn(where x indicates the relevant step
within the protection) to provide external directional control (that is, torque control) by for
example using one of the following functions if available in the IED:

1. Distance protection directional function.

2. Negative sequence based overcurrent function.

6.4.7.4 Base quantities within the protection M13941-152 v4

The base quantities are entered as global settings for all functions in the IED. Base current (IBase)
shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes. Base voltage
(VBase) shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV.

6.4.7.5 Internal ground-fault protection structure M13941-157 v2

The protection is internally divided into the following parts:

1. Four residual overcurrent steps.

2. Directional supervision element for residual overcurrent steps with integrated directional
comparison step for communication based ground-fault protection schemes (permissive or
blocking).
3. Second harmonic blocking element with additional feature for sealed-in blocking during
switching of parallel transformers.

Each part is described separately in the following sections.

6.4.7.6 Four residual overcurrent steps M13941-166 v6

Each overcurrent step uses operating quantity Iop (residual current) as measuring quantity. Each
of the four residual overcurrent steps has the following built-in facilities:

• Directional mode can be set to Disabled/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse. By this parameter

setting the directional mode of the step is selected. It shall be noted that the directional
decision (Forward/Reverse) is not made within each residual overcurrent step itself. The
direction of the fault is determined in a directional element common for all steps.
• Residual current pickup value.
• Type of operating characteristic. By this parameter setting it is possible to select inverse or
definitive time delay for step 1 and 4 separately. Step 2 and 3 are always definite time delayed.

100 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

All of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are available. For the complete list of
available inverse curves please refer to section "Inverse time characteristics".
• Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like definite time
delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves and reset time delay are defined.
• Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (Enabled/Disabled). By this parameter
setting it is possible to prevent operation of the step if the second harmonic content in the
residual current exceeds the preset level.

Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent step is shown in figure 37.

Characteristn=DefTime
|IOP|
a
AND 0-tx TRSTx
OR
a>b 0
Pickupx b

AND
PU_STx

0-txMin
BLKx 0 AND

BLOCK
Inverse

2ndH_BLOCK_Int
OR Characteristn=Inverse
HarmRestrainx=Disabled

DirModeSelx=Disabled OR STEPx_DIR_Int
DirModeSelx=Non-directional
DirModeSelx=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModeSelx=Reverse

AND
REVERSE_Int

ANSI09000638-3-en.vsd

ANSI09000638 V3 EN-US

Figure 37: Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent

The protection can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. Output signals for
respective step, PU_STx and TRSTx and , can be blocked from the binary input BLKn.

6.4.7.7 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison

function M13941-179 v6

It shall be noted that at least one of the four residual overcurrent steps shall be set
as directional in order to enable execution of the directional supervision element
and the integrated directional comparison function.

The protection has integrated directional feature. The operating quantity current I3PDIR is
always used. The polarizinwcg method is determined by the parameter setting polMethod. The
polarizing quantity will be selected by the function in one of the following three ways:

1. When polMethod = Voltage, VPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

2. When polMethod = Current, IPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
3. WhenpolMethod = Dual, VPol + IPol · ZNPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as shown in
figure 38, in order to determine the direction of the ground fault.

Bay control REC650 101

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

Operating area

PUREV
0.6 * INDirPU
Characteristic for reverse
release of measuring steps
-RCA -85 deg
Characteristic
for PUREV 40% of
INDirPU RCA +85 deg

RCA
65° VPol = -3V0

-RCA +85 deg

RCA -85 deg

Characteristic for forward
release of measuring steps
INDirPU

PUFW

I op = 3I0

Operating area
Characteristic
for PUFW ANSI11000243-1-en.ai
ANSI11000243 V1 EN-US

Figure 38: Operating characteristic for ground-fault directional element using the zero
sequence components

102 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

BLKTR

Characteristx=DefTime AND
TRSTx
|IOP| AND
a OR 0-tx
a>b
Pickupx b
0

AND
PU_STx

BLKx 0-txMin
0 AND
BLOCK
Inverse

Characteristx=Inverse

DirModeSelx=Disabled OR STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModeSelx=Non-directional
DirModeSelx=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModeSelx=Reverse

AND
REVERSE_Int

ANSI11000281-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000281-1-en.vsd

ANSI11000281 V1 EN-US

Figure 39: Operating characteristic for ground-fault directional element using the zero
sequence components

Bay control REC650 103

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

Operating area

PUREV
0.6 * IDirPU
Characteristic for reverse
release of measuring steps
-RCA -85 deg
Characteristic
for PUREV 40% of
IDIR RCA +85 deg

RCA
65 deg Vpol = -V2

-RCA +85 deg

RCA -85 deg

Characteristic for forward
release of measuring steps
IDIR

PUFW

I op = 3I2

Operating area
Characteristic
for PUFW ANSI11000269-2-en.ai
ANSI11000269 V2 EN-US

Figure 40: Operating characteristic for ground-fault directional element using the negative
sequence components
Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:

• Directional element will be internally enabled to operate as soon as Iop is bigger than 40% of
IDirPU and directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
• Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA, which defines the position of forward and reverse areas
in the operating characteristic.

Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, will set EF4PTOC
(51N/67N) function output binary signals:

1. PUFW=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos(φ - AngleRCA) is bigger than setting
parameter IDirPU and directional supervision element detects fault in forward direction.
2. PUREV=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos(φ - AngleRCA) is bigger than 60% of
setting parameter IDirPU and directional supervision element detects fault in reverse
direction.

These signals shall be used for communication based ground-fault teleprotection communication
schemes (permissive or blocking).

Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step is shown in figure 41:

104 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

|IopDir|
a
a>b PUREV
b AND
REVERSE_Int
0.6
X
a
a>b
AND PUFW
IDirPU b
FORWARD_Int

X
0.4

FWD
AND FORWARD_Int
AngleRCA
polMethod=Voltage
OR
VPolMin

Characteristic
Directional
polMethod=Dual IPolMin
VPol T
I3PDIR
polMethod=Current 0.0 F
OR
VTPol
IPol AND REVERSE_Int
T RVS
0.0 F
VIPol
RNPol X STAGE1_DIR_Int
Complex T
STAGE2_DIR_Int
XNPol Number 0.0 F STAGE3_DIR_Int OR
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK AND

ANSI07000067-4-en.vsd

ANSI07000067 V4 EN-US

Figure 41: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step

6.4.8 Second harmonic blocking element GUID-B76F852F-E5BD-4437-8A74-F48CE9360B36 v1.1.1

A harmonic restrain of the Four step residual overcurrent protection function EF4PTOC 51N_67N
can be chosen. Any of the four residual overcurrent stages can be selectively blocked by parameter
HarmRestrainx setting. When second harmonic restraint feature is active, the EF4PTOC 51N_67N
function output signal 2NDHARMD will be set to logical value one if following conditions are
fulfilled:

• Magnitude of fundamental frequency component in a phase current is above 7.0% IB

• Magnitude of second harmonic component in a residual current is above 7.0% IB
• Magnitude of second harmonic component in a residual current exceeds the preset level
defined by a setting 2ndHarmStab multiplied by the magnitude of fundamental frequency
component in a residual current.

Bay control REC650 105

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

BLOCK

a
a>b
0.07*IBase b

a
a>b
b
Extract second 2NDHARMD
IOP AND
harmonic current a
a>b
component b

Extract
fundamental
current component
X
2ndHarmStab

q-1

t=70ms OR
t AN OR 2ndH_BLOCK_Int
D

BlkParTransf=On
|IOP|
a
a>b
b
UseStartValue
IN1>
IN2>
IN3>
IN4>

IEC13000015-1-en.vsd
IEC13000015 V1 EN-US

Figure 42: Second harmonic blocking

6.4.9 Technical data

M15223-1 v10

Table 48: EF4PTOC (51N/67N) technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (1-2500)% of lBase ± 1.0% of In at I < In
± 1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio > 95% -

Operate current for directional (1–100)% of lBase ± 2.0% of In
comparison, Zero sequence
Operate current for directional (1–100)% of lBase ± 2.0% of In
comparison, Negative
sequence
Min. operating current (1-10000)% of lBase ± 1.0% of In at I < In
± 1.0% of I at I >In

Minimum operate time for (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms

inverse characteristics
Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ±25 ms
Table continues on next page

106 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Inverse characteristics, see 15 curve types 1) ANSI/IEEE C37.112
table 573, table 574 and table IEC 60255–151
575 ±3% or ±40 ms
0.10 ≤ k ≤ 3.00
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset

Minimum polarizing voltage, (1–100)% of VBase ± 0.5% of Vn

Zero sequence
Minimum polarizing voltage, (1–100)% of VBase ± 0.5% of Vn
Negative sequence
Minimum polarizing current, (2–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of In
Zero sequence
Minimum polarizing current, (2–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of In
Negative sequence
Real part of source Z used for (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -
current polarization
Imaginary part of source Z (0.50–3000.00) W/phase -
used for current polarization
Operate time, non-directional 30 ms typically at 0.5 to 2 x Iset -
pickup function
Reset time, non-directional 30 ms typically at 2 to 0.5 x Iset -
pickup function
Operate time, directional 30 ms typically at 0,5 to 2 x IN -
pickup function
Reset time, directional pickup 30 ms typically at 2 to 0,5 x IN -
function
1) Note: Timing accuracy only valid when 2nd harmonic blocking is turned off.

6.5 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power

protection SDEPSDE (67N) SEMOD171436-1 v3

6.5.1 Identification
SEMOD172025-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Sensitive directional residual over SDEPSDE - 67N
current and power protection

6.5.2 Functionality GUID-EB27F20E-F477-418B-83F0-744BF2988469 v3

In isolated networks or in networks with high impedance grounding, the ground fault current is
significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. In addition to this, the magnitude of the fault
current is almost independent on the fault location in the network. The protection can be selected
to use either the residual current, 3I0·cosj or 3I0·j, or residual power component 3V0·3I0·cos j, for

Bay control REC650 107

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

operating quantity. There is also available one non-directional 3I0 step and one non-directional 3V0
overvoltage tripping step.

6.5.3 Function block SEMOD172780-4 v4

SDEPSDE (67N)
I3P* TRIP
V3P* TRDIRIN
BLOCK TRNDIN
BLKVN TRVN
PICKUP
PUDIRIN
PUNDIN
PUVN
PUFW
PUREV
CND
VNREL

ANSI08000036-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000036 V1 EN-US

Figure 43: SDEPSDE (67N) function block

6.5.4 Signals
PID-3483-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 49: SDEPSDE (67N) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKUN BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the non-directional voltage residual outputs

PID-3483-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 50: SDEPSDE (67N) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRDIRIN BOOLEAN Trip of the directional residual overcurrent
TRNDIN BOOLEAN Trip of non-directional residual overcurrent
TRUN BOOLEAN Trip of non-directional residual overvoltage
START BOOLEAN General pickup signal
STDIRIN BOOLEAN Pick up of the directional residual overcurrent function
STNDIN BOOLEAN Pick up of non directional residual overcurrent
STUN BOOLEAN Pick up of non directional residual overvoltage
STFW BOOLEAN Pick up of directional function for fault in forward direction
STRV BOOLEAN Pick up of directional function for fault in reverse direction
STDIR INTEGER Direction of fault
UNREL BOOLEAN Residual voltage release of operation of directional modes

108 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

6.5.5 Settings
PID-3483-SETTINGS v1

Table 51: SDEPSDE (67N) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disable / Enable
Enabled
OpMode 3I0Cosfi - - 3I0Cosfi Selection of operation mode for
3I03V0Cosfi protection
3I0 and fi
DirMode Forward - - Forward Direction of operation forward or reverse
Reverse
RCADir -179 - 180 Deg 1 -90 Relay characteristic angle RCA
RCAComp -10.0 - 10.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Relay characteristic angle compensation
ROADir 0 - 90 Deg 1 90 Relay open angle ROA used as release in
phase mode
INCosPhi> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 1.00 Set level for 3I0cosPhi, directional residual
overcurrent, in % of IBase
SN> 0.25 - 200.00 %SB 0.01 10.00 Set level for 3I0V0cosPhi, starting inverse
time count, in % of SBase
INDir> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 5.00 Set level for directional residual
overcurrent protection, in % of IBase
tDef 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Definite time delay directional residual
overcurrent
SRef 0.03 - 200.00 %SB 0.01 10.00 Reference value of residual power for
inverse time count, in % of SBase
kSN 0.00 - 2.00 - 0.01 0.10 Time multiplier setting for directional
residual power mode
OpINNonDir> Disabled - - Disabled Operation of non-directional residual
Enabled overcurrent protection
INNonDir> 1.00 - 400.00 %IB 0.01 10.00 Set level for non-directional residual
overcurrent, in % of IBase
tINNonDir 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time delay for non-directional residual
overcurrent
TimeChar ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Norm. inv. Operation curve selection for IDMT
ANSI Very inv. operation
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
RI type
RD type
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 109

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves
kIN 0.00 - 2.00 - 0.01 1.00 IDMT time multiplier for non-directional
residual overcurrent
OpUN> Disabled - - Disabled Operation of non-directional residual
Enabled overvoltage
UN> 1.00 - 300.00 %VB 0.01 20.00 Set level for non-dir residual voltage, % of
Vbase
tUN 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for non-directional residual
overvoltage
INRel> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 1.00 Residual release current for all directional
modes, in % of IBase
UNRel> 1.00 - 300.00 %VB 0.01 3.00 Residual release volt for all dir modes, % of
VBase

Table 52: SDEPSDE (67N) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

6.5.6 Monitored data

PID-3483-MONITOREDDATA v1

Table 53: SDEPSDE (67N) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
INCOSPHI REAL - A Mag of residual current along polarizing
qty 3I0cos(Fi-RCA)
IN REAL - A Measured magnitude of the residual
current 3I0
UN REAL - kV Measured magnitude of the residual
voltage 3V0
SN REAL - MVA Measured magnitude of residual power
3I03V0cos(Fi-RCA)
ANG FI-RCA REAL - deg Angle between 3V0 and 3I0 minus RCA (Fi-
RCA)

6.5.7 Operation principle

6.5.7.1 Function inputs SEMOD171963-4 v2

The function is using phasors of the residual current and voltage. Group signals I3P and V3P
containing phasors of residual current and voltage is taken from pre-processor blocks.

The sensitive directional ground fault protection has the following sub-functions included:

110 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

6.5.7.2 Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0·cos φ

SEMOD171963-8 v5

φ is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage. Vref = -3V0
ejRCADir, that is -3V0 rotated by the set characteristic angle RCADir (φ=ang(3I0)-ang(Vref) ). RCADir is
normally set equal to 0 in a high impedance grounded network with a neutral point resistor as the
active current component is appearing out on the faulted feeder only. RCADir is set equal to -90° in
an isolated network as all currents are mainly capacitive. The function operates when 3I0·cos φ
gets larger than the set value.

Vref RCA = 0°, ROA = 90°

3I0

= ang(3I0) - ang(3Vref)
-3V0=Vref
3I0 cos

en06000648_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000648 V1 EN-US

Figure 44: RCADir set to 0°

Bay control REC650 111

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

RCA = -90°, ROA = 90°

Vref

3I0
3I0 cos

= ang(3I0) – ang(Vref)

-3V0

en06000649_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000649 V1 EN-US

Figure 45: RCADir set to -90°

For trip, both the residual current 3I0·cos φ and the release voltage 3V0, must be larger than the
set levels: INCosPhiPU and VNRelPU.

When the function is activated binary output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN are activated. If the
output signals are active after the set delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are
activated. The trip from this sub-function has definite time delay.

There is a possibility to increase the operate level for currents where the angle φ is larger than a
set value as shown in figure 46. This is equivalent to blocking of the function if φ > ROADir. This
option is used to handle angle error for the instrument transformers.

112 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

3I0 Operate area

Vref0=-
-3V =V3V
ref o
RCA = 0°
3I0 cos
ROA

ANSI06000650-2-
vsd
en06000650_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000650 V2 EN-US

Figure 46: Characteristic with ROADir restriction

The function indicates forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined as
3I0·cos (φ + 180°) ≥ the set value.

It is also possible to tilt the characteristic to compensate for current transformer angle error with
a setting RCAComp as shown in the figure 47:

Bay control REC650 113

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

Operate area

-3V0=Vref RCA = 0°

Instrument
transformer a
RCAcomp
angle error
Characteristic after
angle compensation

3I0 (to prot)

3I0 (prim)

en06000651_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000651 V1 EN-US

Figure 47: Explanation of RCAComp

6.5.7.3 Directional residual power protection measuring 3I0 · 3V0 · cos φ

SEMOD171963-32 v5

φ is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage compensated
with the set characteristic angle RCADir (φ=ang(3I0)—ang(Vref) ). Vref = -3V0 e-jRCADir. The function
operates when 3I0 · 3V0 · cos φ gets larger than the set value.

For trip, both the residual power 3I0 · 3V0 · cos φ, the residual current 3I0 and the release voltage
3V0, shall be larger than the set levels (SN_PU, INRelPU and VNRelPU).

When the function is activated binary output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN are activated. If the
output signals are active after the set delay tDef or after the inverse time delay (setting TDSN) the
binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated.

The function shall indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined as
3I0 · 3V0·cos (φ + 180°) ³ the set value.

This sub-function has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time delay.

The inverse time delay is defined as:

114 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

TDSN ⋅ (3I 0 ⋅ 3V0 ⋅ cos ϕ (reference))

tinv =
3I 0 ⋅ 3V0 ⋅ cos ϕ (measured )
EQUATION2032-ANSI V2 EN-US (Equation 15)

6.5.7.4 Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 and φ

SEMOD171963-48 v3

The function will operate if the residual current is larger that the set value and the angle φ =
ang(3I0)-ang(Vref= -3V0) is within the sector RCADir ± ROADir

RCA = 0º

ROA = 80º

Operate area

3I0

Vref=-3V0

ANSI06000652-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000652 V2 EN-US

Figure 48: Example of characteristic

For trip, the residual current 3I0 shall be larger than the set level INDirPU, the release voltage 3V0
shall be larger than the set level VNRelPU and the angle φ shall be in the set sector ROADir and
RCADir.

When the function is activated binary output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN are activated. If the
output signals are active after the set delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are
activated.

The function indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined as φ is
within the angle sector: RCADir + 180° ± ROADir

This sub-function has definite time delay.

6.5.7.5 Directional functions SEMOD171963-60 v2

For all the directional functions there are directional pickup signals PUFW: fault in the forward
direction, and PUREV: Pickup in the reverse direction. Even if the directional function is set to
operate for faults in the forward direction a fault in the reverse direction will give the pickup signal

Bay control REC650 115

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

PUREV. Also if the directional function is set to operate for faults in the reverse direction a fault in
the forward direction will give the pickup signal PUFW.

6.5.7.6 Non-directional ground fault current protection SEMOD171963-63 v3

This function will measure the residual current without checking the phase angle. The function will
be used to detect cross-country faults. This function can serve as alternative or back-up to
distance protection with phase preference logic.

The non-directional function is using the calculated residual current, derived as sum of the phase
currents. This will give a better ability to detect cross-country faults with high residual current,
also when dedicated core balance CT for the sensitive ground fault protection will saturate.

This sub-function has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time delay.
The inverse time delay shall be according to IEC 60255-3.

For trip, the residual current 3I0 shall be larger than the set level (INNonDirPU).

When the function is activated binary output signal PUNDIN is activated. If the output signal is
active after the set delay tINNonDir or after the inverse time delay the binary output signals TRIP
and TRNDIN are activated.

6.5.7.7 Residual overvoltage release and protection SEMOD171963-72 v3

The directional function shall be released when the residual voltage gets higher than a set level.

There shall also be a separate trip, with its own definite time delay, from this level set voltage level.

For trip, the residual voltage 3V0 shall be larger than the set level (UN_PU).

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKVN.

When the function is activated binary output signal PUVN is activated. If the output signals are
active after the set delay tVNNonDir TRIP and TRUN are activated. A simplified logical diagram of
the total function is shown in figure 49.

116 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

INNonDirPU PUNDIN
0-t TRNDIN
0
UN_PU PUVN
0-t TRVN
0
OpMODE=INcosPhi

Pickup_N
AND

INCosPhiPU

OpMODE=INVNCosPhi
AND OR AND PUDIRIN

INVNCosPhiPU t

SN
AND TRDIRIN
Phi in RCA +- ROA
TimeChar = InvTime

AND
OpMODE=IN and Phi
AND
TimeChar = DefTime

DirMode = Forw
AND OR
PUFW
Forw

DirMode = Rev
AND

Rev PUREV

en06000653_ansi.vsd

ANSI06000653 V1 EN-US

Figure 49: Simplified logical diagram of the sensitive ground-fault current protection

Bay control REC650 117

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

6.5.8 Technical data

SEMOD173350-2 v9

Table 54: SDEPSDE (67N) technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate level for 3I0·cosj (0.25-200.00)% of lBase ± 1.0% of In at I £ In
directional residual ± 1.0% of I at I > In
overcurrent
At low setting:
(0.25-1.00)% of In: ±0.05% of In
(1.00-5.00)% of In: ±0.1% of In

Operate level for ·3I0·3V0· (0.25-200.00)% of SBase ± 2.0% of Sn at S £ Sn

cosj directional residual ± 2.0% of S at S > Sn
power
At low setting:
(0.25-5.00)% of SBase

± 10% of set value

Operate level for 3I0 and j (0.25-200.00)% of lBase ± 1.0% of In at £ In

residual overcurrent ± 1.0% of I at I > In

At low setting:
(0.25-1.00)% of In: ±0.05% of In
(1.00-5.00)% of In: ±0.1% of In

Operate level for non- (1.00-400.00)% of lBase ± 1.0% of In at I £ In

directional overcurrent ± 1.0% of I at I > In

At low setting <5% of In:

±0.1% of In

Operate level for non- (1.00-200.00)% of VBase ± 0.5% of Vn at V£Vn

directional residual ± 0.5% of V at V > Vn
overvoltage
Residual release current (0.25-200.00)% of lBase ± 1.0% of In at I £ In
for all directional modes ± 1.0% of I at I > In

At low setting:
(0.25-1.00)% of In: ±0.05% of In
(1.00-5.00)% of In: ±0.1% of In

Residual release voltage (1.00 - 300.00)% of VBase ± 0.5% of Vn at V£Vn

for all directional modes ± 0.5% of V at V > Vn

Reset ratio > 95% -

Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ±25 ms
Inverse characteristics, see 15 curve types ANSI/IEEE C37.112
table 573, table 574 and IEC 60255–151
table 575 ±3.0% or±90 ms
0.10 ≤ k ≤ 3.00
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset

Relay characteristic angle (-179 to 180) degrees ± 2.0 degrees

RCA
Relay open angle ROA (0-90) degrees ± 2.0 degrees
Table continues on next page

118 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate time, non- 60 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 60 ms typically at 0 to 2 x 1set
directional residual over
current
Reset time, non-directional 65 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 65 ms typically at 2 to 0 x 1set
residual over current
Operate time, non- 45 ms typically at 0.8 to 1.5 x Uset 45 ms typically at 0.8 to 1.5 x Uset
directional residual
overvoltage
Reset time, non-directional 85 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset 85 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset
residual overvoltage
Operate time, directional 140 ms typically at 0.5 to 2 x Iset -
residual over current
Reset time, directional 85 ms typically at 2 to 0.5 x Iset -
residual over current
Critical impulse time non- 35 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -
directional residual over
current
Impulse margin time non- 25 ms typically -
directional residual over
current

6.6 Thermal overload protection, one time constant

Fahrenheit/Celsius LFPTTR/LCPTTR (26) IP14512-1 v5

6.6.1 Identification
M17106-1 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Thermal overload protection, one LFPTTR 26
time constant, Fahrenheit

Thermal overload protection, one LCPTTR 26

time constant, Celsius

6.6.2 Functionality M12020-4 v9

The increasing utilizing of the power system closer to the thermal limits has generated a need of a
thermal overload protection also for power lines.

Bay control REC650 119

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

A thermal overload will often not be detected by other protection functions and the introduction
of the thermal overload protection can allow the protected circuit to operate closer to the thermal
limits.

The three-phase current measuring protection has an I2t characteristic with settable time
constant and a thermal memory. The temperature is displayed in either in Celsius or in Fahrenheit
depending on whether the function used is Thermal overload protection one time constant,
Fahrenheit LFPTTR (26) or Celsius LCPTTR.

An alarm pickup gives early warning to allow operators to take action well before the line is
tripped.

Estimated time to trip before operation, and estimated time to reclose after operation are
presented.

6.6.3 Function block M12627-3 v6

LFPTTR (26)
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK RI
AMBTEMP ALARM
SENSFLT LOCKOUT
RESET TEMP
TEMPAMB
TERMLOAD

ANSI11000246-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000246 V1 EN-US

LCPTTR (26)
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK RI
AMBTEMP ALARM
SENSFLT LOCKOUT
RESET TEMP
TEMPAMB
TERMLOAD

ANSI08000038-2-en.vsd
ANSI08000038 V2 EN-US

Figure 50: LFPTTR/LCPTTR (26) function block

6.6.4 Signals
PID-3033-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 55: LFPTTR (26) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
AMBTEMP REAL 0 Ambient temperature from external temperature sensor
SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of internal thermal load counter

120 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

PID-3032-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 56: LCPTTR (26) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
AMBTEMP REAL 0 Ambient temperature from external temperature sensor
SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of internal thermal load counter

PID-3033-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 57: LFPTTR (26) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
PICKUP BOOLEAN General pickup signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Lockout signal
TEMP REAL Calculated temperature of the device
TEMPAMB REAL Ambient temperature used in the calculations
TERMLOAD REAL Temperature relative to operate temperature

PID-3032-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 58: LCPTTR (26) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
PICKUP BOOLEAN General pickup signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Lockout signal
TEMP REAL Calculated temperature of the device
TEMPAMB REAL Ambient temperature used in the calculations
TERMLOAD REAL Temperature relative to operate temperature

Bay control REC650 121

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

6.6.5 Settings
PID-3033-SETTINGS v3

Table 59: LFPTTR (26) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disable / Enable
Enabled
TRef 0 - 600 Deg F 1 160 End temperature rise above ambient of
the line when loaded with IRef
IRef 0 - 400 %IB 1 100 Load current in % of IBase leading to TRef
temperature
Tau 1 - 1000 Min 1 45 Time constant of the line
AlarmTemp 0 - 400 Deg F 1 175 Temperature level for pickup (alarm)
TripTemp 0 - 600 Deg F 1 195 Temperature level for trip
ReclTemp 0 - 600 Deg F 1 170 Temperature for reset of lockout after trip
AmbiSens Disabled - - Disabled External temperature sensor available
Enabled
DefaultAmbTemp -50 - 250 Deg F 1 60 Ambient temperature used when
AmbiSens is set to Off
DefaultTemp -50 - 600 Deg F 1 100 Temperature raise above ambient
temperature at startup

Table 60: LFPTTR (26) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

PID-3032-SETTINGS v3

Table 61: LCPTTR (26) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disable / Enable
Enabled
TRef 0 - 300 Deg C 1 90 End temperature rise above ambient of
the line when loaded with IRef
IRef 0 - 400 %IB 1 100 Load current in % of IBase leading to TRef
temperature
Tau 1 - 1000 Min 1 45 Time constant of the line
AlarmTemp 0 - 200 Deg C 1 80 Temperature level for pickup (alarm)
TripTemp 0 - 300 Deg C 1 90 Temperature level for trip
ReclTemp 0 - 300 Deg C 1 75 Temperature for reset of lockout after trip
AmbiSens Disabled - - Disabled External temperature sensor available
Enabled
DefaultAmbTemp -50 - 100 Deg C 1 20 Ambient temperature used when
AmbiSens is set to Off
DefaultTemp -50 - 300 Deg C 1 50 Temperature raise above ambient
temperature at startup

122 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

Table 62: LCPTTR (26) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

6.6.6 Monitored data

PID-3033-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 63: LFPTTR (26) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TTRIP INTEGER - - Estimated time to trip (in min)
TENRECL INTEGER - - Estimated time to reset of lockout (in min)
TEMP REAL - Temperatur Calculated temperature of the device
e
Fahrenheit
TEMPAMB REAL - Temperatur Ambient temperature used in the
e calculations
Fahrenheit

PID-3032-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 64: LCPTTR (26) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TTRIP INTEGER - - Estimated time to trip (in min)
TENRECL INTEGER - - Estimated time to reset of lockout (in min)
TEMP REAL - deg Calculated temperature of the device
TEMPAMB REAL - deg Ambient temperature used in the
calculations

6.6.7 Operation principle M12018-3 v5

The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current the RMS value is
derived. These phase current values are fed to the thermal overload protection, one time constant
LFPTTR/LCPTTR (26) function. The temperature is displayed either in Celsius or Fahrenheit,
depending on whether LFPTTR/LCPTTR (26) function is selected.

From the largest of the three-phase currents a final temperature is calculated according to the
expression:

Bay control REC650 123

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

2
æ I ö
Q final =ç ÷÷ × Tref
ç I ref
è ø
EQUATION1167 V1 EN-US (Equation 16)

where:
I is the largest phase current,
Iref is a given reference current and

Tref is steady state temperature rise corresponding to Iref

If this temperature is larger than the set operate temperature level, TripTemp, a PICKUP output
signal is activated.

The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:

æ Dt
ö
Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) × ç1 - e t ÷
-

è ø
EQUATION1168 V1 EN-US (Equation 17)

where:
Qn is the calculated present temperature,

Qn-1 is the calculated temperature at the previous time step,

Qfinal is the calculated final temperature with the actual current,

Dt is the time step between calculation of the actual temperature and

t is the set thermal time constant for the protected device (line or cable)

The calculated component temperature is available as a real figure signal, TEMP.

When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level AlarmTemp the output signal
ALARM is set. When the component temperature reaches the set trip level TripTemp the output
signal TRIP is set.

There is also a calculation of the present time to operate with the present current. This calculation
is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the operation temperature:

æQ - Qoperate ö
toperate = -t × ln ç final
ç Q final - Q n ÷÷
è ø
EQUATION1169 V1 EN-US (Equation 18)

The calculated time to trip is available as a real figure signal, TTRIP.

124 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

After a trip, caused by the thermal overload protection, there can be a lockout to reconnect the
tripped circuit. The output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated when the device temperature is
above the set lockout release temperature setting ReclTemp.

The time to lockout release is calculated that is, a calculation of the cooling time to a set value. The
thermal content of the function can be reset with input RESET.

æ Q final - Qlockout _ release ö

tlockout _ release = -t × ln ç ÷÷
ç Q - Q
è final n ø
EQUATION1170 V1 EN-US (Equation 19)

The calculated time to reset of lockout is available as a real figure signal, TENRECL.

The protection has a reset input: RESET. By activating this input the calculated temperature is
reset to its default initial value. This is useful during testing when secondary injected current has
given a calculated “false” temperature level.

Bay control REC650 125

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

Final Temp PICKUP

> TripTemp

actual temperature
Calculation
of actual
temperature

IA, IB, IC Calculation

of final
temperature

Actual Temp >

ALARM
AlarmTemp

TRIP
Actual Temp
> TripTemp
Lock-
LOCKOUT
out
logic
Actual Temp
< Recl Temp

Calculation TTRIP
of time to
trip

Calculation
of time to TENRECL
reset of
lockout

ANSI09000637-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000637 V2 EN-US

Figure 51: Functional overview of LFPTTR/LCPTTR (26)

126 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

6.6.8 Technical data

M12352-1 v9

Table 65: LFPTTR/LCPTTR (26)technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Reference current (0-400)% of IBase ± 1.0% of In

Reference temperature (0-600) °F, (0 - 300)°C ± 2.0°F, ±2.0°C

Operate time: Time constant t = (0–1000) IEC 60255-8, ±5% + 200 ms
minutes
æ I 2 - I p2 ö
t = t × ln ç 2 ÷
ç I - I ref 2 ÷
è ø
EQUATION1356 V2 EN-US (Equation 20)

I = actual measured current

Ip = load current before
overload occurs
Iref = reference load current

Alarm temperature (0-400)°F, (0-200)°C ± 2.0°C

± 2.0°F
Trip temperature (0--600)°F, (0-300)°C ± 2.0°C
± 2.0°F
Reset level temperature (0-600)°F, (0-300)°C ± 2.0°C
± 2.0°F

6.7 Breaker failure protection 3-phase activation and output

CCRBRF (50BF) IP14514-1 v4

6.7.1 Identification
M14878-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Breaker failure protection, 3-phase CCRBRF 50BF
activation and output
3I>BF

SYMBOL-U V1 EN-US

6.7.2 Functionality M11550-6 v13

CCRBRF (50BF) can be current based, contact based, or an adaptive combination of these two
conditions.

Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF, 50BF) ensures fast back-up tripping of surrounding breakers
in case the protected breaker fails to open. CCRBRF (50BF) can be current based, contact based,
or an adaptive combination of these two conditions.

Bay control REC650 127

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

Current check with extremely short reset time is used as check criterion to achieve high security
against inadvertent operation.

Contact check criteria can be used where the fault current through the breaker is small.

Breaker failure protection, 3-phase activation and output (CCRBRF, 50BF) current criteria can be
fulfilled by one or two phase currents the residual current, or one phase current plus residual
current. When those currents exceed the user defined settings, the function is triggered. These
conditions increase the security of the back-up trip command.

CCRBRF (50BF) function can be programmed to give a three-phase re-trip of the protected
breaker to avoid inadvertent tripping of surrounding breakers.

6.7.3 Function block M11944-3 v6

CCRBRF (50BF)
I3P* TRBU
BLOCK TRRET
BFI_3P
52A_A
52A_B
52A_C

ANSI09000272-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000272 V1 EN-US

Figure 52: CCRBRF (50BF) function block

6.7.4 Signals
PID-1160-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 66: CCRBRF (50BF) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BFI_3P BOOLEAN 0 Three phase breaker failure initiation
52a_A BOOLEAN 1 Circuit breaker closed in phase A
52a_B BOOLEAN 1 Circuit breaker closed in phase B
52a_C BOOLEAN 1 Circuit breaker closed in phase C

PID-1160-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 67: CCRBRF (50BF) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRBU BOOLEAN Back-up trip by breaker failure protection function
TRRET BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function

128 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

6.7.5 Settings
PID-1160-SETTINGS v13

Table 68: CCRBRF (50BF) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
FunctionMode Current - - Current Detection principle for back-up trip
Contact
Current&Contact
BuTripMode 2 out of 4 - - 1 out of 3 Back-up trip mode
1 out of 3
1 out of 4
RetripMode Retrip Off - - Retrip Off Operation mode of re-trip logic
CB Pos Check
No CBPos Check
Pickup_PH 5 - 200 %IB 1 10 Phase current pickup in % of IBase
Pickup_N 2 - 200 %IB 1 10 Operate residual current level in % of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of re-trip
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of back-up trip

Table 69: CCRBRF (50BF) Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Pickup_BlkCont 5 - 200 %IB 1 20 Current for blocking of 52a operation in %
of Ibase

Table 70: CCRBRF (50BF) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

6.7.6 Monitored data

PID-1160-MONITOREDDATA v15

Table 71: CCRBRF (50BF) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
I_A REAL - A Measured current in phase A
I_B REAL - A Measured current in phase B
I_C REAL - A Measured current in phase C
IN REAL - A Measured residual current

Bay control REC650 129

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

6.7.7 Operation principle M16914-3 v5.1.1

Breaker failure protection, 3-phase activation and output CCRBRF (50BF) is initiated from
protection trip command, either from protection functions within the IED or from external
protection devices.

The initiate signal is general for all three phases. A re-trip attempt can be made after a set time
delay. The re-trip function can be done with or without CB position check based on current and/or
contact evaluation. With the current check the re-trip is only performed if the current through the
circuit breaker is larger than the operate current level. With contact check the re-trip is only
performed if breaker is indicated as closed.

The initiate signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. This signal will initiate the
back-up trip timer. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is detected by the function, by
detection of either low current through RMS evaluation and a special adapted current algorithm or
by open contact indication. The special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful
breaker opening, that is, fast resetting of the current measurement. If the current and/or contact
detection has not detected breaker opening before the back-up timer has run its time a back-up
trip is initiated.

Further the following possibilities are available:

• In the current detection it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3 where it is
sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out of 4 where it is sufficient to
detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or high residual current and 2 out of 4 where
at least two current (phase current and/or residual current) shall be high for breaker failure
detection.
• The current detection level for the residual current can be set different from the setting of
phase current detection.
• Back-up trip is always made with current or contact check. It is possible to have this option
activated for small load currents only.

30 ms
BFI_3P
BFI_A OR BFP Started A

AND S
SR Q
150ms
R
BLOCK 0
OR AND
Time out A
Reset A Retrip Time Out A
BackupTrip A

ANSI09000976-3-en.vsd
ANSI09000976 V3 EN-US

Figure 53: Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF (50BF) starting logic

130 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

Pickup_PH
a
a>b
b

FunctionMode Current
OR AND Reset A
OR

1 Contact Time out A

Current and Contact OR
AND
Current High A
I_A
BFP Started A AND CB Closed A
OR

a AND AND
a>b OR AND
Pickup_BlKCont b

52a_A Contact Closed A

AND

ANSI09000977-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000977 V2 EN-US

Figure 54: Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF (50BF), CB position evaluation

TRRET_C
From other
BFP Started A 0-t1 Retrip Time Out A
phases TRRET_B OR
TRRET
0
200 ms
RetripMode No CBPos Check AND
OR
OR

1 30 ms
OR

CB Pos Check AND

CB Closed A

ANSI16000502-1-en.vsd
ANSI16000502 V1 EN-US

Figure 55: Simplified logic scheme of the retrip logic function

Bay control REC650 131

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

BUTripMode
1 out of 3
2 out of 4
OR
1 1 out of 4
AND
Current High A

BFP Started A
AND
IN
a
a>b
IN> b

Contact Closed A
OR

Current High B OR
From other Current High C AND Backup Time Out A
phases
Current High A

30 ms
BFP Started A 0-t2 Backup Trip A
0 OR AND
OR

60 s
AND
0

AND
OR OR
200 ms
From other Backup Trip B OR TRBU
OR
phases Backup Trip C
AND

BFP Started B AND OR

From other
phases BFP Started C AND

ANSI16000503-1-en.vsd

ANSI16000503 V1 EN-US

Figure 56: Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip function

Internal logical signals Current High A, Current High B, and Current High C have logical value 1
when current in respective phase has magnitude larger than setting parameter Pickup_PH.

6.7.8 Technical data

M12353-1 v7

Table 72: CCRBRF (50BF) technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate phase current (5-200)% of lBase ± 1.0% of In at I £ In
± 1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio, phase current > 95% -

Operate residual current (2-200)% of lBase ± 1.0% of In at I £ In
± 1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio, residual current > 95% -

Phase current pickup for blocking of (5-200)% of lBase ± 1.0% of In at I £ In
contact function ± 1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio > 95% -

Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ±10 ms
Operate time for current detection 20 ms typically -
Reset time for current detection 10 ms maximum -

132 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

6.8 Stub protection STBPTOC (50STB) IP14515-1 v3

6.8.1 Identification
M17108-1 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Stub protection STBPTOC 50STB

3I>STUB

SYMBOL-T V1 EN-US

6.8.2 Functionality M12902-3 v7

When a power line is taken out of service for maintenance and the line disconnector is opened, line
side voltage transformers will be on the disconnected part of the line. The primary line distance
protection will thus not be able to operate and must be blocked.

The stub protection STBPTOC (50STB) covers the zone between the current transformers and the
open disconnector. The three-phase instantaneous overcurrent function is released from a
normally open, 89b auxiliary contact on the line disconnector.

6.8.3 Function block M12524-3 v5

STBPTOC (50STB)
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK PICKUP
ENABLE

ANSI08000051-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000051 V1 EN-US

Figure 57: STBPTOC (50STB) function block

6.8.4 Signals
PID-1131-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 73: STBPTOC (50STB) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
ENABLE BOOLEAN 0 Enable stub protection usually with open disconnect switch (89b)

PID-1131-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 74: STBPTOC (50STB) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
PICKUP BOOLEAN General pickup signal

Bay control REC650 133

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

6.8.5 Settings
PID-1131-SETTINGS v13

Table 75: STBPTOC (50STB) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
IPickup 1 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Pickup current level in % of IBase

Table 76: STBPTOC (50STB) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

6.8.6 Monitored data

PID-1131-MONITOREDDATA v14

Table 77: STBPTOC (50STB) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
I_A REAL - A Current in phase A
I_B REAL - A Current in phase B
I_C REAL - A Current in phase C

6.8.7 Operation principle M12905-3 v4

The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From
the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each phase
current is derived. These phase current values are fed to a comparator in the stub protection
function STBPTOC (50STB). In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set operating
current value of the function IPickup.

If a phase current is larger than the set operating current the signal from the comparator for this
phase is activated. If the fault current remains during the timer delay t, the TRIP output signal is
activated. The function can be blocked by activation of the BLOCK input.

134 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

STUB PROTECTION FUNCTION

BLOCK

TRIP
PU_A AND

PU_B OR

PU_C

ENABLE

en05000731_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000731 V1 EN-US

Figure 58: Simplified logic diagram for Stub protection (50STB)

6.8.8 Technical data

M12350-1 v8

Table 78: STBPTOC (50STB) technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating current (1-2500)% of IBase ± 1.0% of In at I £ In
± 1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio > 95% -

Operate time 20 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Reset time 30 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

6.9 Pole discrepancy protection CCRPLD (52PD) IP14516-1 v4

6.9.1 Identification
M14888-1 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Pole discrepancy protection CCRPLD 52PD

PD

SYMBOL-S V1 EN-US

Bay control REC650 135

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

6.9.2 Functionality M13269-3 v12

Circuit breakers and disconnectors can end up with their phases in different positions (close-
open), due to electrical or mechanical failures. An open phase can cause negative and zero
sequence currents which cause thermal stress on rotating machines and can cause unwanted
operation of zero sequence or negative sequence current functions.

Normally the affected breaker is tripped to correct such a situation. If the situation warrants the
surrounding breakers should be tripped to clear the unsymmetrical load situation.

The pole discrepancy function operates based on information from the circuit breaker logic with
additional criteria from phase selective current unsymmetry.

6.9.3 Function block M17149-3 v5

CCRPLD (52PD)
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK PICKUP
CLOSECMD
OPENCMD
EXTPDIND

ANSI08000041-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000041 V1 EN-US

Figure 59: CCRPLD (52PD) function block

6.9.4 Signals
PID-1167-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 79: CCRPLD (52PD) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
CLOSECMD BOOLEAN 0 Close command to CB
OPENCMD BOOLEAN 0 Open command to CB
EXTPDIND BOOLEAN 0 Pole discrepancy signal from CB logic

PID-1167-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 80: CCRPLD (52PD) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal to CB
PICKUP BOOLEAN Trip condition TRUE, waiting for time delay

136 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

6.9.5 Settings
PID-1167-SETTINGS v13

Table 81: CCRPLD (52PD) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay between trip condition and trip
signal
ContactSel Disabled - - Disabled Contact function selection
PD signal from CB
CurrentSel Disabled - - Disabled Current function selection
CB oper monitor
Continuous
monitor
CurrUnsymPU 0 - 100 % 1 80 Unsym magn of lowest phase current
compared to the highest.
CurrRelPU 0 - 100 %IB 1 10 Current magnitude for release of the
function in % of IBase

Table 82: CCRPLD (52PD) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

6.9.6 Monitored data

PID-1167-MONITOREDDATA v14

Table 83: CCRPLD (52PD) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IMin REAL - A Lowest phase current
IMax REAL - A Highest phase current

6.9.7 Operation principle

M13273-3 v5
The detection of pole discrepancy can be made in two different ways. If the contact based
function is used an external logic can be made by connecting the auxiliary contacts of the circuit
breaker so that a pole discrepancy is indicated, see figure 60.

Bay control REC650 137

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

C.B.

52a

52a
+
52a

52b

52b poleDiscrepancy Signal from C.B.

52b
ANSI_en05000287.vsd

ANSI05000287 V1 EN-US

Figure 60: Pole discrepancy external detection logic

This binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance of this signal will start
a timer that will give a trip signal after the set time delay.

Pole discrepancy can also be detected by means of phase selective current measurement. The
sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the
fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is
derived. The smallest and the largest phase current are derived. If the smallest phase current is
lower than the setting CurrUnsymPU times the largest phase current the settable trip timer (tTrip)
is started. The tTrip timer gives a trip signal after the set delay. The TRIP signal is a pulse 150 ms
long. The current based pole discrepancy function can be set to be active either continuously or
only directly in connection to breaker open or close command.
M13946-3 v6

BLOCK

PD Signal from CB
AND
EXTPDIND

150 ms
AND 0-Trip TRIP
OR 0

CLOSECMD tTrip+200 ms
OR
OPENCMD

CB oper monitor AND

Unsymmetrical
current detection

ANSI08000014-2-en.vsd
ANSI08000014 V2 EN-US

Figure 61: Simplified block diagram of pole discrepancy function - contact and current
based
The pole discrepancy protection is blocked if the input signal BLOCK is high.

138 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discrepancy protection. It can be
connected to a binary input in the IED in order to receive a block command from external devices
or can be software connected to other internal functions in the IED itself in order to receive a block
command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and
internal function outputs.

If the pole discrepancy protection is enabled, then two different criteria can generate a trip signal
TRIP:

• Pole discrepancy signaling from the circuit breaker.

• Unsymmetrical current detection.

6.9.7.1 Pole discrepancy signaling from circuit breaker M13946-18 v4

If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close (pole discrepancy status),
then the function input EXTPDIND is activated from the pole discrepancy signal in figure 60. After
a settable time tTrip, a 150 ms trip pulse command TRIP is generated by the pole discrepancy
protection.

6.9.7.2 Unsymmetrical current detection M13946-21 v4

Unsymmetrical current indicated if:

• any phase current is lower than CurrUnsymPU of the highest current in the three phases.
• the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelPU of IBase.

If these conditions are true, an unsymmetrical condition is detected. This detection is enabled to
generate a trip after a set time delay tTrip if the detection occurs in the next 200 ms after the
circuit breaker has received a command to open trip or close and if the unbalance persists. The
200 ms limitation is for avoiding unwanted operation during unsymmetrical load conditions.

The pole discrepancy protection is informed that a trip or close command has been given to the
circuit breaker through the inputs CLOSECMD (for closing command information) and OPENCMD
(for opening command information). These inputs can be connected to terminal binary inputs if
the information are generated from the field (that is from auxiliary contacts of the close and open
push buttons) or may be software connected to the outputs of other integrated functions (that is
close command from a control function or a general trip from integrated protections).

6.9.8 Technical data

M13279-1 v6

Table 84: CCRPLD (52PD) technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, current (0-100) % ± 1.0% of In
asymmetry level
Reset ratio >95% -
Time delay (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms

Bay control REC650 139

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

6.10 Broken conductor check BRCPTOC (46) SEMOD171761-1 v3

6.10.1 Identification
SEMOD172362-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC - 46

6.10.2 Functionality SEMOD171805-5 v5

Conventional protection functions can not detect the broken conductor condition. Broken
conductor check BRCPTOC (46) function, consisting of continuous phase selective current
unsymmetrical check on the line where the IED is connected will give alarm or trip at detecting
broken conductors.

6.10.3 Function block SEMOD171906-11 v4

BRCPTOC (46)
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK PICKUP

ANSI09000277-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000277 V1 EN-US

Figure 62: BRCPTOC (46) function block

6.10.4 Signals
PID-1123-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 85: BRCPTOC (46) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

PID-1123-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 86: BRCPTOC (46) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Operate signal of the protection logic
PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup signal of the protection logic

140 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

6.10.5 Settings
PID-1123-SETTINGS v13

Table 87: BRCPTOC (46) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disable / Enable
Enabled
Pickup_ub 50 - 90 %IM 1 50 Unbalance current operation value in
percent of max current
Pickup_PH 5 - 100 %IB 1 20 Minimum phase current for operation of
pickup_ub> in % of Ibase
tOper 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Operate time delay

Table 88: BRCPTOC (46) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

6.10.6 Monitored data

PID-1123-MONITOREDDATA v15

Table 89: BRCPTOC (46) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IUNBAL REAL - - Measured unbalance of phase currents

6.10.7 Operation principle SEMOD171791-5 v4

Broken conductor check (BRCPTOC, 46) detects a broken conductor condition by detecting the
asymmetry between currents in the three phases. The current-measuring elements continuously
measure the three-phase currents.

The current asymmetry signal output PICKUP is set on if:

• The difference in currents between the phase with the lowest current and the phase with the
highest current is greater than set percentage Pickup_ub of the highest phase current
• The lowest phase current is below 50% of the minimum setting value Pickup_PH

The third condition is included to avoid problems in systems involving parallel lines. If a conductor
breaks in one phase on one line, the parallel line will experience an increase in current in the same
phase. This might result in the first two conditions being satisfied. If the unsymmetrical detection
lasts for a period longer than the set time tOper the TRIP output is activated.

The simplified logic diagram of the broken conductor check function is shown in figure 63

BRCPTOC (46) is disabled (blocked) if:

Bay control REC650 141

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

• The IED is in test mode and BRCPTOC (46) has been blocked from the HMI test menu
(Blocked=Yes).
• The input signal BLOCK is high.

The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block
command from external devices, or can be software connected to other internal functions of the
IED itself to receive a block command from internal functions.

The output trip signal TRIP is a three-phase trip. It can be used to command a trip to the circuit
breaker or for alarm purpose only.

TEST

TEST-ACTIVE
AND
Block BRCPTOC=Yes
PICKUP

Function Enable
BLOCK OR

0-t TRIP
AND
Unsymmetrical 0
Current Detection
PU_N

IA<50%Pickup_PH

IB<50%Pickup_PH OR

IC<50%Pickup_PH

ANSI09000158-3-en.vsd
ANSI09000158 V3 EN-US

Figure 63: Simplified logic diagram for Broken conductor check BRCPTOC (46)

6.10.8 Technical data

SEMOD175200-2 v4

Table 90: BRCPTOC (46) technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Minimum phase current for operation (5–100)% of IBase ± 1.0% of In

Unbalance current operation (50-90)% of maximum current ± 2.0% of In

Timer (0.00-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms

Trip time for pickup function 35 ms typically -
Reset time for pickup function 30 ms typically -
Critical impulse time 15 ms typically -
Impulse margin time 10 ms typically -

142 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

6.11 Directional over-/under-power protection GOPPDOP/

GUPPDUP (32/37) GUID-1CC8CF0E-5283-472D-AC4D-46CFD031D458 v1

6.11.1 Functionality SEMOD175421-4 v6

The directional over-/under-power protection GOPPDOP (32)/GUPPDUP (37) can be used wherever
a high/low active, reactive or apparent power protection or alarming is required. The functions
can alternatively be used to check the direction of active or reactive power flow in the power
system. There are a number of applications where such functionality is needed. Some of them are:

• detection of reversed active power flow

• detection of high reactive power flow

Each function has two steps with definite time delay.

6.11.2 Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP (32) SEMOD172360-1 v4

6.11.2.1 Identification
SEMOD176574-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP 32
P>
2
DOCUMENT172362-IMG158942
V2 EN-US

6.11.2.2 Function block SEMOD172667-4 v4

GOPPDOP (32)
I3P* TRIP
V3P* TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLK1 BFI_3P
BLK2 PICKUP1
PICKUP2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT

ANSI08000506-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000506 V1 EN-US

Figure 64: GOPPDOP (32) function block

Bay control REC650 143

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

6.11.2.3 Signals
PID-2725-INPUTSIGNALS v12

Table 91: GOPPDOP (32) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

PID-2725-OUTPUTSIGNALS v12

Table 92: GOPPDOP (32) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from stage 1
TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from stage 2
BFI_3P BOOLEAN General pickup signal
PICKUP1 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from stage 1
PICKUP2 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from stage 2
P REAL Active Power
PPERCENT REAL Active power in % of calculated power base value
Q REAL Reactive power
QPERCENT REAL Reactive power in % of calculated power base value

6.11.2.4 Settings
PID-2725-SETTINGS v12

Table 93: GOPPDOP (32) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disable / Enable
Enabled
OpMode1 Disabled - - OverPower Operation mode 1
OverPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 % 0.1 1.0 Power setting for stage 1 in % of
calculated power base value
Angle1 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for stage 1
TripDelay1 0.010 - 6000.000 s 0.001 1.000 Trip delay for stage 1
OpMode2 Disabled - - OverPower Operation mode 2
OverPower
Table continues on next page

144 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Power2 0.0 - 500.0 % 0.1 1.0 Power setting for stage 2 in % of
calculated power base value
Angle2 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for stage 2
TripDelay2 0.010 - 6000.000 s 0.001 1.000 Trip delay for stage 2

Table 94: GOPPDOP (32) Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
k 0.00 - 0.99 - 0.01 0.00 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, V and I

Table 95: GOPPDOP (32) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Mode A, B, C - - Pos Seq Mode of measurement for current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
AB
BC
CA
A
B
C

6.11.2.5 Monitored data

PID-2725-MONITOREDDATA v12

Table 96: GOPPDOP (32) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
P REAL - MW Active Power
PPERCENT REAL - % Active power in % of calculated power
base value
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power
QPERCENT REAL - % Reactive power in % of calculated power
base value

6.11.3 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP (37) SEMOD156693-1 v4

Bay control REC650 145

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

6.11.3.1 Identification
SEMOD158941-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP 37
P<
2
SYMBOL-LL V2 EN-US

6.11.3.2 Function block SEMOD172623-4 v4

GUPPDUP (37)
I3P* TRIP
V3P* TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLK1 BFI_3P
BLK2 PICKUP1
PICKUP2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT

ANSI08000507-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000507 V1 EN-US

Figure 65: GUPPDUP (37) function block

6.11.3.3 Signals
PID-2724-INPUTSIGNALS v12

Table 97: GUPPDUP (37) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

PID-2724-OUTPUTSIGNALS v12

Table 98: GUPPDUP (37) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from stage 1
TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from stage 2
BFI_3P BOOLEAN General pickup signal
PICKUP1 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from stage 1
Table continues on next page

146 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

Name Type Description

PICKUP2 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from stage 2
P REAL Active Power
PPERCENT REAL Active power in % of calculated power base value
Q REAL Reactive power
QPERCENT REAL Reactive power in % of calculated power base value

6.11.3.4 Settings
PID-2724-SETTINGS v12

Table 99: GUPPDUP (37) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disable / Enable
Enabled
OpMode1 Disabled - - UnderPower Operation mode 1
UnderPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 % 0.1 1.0 Power setting for stage 1 in % of
calculated power base value
Angle1 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for stage 1
TripDelay1 0.010 - 6000.000 s 0.001 1.000 Trip delay for stage 1
OpMode2 Disabled - - UnderPower Operation mode 2
UnderPower
Power2 0.0 - 500.0 % 0.1 1.0 Power setting for stage 2 in % of
calculated power base value
Angle2 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for stage 2
TripDelay2 0.010 - 6000.000 s 0.001 1.000 Trip delay for stage 2

Table 100: GUPPDUP (37) Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TD 0.00 - 0.99 - 0.01 0.00 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, V and I

Table 101: GUPPDUP (37) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Mode A, B, C - - Pos Seq Mode of measurement for current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
AB
BC
CA
A
B
C

Bay control REC650 147

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

6.11.3.5 Monitored data

PID-2724-MONITOREDDATA v12

Table 102: GUPPDUP (37) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
P REAL - MW Active Power
PPERCENT REAL - % Active power in % of calculated power
base value
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power
QPERCENT REAL - % Reactive power in % of calculated power
base value

6.11.4 Operation principle

SEMOD172136-4 v4
A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown in figure 66.
The function has two stages with individual settings.

Chosen current
phasors P

Complex Derivation of S( angle)

S( angle ) < t TRIP1
power S( composant)
Chosen voltage Power1 0
calculation in Char angle
phasors Q
PICKUP1

S( angle ) < t TRIP2

Power2 0
PICKUP2

P = POWRE

Q = POWIM

ANSI06000438-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000438 V2 EN-US

Figure 66: Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function

The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing blocks. The
apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as shown in table 103.

148 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

Table 103: Complex power calculation

Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation
A, B, C
S = V A × I A* + VB × I B* + VC × I C *
EQUATION2055-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 21)
Arone
S = VAB × I A* - VBC × IC *
EQUATION2056-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 22)
PosSeq
S = 3 × VPosSeq × I PosSeq*
EQUATION2057-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 23)
AB
S = VAB × ( I A* - I B* )
EQUATION2058-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 24)
BC
S = VBC × ( I B* - I C * )
EQUATION2059-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 25)
CA
S = VCA × ( I C * - I A* )
EQUATION2060-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 26)
A
S = 3 × VA × I A*
EQUATION2061-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 27)
B
S = 3 × VB × I B*
EQUATION2062-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 28)
C
S = 3 × VC × I C *
EQUATION2063-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 29)

The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for monitoring and
fault recording.

The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is calculated. If this
angle is 0° the active power component P is calculated. If this angle is 90° the reactive power
component Q is calculated.

The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting Power1(2). For
directional underpower protection, a pickup signal PICKUP1(2) is activated if the calculated power
component is smaller than the pick up value. For directional overpower protection, a pickup signal
PICKUP1(2) is activated if the calculated power component is larger than the pick up value. After a
set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the pickup signal is still active. At
activation of any of the two stages a common signal PICKUP will be activated. At trip from any of
the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated.

Bay control REC650 149

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

To avoid instability there is a hysteresis in the power function. The absolute hysteresis for stage
1(2) is 0.5 p.u. for Power1(2) ≥ 1.0 p.u., else the hysteresis is 0.5 Power1(2).

If the measured power drops under the (Power1(2) - hysteresis) value, the over-power function will
reset after 0.06 seconds. If the measured power comes over the (Power1(2) + hysteresis) value, the
under-power function will reset after 0.06 seconds. The reset means that the pickup signal will
drop out and that the timer of the stage will reset.

6.11.4.1 Low pass filtering SEMOD172136-39 v3

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to
introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This will make slower
measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in
accordance with the following recursive formula:

S = TD ⋅ SOld + (1 − TD ) ⋅ SCalculated
EQUATION1959-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 30)

Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

TD is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter TD is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is immediately
given out without any filtering (that is without any additional delay). When TD is set to value
bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for TD=0.92 in case of slow operating
functions.

6.11.5 Technical data

SEMOD175152-2 v6

Table 104: GOPPDOP, GUPPDUP (32/37) technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Power level (0.0–500.0)% of SBase ± 1.0% of Sr at S < Sr
± 1.0% of S at S > Sr

(1.0-2.0)% of SBase < ± 50% of set value

(2.0-10)% of SBase < ± 20% of set value
Characteristic angle (-180.0–180.0) degrees 2 degrees
Timers (0.010 - 6000.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms

150 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

6.12 Negative sequence based overcurrent function DNSPTOC

(46) GUID-66A7DE2F-EBD6-4601-B0F7-2B568968EA33 v1

6.12.1 Identification
GUID-F53558B3-4614-4502-82DD-B7BA07FB2723 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Negative sequence based DNSPTOC 46
overcurrent function
3I2>

IEC09000132 V2 EN-US

6.12.2 Functionality GUID-CFD34404-5934-41EE-8AAC-A5FD2B9B4E33 v5

Negative sequence based overcurrent function DNSPTOC (46) may be used in power line
applications where the reverse zero sequence source is weak or open, the forward source
impedance is strong and it is desired to detect forward ground faults.

Additionally, it is applied in applications on cables, where zero sequence impedance depends on

the fault current return paths, but the cable negative sequence impedance is practically constant.

The directional function is current and voltage polarized. The function can be set to forward,
reverse or non-directional independently for each step. Both steps are provided with a settable
definite time delay.

DNSPTOC (46) protects against all unbalanced faults including phase-to-phase faults. The
minimum pickup current of the function must be set to above the normal system unbalance level
in order to avoid inadvertent tripping.

6.12.3 Function block GUID-E93E47F7-E421-420E-BF4B-E66481BA7454 v2

DNSPTOC (46)
I3P* TRIP
V3P* TROC1
BLOCK TROC2
BLKOC1 BFI_3P
ENMLTOC1 PU_OC1
BLKOC2 PU_OC2
ENMLTOC2 DIROC1
DIROC2
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
VIANGLE

ANSI09000125-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000125 V1 EN-US

Figure 67: DNSPTOC (46) function block

Bay control REC650 151

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

6.12.4 Signals
PID-3444-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 105: DNSPTOC (46) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKOC1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over current function OC1
ENMLTOC1 BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier - step1 (OC1)
BLKOC2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over current function OC2
ENMLTOC2 BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier - step 2 (OC2)

PID-3444-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 106: DNSPTOC (46) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TROC1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1 (OC1)
TROC2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2 (OC2)
START BOOLEAN General pickup signal
STOC1 BOOLEAN OC1_PICK UP
STOC2 BOOLEAN OC2_PICK UP
DIROC1 INTEGER Directional mode of step 1(non-directional, forward, reverse)
DIROC2 INTEGER Directional mode of step 2 (non-directional, forward, reverse)
CURRENT REAL Measured current value
VOLTAGE REAL Measured voltage value
UIANGLE REAL Angle between voltage and current

6.12.5 Settings
PID-3444-SETTINGS v2

Table 107: DNSPTOC (46) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
RCADir -180 - 180 Deg 1 -75 Relay characteristic angle
ROADir 1 - 90 Deg 1 75 Relay operate angle
LowVolt_VM 0.0 - 5.0 %VB 0.1 0.5 Voltage level in % of Vbase below which
ActLowVolt control takes over
Table continues on next page

152 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 6
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Operation_OC1 Disabled - - Disabled Operation DISABLE/ENABLE for step 1
Enabled (OC1)
StartCurr_OC1 2.0 - 200.0 %IB 1.0 10.0 Operate current level in % of IBase for step
1 (OC1)
CurrMult_OC1 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for step
1 (OC1)
tDef_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay for step
1 (OC1)
DirMode_OC1 Non-directional - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (non-
Forward directional, forward, reverse)
Reverse
DirPrinc_OC1 I&V - - I&V Measuring on I & V or IcosPhi & V for step 1
IcosPhi&V (OC1)
ActLowVolt1_VM Non-directional - - Block Low votlage level action for step 1 (Non-
Block directional, Block, Memory)
Operation_OC2 Disabled - - Disabled Operation DISABLE/ENABLE for step 2
Enabled (OC2)
StartCurr_OC2 2.0 - 200.0 %IB 1.0 10.0 Operate current level in % of Ibase for step
2 (OC2)
CurrMult_OC2 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Operate current level in % of Ibase for step
2 (OC2)
tDef_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay for step
2 (OC2)
DirMode_OC2 Non-directional - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 (non-
Forward directional, forward, reverse)
Reverse
DirPrinc_OC2 I&V - - I&V Measuring on I & V or IcosPhi & V for step 2
IcosPhi&V (OC2)
ActLowVolt2_VM Non-directional - - Block Low votlage level action for step 2 (Non-
Block directional, Block, Memory)

Table 108: DNSPTOC (46) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

6.12.6 Monitored data

PID-3444-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 109: DNSPTOC (46) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CURRENT REAL - A Measured current value
VOLTAGE REAL - kV Measured voltage value
UIANGLE REAL - deg Angle between voltage and current

Bay control REC650 153

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 6 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Current protection

6.12.7 Operation principle GUID-919EE194-D9D0-4388-A4A2-1449F86B4F2E v4

Negative sequence based overcurrent function (DNSPTOC, 46) has two settable current levels,
setting parameters PickupCurr_OC1 and PickupCurr_OC2. Both features have definite time
characteristics with settings tDef_OC1 and tDef_OC2 respectively. It is possible to change the
direction of these steps to forward, reverse or non-directional by setting parameters
DirMode_OC1 and DirMode_OC2. At too low polarizing voltage the overcurrent feature can be
either blocked or non-directional. This is controlled by settings ActLowVolt1_VM and
ActLowVolt2_VM.

6.12.8 Technical data

GUID-D69015D7-192B-45DE-A67A-96F582CF09C0 v4

Table 110: DNSPTOC (46) Technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (2.0 - 200.0) % of IBase ± 1.0% of Ir at I <In
± 1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio > 95 % -

Low polarizing voltage level (0.0 - 5.0) % of VBase < ± 0.5% of Vn

Relay characteristic angle (-180 - 180) degrees ± 2.0 degrees

Relay operate angle (1 - 90) degrees ± 2.0 degrees
Timers (0.00 - 6000.00) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
Operate time, non-directional 30 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -
20 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset

Reset time, non-directional 40 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Operate time, directional 30 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

20 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset

Reset time, directional 40 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Dynamic overreach < 10% at t = 300 ms -

154 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 7
Voltage protection

Section 7 Voltage protection

7.1 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27) GUID-2337BCF0-1F7E-461A-9EB8-954E2DD25D74 v1

7.1.1 Identification
M16876-1 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 27

3U<

V2 EN-US
SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER-THAN

7.1.2 Functionality M13789-3 v8

Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions. Two step
undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV, 27) function can be used to open circuit breakers to prepare
for system restoration at power outages or as long-time delayed back-up to primary protection.

UV2PTUV (27) has two voltage steps, where step 1 is settable as inverse or definite time delayed.
Step 2 is always definite time delayed.

UV2PTUV (27) has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.

7.1.3 Function block M13794-3 v5

UV2PTUV (27)
V3P* TRIP
BLOCK TRST1
BLK1 TRST2
BLK2 PICKUP
PU_ST1
PU_ST1_A
PU_ST1_B
PU_ST1_C
PU_ST2

ANSI09000285-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000285 V1 EN-US

Figure 68: UV2PTUV (27) function block

Bay control REC650 155

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 7 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Voltage protection

7.1.4 Signals
PID-2720-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 111: UV2PTUV (27) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

PID-2720-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 112: UV2PTUV (27) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRST1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TRST2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
PICKUP BOOLEAN General pickup signal
PU_ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 1
PU_ST1_A BOOLEAN Pick up signal from step 1 phase A
PU_ST1_B BOOLEAN Pick up signal from step 1 phase B
PU_ST1_C BOOLEAN Pick up signal from step 1 phase C
PU_ST2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 2

7.1.5 Settings
PID-2720-SETTINGS v13

Table 113: UV2PTUV (27) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
OperationStep1 Disabled - - Enabled Enable execution of step 1
Enabled
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step
Inverse curve A 1
Inverse curve B
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required to operate (1
2 out of 3 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1
3 out of 3
Pickup1 1 - 100 %VB 1 70 Voltage start value (DT & IDMT) in % of
VBase for step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definite time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
Table continues on next page

156 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 7
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TD1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
OperationStep2 Disabled - - Enabled Enable execution of step 2
Enabled
OpMode2 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required to operate (1
2 out of 3 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2
3 out of 3
Pickup2 1 - 100 %VB 1 50 Voltage start value (DT & IDMT) in % of
VBase for step 2
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definie time delay of step 2

Table 114: UV2PTUV (27) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
ConnType PhN DFT - - PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT
PhPh RMS

7.1.6 Monitored data

PID-2720-MONITOREDDATA v13

Table 115: UV2PTUV (27) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
V_A REAL - kV Voltage in phase A
V_B REAL - kV Voltage in phase B
V_C REAL - kV Voltage in phase C

7.1.7 Operation principle M15326-3 v6

Two-step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV ,27) is used to detect low power system voltage.
UV2PTUV (27) has two voltage measuring steps with separate time delays. If one, two or three
phase voltages decrease below the set value, a corresponding PICKUP signal is generated.
UV2PTUV (27) can be set to PICKUP/TRIP based on 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 of the
measured voltages, being below the set point. If the voltage remains below the set value for a time
period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. The time
delay characteristic is settable for step 1 and can be either definite or inverse time delayed. Step 2
is always definite time delayed.

UV2PTUV (27) can be set to measure phase-to-ground fundamental value, phase-to-phase

fundamental value, phase-to-ground true RMS value or phase-to-phase true RMS value. The choice
of the measuring is done by the parameter ConnType. The voltage related settings are made in
percent of base voltage which is set in kV phase-to-phase voltage. This means operation for
phase-to-ground voltage under:

Bay control REC650 157

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 7 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Voltage protection

Vpickup < (%) ×VBase(kV )

3
EQUATION1606 V1 EN-US (Equation 31)

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage under:

Vpickup < (%) × VBase(kV)

EQUATION1991-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 32)

When phase-to-ground voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square root of three.

7.1.7.1 Measurement principle M15326-6 v5

Depending on the set ConnType value, UV2PTUV (27) measures phase-to-ground or phase-to-
phase voltages and compare against set values, Pickup1 and Pickup2. The parameters OpMode1
and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the PICKUP outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out
of 3, or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be lower than the corresponding set point to issue
the corresponding PICKUP signal.

To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.

7.1.7.2 Time delay M15326-10 v7

The time delay for step 1 can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time undervoltage (TUV).
Step 2 is always definite time delay (DT). For the inverse time delay two different modes are
available; inverse curve A and inverse curve B.

The type A curve is described as:

TD
t=
Vpickup < -V
Vpickup <
ANSIEQUATION1431 V1 EN-US (Equation 33)

The type B curve is described as:

TD × 480
t= 2.0
+ 0.055
æ Vpickup < -V ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è Vpickup < ø
EQUATION1608 V1 EN-US (Equation 34)

The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The details of the
different inverse time characteristics are shown in section 20.3"Inverse time characteristics".

Figure 69: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration

158 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 7
Voltage protection

Voltage

VL1
VL2
VL3

IDMT Voltage

Time

ANSI12000186-1-en.vsd

Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least the user set
time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by
some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (TUV). If the pickup
condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, the corresponding
pickup output is reset.

7.1.7.3 Blocking M15326-20 v6

It is possible to block Two step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV ,27) partially or completely, by
binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLK1: blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 1
BLK2: blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 2

7.1.7.4 Design M15326-35 v6

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-neutral voltages or the
three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive fourier filters or true RMS filters of input voltage signals
are used. The voltages are individually compared to the set value, and the lowest voltage is used
for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2
out of 3 and 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the PICKUP condition. The design of Two step undervoltage
protection UV2PTUV (27) is schematically shown in Figure 70.

Bay control REC650 159

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 7 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Voltage protection

VA or VAB Comparator PU_ST1_A

V < Pickup1 Phase A
Voltage Phase
Selector PU_ST1_B
VB or VBC Comparator OpMode1 Phase B
V < Pickup1 1 out of 3
2 out of 3 PU_ST1_C
Phase C Pickup
VC or VCA Comparator 3 out of 3
&
V < Pickup1 Trip PU_ST1
OR
Output
PICKUP Logic

Step 1
TRST1
Time integrator TRIP OR
MinVoltSelector or Timer t1

Comparator
V < Pickup2 Phase A
Voltage Phase PU_ST2
Selector OR
Comparator OpMode2 Phase B
V < Pickup2 1 out of 3
2 out of 3
Phase C Pickup
Comparator 3 out of 3
&
V < Pickup2 Trip
Output
PICKUP Logic

Step 2
Timer TRIP TRST2
t2 OR

OR PICKUP

TRIP
OR

ANSI08000016-3-en.vsd
ANSI08000016 V3 EN-US

Figure 70: Schematic design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27)

7.1.8 Technical data

M13290-1 v10

Table 116: UV2PTUV (27) technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, low and high step (1–100)% of VBase ± 0.5% of Vn

Reset ratio <102% -

Inverse time characteristics for low - See table 577
and high step, see table 577
Definite time delay, step 1 (0.00 - 6000.00) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
Table continues on next page

160 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 7
Voltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Definite time delays, step 2 (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ±25 ms
Minimum operate time, inverse (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
characteristics
Operate time, pickup function 30 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.5Vset -

Reset time, pickup function 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset40 ms -

typically at 0.5 to 1.2 xVset

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8 x Vset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

7.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59) GUID-089477DD-5BC6-4DB5-BC0A-523005A57CA0 v1

7.2.1 Identification
M17002-1 v6

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 59

3U>

V2 EN-US
SYMBOL-C-2U-SMALLER-THAN

7.2.2 Functionality M13798-3 v10

Overvoltages may occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as sudden power
loss, tap changer regulating failures, and open line ends on long lines.

Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV, 59) function can be used to detect open line ends,
normally then combined with a directional reactive over-power function to supervise the system
voltage. When triggered, the function will cause an alarm, switch in reactors, or switch out
capacitor banks.

OV2PTOV (59) has two voltage steps, where step 1 can be set as inverse or definite time delayed.
Step 2 is always definite time delayed.

OV2PTOV (59) has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.

Bay control REC650 161

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 7 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Voltage protection

7.2.3 Function block M13803-3 v5

OV2PTOV (59)
V3P* TRIP
BLOCK TRST1
BLK1 TRST2
BLK2 PICKUP
PU_ST1
PU_ST1_A
PU_ST1_B
PU_ST1_C
PU_ST2

ANSI09000278-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000278 V1 EN-US

Figure 71: OV2PTOV function block (59)

7.2.4 Signals
PID-2719-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 117: OV2PTOV (59) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

PID-2719-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 118: OV2PTOV (59) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRST1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TRST2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
PICKUP BOOLEAN General pickup signal
PU_ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 1
PU_ST1_A BOOLEAN Pick up signal from step 1 phase A
PU_ST1_B BOOLEAN Pick up signal from step 1 phase B
PU_ST1_C BOOLEAN Pick up signal from step 1 phase C
PU_ST2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 2

162 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 7
Voltage protection

7.2.5 Settings
PID-2719-SETTINGS v13

Table 119: OV2PTOV (59) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
OperationStep1 Disabled - - Enabled Enable execution of step 1
Enabled
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step
Inverse curve A 1
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required to operate (1
2 out of 3 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1
3 out of 3
Pickup1 1 - 200 %VB 1 120 Voltage start value (DT & IDMT) in % of
VBase for step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definite time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
TD1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
OperationStep2 Disabled - - Enabled Enable execution of step 2
Enabled
OpMode2 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required to operate (1
2 out of 3 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2
3 out of 3
Pickup2 1 - 200 %VB 1 150 Voltage start value (DT & IDMT) in % of
VBase for step 2
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definite time delay of step 2

Table 120: OV2PTOV (59) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
ConnType PhN DFT - - PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT
PhPh RMS

Bay control REC650 163

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 7 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Voltage protection

7.2.6 Monitored data

PID-2719-MONITOREDDATA v13

Table 121: OV2PTOV (59) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
V_A REAL - kV Voltage in phase A
V_B REAL - kV Voltage in phase B
V_C REAL - kV Voltage in phase C

7.2.7 Operation principle M15330-3 v6

Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59) is used to detect high power system voltage.
OV2PTOV (59) has two steps with separate time delays. If one-, two- or three-phase voltages
increase above the set value, a corresponding PICKUP signal is issued. OV2PTOV (59) can be set to
PICKUP/TRIP, based on 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 of the measured voltages, being above
the set point. If the voltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the
chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued.

The time delay characteristic is settable for step 1 and can be either definite or inverse time
delayed. Step 2 is always definite time delayed.

The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global set base voltage VBase, which is set
in kV, phase-to-phase.

OV2PTOV (59) can be set to measure phase-to-ground fundamental value, phase-to-phase

fundamental value, phase-to-ground RMS value or phase-to-phase RMS value. The choice of
measuring is done by the parameter ConnType.

The voltage related settings are made in percent of base voltage which is set in kV phase-to-phase
voltage. OV2PTOV (59) will operate if the voltage gets higher than the set percentage of the set
global base voltage VBase. This means operation for phase-to-ground voltage over:

Vpickup > (%) ⋅ VBase(kV ) / 3

EQUATION1610 V2 EN-US (Equation 35)

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage over:

Vpickup > (%) × VBase(kV)

EQUATION1992 V1 EN-US (Equation 36)

When phase-to-ground voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square root of three.

7.2.7.1 Measurement principle M15330-6 v5

All the three voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set values, Pickup1 for
Step 1 and Pickup2 for Step 2. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements

164 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 7
Voltage protection

to activate the PICKUP outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to
be higher than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding PICKUP signal.

To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis is included.

7.2.7.2 Time delay M15330-10 v7

The time delay for step 1 can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time overvoltage (TOV).
Step 2 is always definite time delay (DT). For the inverse time delay three different modes are
available:

• inverse curve A
• inverse curve B
• inverse curve C

The type A curve is described as:

TD
t=
V − Vpickup >
Vpickup >
EQUATION1625 V2 EN-US (Equation 37)

The type B curve is described as:

TD ⋅ 480
t= − 0.035
V − Vpickup >
32 ⋅ − 0.5
Vpickup >
ANSIEQUATION2287 V2 EN-US (Equation 38)

The type C curve is described as:

TD ⋅ 480
t= + 0.035
V − Vpickup >
32 ⋅ − 0.5
Vpickup >
ANSIEQUATION2288 V2 EN-US (Equation 39)

The highest phase (or phase-to-phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time delay
integration, see Figure 72. The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in
section "Inverse time characteristics".

Bay control REC650 165

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 7 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Voltage protection

Voltage
IDMT Voltage

VA
VB
VC

Time

ANSI05000016-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000016 V2 EN-US

Figure 72: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration
A TRIP requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at least the user set time delay. This
time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by selected voltage
level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (TOV). If the PICKUP condition, with respect
to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, the corresponding PICKUP output is reset.

7.2.7.3 Blocking M15330-20 v6

It is possible to block two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV ,59) partially or completely, by
binary input signals where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLK1: blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 1
BLK2: blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 2

7.2.7.4 Design M15330-34 v6

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-ground voltages or the
three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive Fourier filters or true RMS filters of input voltage signals
are used. The phase voltages are individually compared to the set value, and the highest voltage is
used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out
of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the PICKUP condition. The design of Two step
overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV, 59) is schematically described in Figure 73.

166 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 7
Voltage protection

VA or VAB Comparator PU_ST1_A

V > Pickup1 Phase A
Voltage Phase
Selector PU_ST1_B
VB or VBC Comparator OpMode1 Phase B
V > Pickup1 1 out of 3
2 outof 3 PU_ST1_C
3 out of 3 Phase C Pickup
VC or VCA Comparator &
V > Pickup1 Trip PU_ST1
OR
Output
PICKUP Logic

Step 1

Time integrator TRST1

TRIP OR
MaxVoltSelector
or Timer t1

Comparator
V > Pickup2 Phase A
Voltage Phase
Selector
Comparator OpMode2 Phase B PU_ST2
OR
V > Pickup2 1 out of 3
2 outof 3
Phase C Pickup
3 out of 3
Comparator &
V > Pickup2 Trip
Output
PICKUP Logic

Step 2

Timer TRIP TRST2

OR
t2

PICKUP
OR

TRIP
OR

ANSI08000012-3-en.vsd
ANSI08000012 V3 EN-US

Figure 73: Schematic design of Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV, 59)

7.2.8 Technical data

M13304-1 v8

Table 122: OV2PTOV (59) technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, step 1 and 2 (1-200)% of VBase ± 0.5% of Vn at V < Vn
± 0.5% of V at V > Vn

Reset ratio >98% -

Inverse time characteristics for steps 1 - See table 576
and 2, see table ""
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 167

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 7 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Voltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Definite time delay, step 1 (0.00 - 6000.00) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
Definite time delays, step 2 (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
Minimum operate time, Inverse (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
characteristics
Operate time, pickup function 30 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset -

Reset time, pickup function 40 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset -

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

7.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV

(59N) IP14546-1 v4

7.3.1 Identification
SEMOD54295-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Two step residual overvoltage ROV2PTOV 59N
protection
3U0>

IEC10000168 V1 EN-US

7.3.2 Functionality M13808-3 v8

Residual voltages may occur in the power system during ground faults.

Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N) function calculates the residual voltage
from the three-phase voltage input transformers or measures it from a single voltage input
transformer fed from a broken delta or neutral point voltage transformer.

ROV2PTOV (59N) has two voltage steps, where step 1 can be set as inverse or definite time
delayed. Step 2 is always definite time delayed.

7.3.3 Function block M13812-3 v5

ROV2PTOV (59N)
V3P* TRIP
BLOCK TRST1
BLK1 TRST2
BLK2 PICKUP
PU_ST1
PU_ST2

ANSI09000273_1_en.vsd
ANSI09000273 V1 EN-US

Figure 74: ROV2PTOV (59N) function block

168 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 7
Voltage protection

7.3.4 Signals
PID-2718-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 123: ROV2PTOV (59N) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

PID-2718-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 124: ROV2PTOV (59N) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRST1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TRST2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
PICKUP BOOLEAN General pickup signal
PU_ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 1
PU_ST2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 2

7.3.5 Settings
PID-2718-SETTINGS v13

Table 125: ROV2PTOV (59N) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
OperationStep1 Disabled - - Enabled Enable execution of step 1
Enabled
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step
Inverse curve A 1
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Pickup1 1 - 200 %VB 1 30 Voltage start value (DT & IDMT) in % of
VBase for step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definite time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
TD1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 169

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 7 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OperationStep2 Disabled - - Enabled Enable execution of step 2
Enabled
Pickup2 1 - 100 %VB 1 45 Voltage start value (DT & IDMT) in % of
VBase for step 2
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definite time delay of step 2

Table 126: ROV2PTOV (59N) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.3.6 Monitored data

PID-2718-MONITOREDDATA v13

Table 127: ROV2PTOV (59N) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VLevel REAL - kV Magnitude of measured voltage

7.3.7 Operation principle M15331-3 v5

Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N) is used to detect ground (zero
sequence) overvoltages. The ground overvoltage 3V0 is normally computed by adding the input
phase voltages. 3V0 may also be input single phase by either measuring directly from a voltage
transformer in the neutral of a power transformer, or from a secondary broken delta connection of
a transformer with a wye-grounded primary. ROV2PTOV (59N) has two steps with separate time
delays. If the ground overvoltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to
the chosen time delay, the corresponding TRIP signal is issued.

The time delay characteristic is setable for step 1 and can be either definite or inverse time
delayed. Step 2 is always definite time delayed.

The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global phase-to-phase base voltage
divided by √3.

7.3.7.1 Measurement principle M15331-6 v4

The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values, Pickup1 and
Pickup2.

To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.

170 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 7
Voltage protection

7.3.7.2 Time delay M15331-10 v7

7.3.7.3 Blocking M15331-18 v5

It is possible to block two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV, 59N) partially or
completely, by binary input signals where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLK1: blocks all pickupand trip outputs related to step 1
BLK2: blocks all pickup and trip inputs related to step 2

7.3.7.4 Design M15331-32 v5

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage. Recursive Fourier
filters filter the input voltage signal. The single input voltage is compared to the set value, and is
also used for the inverse time characteristic integration. The design of Two step residual
overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV, 59N) is schematically described in Figure 75.

VN Comparator Phase 1 PU_ST1

VN > Pickup1
TRST1
PICKUP Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Time integrator Logic
TRIP
or Timer t1
Step 1

PU_ST2
Comparator Phase 1
VN > Pickup2 TRST2

Pickup
PICKUP &
Trip PICKUP
OR
Output
Logic
Timer TRIP
t2
Step 2
TRIP
OR

ANSI08000013-2-en.vsd
ANSI08000013 V2 EN-US

Figure 75: Schematic design of Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV, 59N)

Bay control REC650 171

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 7 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Voltage protection

The design of Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV, 59N) is

schematically described in Figure 75. VN is a signal included in the three phase
group signal V3P which shall be connected to output AI3P of the SMAI. If a
connection is made to the 4 input GRPx_N (x is equal to instance number 2 to 12) on
the SMAI, VN is this signal else VN is the vectorial sum of the three inputs GRPx_A
to GRPx_C.

7.3.8 Technical data

M13317-2 v9

Table 128: ROV2PTOV (59N) technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, step 1 (1-200)% of VBase ± 0.5% of Vn at V < Vn
± 0.5% of V at V > Vn

Operate voltage, step 2 (1–100)% of VBase ± 0.5% of Vn at V < Vn

± 0.5% of V at V > Vn

Reset ratio > 98% -

Inverse time characteristics for low - See table 578
and high step, see table 578
Definite time setting, step 1 (0.00–6000.00) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
Definite time setting, step 2 (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
Minimum operate time for step 1 (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
inverse characteristic
Operate time, pickup function 30 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset -

Reset time, pickup function 40 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset -

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 1.2 xVset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

7.4 Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27) SEMOD171453-1 v3

7.4.1 Identification
SEMOD171954-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV - 27

7.4.2 Functionality SEMOD171457-5 v5

Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27) is suitable for use in networks with an automatic system
restoration function. LOVPTUV (27) issues a three-pole trip command to the circuit breaker, if all
three phase voltages fall below the set value for a time longer than the set time and the circuit
breaker remains closed.

172 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 7
Voltage protection

The operation of LOVPTUV (27) is supervised by the fuse failure supervision SDDRFUF.

7.4.3 Function block SEMOD171785-4 v4

LOVPTUV (27)
V3P* TRIP
BLOCK PICKUP
CBOPEN
BLKV

ANSI09000279-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000279 V1 EN-US

Figure 76: LOVPTUV (27) function block

7.4.4 Signals
PID-1162-INPUTSIGNALS v14

Table 129: LOVPTUV (27) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker open
BLKV BOOLEAN 0 Block from voltage circuit supervision

PID-1162-OUTPUTSIGNALS v14

Table 130: LOVPTUV (27) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal
PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup signal

7.4.5 Settings
PID-1162-SETTINGS v14

Table 131: LOVPTUV (27) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Enable/Disable
Enabled
VPG 1 - 100 %VB 1 70 Operate voltage in% of base voltage
Ubase
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 7.000 Operate time delay

Bay control REC650 173

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 7 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Voltage protection

Table 132: LOVPTUV (27) Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tPulse 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Duration of TRIP pulse
tBlock 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to block when all 3ph voltages
are not low
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay for enable the function after
restoration

Table 133: LOVPTUV (27) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.4.6 Operation principle SEMOD171765-4 v5

The operation of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27) is based on line voltage measurement.
LOVPTUV (27) is provided with a logic, which automatically recognizes if the line was restored for
at least tRestore before starting the tTrip timer. All three phases are required to be low before the
output TRIP is activated. The PICKUP output signal indicates pickup.

Additionally, LOVPTUV (27) is automatically blocked if only one or two phase voltages have been
detected low for more than tBlock.

LOVPTUV (27) operates again only if the line has been restored to full voltage for at least tRestore.
Operation of the function is also inhibited by fuse failure and open circuit breaker information
signals, by their connection to dedicated inputs of the function block.

Due to undervoltage conditions being continuous the trip pulse is limited to a length set by
setting tPulse.

The operation of LOVPTUV (27) is supervised by the fuse-failure function (BLKV input) and the
information about the open position (CBOPEN) of the associated circuit breaker.

The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block
command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the
IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. LOVPTUV (27) is also
blocked when the IED is in test mode and LOVPTUV (27) has been blocked from the HMI test menu
(Blocked = Yes).

174 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 7
Voltage protection

LOSS OF VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION

TEST

TEST-ACTIVE
&
BlockLOV = Yes

START
BLOCK >1
Function Enable tTrip tPulse TRIP
STUL1N & t

STUL2N &
only 1 or 2 phases are low for
Latched at least 10 s (not three)
STUL3N Enable
&

tBlock
>1 t

CBOPEN Reset Enable

>1
&
BLKU
tRestore
>1 Set Enable
t
>1
Line restored for
at least 3 s

ANSI08000011=3=e
n=Original[1].vsd

ANSI08000011 V3 EN-US

Figure 77: Simplified diagram of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27)

7.4.7 Technical data

SEMOD175210-2 v4

Table 134: LOVPTUV (27) technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage (0–100)% of VBase ± 0.5% of Vn

Reset ratio <105% -

Pulse timer (0.050–60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
Timers (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms

Bay control REC650 175

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
176
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 8
Frequency protection

Section 8 Frequency protection

8.1 Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) IP15746-1 v3

8.1.1 Identification
M14865-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF 81

f<

SYMBOL-P V1 EN-US

8.1.2 Functionality M13349-3 v9

Underfrequency occurs as a result of a lack of sufficient generation in the network.

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) measures frequency with high accuracy, and is used for
load shedding systems, remedial action schemes, gas turbine startup and so on. Separate definite
time delays are provided for operate and restore.

SAPTUF (81) is provided with undervoltage blocking.

8.1.3 Function block M13352-3 v5

SAPTUF (81)
V3P* TRIP
BLOCK PICKUP
RESTORE
BLKDMAGN

ANSI09000282-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000282 V1 EN-US

Figure 78: SAPTUF (81) function block

8.1.4 Signals
PID-1969-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 135: SAPTUF (81) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Bay control REC650 177

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 8 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Frequency protection

PID-1969-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 136: SAPTUF (81) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
PICKUP BOOLEAN General pickup signal
RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Measurement blocked due to low voltage amplitude

8.1.5 Settings
PID-1969-SETTINGS v13

Table 137: SAPTUF (81) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
PUFrequency 35.00 - 75.00 Hz 0.01 48.80 Frequency set value
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate time delay
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Restore time delay
RestoreFreq 45.00 - 65.00 Hz 0.01 49.90 Restore frequency if frequency is above
frequency value

8.1.6 Monitored data

PID-1969-MONITOREDDATA v15

Table 138: SAPTUF (81) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
FREQ REAL - Hz Measured frequency

8.1.7 Operation principle M13354-3 v6

The underfrequency protection (SAPTUF, 81) function is used to detect low power system
frequency. If the frequency remains below the set value for a time period greater than the set time
delay the TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency
measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available
from the preprocessing function, that is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage in the
preprocessing function, the function is blocked and no PICKUP or TRIP signal is issued.

8.1.7.1 Measurement principle M13354-6 v6

The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive sequence
voltage and compares it to the setting PUFrequency. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid
transients due to switchings and faults in the power system. If the voltage magnitude decreases
below the setting MinValFreqMeas in the SMAI preprocessing function, which is described in the
Basic IED Functions chapter and is set as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter,

178 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 8
Frequency protection

SAPTUF (81) gets blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in
percent of the setting of the global parameter VBase.

To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.

BLOCK

BLOCK BLKDMAGN
OR
freqNotValid

Pickup
& PICKUP
DefiniteTimeDelay PICKUP
Frequency Comparator Trip
f < PUFrequency Output
TimeDlyOperate TRIP Logic

TRIP

100 ms

Comparator RESTORE
TimeDlyRestore
f > RestoreFreq

ANSI09000034-1-en.vsd

ANSI09000034 V1 EN-US

Figure 79: Simplified logic diagram for SAPTUF (81)

8.1.7.2 Time delay M13354-10 v5.1.1

The time delay for SAPTUF (81) is a settable definite time delay, specified by the setting tDelay.

Trip signal issuing requires that the under frequency condition continues for at least the user set
time delay. If the PICKUP ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a defined
reset time, the PICKUP output is reset.

When the measured frequency returns to the level corresponding to the setting RestoreFreq, a
100ms pulse is given on the output RESTORE after a settable time delay (tRestore).

8.1.7.3 Blocking M13354-50 v5

It is possible to block underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) completely, by binary input signal:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of MinValFreqMeas in the preprocessing
function both the PICKUP and the TRIP outputs are blocked.

Bay control REC650 179

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 8 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Frequency protection

8.1.7.4 Design M13354-63 v7

The design of underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) is schematically described in figure 80.

Figure 80: Simplified logic diagram for SAPTUF (81)

8.1.8 Technical data

M13360-1 v9.1.1

Table 139: SAPTUF (81) Technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, pickup function (35.00-75.00) Hz ± 2.0 mHz at
symmetrical three-
phase voltage
Operate value, restore frequency (45 - 65) Hz ± 2.0 mHz
Reset ratio <1.001 -
Operate time, pickup function At 50 Hz: 200 ms typically at fset +0.5 Hz -
to fset -0.5 Hz
At 60 Hz: 170 ms typically at fset +0.5 Hz to
fset -0.5 Hz

Reset time, pickup function At 50 Hz: 60 ms typically at fset -0.5 Hz to -

fset +0.5 Hz
At 60 Hz: 50 ms typically at fset -0.5 Hz to
fset +0.5 Hz

Operate time delay (0.000-60.000)s <250 ms

Restore time delay (0.000-60.000)s <150 ms

8.2 Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) IP15747-1 v3

8.2.1 Identification
M14866-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF 81

f>

SYMBOL-O V1 EN-US

8.2.2 Functionality M14953-3 v9

Overfrequency protection function SAPTOF (81) is applicable in all situations, where reliable
detection of high fundamental power system frequency is needed.

180 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 8
Frequency protection

Overfrequency occurs because of sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power network. Close
to the generating plant, generator governor problems can also cause over frequency.

SAPTOF (81) measures frequency with high accuracy, and is used mainly for generation shedding
and remedial action schemes. It is also used as a frequency stage initiating load restoring. A
definite time delay is provided for operate.

SAPTOF (81) is provided with an undervoltage blocking.

8.2.3 Function block M14956-3 v5

SAPTOF (81)
V3P* TRIP
BLOCK BFI
BLKDMAGN

ANSI09000280-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000280 V1 EN-US

Figure 81: SAPTOF (81) function block

8.2.4 Signals
PID-1968-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 140: SAPTOF (81) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

PID-1968-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 141: SAPTOF (81) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
BFI BOOLEAN General pickup signal
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Measurement blocked due to low amplitude

8.2.5 Settings
PID-1968-SETTINGS v13

Table 142: SAPTOF (81) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disable / Enable
Enabled
PUFrequency 35.00 - 75.00 Hz 0.01 51.20 Frequency set value
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate time delay

Bay control REC650 181

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 8 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Frequency protection

8.2.6 Monitored data

PID-1968-MONITOREDDATA v15

Table 143: SAPTOF (81) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
FREQ REAL - Hz Measured frequency

8.2.7 Operation principle M14958-3 v5

Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) is used to detect high power system frequency. SAPTOF
(81) has a settable definite time delay. If the frequency remains above the set value for a time
period greater than the set time delay the TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted TRIP due to
uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the
function is available from the preprocessing function, that is, if the voltage is lower than the set
blocking voltage in the preprocessing function, the function is blocked and no PICKUP or TRIP
signal is issued.

8.2.7.1 Measurement principle M14958-6 v7

The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive sequence
voltage and compares it to the setting PUFrequency. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid
transients due to switchings and faults in the power system. If the voltage magnitude decreases
below the setting MinValFreqMeas in the SMAI preprocessing function, which is discussed in the
Basic IED Functions chapter and is set as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter VBase,
SAPTOF (81) is blocked and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in
percent of the global parameter VBase. To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a
hysteresis has been included.

BLOCK

BLOCK
OR BLKDMAGN
freqNotValid

Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PICKUP PICKUP
Definite Time Delay
Frequency Comparator
f > PUFrequency
TimeDlyOperate
TRIP

TRIP

ANSI09000033-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000033 V1 EN-US

Figure 82: Schematic design of overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81)

182 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 8
Frequency protection

8.2.7.2 Time delay M14958-9 v5

The time delay for SAPTOF (81) is a settable definite time delay, specified by the setting tDelay.

If the PICKUP condition frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a
defined reset time, the PICKUP output is reset.

8.2.7.3 Blocking M14958-13 v5

It is possible to block Over frequency protection (SAPTOF, 81) completely, by binary input signals
or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of MinValFreqMeas in the preprocessing
function both the PICKUP and the TRIP outputs are blocked.

8.2.7.4 Design M14958-24 v7

The design of overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) is schematically described in figure 83.

BLOCK
BLKTRIP BLOCK
OR BLKDMAGN
Comparator
V < IntBlockLevel

Pickup
&
Trip
Voltage Time integrator Output
Logic
Definite Time Delay PICKUP PICKUP
Frequency Comparator
f > PuFrequency TimeDlyOperate
TRIP
TimeDlyReset
TRIP

en05000735_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000735 V1 EN-US

Figure 83: Schematic design of overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81)

Bay control REC650 183

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 8 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Frequency protection

8.2.8 Technical data

M14964-1 v9

Table 144: SAPTOF (81) technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, pickup function (35.00-75.00) Hz ± 2.0 mHz at
symmetrical three-
phase voltage
Reset ratio >0.999 -
Operate time, pickup function At 50 Hz: 200 ms typically at fset -0.5 Hz to -
fset +0.5 Hz
At 60 Hz: 170 ms typically at fset -0.5 Hz to
fset +0.5 Hz

Reset time, pickup function At 50 and 60 Hz: 55 ms typically at fset -

+0.5 Hz to fset-0.5 Hz

Timer (0.000-60.000)s <250 ms

8.3 Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81) IP15748-1 v3

8.3.1 Identification
M14868-1 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC 81

df/dt >
<

SYMBOL-N V1 EN-US

8.3.2 Functionality M14965-3 v10

The rate-of-change frequency protection function SAPFRC (81) gives an early indication of a main
disturbance in the system. SAPFRC (81) measures frequency with high accuracy, and can be used
for generation shedding, load shedding and remedial action schemes. SAPFRC (81) can
discriminate between a positive or negative change of frequency. A definite time delay is provided
for operate.

SAPFRC (81) is provided with an undervoltage blocking.

184 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 8
Frequency protection

8.3.3 Function block M14968-3 v6

SAPFRC (81)
V3P* TRIP
BLOCK PICKUP
RESTORE
BLKDMAGN

ANSI09000281-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000281 V1 EN-US

Figure 84: SAPFRC (81) function block

8.3.4 Signals
PID-1962-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 145: SAPFRC (81) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

PID-1962-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 146: SAPFRC (81) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Operate/trip signal for frequency gradient
PICKUP BOOLEAN Start/pick-up signal for frequency gradient
RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Blocking indication due to low magnitude

8.3.5 Settings
PID-1962-SETTINGS v13

Table 147: SAPFRC (81) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
PUFreqGrad -10.00 - 10.00 Hz/s 0.01 0.50 Frequency gradient pick up value, the sign
defines direction
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate time delay in positive / negative
frequency gradient mode
RestoreFreq 45.00 - 65.00 Hz 0.01 49.90 Restore is enabled if frequency is above
set frequency value
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Restore time delay

Bay control REC650 185

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 8 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Frequency protection

8.3.6 Operation principle M14970-3 v6

Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81) is used to detect fast power system frequency
changes at an early stage. It (81) has a settable definite time delay.To avoid an unwanted trip due
to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of
the function is available from the preprocessing function that is, if the voltage is lower than the
set blocking voltage in the preprocessing function, the function is blocked and no PICKUP or TRIP
signal is issued. If the frequency recovers, after a frequency decrease, a restore signal is issued.

8.3.6.1 Measurement principle M14970-6 v6

The rate-of-change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is measured

continuously, and compared with the set valuePUFreqGrad. If the voltage magnitude decreases
below the setting MinValFreqMeas in the preprocessing function, which is set as a percentage of a
global base voltage parameter, SAPFRC (81) is blocked and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. The
sign of the setting PUFreqGrad, controls if SAPFRC (81) reacts on a positive or on a negative
change in frequency. If SAPFRC (81) is used for decreasing frequency that is, the setting
PUFreqGrad has been given a negative value, and a trip signal has been issued, a 100 ms pulse is
issued on the RESTORE output, when the frequency recovers to a value higher than the setting
RestoreFreq. A positive setting of PUFreqGrad, sets SAPFRC (81) to PICKUP and TRIP for frequency
increases.

To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.

8.3.6.2 Time delay M14970-10 v6

SAPFRC (81) has a settable definite time delay, tTrip.

Trip signal issuing requires that SAPFRC (81) condition continues for at least the user set time
delay, tTrip. If the PICKUP condition, ceases during the delay time and is not fulfilled again within a
defined reset time, the PICKUP output is reset after the reset time has elapsed.

After an issue of the TRIP output signal, the RESTORE output of SAPFRC (81) is set after a time
delay (tRestore), when the measured frequency has returned to the level corresponding to
RestoreFreq. If tRestore is set to 0.000 s the restore functionality is disabled, and no output will
be given. The restore functionality is only active for lowering frequency conditions and the restore
sequence is disabled if a new negative frequency gradient is detected during the restore period.

186 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 8
Frequency protection

8.3.6.3 Design M14970-34 v5

BLOCK

BLOCK
OR

freqNotValid BLKDMAGN

Pickup
Rate-of-Change &
Comparator
of Frequency Trip
If
Output PICKUP
[PUFreqGrad<0 PICKUP Definite Time Delay Logic
AND
df/dt < PUFreqGrad] tTrip
OR
[PUFreqGrad>0
AND
TRIP
df/dt > PUFreqGrad]
Then
PICKUP
100 ms

Frequency Comparator RESTORE

tRestore
f > RestoreFreq

ANSI08000009_en_1.vsd

ANSI08000009 V1 EN-US

Figure 85: Schematic design of Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81)

8.3.7 Technical data

M14976-1 v5

Table 148: SAPFRC (81) technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, pickup function (-10.00-10.00) Hz/s ± 10.0 mHz/s
Operate value, restore enable frequency (45.00 - 65.00) Hz ± 2.0 mHz
Timers (0.000 - 60.000) s <130 ms
Operate time, pickup function At 50 Hz: 100 ms typically -
At 60 Hz: 80 ms typically

Bay control REC650 187

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
188
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 9
Secondary system supervision

Section 9 Secondary system supervision

9.1 Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF (87) IP14555-1 v3

9.1.1 Identification
M14870-1 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF - 87

9.1.2 Functionality M12444-3 v7

Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of many
protection functions such as differential, ground-fault current and negative-sequence current
functions.

It must be remembered that a blocking of protection functions at an occurrence of open CT circuit

will mean that the situation will remain and extremely high voltages will stress the secondary
circuit.

Current circuit supervision (CCSRDIF, 87) compares the residual current from a three phase set of
current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input taken from another
set of cores on the current transformer.

A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to block
protection functions expected to give inadvertent tripping.

9.1.3 Function block M12436-3 v5

CCSRDIF (87)
I3P* FAIL
BLOCK ALARM
IREF

ANSI08000055-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000055 V1 EN-US

Figure 86: CCSRDIF (87) function block

Bay control REC650 189

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 9 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Secondary system supervision

9.1.4 Signals
PID-1124-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 149: CCSRDIF (87) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
IREF GROUP - Group signal for current reference
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

PID-1124-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 150: CCSRDIF (87) Output signals

Name Type Description
FAIL BOOLEAN Detection of current circuit failure
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for current circuit failure

9.1.5 Settings
PID-1124-SETTINGS v13

Table 151: CCSRDIF (87) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
IMinOp 5 - 200 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate current differential
pickup in % of IBase

Table 152: CCSRDIF (87) Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Pickup_Block 5 - 500 %IB 1 150 Block of the function at high phase
current, in % of IBase

Table 153: CCSRDIF (87) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

9.1.6 Operation principle M12396-5 v5

Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF (87) compares the absolute value of the vectorial sum of the
three phase currents |ΣIphase| and the numerical value of the residual current |Iref| from another
current transformer set, see figure 87.

190 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 9
Secondary system supervision

The FAIL output will be set to a logical one when the following criteria are fulfilled:

• The numerical value of the difference |ΣIphase| – |Iref| is higher than 80% of the numerical
value of the sum |ΣIphase| + |Iref|.
• The numerical value of the current |ΣIphase| – |Iref| is equal to or higher than the set operate
value IMinOp.
• No phase current has exceeded Pickup_Block during the last 10 ms.
• CCSRDIF (87) is enabled by setting Operation = Enabled.

The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being activated for
more than 20 ms. If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms an ALARM will be issued. In this case the
FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the AND-gate resets. This prevents unwanted
resetting of the blocking function when phase current supervision element(s) operate, for
example, during a fault.

I>Pickup_Block
BLOCK
IA IA I>IMinOp
IB IB +å
IC IC å -
+å +å
I ref Iref x
+ -
0,8
1,5 x Ir
AND OR FAIL
OR 10 ms
0
20-100 ms
0
150 ms-1 s ALARM
OPERATION
0
BLOCK

ANSI11000291-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000291 V1 EN-US

Figure 87: Simplified logic diagram for Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF (87)
The operate characteristic is percentage restrained, see figure 88.

Bay control REC650 191

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 9 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Secondary system supervision

| åI phase | - | I ref |

Slope = 1

Operation
Slope = 0.8
area
I MinOp

| åI phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd
IEC99000068 V1 EN-US

Figure 88: Operate characteristics

Due to the formulas for the axis compared, |SIphase | - |I ref | and |S I phase | + | I ref
| respectively, the slope can not be above 2.

9.1.7 Technical data

M12358-1 v4

Table 154: CCSRDIF (87) technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (5-200)% of In ± 10.0% of In at I £ In
± 10.0% of I at I > In

Block current (5-500)% of In ± 5.0% of In at I £ In

± 5.0% of I at I > In

9.2 Fuse failure supervision SDDRFUF

9.2.1 Identification
M14869-1 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Fuse failure supervision SDDRFUF - -

192 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 9
Secondary system supervision

9.2.2 Functionality SEMOD113820-4 v8

The aim of the fuse failure supervision function SDDRFUF is to block voltage measuring functions
at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage transformer and the IED in order to avoid
inadvertent operations that otherwise might occur.

The fuse failure supervision function basically has three different detection methods, negative
sequence and zero sequence based detection and an additional delta voltage and delta current
detection.

The negative sequence detection is recommended for IEDs used in isolated or high-impedance
grounded networks. It is based on the negative-sequence measuring quantities, a high value of
negative sequence voltage 3V2 without the presence of the negative-sequence current 3I2.

The zero sequence detection is recommended for IEDs used in directly or low impedance
grounded networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities, a high value of zero
sequence voltage 3V0 without the presence of the zero sequence current 3I0.

For better adaptation to system requirements, an operation mode setting has been introduced
which makes it possible to select the operating conditions for negative sequence and zero
sequence based function. The selection of different operation modes makes it possible to choose
different interaction possibilities between the negative sequence and zero sequence based
detection.

A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the fuse
failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which in practice is more
associated with voltage transformer switching during station operations.

9.2.3 Function block M13678-3 v6

SDDRFUF
I3P* BLKZ
V3P* BLKV
BLOCK 3PH
52A DLD1PH
MCBOP DLD3PH
89B

ANSI08000220-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000220 V1 EN-US

Figure 89: SDDRFUF function block

9.2.4 Signals
PID-1126-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 155: SDDRFUF Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 193

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 9 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Secondary system supervision

Name Type Default Description

52a BOOLEAN 0 Active when circuit breaker is closed
MCBOP BOOLEAN 0 Active when external Miniature Circuit Breaker opens protected
voltage circuit
89b BOOLEAN 0 Active when line disconnect switch is open

PID-1126-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 156: SDDRFUF Output signals

Name Type Description
BLKZ BOOLEAN Start of current and voltage controlled function
BLKV BOOLEAN General pickup
3PH BOOLEAN Three-phase pickup
DLD1PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in at least one phase
DLD3PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in all three phases

9.2.5 Settings
PID-1126-SETTINGS v13

Table 157: SDDRFUF Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Enabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
OpModeSel Disabled - - V0I0 Operating mode selection
V2I2
V0I0
V0I0 OR V2I2
V0I0 AND V2I2
OptimZsNs
3V0PU 1 - 100 %VB 1 30 Pickup of residual overvoltage element in
% of VBase
3I0PU 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Pickup of residual undercurrent element in
% of IBase
3V2PU 1 - 100 %VB 1 30 Pickup of negative sequence overvoltage
element in % of VBase
3I2PU 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Pickup of negative sequence undercurrent
element in % of IBase
OpDVDI Disabled - - Disabled Operation of change based function
Enabled Disable/Enable
DVPU 1 - 100 %VB 1 60 Pickup of change in phase voltage in % of
VBase
DIPU 1 - 100 %IB 1 15 Pickup of change in phase current in % of
IBase
VPPU 1 - 100 %VB 1 70 Pickup of phase voltage in % of VBase
50P 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Pickup of phase current in % of IBase
SealIn Disabled - - Enabled Seal in functionality Disable/Enable
Enabled
Table continues on next page

194 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 9
Secondary system supervision

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

VSealInPU 1 - 100 %VB 1 70 Pickup of seal-in phase voltage in % of
VBase
IDLDPU 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Pickup for phase current detection in % of
IBase for dead line detection
VDLDPU 1 - 100 %VB 1 60 Pickup for phase voltage detection in % of
VBase for dead line detection

Table 158: SDDRFUF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

9.2.6 Monitored data

PID-1126-MONITOREDDATA v14

Table 159: SDDRFUF Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3I0 REAL - A Magnitude of zero sequence current
3I2 REAL - A Magnitude of negative sequence current
3V0 REAL - kV Magnitude of zero sequence voltage
3V2 REAL - kV Magnitude of negative sequence voltage

9.2.7 Operation principle

9.2.7.1 Zero and negative sequence detection GUID-F2E5BA8F-BB7B-4BF8-9E4C-C5725F69744A v2

The zero and negative sequence function continuously measures the currents and voltages in all
three phases and calculates: (see figure 90)

• the zero-sequence voltage 3V0

• the zero-sequence current 3I0
• the negative sequence current 3I2
• the negative sequence voltage 3V2

The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3V0PU and 3I0PU, 3V2PU and
3I2PU.

The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetZeroSeq if the measured zero-sequence voltage
is higher than the set value 3V0PU and the measured zero-sequence current is below the set value
3I0PU.

The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetNegSeq if the measured negative sequence
voltage is higher than the set value 3V2PU and the measured negative sequence current is below
the set value 3I2PU.

Bay control REC650 195

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 9 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Secondary system supervision

A drop off delay of 100 ms for the measured zero-sequence and negative sequence current will
prevent a false fuse failure detection at un-equal breaker opening at the two line ends.

Sequence Detection
3I0PU CurrZeroSeq
IA
Zero 3I0
sequence
filter CurrNegSeq
a
IB a>b 100 ms
b 0
Negative 3I2
sequence
IC filter FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND
a
a>b 100 ms
3I2PU b 0
FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND
3V0PU
VoltZeroSeq
VA
Zero
sequence
a 3V0
a>b
b
filter
VB VoltNegSeq

Negative
sequence a 3V2
a>b
VC filter b

3V2PU

ANSI10000036-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000036 V2 EN-US

Figure 90: Simplified logic diagram for sequence detection part

The calculated values 3V0, 3I0, 3I2 and 3V2 are available as service values on local HMI and
monitoring tool in PCM600.

9.2.7.2 Delta current and delta voltage detection GUID-DEDFECAD-652F-4D25-A649-A41E65D0580B v3

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 91. The calculation of the change is
based on vector change which means that it detects both amplitude and phase angle changes.
The calculated delta quantities are compared with their respective set values DIPU and DVPU and
the algorithm, detects a fuse failure if a sufficient change in voltage without a sufficient change in
current is detected in each phase separately. The following quantities are calculated in all three
phases:

• The change in voltage DV

• The change in current DI

The internal FuseFailDetDVDI signal is activated if the following conditions are fulfilled for a phase:

• The magnitude of the phase-ground voltage has been above VPPU for more than 1.5 cycle
• The magnitude of DV is higher than the setting DVPU
• The magnitude of DI is below the setting DIPU

and at least one of the following conditions are fulfilled:

• The magnitude of the phase current in the same phase is higher than the setting 50P
• The circuit breaker is closed (52a = True)

196 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 9
Secondary system supervision

The first criterion means that detection of failure in one phase together with a current in the same
phase greater than 50P will set the output. The measured phase current is used to reduce the risk
of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected line is low, a voltage drop in the
system (not caused by fuse failure) is not necessarily followed by current change and a false fuse
failure might occur.

The second criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled in any phase while the
circuit breaker is closed. A fault occurs with an open circuit breaker at one end and closed at the
other end, could lead to wrong start of the fuse failure function at the end with the open breaker.
If this is considered to be a disadvantage, connect the 52a input to FALSE. In this way only the first
criterion can activate the delta function.

Bay control REC650 197

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 9 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Secondary system supervision

DVDI Detection
DVDI detection Phase 1
IA One cycle
delay
|DI|
a
a>b
DIPU b

VA One cycle
delay
|DV|
a
a>b AND
DVPU b

a
a>b 20 ms 1.5 cycle
VPPU b 0 0

IB DVDI detection Phase 2

VB

Same logic as for phase 1

IC DVDI detection Phase 3

VC

Same logic as for phase 1

VA
a
a<b
b

IA
a
a>b
50P b AND

OR AND
52A AND OR

VB
a
a<b
b

IB
a
a>b
b AND

OR AND
AND OR

VC
a
a<b
b

IC
a
a>b
b AND

OR AND FuseFailDetDVDI
AND OR
OR

ANSI10000034-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000034 V2 EN-US

Figure 91: Simplified logic diagram for DV/DI detection part

198 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 9
Secondary system supervision

9.2.7.3 Dead line detection M13679-44 v4

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 92. A dead phase condition is indicated
if both the voltage and the current in one phase is below their respective setting values VDLDPU
and IDLDPU. If at least one phase is considered to be dead the output DLD1PH and the internal
signal DeadLineDet1Ph is activated. If all three phases are considered to be dead the output
DLD3PH is activated

Dead Line Detection

IA
a
a<b AllCurrLow
b
AND
IB
a
a<b
b

IC
a
a<b
b

IDLDPU
DeadLineDet1Ph
VA
a AND
a<b
b OR DLD1PH
AND
VB
a AND
a<b
b
AND DLD3PH
VC AND
a AND
a<b
b

VDLDPU

intBlock

ANSI0000035-1-en.vsd
ANSI0000035 V1 EN-US

Figure 92: Simplified logic diagram for Dead Line detection part

9.2.7.4 Main logic GUID-D474A49E-D3A8-438C-B7E4-E527FEC2F335 v5

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 93. The fuse failure supervision
function (SDDRFUF) can be switched on or off by the setting parameter Operation to Enabled or
Disabled.

For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements an operation mode selector,
OpModeSel, has been introduced to make it possible to select different operating modes for the
negative and zero sequence based algorithms. The different operation modes are:

• Disabled. The negative and zero sequence function is disabled.

• V2I2. Negative sequence is selected.
• V0I0. Zero sequence is selected.
• V0I0 OR V2I2. Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in parallel in an OR-
condition.
• V0I0 AND V2I2. Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in series (AND-
condition for operation).
• OptimZsNs. Optimum of negative and zero sequence current (the function that has the
highest magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will be activated).

Bay control REC650 199

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 9 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Secondary system supervision

The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OpDVDI to Enabled. When selected it
operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithms.

As soon as any fuse failure situation is detected, signals FuseFailDetZeroSeq, FuseFailDetNegSeq

or FuseFailDetDVDI, and the specific functionality is released, the function will activate the output
signal BLKV. The output signal BLKZ will be activated as well if not the internal dead phase
detection, DeadLineDet1Ph, is not activated at the same time. The output BLKV can be used for
blocking voltage related measuring functions (under voltage protection, energizing check, and so
on). For blocking of impedance protection functions, output BLKZ shall be used.

If the fuse failure situation is present for more than 5 seconds and the setting parameter SealIn is
set to Enabled it will be sealed in as long as at least one phase voltages is below the set value
VSealInPU. This will keep the BLKV and BLKZ signals activated as long as any phase voltage is
below the set value VSealInPU. If all three phase voltages drop below the set value VSealInPU and
the setting parameter SealIn is set to Enabled the output signal 3PH will also be activated. The
signals 3PH, BLKV and BLKZ signals will now be active as long as any phase voltage is below the
set value VSealInPU.

If SealIn is set to Enabled the fuse failure condition is stored in the non-volatile memory in the IED.
At start-up of the IED (due to auxiliary power interruption or re-start due to configuration change)
it uses the stored value in its non-volatile memory and re-establishes the conditions that were
present before the shut down. All phase voltages must be greater than VSealInPU before fuse
failure is de-activated and resets the signals BLKU, BLKZ and 3PH.

The output signal BLKV will also be active if all phase voltages have been above the setting
VSealInPU for more than 60 seconds, the zero or negative sequence voltage has been above the
set value 3V0PU and 3V2PU for more than 5 seconds, all phase currents are below the setting
IDLDPU (operate level for dead line detection) and the circuit breaker is closed (input 52a is
activated).

If a MCB is used then the input signal MCBOP is to be connected via a terminal binary input to the
N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit. The
MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKV and BLKZ in order to block all the voltage related
functions when the MCB is open independent of the setting of OpModeSel or OpDVDI. An
additional drop-out timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the
unwanted operation of voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main
contacts of the miniature circuit breaker.

The input signal 89b is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary
contact of the line disconnector. The 89b signal sets the output signal BLKV in order to block the
voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open. The impedance protection function
does not have to be affected since there will be no line currents that can cause malfunction of the
distance protection.

200 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 9
Secondary system supervision

Fuse failure detection

Main logic
TEST

TEST ACTIVE
AND
BlocFuse = Yes

BLOCK intBlock
OR

All VP < VSealInPU

OR
AND
3PH
AND
SealIn = Enabled AND

AND
Any VP < VsealInPU

FuseFailDetDVDI
AND
OpDVDI = Enabled 5 sec
OR
0
FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND

AND

FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND

V2I2
V0I0 OR
V0I0 OR V2I2
OpModeSel
V0I0 AND V2I2
OptimZsNs
OR
CurrZeroSeq
a AND
CurrNegSeq a>b
b

AND

DeadLineDet1Ph AND BLKZ

0 OR AND
200 ms
MCBOP 0
150 ms

AND BLKV
OR OR
All VP > VsealInPU 60 sec
0 AND

VoltZeroSeq
VoltNegSeq OR 5 sec
0
AllCurrLow
52a

89b

ANSI10000041-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000041 V2 EN-US

Figure 93: Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, Main logic

Bay control REC650 201

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 9 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Secondary system supervision

9.2.8 Technical data

M16069-1 v8

Table 160: SDDRFUF technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, zero sequence (1-100)% of VBase ± 1.0% of Vn

Operate current, zero sequence (1–100)% of IBase ± 1.0% of In

Operate voltage, negative sequence (1–100)% of VBase ± 0.5% of Vn

Operate current, negative sequence (1–100)% of IBase ± 1.0% of In

Operate voltage change pickup (1–100)% of VBase ± 5.0% of Vn

Operate current change pickup (1–100)% of IBase ± 5.0% of In

Operate phase voltage (1-100)% of VBase ± 0.5% of Vn

Operate phase current (1-100)% of IBase ± 1.0% of In

Operate phase dead line voltage (1-100)% of VBase ± 0.5% of Vn

Operate phase dead line current (1-100)% of IBase ± 1.0% of In

9.3 Breaker close/trip circuit monitoring TCSSCBR

9.3.1 Identification GUID-C6367ACC-A594-4C2C-B75A-8A62387117BB v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Breaker close/trip circuit monitoring TCSSCBR - -

9.3.2 Functionality GUID-EE8A480D-59AB-423D-9567-317A111EF846 v9

The trip circuit supervision function TCSSCBR is designed to supervise the control circuit of the
circuit breaker. The trip circuit supervision generates a current of approximately 1 mA through the
supervised control circuit. The validity supervision of a control circuit is provided for power output
contacts T1, T2 and T3.

The function picks up and trips when TCSSCBR detects a trip circuit failure. The trip time
characteristic for the function is of definite time (DT) type. The function trips after a predefined
operating time and resets when the fault disappears.

9.3.3 Function block GUID-3F512745-A836-459E-99B6-DC0D0EBFB849 v4

GUID-6F85BD70-4D18-4A00-A410-313233025F3A V2 EN-US

Figure 94: Function block

202 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 9
Secondary system supervision

9.3.4 Signals GUID-17411B12-9FC3-4E47-87D1-147BD838FE7D v1

PID-1837-INPUTSIGNALS v14

Table 161: TCSSCBR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
TCS_STATE BOOLEAN 0 Trip circuit fail indication from I/O-card
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

PID-1837-OUTPUTSIGNALS v14

Table 162: TCSSCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
ALARM BOOLEAN Trip circuit fault indication

9.3.5 Settings GUID-958B656D-96BB-491A-8D43-78C352D37207 v1

PID-1837-SETTINGS v14

Table 163: TCSSCBR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Enabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
tDelay 0.020 - 300.000 s 0.001 3.000 Operate time delay

9.3.6 Operation principle GUID-687CF393-FED2-4CE5-B720-5A09B38C99B8 v7

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding
parameter values are Enable and Disable.

The operation of trip circuit supervision can be described by using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

TCS
TCS_STATE
status
Timer
BLOCK 0-t ALARM
0
ANSI11000289 V1 EN-US

Figure 95: Functional module diagram

Trip circuit supervision generates a current of approximately 1.0 mA through the

supervised circuit. It must be ensured that this current will not cause a latch up of
the controlled object.

Bay control REC650 203

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 9 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Secondary system supervision

To protect the trip circuit supervision circuits in the IED, the output contacts are
provided with parallel transient voltage suppressors. The breakdown voltage of
these suppressors is 400 +/– 20 V DC.

Timer
The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the BLOCK input
deactivates the ALARM output and resets the internal timer.

9.3.7 Technical data GUID-3C50487E-47ED-4E5C-AA2E-FA0EB53376BC v1

GUID-CF26761C-55B8-41EF-B140-651F7F116003 v2

Table 164: TCSSCBR Technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate time delay (0.020 - 300.000) s ± 0,5% ± 110 ms

204 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

Section 10 Control
10.1 Synchronism check, energizing check, and synchronizing
SESRSYN (25) IP14558-1 v4

10.1.1 Identification
M14889-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and SESRSYN 25
synchronizing
sc/vc

SYMBOL-M V1 EN-US

10.1.2 Functionality M12480-3 v12

The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous networks at the correct moment
including the breaker closing time, which improves the network stability.

Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN (25) function checks that the
voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with at least one side dead to
ensure that closing can be done safely.

SESRSYN (25) function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus and breaker-
and-a-half or ring busbar arrangements.

Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and can have
different settings.

For systems, which are running asynchronous, a synchronizing function is provided. The main
purpose of the synchronizing function is to provide controlled closing of circuit breakers when two
asynchronous systems are going to be connected. The synchronizing function evaluates voltage
difference, phase angle difference, slip frequency and frequency rate of change before issuing a
controlled closing of the circuit breaker. Breaker closing time is a parameter setting.

Bay control REC650 205

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

10.1.3 Function block M12431-3 v6

SESRSYN (25)
V3PB1* SYNOK
V3PB2* AUTOSYOK
V3PL1* AUTOENOK
V3PL2* MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
BUS1_OP TSTENOK
BUS1_CL VSELFAIL
BUS2_OP B1SEL
BUS2_CL B2SEL
LINE1_OP L1SEL
LINE1_CL L2SEL
LINE2_OP SYNPROGR
LINE2_CL SYNFAIL
VB1OK FRDIFSYN
VB1FF FRDERIVA
VB2OK VOKSC
VB2FF VDIFFSC
VL1OK FRDIFFA
VL1FF PHDIFFA
VL2OK FRDIFFM
VL2FF PHDIFFM
STARTSYN INADVCLS
TSTSYNCH VDIFFME
TSTSC FRDIFFME
TSTENERG PHDIFFME
AENMODE Vbus
MENMODE VLine
MODEAEN
MODEMEN

ANSI08000219_2_en.vsd
ANSI08000219 V2 EN-US

Figure 96: SESRSYN (25) function block

10.1.4 Signals
PID-2956-INPUTSIGNALS v8

Table 165: SESRSYN (25) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
V3PB1 GROUP - Group signal for phase to ground voltage input L1, busbar 1
SIGNAL
V3PB2 GROUP - Group signal for phase to ground voltage input L1, busbar 2
SIGNAL
V3PL1 GROUP - Group signal for phase to ground voltage input L1, line 1
SIGNAL
V3PL2 GROUP - Group signal for phase to ground voltage input L1, line 2
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Block synchronizing
BLKSC BOOLEAN 0 Block synchro check
BLKENERG BOOLEAN 0 Block energizing check
BUS1_OP BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus1
BUS1_CL BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB and disconnector connected to bus1
Table continues on next page

206 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

Name Type Default Description

BUS2_OP BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus2
BUS2_CL BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB and disconnector connected to bus2
LINE1_OP BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line1
LINE1_CL BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB and disconnector connected to line1
LINE2_OP BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line2
LINE2_CL BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB and disconnector connected to line2
VB1OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer OK
VB1FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer fuse failure
VB2OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer OK
VB2FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer fuse failure
VL1OK BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer OK
VL1FF BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure
VL2OK BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer OK
VL2FF BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure
STARTSYN BOOLEAN 0 Start synchronizing
TSTSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Set synchronizing in test mode
TSTSC BOOLEAN 0 Set synchro check in test mode
TSTENERG BOOLEAN 0 Set energizing check in test mode
AENMODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of automatic energizing mode
MENMODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of manual energizing mode

PID-2956-OUTPUTSIGNALS v8

Table 166: SESRSYN (25) Output signals

Name Type Description
SYNOK BOOLEAN Synchronizing OK output
AUTOSYOK BOOLEAN Auto synchronism-check OK
AUTOENOK BOOLEAN Automatic energizing check OK
MANSYOK BOOLEAN Manual synchronism-check OK
MANENOK BOOLEAN Manual energizing check OK
TSTSYNOK BOOLEAN Synchronizing OK test output
TSTAUTSY BOOLEAN Auto synchronism-check OK test output
TSTMANSY BOOLEAN Manual synchronism-check OK test output
TSTENOK BOOLEAN Energizing check OK test output
VSELFAIL BOOLEAN Selected voltage transformer fuse failed
B1SEL BOOLEAN Bus1 selected
B2SEL BOOLEAN Bus2 selected
L1SEL BOOLEAN Line1 selected
L2SEL BOOLEAN Line2 selected
SYNPROGR BOOLEAN Synchronizing in progress
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 207

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

Name Type Description

SYNFAIL BOOLEAN Synchronizing failed
FRDIFSYN BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDERIVA BOOLEAN Frequency derivative out of limit for synchronizing
VOKSC BOOLEAN Voltage magnitudes above set limits
VDIFFSC BOOLEAN Voltage difference out of limit
FRDIFFA BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Auto operation
PHDIFFA BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Auto operation
FRDIFFM BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Manual operation
PHDIFFM BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Manual Operation
INADVCLS BOOLEAN Inadvertent circuit breaker closing
VDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of voltage in p.u of set voltage base value
FRDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of frequency
PHDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of phase angle
Vbus REAL Bus voltage
VLine REAL Line voltage
MODEAEN INTEGER Selected mode for automatic energizing
MODEMEN INTEGER Selected mode for manual energizing

10.1.5 Settings
PID-2956-SETTINGS v8

Table 167: SESRSYN (25) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
CBConfig No voltage sel. - - No voltage sel. Select CB configuration
Double bus
1 1/2 bus CB
1 1/2 bus alt. CB
Tie CB
VRatio 0.500 - 2.000 - 0.001 1.000 Multiplication factor for minor internal
adjustmernt of measured line voltage for
synchro functions
PhaseShift -180 - 180 Deg 1 0 Additional phase angle for selected line
voltage
OperationSynch Disabled - - Disabled Operation for synchronizing function
Enabled Off/On
FreqDiffMin 0.003 - 0.250 Hz 0.001 0.010 Minimum frequency difference limit for
synchronizing
FreqDiffMax 0.050 - 0.500 Hz 0.001 0.200 Maximum frequency difference limit for
synchronizing
FreqRateChange 0.000 - 0.500 Hz/s 0.001 0.300 Maximum allowed frequency rate of
change
tBreaker 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.080 Closing time of the breaker
Table continues on next page

208 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tClosePulse 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Breaker closing pulse duration
tMaxSynch 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 600.00 Resets synch if no close has been made
before set time
tMinSynch 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Minimum time to accept synchronizing
conditions
OperationSC Disabled - - Enabled Operation for synchronism-check function
Enabled Off/On
VDiffSC 0.02 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.15 Voltage difference limit for synchrocheck
in p.u of set voltage base value
FreqDiffA 0.003 - 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.010 Frequency difference limit between bus
and line Auto
FreqDiffM 0.003 - 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.010 Frequency difference limit between bus
and line Manual
PhaseDiffA 5.0 - 90.0 Deg 1.0 25.0 Phase angle difference limit between bus
and line Auto
PhaseDiffM 5.0 - 90.0 Deg 1.0 25.0 Phase angle difference limit between bus
and line Manual
tSCA 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay output for synchrocheck Auto
tSCM 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay output for synchrocheck
Manual
AutoEnerg Disabled - - DLLB Automatic energizing check mode
DLLB
DBLL
Both
ManEnerg Disabled - - Both Manual energizing check mode
DLLB
DBLL
Both
ManEnergDBDL Disabled - - Disabled Manual dead bus, dead line energizing
Enabled
tAutoEnerg 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for automatic energizing check
tManEnerg 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for manual energizing check

Table 168: SESRSYN (25) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GblBaseSelBus 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups, Bus
GblBaseSelLine 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups, Line
SelPhaseBus1 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for busbar1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 209

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SelPhaseBus2 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for busbar2
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
SelPhaseLine1 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for line1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
SelPhaseLine2 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for line2
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence

10.1.6 Monitored data

PID-2956-MONITOREDDATA v7

Table 169: SESRSYN (25) Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VDIFFME REAL - - Calculated difference of voltage in p.u of
set voltage base value
FRDIFFME REAL - Hz Calculated difference of frequency
PHDIFFME REAL - deg Calculated difference of phase angle
Vbus REAL - kV Bus voltage
VLine REAL - kV Line voltage

10.1.7 Operation principle

10.1.7.1 Basic functionality M14832-3 v5

The synchronism check function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and compares
them to set limits. The output is only given when all measured quantities are simultaneously
within their set limits.

The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them to both
high and low threshold detectors. The output is given only when the actual measured quantities
match the set conditions.

The synchronizing function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker, and also
determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit breaker, from the
measured slip frequency. The output is given only when all measured conditions are

210 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

simultaneously within their set limits. The issue of the output is timed to give closure at the
optimal time including the time for the circuit breaker and the closing circuit.

For single circuit breaker double bus and breaker-and-a-half circuit breaker arrangements, the
SESRSYN (25) function blocks have the capability to make the necessary voltage selection. For
single circuit breaker double bus arrangements, selection of the correct voltage is made using
auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors. For breaker-and-a-half circuit breaker arrangements,
correct voltage selection is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus/line disconnectors as well as
the circuit breakers.

The internal logic for each function block as well as, the input and outputs, and the settings with
default setting and setting ranges is described in this document. For application related
information, please refer to the application manual.

10.1.7.2 Synchronism check M14834-3 v10

The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are calculated by
the SESRSYN function and are available for the synchronism check function for evaluation. If the
bus voltage is connected as phase-phase and the line voltage as phase-neutral (or the opposite),
this need to be compensated. This is done by selecting the corresponding phases for the
measurement in the settings for the SESRSYN function. In addition the phase angle difference has
to be compensated for by the setting PhaseShift. The setting scales the line voltage and adjust the
phase angle equal to the bus voltage.

When the function is set to OperationSC = Enabled, the measuring will start.

The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with internally preset values that are set
to be 80% of the UBase selected for GlbBaseSelBus and GlbBaseSelLine.

If both sides are higher than 80% of the Ubase values, the measured values are compared with the
set values for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage difference: FreqDiff, PhaseDiffand
VDiffSC. If a compensation factor is set due to the use of different voltages on the bus and line,
the factor is deducted from the line voltage before the comparison of the phase angle values.

The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The function is only released if
the frequency difference is less than the fixed set value of +/-5 Hz.

Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are available and used
for the manual closing and autoreclose functions respectively, as required.

The inputs BLOCK and BLKSC are available for total block of the complete SESRSYN (25) function
and selective block of the Synchronism check function respectively. Input TSTSC will allow testing
of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate test output.

The outputs MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured conditions match
the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can be delayed independently for
MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK conditions.

A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking conditions. VOKSC
shows that the voltages are high, VDIFFSC, FRDIFFA, FRDIFFM, PHDIFFA, PHDIFFM shows when
the voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference conditions are out of
limits.

Output INADVCLS, inadvertent circuit breaker closing, indicate that the circuit breaker has been
closed at wrong phase angle by mistake. The output is activated, if the voltage conditions are

Bay control REC650 211

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

fulfilled at the same time the phase angle difference between bus and line is suddenly changed
from being larger than 60 degrees to smaller than 5 degrees.

Note! Similar logic for Manual Synchrocheck.

OperationSC = Enabled
AND TSTAUTSY
AND

TSTSC

BLKSC AND
BLOCK OR
AUTOSYOK
AND

AND 0-tSCA
0

VDiffSC
AND 50 ms
Bus voltage >80% 0
of GblBaseSelBus
VOKSC
Line voltage >80% AND
of GblBaseSelLine
VDIFFSC
1

FreqDiffA FRDIFFA
1

PhaseDiffA PHDIFFA
1

VDIFFME
voltageDifferenceValue
FRDIFFME
frequencyDifferenceValue
PHDIFFME
phaseAngleDifferenceValue

100 ms
0 INADVCLS
AND AND
PhaseDiff > 60° 80 ms

PhaseDiff < 5°

ANSI08000018-2-en.vsd
ANSI08000018 V2 EN-US

Figure 97: Simplified logic diagram for the Auto Synchronism function

10.1.7.3 Synchronizing SEMOD171603-4 v9

When the function is set to OperationSynch = Enabled the measuring will be performed.

The function will compare the values for the bus and line voltage with internally preset values that
are set to be 80% of the set UBase selected for GlbBaseSelBus and GlbBaseSelLine, which is a
supervision that the voltages are both live. Also the voltage difference is checked to be smaller
than the internally preset value 0.10, which is a p.u value of set voltage base values. If both sides
are higher than the preset values and the voltage difference between bus and line is acceptable,
the measured values are also compared with the set values for acceptable frequency FreqDiffMax
and FreqDiffMin, rate of change of frequency FreqRateChange and phase angle, which has to be
smaller than the internally preset value of 15 degrees.

212 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

Measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum frequency will initiate
the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to allow operation to be sent in the right
moment including the set tBreaker time. There is a phase angle release internally to block any
incorrect closing pulses. At operation the SYNOK output will be activated with a pulse tClosePulse
and the function reset. The function will also reset if the syncronizing conditions are not fulfilled
within the set tMaxSynch time. This prevents that the function is, by mistake, maintained in
operation for a long time, waiting for conditions to be fulfilled.

The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete SESRSYN function
and block of the Synchronizing function respectively. TSTSYNCH will allow testing of the function
where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate output.

SYN1
OPERATION SYNCH=ON

TEST MODE=ON

STARTSYN SYNPROGR
AND
AND
S
BLKSYNCH
OR R

Voltage difference between

V-Bus and V-Line < 0.10 p.u

Bus voltage > 80% of SYNOK

GblBaseSelBus AND
AND 50 ms
Line voltage > 80% of 0
GblBaseSelLine
OR

FreqDiffMax
AND
TSTSYNOK
FreqDiffMin OR

FreqRateChange 0.05-tClosePulse
AND
0
fBus&fLine ± 5 Hz
AND
PhaseDiff < 15 deg SYNFAIL
0-tMaxSynch
PhaseDiff=closing angle 0

FreqDiff
Close pulse
tBreaker in advace

ANSI08000020-3-en.vsd
ANSI08000020 V3 EN-US

Figure 98: Simplified logic diagram for the synchronizing function

10.1.7.4 Energizing check M14835-3 v8

Voltage values are measured in the IED and are available for evaluation by the Synchronism check
function.

The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they are live or dead.
To be considered live, the value must be above 80% of set UBase selected for GblBaseSelBus or
GblBaseSelLine and to be considered dead it must be below 40% of set UBase selected
forGblBaseSelBus or GblBaseSelLine.

Bay control REC650 213

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies must not
deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz.

The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the Automatic functions
respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs AUTOENOK and MANENOK respectively will
be activated if the fuse supervision conditions are fulfilled. The output signal can be delayed
independently for MANENOK and AUTOENOK conditions. The Energizing direction can also be
selected by an integer input AENMODE respective MENMODE, which for example, can be
connected to a Binary to Integer function block (B16I). Integers supplied shall be 1=off, 2=DLLB,
3=DBLL and 4= Both. Not connected input with connection of INTZERO output from Fixed Signals
(FIXDSIGN) function block will mean that the setting is done from Parameter Setting tool. The
active position can be read on outputs MODEAEN resp MODEMEN. The modes are 0=OFF, 1=DLLB,
2=DBLL and 3=Both.

The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete SESRSYN (25)
function respective block of the Energizing check function. TSTENERG will allow testing of the
function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate test output.

10.1.7.5 Fuse failure supervision M14837-3 v9

External fuse failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to binary
inputs that are configured to the inputs of SESRSYN (25) function in the IED. Alternatively, the
internal signals from fuse failure supervision can be used when available. There are two alternative
connection possibilities. Inputs labelled OK must be connected if the available contact indicates
that the voltage circuit is healthy. Inputs labelled FF must be connected if the available contact
indicates that the voltage circuit is faulty.

The VB1OK/VB2OK and VB1FF/VB2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage and the VL1OK/
VL2OK and VL1FF/VL2FF inputs are related to the line voltage. Configure them to the binary input
or function outputs that indicate the status of the external fuse failure of the busbar and line
voltages. In the event of a fuse failure, the energizing check function is blocked. The synchronism
check function requires full voltage on both sides, thus no blocking at fuse failure is needed.

10.1.7.6 Voltage selection M14836-3 v7

The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage transformers for the
different arrangements is a basic part of the SESRSYN (25) function and determines the voltages
fed to the Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing check functions. This includes the selection
of the appropriate Line and Bus voltages and MCB supervision.

The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig.

If No voltage sel. is set the voltages used will be V-Line1 and V-Bus1. This setting is also used in the
case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure supervision for the used inputs must
also be connected.

From the voltage selection part, selected voltages, and functions conditions are connected to the
Synchronizing, Synchronism check and Energizing check inputs.

For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type contacts to supply
Disconnector Open and Closed positions but, it is also possible to use an inverter for one of the
positions.

214 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

10.1.7.7 Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double busbars M14838-3 v8

This function uses the binary input from the disconnectors auxiliary contacts BUS1_OP-BUS1_CL
for Bus 1, and BUS2_OP-BUS2_CL for Bus 2 to select between bus 1 and bus 2 voltages. If the
disconnector connected to bus 1 is closed and the disconnector connected to bus 2 is opened the
bus 1 voltage is used. All other combinations use the bus 2 voltage. The outputs B1SEL and B2SEL
respectively indicate the selected Bus voltage.

The function checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2 and line voltage transformers. Inputs
VB1OK-VB1FF supervise the MCB for Bus 1 and VB2OK-VB2FF supervises the MCB for Bus 2. VL1OK
and VL1FF supervises the MCB for the Line voltage transformer. The inputs fail (FF) or healthy (OK)
can alternatively be used dependent on the available signal. If a VT failure is detected in the
selected voltage source an output signal VSELFAIL is set. This output signal is true if the selected
bus or line voltages have a VT failure. This output as well as the function can be blocked with the
input signal BLOCK. The function logic diagram is shown in figure 99.

BUS1_OP
B1SEL
BUS1_CL AND

BUS2_OP B2SEL
NOT
BUS2_CL AND

invalidSelection
AND

bus1Voltage busVoltage

bus2Voltage

VB1OK AND
VB1FF OR
OR selectedFuseOK
AND
VB2OK AND
VB2FF OR VSELFAIL
AND

VL1OK
VL1FF OR

BLOCK

en05000779_2_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000779 V2 EN-US

Figure 99: Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit breaker with double busbars

10.1.7.8 Voltage selection for a breaker-and-a-half circuit breaker arrangement M14839-3 v6

Note that with breaker-and-a-half schemes three Synchronism check functions must be used for
the complete diameter. Below, the scheme for one Bus breaker and the Tie breaker is described.

This voltage selection function uses the binary inputs from the disconnectors and circuit breakers
auxiliary contacts to select the right voltage for the SESRSYN (Synchronism, Synchronizing and

Bay control REC650 215

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

Energizing check) function. For the bus circuit breaker one side of the circuit breaker is connected
to the busbar and the other side is connected either to line 1, line 2 or the other busbar depending
on the best selection of voltage circuit.

Inputs LINE1_OP-LINE1_CL, BUS1_OP-BUS1_CL, BUS2_OP-BUS2_CL, LINE2_OP-LINE2_CL are inputs

for the position of the Line disconnectors respectively the Bus and Tie breakers. The outputs
L1SEL, L2SEL and B2SEL will give indication of the selected Line voltage as a reference to the fixed
Bus 1 voltage, which indicates B1SEL.

The fuse supervision is connected to VL1OK-VL1FF, VL2OK-VL2FF and with alternative Healthy or
Failing MCB signals depending on what is available from each MCB.

The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 voltage on one side and the other side
is connected either to bus 2 or line 2 voltage. Four different output combinations are possible, bus
to bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line.

• The line 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is closed.

• The bus 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is open and the bus 1 circuit breaker is
closed.
• The line 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is closed.
• The bus 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is open and the bus 2 circuit breaker is
closed.

The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2. If a VT failure is
detected in the selected voltage an output signal VSELFAIL is set. This output signal is true if the
selected bus or line voltages have a MCB trip. This output as well as the function can be blocked
with the input signal BLOCK. The function block diagram for the voltage selection of a bus circuit
breaker is shown in figure 100 and for the tie circuit breaker in figure 101.

216 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

LINE1_OP
L1SEL
LINE1_CL AND

BUS1_OP
L2SEL
BUS1_CL AND AND
B2SEL
OR
LINE2_OP
LINE2_CL AND invalidSelection
AND

BUS2_OP AND

BUS2_CL AND

line1Voltage lineVoltage

line2Voltage

bus2Voltage

VB1OK
VB1FF OR

OR selectedFuseOK
VB2OK AND
AND
VB2FF OR

VSELFAIL
VL1OK AND
AND
VL1FF OR

VL2OK
AND
VL2FF OR

BLOCK

en05000780_2_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000780 V2 EN-US

Figure 100: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a breaker-
and-a-half arrangement

Bay control REC650 217

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

LINE1_OP
AND
L1SEL
LINE1_CL
B1SEL
NOT

BUS1_OP AND
AND
BUS1_CL AND

line1Voltage busVoltage

bus1Voltage

LINE2_OP
L2SEL
LINE2_CL AND
B2SEL
NOT
invalidSelection
OR
BUS2_OP AND
AND
BUS2_CL AND

line2Voltage lineVoltage

bus2Voltage

VB1OK AND
VB1FF OR

OR selectedFuseOK
VB2OK AND
AND
VB2FF OR

VSELFAIL
VL1OK AND
AND
VL1FF OR

VL2OK
AND
VL2FF OR

BLOCK

en05000781_2_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000781 V2 EN-US

Figure 101: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in breaker-
and-a-half arrangement.

218 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

10.1.8 Technical data

M12359-1 v9

Table 170: SESRSYN (25) technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Phase shift, jline - jbus (-180 to 180) degrees -

Voltage ratio, Vbus/Vline 0.500 - 2.000 -

Reset ratio, synchronism check > 95% -

Frequency difference limit between bus and (0.003-1.000) Hz ± 2.0 mHz
line for synchrocheck
Phase angle difference limit between bus and (5.0-90.0) degrees ± 2.0 degrees
line for synchrocheck
Voltage difference limit between bus and line 0.03-0.50 p.u ± 0.5% of Vn
for synchronizing and synchrocheck
Time delay output for synchronism check (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
Frequency difference minimum limit for (0.003-0.250) Hz ± 2.0 mHz
synchronizing
Frequency difference maximum limit for (0.050-0.500) Hz ± 2.0 mHz
synchronizing
Maximum allowed frequency rate of change (0.000-0.500) Hz/s ± 10.0 mHz/s
Closing time of the breaker (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
Breaker closing pulse duration (0.050-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
tMaxSynch, which resets synchronizing (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
function if no close has been made before set
time
Minimum time to accept synchronizing (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
conditions
Time delay output for energizing check (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
Operate time for synchronism check function 40 ms typically -
Operate time for energizing function 100 ms typically -

10.2 Autorecloser for 3-phase operation SMBRREC (79) IP14559-1 v4

10.2.1 Identification
M14890-1 v4

Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Autorecloser for 3-phase operation SMBRREC 79

O->I

SYMBOL-L V1 EN-US

Bay control REC650 219

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

10.2.2 Functionality M12390-3 v11

The autorecloser for 3-phase operation SMBRREC (79) function provides high-speed and/or
delayed auto-reclosing for single breaker applications.

Up to five three-phase reclosing attempts can be included by parameter setting.

The autoreclosing function is configured to co-operate with the synchronism check function.

10.2.3 Function block M12633-3 v5

SMBRREC (79)
ON BLOCKED
OFF SETON
BLKON READY
BLKOFF ACTIVE
RESET SUCCL
INHIBIT UNSUCCL
RI INPROGR
TRSOTF 3PT1
ZONESTEP 3PT2
THOLHOLD 3PT3
CBREADY 3PT4
52A 3PT5
SYNC CLOSECMD
WAIT WFMASTER
RSTCOUNT COUNT3P1
COUNT3P2
COUNT3P3
COUNT3P4
COUNT3P5
COUNTAR

ANSI08000086-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000086 V1 EN-US

Figure 102: SMBRREC (79) function block

10.2.4 Signals
PID-1122-INPUTSIGNALS v14

Table 171: SMBRREC (79) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ON BOOLEAN 0 Enables AR when Operation = ExternalCtrl
OFF BOOLEAN 0 Disables AR when Operation = ExternalCtrl
BLKON BOOLEAN 0 Sets AR in blocked state
BLKOFF BOOLEAN 0 Releases AR from blocked state
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Resets AR to initial conditions
INHIBIT BOOLEAN 0 Interrupts and inhibits reclosing sequence
RI BOOLEAN 0 Reclosing sequence starts by a protection trip signal
TRSOTF BOOLEAN 0 Makes AR to continue to shots 2-5 at a trip from SOTF
ZONESTEP BOOLEAN 0 Coordination between local AR and down stream devices
THOLHOLD BOOLEAN 0 Holds AR in wait state
CBREADY BOOLEAN 0 CB must be ready for CO/OCO operation to allow start / close
52a BOOLEAN 0 Status of the circuit breaker Closed/Open
SYNC BOOLEAN 0 Synchronizing check fulfilled for 3Ph closing attempts
WAIT BOOLEAN 0 Wait for master in Multi-breaker arrangements
RSTCOUNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets all counters

220 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

PID-1122-OUTPUTSIGNALS v14

Table 172: SMBRREC (79) Output signals

Name Type Description
BLOCKED BOOLEAN Wait for master in Multi-breaker arrangements
SETON BOOLEAN AR operation is switched on
READY BOOLEAN Indicates that AR is ready for a new sequence
ACTIVE BOOLEAN Reclosing sequence in progress
SUCCL BOOLEAN Activated if CB closes during the time tUnsucCl
UNSUCCL BOOLEAN Reclosing unsuccessful, signal resets after the reclaim time
INPROGR BOOLEAN Reclosing shot in progress, activated during open reset
3PT1 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 1
3PT2 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 2
3PT3 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 3
3PT4 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 4
3PT5 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 5
CLOSECMD BOOLEAN Closing command for CB
WFMASTER BOOLEAN Signal to Slave issued by Master for sequential reclosing
COUNT3P1 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 1
COUNT3P2 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 2
COUNT3P3 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 3
COUNT3P4 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 4
COUNT3P5 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 5
COUNTAR INTEGER Counting total number of reclosing shots

10.2.5 Settings
PID-1122-SETTINGS v14

Table 173: SMBRREC (79) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - External ctrl Disable/ExternalCtrl/Enable
External ctrl
Enabled
t1 3Ph 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 6.000 Open time for shot 1, delayed reclosing
3ph
tReset 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 60.00 Duration of the reset time
tSync 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum wait time for synchronism-check
OK
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Maximum trip pulse duration
tCBClosedMin 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Minimum time that CB must be closed
before new sequence allows
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 221

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tUnsucCl 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Wait time for CB before indicating
Unsuccessful/Successful
Priority None - - None Priority selection between adjacent
Low terminals None/Low/High
High
tWaitForMaster 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 60.00 Maximum wait time for release from
Master

Table 174: SMBRREC (79) Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NoOfShots 1 - - 1 Maximum number of reclosing shots 1-5
2
3
4
5
StartByCBOpen Disabled - - Disabled To be set ON if AR is to be started by CB
Enabled open position
CBAuxContType NormClosed - - NormOpen Select CB auxilary contact type NC/NO for
NormOpen CBPOS input
CBReadyType CO - - CO Select type of circuit breaker ready signal
OCO CO/OCO
t2 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 2, three-phase
t3 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 3, three-phase
t4 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 4, three-phase
t5 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 5, three-phase
tInhibit 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Inhibit reclosing reset time
Follow CB Disabled - - Disabled Advance to next shot if CB has been closed
Enabled during dead time
AutoCont Disabled - - Disabled Continue with next reclosing-shot if
Enabled breaker did not close
tAutoContWait 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Wait time after close command before
proceeding to next shot
UnsucClByCBChk NoCBCheck - - NoCBCheck Unsuccessful closing signal obtained by
CB check checking CB position
BlockByUnsucCl Disabled - - Disabled Block AR at unsuccessful reclosing
Enabled
ZoneSeqCoord Disabled - - Disabled Coordination of down stream devices to
Enabled local protection unit’s AR

10.2.6 Operation principle

10.2.6.1 Initiate auto-reclosing and conditions for initiation of a reclosing cycle M12394-15 v6

The usual way in which to initiate a reclosing cycle, or sequence, is to initiate it when a line
protection tripping has occurred, by applying a signal to the RI input.

222 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

For a new auto-reclosing cycle to be started, a number of conditions need to be met. They are
linked to dedicated inputs. The inputs are:

• CBREADY: CB ready for a reclosing cycle, for example, charged operating gear
• 52a: to ensure that the CB was closed when the line fault occurred and initiation was applied
• No blocking or inhibit signal shall be present.

After the initiate has been accepted, it is latched in and an internal signal “Started” is set. It can be
interrupted by certain events, like an inhibit signal.

To initiate auto-reclosing by CB position Open instead of from protection trip signals, one has to
configure the CB Open position signal to inputs 52a and RI and set a parameter StartByCBOpen =
Enabled and CBAuxContType = NormClosed (normally closed, 52b). One also has to configure and
connect signals from manual trip commands to input INHIBIT.

The logic for switching the auto-recloser Enabled/Disabled and the starting of the reclosing is
shown in figure 103. The following should be considered:

• Setting Operation can be set to Disabled, External ctrl or Enabled. External ctrl offers the
possibility of switching by external switches to inputs ON and OFF, communication
commands to the same inputs, and so on.
• SMBRREC (79) is normally started by tripping. It is either a Zone 1 and Communication aided
trip or a general trip. If the general trip is used the function must be blocked from all back-up
tripping connected to INHIBIT. In both alternatives the breaker failure function must be
connected to inhibit the function. RI makes a first attempt with synchronism-check. TRSOTF
starts shots 2-5.
• Circuit breaker checks that the breaker was closed for a certain length of time before the
starting occurred and that the CB has sufficient stored energy to perform an auto-reclosing
sequence and is connected to inputs 52a and CBREADY.

Operation:Enabled

Operation:Disabled

Operation:External Ctrl
OR
ON AND SETON
AND S
OR
OFF AND R

RI

OR initiate
autoInitiate

Additional conditions
TRSOTF AND

pickup
CBREADY AND
0 AND
120 ms AND S
52a CB Closed 0-tCBClosedMin R
0

AND
Blocking conditions READY
AND
OR
Inhibit condistions

count 0

ANSI08000017-2-en.vsd
ANSI08000017 V2 EN-US

Figure 103: Auto-reclosing Disabled/Enabled and start

Bay control REC650 223

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

10.2.6.2 Control of the auto-reclosing open time M12394-49 v4

There are settings for three-phase auto-reclosing open time, t1 3Ph to t5 3Ph.

10.2.6.3 Long trip signal M12394-78 v4

In normal circumstances the trip command resets quickly due to fault clearing. The user can set a
maximum trip pulse duration tTrip. A long trip signal interrupts the reclosing sequence in the
same way as a signal to input INHIBIT.

Reclosing checks and the reset timer M12394-180 v4

When dead time has elapsed during the auto-reclosing procedure certain conditions must be
fulfilled before the CB closing command is issued. To achieve this, signals are exchanged between
program modules to check that these conditions are met. In three-phase reclosing a synchronizing
and/or energizing check can be used. It is possible to use a synchronism check function in the
same physical device or an external one. The release signal is configured by connecting to the
auto-reclosing function input SYNC. If reclosing without checking is preferred the SYNC input can
be set to TRUE (set high). Another possibility is to set the output of the synchronism check
function to a permanently activated state. At confirmation from the synchronism check, the signal
passes on.

By choosing CBReadyType = CO (CB ready for a Close-Open sequence) the readiness of the circuit
breaker is also checked before issuing the CB closing command. If the CB has a readiness contact
of type CBReadyType = OCO (CB ready for an Open-Close-Open sequence) this condition may not
be complied with after the tripping and at the moment of reclosure. The Open-Close-Open
condition was however checked at the start of the reclosing cycle and it is then likely that the CB is
prepared for a Close-Open sequence.

The synchronism check or energizing check must be fulfilled within a set time interval, tSync. If it is
not, or if other conditions are not met, the reclosing is interrupted and blocked.

The reset timer defines a time from the issue of the reclosing command, after which the reclosing
function resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is treated as a continuation of the first
fault. The reset timer is started when the CB closing command is given.

A number of outputs for Autoreclosing state control keeps track of the actual state in the
reclosing sequence.

224 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

"SMBRREC Open
time" timer
From logic for
reclosing 0-t1 3Ph 3PT1TO
0
programs

3PT1TO
3PT2TO
3PT3TO OR
AND
3PT4TO Pulse
3PT5TO AND

SYNC
initiate AND Blocking out
CBREADY AND OR

SMBRREC
0-tSync
State Control
AND
0 COUNTER
0 Shot 0
CL Shot 1
1
2 Shot 2
3 Shot 3
Pulse (above) AND 0-tReset R 4 Shot 4
OR 0 Shot 5
5
LOGIC Reclaim Timer On
reclosing
programs
pickup
initiate INPROGR
Shot 0 3PT1 OR
Shot 1 3PT2
Shot 2
Shot 3 3PT3
Shot 4
Shot 5 3PT4
3PT5

Blocking out
OR 0 Inhibit (internal)
INHIBIT 0-tInhibit

ANSI08000244-2-en.vsd
ANSI08000244 V2 EN-US

Figure 104: Reclosing Reset and Inhibit timers

Pulsing of the CB closing command M12394-231 v5

The duration of the pulse is fixed 200 ms. See figure 105

When a reclosing command is issued, the appropriate reclosing operation counter is incremented.
There is a counter for each reclosing shot and one for the total number of reclosing commands
issued.

Bay control REC650 225

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

pulse
CLOSECMD
initiate AND

3PT1 AND COUNT3P1

counter

3PT2 AND COUNT3P2

counter

3PT3 AND COUNT3P3

counter

3PT4 AND COUNT3P4

counter

3PT5 AND COUNT3P5

counter

counter COUNTAR
RSTCOUNT

ANSI08000245-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000245 V1 EN-US

Figure 105: Pulsing of closing command and driving the operation counters

Transient fault M12394-257 v3

After the reclosing command the reset timer tReset starts running for the set time. If no tripping
occurs within this time, the auto-reclosing will reset.

Permanent fault and reclosing unsuccessful signal M12394-260 v4

If a new trip occurs after the CB closing command, and a new input signal RI or TRSOTF appears,
the output UNSUCCL (unsuccessful closing) is set high. The timers for the first shot can no longer
be started. Depending on the setting for the number of reclosing shots, further shots may be
made or the reclosing sequence will be ended. After the reset time has elapsed, the auto-reclosing
function resets but the CB remains open. The CB closed data at the 52a input will be missing.
Because of this, the reclosing function will not be ready for a new reclosing cycle.

Normally the signal UNSUCCL appears when a new trip and initiate is received after the last
reclosing shot has been made and the auto-reclosing function is blocked. The signal resets once
the reset time has elapsed. The “unsuccessful“ signal can also be made to depend on CB position
input. The parameter UnsucClByCBChk should then be set to CBCheck, and a timer tUnsucCl
should also be set. If the CB does not respond to the closing command and does not close, but
remains open, the output UNSUCCL is set high after time tUnsucCl.

226 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

initiate
block start AND
OR UNSUCCL
AND S

shot 0
R

UnsucClByCBchk = CBcheck

Pulse SMBRREC
(Closing) OR
0-tUnsucCl AND
AND
52a CBclosed 0

ANSI09000203-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000203 V2 EN-US

Figure 106: Issue of signal UNSUCCL, unsuccessful reclosing

Automatic continuation of the reclosing sequence M12394-283 v4

The auto-reclosing function can be programmed to proceed to the following reclosing shots (if
selected) even if the initiate signals are not received from the protection functions, but the
breaker is still not closed. This is done by setting parameter AutoCont = Enabled and to the
required delay for the function to proceed without a new initiate.

0-tAutoContWait
0

AND

CLOSECMD
AND S Q

AND

52a CBClosed
OR

initiate
RI OR

en05000787_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000787 V1 EN-US

Figure 107: Automatic proceeding of shot 2 to 5

Initiation of reclosing from CB open information M12394-308 v5

If a user wants to apply initiation of auto-reclosing from CB open position instead of from
protection trip signals, the function offers such a possibility. This starting mode is selected by a
setting parameter StartByCBOpen = Enabled. One needs then to block reclosing at all manual trip

Bay control REC650 227

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

operations. Typically, one also set CBAuxContType = NormClosed and connect a CB auxiliary
contact of type NC (normally closed, 52b) to inputs 52a and RI. When the signal changes from CB
closed to CB open an auto-reclosing start pulse of limited length is generated and latched in the
function, subject to the usual checks. Then the reclosing sequence continues as usual. One needs
to connect signals from manual tripping and other functions, which shall prevent reclosing, to the
input INHIBIT.

StartByCBOpen = Enabled
1

RI AND

pickup
³1
100 ms
AND

100 ms

ANSI08000078-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000078 V1 EN-US

Figure 108: Pulsing of the pickup inputs

10.2.7 Technical data

M12379-1 v7

Table 175: SMBRREC (79) technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of autoreclosing shots 1-5 -
Autoreclosing open time:
shot 1 - t1 3Ph (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms

shot 2 - t2 3Ph (0.00-6000.00) s

shot 3 - t3 3Ph
shot 4 - t4 3Ph
shot 5 - t5 3Ph
Autorecloser maximum wait time for sync (0.00-6000.00) s
Maximum trip pulse duration (0.000-60.000) s
Inhibit reset time (0.000-60.000) s
Reset time (0.00-6000.00) s
Minimum time CB must be closed before AR becomes ready (0.00-6000.00) s
for autoreclosing cycle
CB check time before unsuccessful (0.00-6000.00) s
Wait for master release (0.00-6000.00) s
Wait time after close command before proceeding to next (0.000-60.000) s
shot

228 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

10.3 Apparatus control

10.3.1 Functionality M13444-3 v10

The apparatus control function APC8 for up to 8 apparatuses is used for control and supervision
of circuit breakers, disconnectors and grounding switches within a bay. Permission to operate is
given after evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking, synchronism check,
operator place selection and external or internal blockings.

In normal security, the command is processed and the resulting position is not supervised.
However with enhanced security, the command is processed and the resulting position is
supervised.

The switch controller SCSWI initializes and supervises all functions to properly select and operate
switching primary apparatuses. Each of the 8 switch controllers SCSWI may handle and operate on
one three-phase apparatus.

Each of the 3 circuit breaker controllers SXCBR provides the actual position status and pass the
commands to the primary circuit breaker and supervises the switching operation and positions.

Each of the 7 circuit switch controllers SXSWI provides the actual position status and pass the
commands to the primary disconnectors and earthing switches and supervises the switching
operation and positions.

10.3.2 Switch controller SCSWI

10.3.2.1 Identification
GUID-3A3F01BC-C350-47C1-82FF-BCFAD41A33A1 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Switch controller SCSWI - -

10.3.2.2 Functionality M13486-3 v4

The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly select and
operate switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may handle and operate on one
three-phase device.

Bay control REC650 229

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

10.3.2.3 Function block M13482-3 v5

SCSWI
BLOCK EXE_OP
PSTO EXE_CL
L_SEL SELECTED
L_OPEN START_SY
L_CLOSE POSITION
AU_OPEN OPENPOS
AU_CLOSE CLOSEPOS
BL_CMD CMD_BLK
RES_EXT L_CAUSE
SY_INPRO POS_INTR
SYNC_OK XOUT
EN_OPEN
EN_CLOSE
XPOS*

IEC09000087_1_en.vsd
IEC09000087 V1 EN-US

Figure 109: SCSWI function block

10.3.2.4 Signals
PID-1429-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 176: SCSWI Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 2 Operator place selection
L_SEL BOOLEAN 0 Select signal from local panel
L_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open signal from local panel
L_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close signal from local panel
AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Used for local automation function
AU_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Used for local automation function
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the command
RES_EXT BOOLEAN 0 Reservation is made externally
SY_INPRO BOOLEAN 0 Synchronizing function in progress
SYNC_OK BOOLEAN 0 Closing is permitted by the synchronism-check
EN_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Enables open operation
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Enables close operation
XPOS GROUP - Group signal from XCBR/XSWI
SIGNAL

PID-1429-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 177: SCSWI Output signals

Name Type Description
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Execute Open command
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Execute Close command
SELECTED BOOLEAN Select conditions are fulfilled
START_SY BOOLEAN Starts the synchronizing function
POSITION INTEGER Position indication
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Open position indication
Table continues on next page

230 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

Name Type Description

CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Closed position indication
CMD_BLK BOOLEAN Commands are blocked
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command
POS_INTR BOOLEAN Stopped in intermediate position
XOUT BOOLEAN Execution information to XCBR/XSWI

10.3.2.5 Settings
PID-1429-SETTINGS v14

Table 178: SCSWI Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CtlModel Dir Norm - - SBO Enh Specifies control model type
SBO Enh
PosDependent Always permitted - - Always Permission to operate depending on the
Not perm at permitted position
00/11
tSelect 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 30.000 Maximum time between select and
execute signals
tSynchrocheck 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 10.00 Allowed time for synchronism-check to
fulfil close conditions
tSynchronizing 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 0.00 Supervision time to get the signal
synchronizing in progress
tExecutionFB 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum time from command execution
to termination

10.3.3 Circuit breaker SXCBR

10.3.3.1 Identification
GUID-3FBC91E8-E98C-4FFF-9A49-5D24FFC351CC v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Circuit breaker SXCBR - -

10.3.3.2 Functionality M13489-3 v4

The purpose of Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is to provide the actual status of positions and to perform
the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the form of
circuit breakers via binary output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.

Bay control REC650 231

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

10.3.3.3 Function block M13500-3 v5

SXCBR
BLOCK XPOS
LR_SWI EXE_OP
OPEN EXE_CL
CLOSE SUBSTED
BL_OPEN OP_BLKD
BL_CLOSE CL_BLKD
BL_UPD UPD_BLKD
POSOPEN POSITION
POSCLOSE OPENPOS
TR_OPEN CLOSEPOS
TR_CLOSE TR_POS
RS_CNT CNT_VAL
XIN L_CAUSE

IEC09000089_1_en.vsd
IEC09000089 V1 EN-US

Figure 110: SXCBR function block

10.3.3.4 Signals
PID-3527-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 179: SXCBR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
TR_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of truck from I/O
TR_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of truck from I/O
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
XIN BOOLEAN 0 Execution information from CSWI

PID-3527-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 180: SXCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for open commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for close commands
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position indication is blocked
POSITION INTEGER Apparatus position indication
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
Table continues on next page

232 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

Name Type Description

CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
TR_POS INTEGER Truck position indication
CNT_VAL INTEGER Operation counter value
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command

10.3.3.5 Settings
PID-3527-SETTINGS v1

Table 181: SXCBR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Supervision time for the apparatus to
move after a command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Allowed time for intermediate position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - - Not adaptive Output resets when a new correct end
Adaptive position is reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close command
SuppressMidPos Disabled - - Enabled Mid-position is suppressed during the
Enabled time tIntermediate

10.3.4 Circuit switch SXSWI

10.3.4.1 Identification
GUID-E9AA5FA8-0685-4A0A-B1FE-49B38A23B37E v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Circuit switch SXSWI - -

10.3.4.2 Functionality M16492-3 v4

The purpose of Circuit switch (SXSWI) function is to provide the actual status of positions and to
perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the form
of disconnectors or grounding switches via binary output boards and to supervise the switching
operation and position.

Bay control REC650 233

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

10.3.4.3 Function block M13504-3 v5

SXSWI
BLOCK XPOS
LR_SWI EXE_OP
OPEN EXE_CL
CLOSE SUBSTED
BL_OPEN OP_BLKD
BL_CLOSE CL_BLKD
BL_UPD UPD_BLKD
POSOPEN POSITION
POSCLOSE OPENPOS
TR_OPEN CLOSEPOS
TR_CLOSE TR_POS
RS_CNT CNT_VAL
XIN L_CAUSE

IEC09000092_1_en.vsd
IEC09000092 V1 EN-US

Figure 111: SXSWI function block

10.3.4.4 Signals
PID-3367-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 182: SXSWI Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
TR_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of truck from I/O
TR_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of truck from I/O
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
XIN BOOLEAN 0 Execution information from CSWI

PID-3367-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 183: SXSWI Output signals

Name Type Description
XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for open commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for close commands
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position indication is blocked
POSITION INTEGER Apparatus position indication
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
Table continues on next page

234 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

Name Type Description

CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
TR_POS INTEGER Truck position indication
CNT_VAL INTEGER Operation counter value
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command

10.3.4.5 Settings
PID-3367-SETTINGS v1

Table 184: SXSWI Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Supervision time for the apparatus to
move after a command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 15.000 Allowed time for intermediate position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - - Not adaptive Output resets when a new correct end
Adaptive position is reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close command
SwitchType Load Break - - Disconnector 1=LoadBreak,2=Disconnector,3=GroundSw
Disconnector ,4=HighSpeedGroundSw
Grounding Switch
HS Groundg.
Switch
SuppressMidPos Disabled - - Enabled Mid-position is suppressed during the
Enabled time tIntermediate

10.3.5 Bay control QCBAY

10.3.5.1 Identification
GUID-0D5EE38C-0DEB-4753-AF0B-72286C4A98DA v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Bay control QCBAY - -

10.3.5.2 Functionality M13447-3 v5

The Bay control QCBAY function is used together with Local remote and local remote control
functions to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. QCBAY also provides blocking
functions that can be distributed to different apparatuses within the bay.

Bay control REC650 235

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

10.3.5.3 Function block M13469-3 v4

QCBAY
LR_OFF PSTO
LR_LOC UPD_BLKD
LR_REM CMD_BLKD
LR_VALID LOC
BL_UPD REM
BL_CMD

IEC09000080_1_en.vsd
IEC09000080 V1 EN-US

Figure 112: QCBAY function block

10.3.5.4 Signals
PID-1959-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 185: QCBAY Input signals

Name Type Default Description
LR_OFF BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Off position
LR_LOC BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Local position
LR_REM BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Remote position
LR_VALID BOOLEAN 0 Data representing the L/R switch position is valid
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the position updates
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the command

PID-1959-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 186: QCBAY Output signals

Name Type Description
PSTO INTEGER Value for the operator place allocation
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position is blocked
CMD_BLKD BOOLEAN Function is blocked for commands
LOC BOOLEAN Local operation allowed
REM BOOLEAN Remote operation allowed

10.3.5.5 Settings
PID-1959-SETTINGS v13

Table 187: QCBAY Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AllPSTOValid Priority - - Priority Priority of originators
No priority

236 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

10.3.6 Local remote LOCREM

10.3.6.1 Identification
GUID-CBF253B8-8F35-409C-BB8B-2DAC0CEEB8C6 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Local remote LOCREM - -

10.3.6.2 Functionality M17086-3 v5

The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch are applied via the function
blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL to the Bay control QCBAY function block. A parameter in
function block LOCREM is set to choose if the switch signals are coming from the local HMI or
from an external hardware switch connected via binary inputs.

10.3.6.3 Function block GUID-4FFF1093-E167-4079-91CA-A48F3801AF4E v1

LOCREM
CTRLOFF OFF
LOCCTRL LOCAL
REMCTRL REMOTE
LHMICTRL VALID

IEC09000076_1_en.vsd
IEC09000076 V1 EN-US

Figure 113: LOCREM function block

10.3.6.4 Signals
PID-1826-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 188: LOCREM Input signals

Name Type Default Description
CTRLOFF BOOLEAN 0 Disable control
LOCCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Local in control
REMCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Remote in control
LHMICTRL INTEGER 0 LHMI control

PID-1826-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 189: LOCREM Output signals

Name Type Description
OFF BOOLEAN Control is disabled
LOCAL BOOLEAN Local control is activated
REMOTE BOOLEAN Remote control is activated
VALID BOOLEAN Outputs are valid

Bay control REC650 237

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

10.3.6.5 Settings
PID-1826-SETTINGS v13

Table 190: LOCREM Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ControlMode Internal LR-switch - - Internal LR- Control mode for internal/external LR-
External LR- switch switch
switch

10.3.7 Local remote control LOCREMCTRL

10.3.7.1 Identification
GUID-0407526D-5F7E-437A-B40C-1F3391B7628D v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Local remote control LOCREMCTRL - -

10.3.7.2 Functionality M17086-3 v5

The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch are applied via the function
blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL to the Bay control QCBAY function block. A parameter in
function block LOCREM is set to choose if the switch signals are coming from the local HMI or
from an external hardware switch connected via binary inputs.

10.3.7.3 Function block GUID-A2934F58-DBF1-4535-887E-5D35D0EEEE43 v1

LOCREMCTRL
^PSTO1 ^HMICTR1
^PSTO2 ^HMICTR2
^PSTO3 ^HMICTR3
^PSTO4 ^HMICTR4
^PSTO5 ^HMICTR5
^PSTO6 ^HMICTR6
^PSTO7 ^HMICTR7
^PSTO8 ^HMICTR8
^PSTO9 ^HMICTR9
^PSTO10 ^HMICTR10
^PSTO11 ^HMICTR11
^PSTO12 ^HMICTR12

IEC09000074_1_en.vsd
IEC09000074 V1 EN-US

Figure 114: LOCREMCTRL function block

238 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

10.3.7.4 Signals
PID-1831-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 191: LOCREMCTRL Input signals

Name Type Default Description
PSTO1 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 1
PSTO2 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 2
PSTO3 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 3
PSTO4 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 4
PSTO5 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 5
PSTO6 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 6
PSTO7 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 7
PSTO8 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 8
PSTO9 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 9
PSTO10 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 10
PSTO11 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 11
PSTO12 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 12

PID-1831-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 192: LOCREMCTRL Output signals

Name Type Description
HMICTR1 INTEGER Bitmask output 1 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR2 INTEGER Bitmask output 2 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR3 INTEGER Bitmask output 3 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR4 INTEGER Bitmask output 4 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR5 INTEGER Bitmask output 5 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR6 INTEGER Bitmask output 6 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR7 INTEGER Bitmask output 7 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR8 INTEGER Bitmask output 8 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR9 INTEGER Bitmask output 9 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR10 INTEGER Bitmask output 10 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR11 INTEGER Bitmask output 11 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR12 INTEGER Bitmask output 12 to local remote LHMI input

10.3.7.5 Settings
PID-1831-SETTINGS v8
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

Bay control REC650 239

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

10.3.8 Select release SELGGIO

10.3.8.1 Identification
GUID-FA42CE9F-D69F-4FA3-A270-0D2F4B23E7E4 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Select release SELGGIO - -

10.3.8.2 Function block GUID-65693BDC-2316-4464-8D60-7FF923FDF2F4 v1

SELGGIO
SELECT1 RESERVED
SELECT2
SELECT3
SELECT4
SELECT5
SELECT6
SELECT7
SELECT8
SELECT9
SELECT10
SELECT11
SELECT12
SELECT13
SELECT14
SELECT15
SELECT16

IEC09000084_1_en.vsd
IEC09000084 V1 EN-US

Figure 115: SELGGIO function block

10.3.8.3 Signals
PID-1198-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 193: SELGGIO Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SELECT1 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 1
SELECT2 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 2
SELECT3 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 3
SELECT4 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 4
SELECT5 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 4
SELECT6 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 4
SELECT7 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 4
SELECT8 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 8
SELECT9 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 8
SELECT10 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 10
SELECT11 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 11
SELECT12 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 12
SELECT13 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 13
SELECT14 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 14
SELECT15 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 15
SELECT16 BOOLEAN 0 Select signal of control 16

240 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

PID-1198-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 194: SELGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
RESERVED BOOLEAN Select signal of control 16

10.3.8.4 Settings
PID-1198-SETTINGS v8
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

10.3.9 Operation principle

10.3.9.1 Switch controller SCSWI M13484-4 v3

The Switch controller (SCSWI) is provided with verification checks for the select - execute
sequence, that is, checks the conditions prior each step of the operation. The involved functions
for these condition verifications are interlocking, reservation, blockings and synchronism-check.

Control handling M13484-6 v3

.
Two types of control models can be used. The two control models are "direct with normal security"
and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security". The parameter CtlModel defines which
one of the two control models is used. The control model "direct with normal security" does not
require a select whereas, the "SBO with enhanced security" command model requires a select
before execution.

Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting position is not
supervised. Enhanced security means that the command sequence is supervised in three steps,
the selection, command evaluation and the supervision of position. Each step ends up with a
pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step in the command sequence is finished. If an error
occurs in one of the steps in the command sequence, the sequence is terminated and the error is
mapped into the enumerated variable "cause" attribute belonging to the pulsed response signal
for the IEC 61850 communication. The last cause L_CAUSE can be read from the function block and
used for example at commissioning.

There is no relation between the command direction and the actual position. For
example, if the switch is in close position it is possible to execute a close
command.

Before an execution command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the parameter

PosDependent is true and the position is in intermediate state or in bad state no execution
command is sent. If the parameter is false the execution command is sent independent of the
position value.

Evaluation of position M13484-14 v2

The position output from switch (SXCBR or SXSWI) is connected to SCSWI. With the group signal
connection the SCSWI obtains the position, time stamps and quality attributes of the position
which is used for further evaluation.

Bay control REC650 241

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause" values from the
switch modules Circuit breaker (SXCBR)/ Circuit switch (SXSWI). At error the "cause" value with
highest priority is shown.

Blocking principles M13484-37 v3

The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY) and via the IEC
61850 communication from the operator place.

The IEC 61850 communication has always priority over binary inputs, e.g. a block
command on binary inputs will not prevent commands over IEC 61850.

The different blocking possibilities are:

• Block/deblock of command. It is used to block command for operation of position.

• Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC 61850). If DO
Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated,
no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The different block conditions will only affect the operation of this function, that is,
no blocking signals will be "forwarded" to other functions. The above blocking
outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Interaction with synchronism-check and synchronizing functions M13484-47 v4

The Switch controller (SCSWI) works in conjunction with the synchronism-check and the
synchronizing function (SESRSYN, 25). It is assumed that the synchronism-check function is
continuously in operation and gives the result to SCSWI. The result from the synchronism-check
function is evaluated during the close execution. If the operator performs an override of the
synchronism-check, the evaluation of the synchronism-check state is omitted. When there is a
positive confirmation from the synchronism-check function, SCSWI will send the close signal
EXE_CL to the switch function Circuit breaker (SXCBR).

When there is no positive confirmation from the synchronism-check function, SCSWI will send a
start signal START_SY to the synchronizing function, which will send the closing command to
SXCBR when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled, see figure 116. If no synchronizing function
is included, the timer for supervision of the "synchronizing in progress signal" is set to 0, which
means no start of the synchronizing function. SCSWI will then set the attribute "blocked-by-
synchronism-check" in the "cause" signal. See also the time diagram in figure 119.

242 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

SCSWI SXCBR
EXE_CL
OR CLOSE

SYNC_OK

START_SY

SY_INPRO
SESRSYN

CLOSECMD
Synchro Synchronizing
check function

ANSI09000209-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000209 V1 EN-US

Figure 116: Example of interaction between SCSWI, SESRSYN (25) (synchronism check and
synchronizing function) and SXCBR function

Time diagrams M13484-51 v3

The Switch controller (SCSWI) function has timers for evaluating different time supervision
conditions. These timers are explained here.

The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the execute command
signal, that is, the time the operator has to perform the command execution after the selection of
the object to operate.

select
execute command
tSelect
timer t1 t1>tSelect, then long-
operation-time in 'cause'
is set

en05000092.vsd
IEC05000092 V1 EN-US

Figure 117: tSelect

The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the command
termination, see figure 118.

Bay control REC650 243

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

execute command

phase A open

close

phase B open

close

phase C open

close

command termination
phase A
command termination
phase B
command termination
phase C
command termination *

circuit breaker open

close

tExecutionFB t1>tExecutionFB, then

timer long-operation-time in
t1 'cause' is set

* The command termination will be delayed one execution sample.

en05000094_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000094 V1 EN-US

Figure 118: tExecutionFB

The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between the execute
command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true at the time the execute
command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will not start. The start signal for the
synchronizing is obtained if the synchronism-check conditions are not fulfilled.

execute command

SYNC_OK

tSynchrocheck
t1
START_SY

SY_INPRO

tSynchronizing
t2>tSynchronizing, then
t2 blocked-by-synchronism
check in 'cause' is set
en05000095_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000095 V1 EN-US

Figure 119: tSynchroCheck and tSynchronizing

Error handling M13484-70 v2

Depending on the error that occurs during the command sequence, the error signal will be set with
a value. Table 195 describes vendor specific cause values in addition to these specified in IEC
61850-8-1 standard. The list of values of the “cause” are in order of priority. The values are

244 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE on the function block indicates the latest value of
the error during the command.

Table 195: Values for "cause" signal in priority order

Apparatus control Description
function
–22 wrongCTLModel
–23 blockedForCommand
–24 blocked-for-open-command
–25 blocked-for-close-command
–30 longOperationTime
–31 switch-not-start-moving
–32 persistent-intermediate-state
–33 switch-returned-to-initial-position
–34 switch-in-bad-state
–35 not-expected-final-position

10.3.9.2 Circuit breaker SXCBR M13487-4 v3

The users of the Circuit breaker function (SXCBR) is other functions such as for example, switch
controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC 61850 client residing in another
IED or the operator place. This switch function executes commands, evaluates block conditions
and evaluates different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch
operation to be allowed, the function performs the execution command. In case of erroneous
conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause" value.

SXCBR has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter value can be
read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a binary input or remotely from the
operator place by configuring a signal from the Single Point Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO)
for example.

Local/Remote switch M13487-7 v2

One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXCBR to indicate the local/remote switch position
from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE it means that change of
position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command
from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of
position) from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are
rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in figure 120.

Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR

From I/O switchLR

FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level

en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN-US

Figure 120: Local/Remote switch

Bay control REC650 245

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

Blocking principles M13487-12 v4

SXCBR includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals is that they
will affect commands from all other clients for example, operators place, protection functions,
autoreclosure and so on.

The IEC 61850 communication has always priority over binary inputs, e.g. a block
command on binary inputs will not prevent commands over IEC 61850.

The blocking possibilities are:

• Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open command. Note that
this block signal also affects the input OPEN for immediate command.
• Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close command. Note that
this block signal also affects the input CLOSE for immediate command.
• Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values. Other
signals related to the position will be reset.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC 61850). If DO
Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated,
no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Substitution M13487-22 v2
The substitution part in SXCBR is used for manual set of the position for the switch. The typical
use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because that the real process value is
erroneous for some reason. SXCBR will then use the manually entered value instead of the value
for positions determined by the process.

It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position

indication and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution is
enabled, the position values are blocked for updating . The substituted values are
stored in a non-volatile memory.

Time diagrams M13487-28 v2

There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate.
tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse is
sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position. Figure 121
explains these two timers during the execute phase.

246 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

EXE_CL AdaptivePulse = TRUE

Close pulse duration

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

if t1 > tStartMove then

tStartMove timer "switch-not-start-moving"
t1 attribute in 'cause' is set
tStartMove

if t2 > tIntermediate then

tIntermediate timer "persisting-intermediate-state"
t2 attribute in 'cause' is set
tIntermediate

en05000097.vsd

IEC05000097 V1 EN-US

Figure 121: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to be sent to
the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command can have
different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the configuration
parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 122 shows the principle of the execute output pulse. The
AdaptivePulse parameter will have affect on both execute output pulses.

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
IEC05000098 V1 EN-US

Figure 122: Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or
tClosePulse.

The execute output pulses are reset when:

• the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is
set to true
• the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
• an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has elapsed.

Bay control REC650 247

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open position and an
open command is executed or if the primary device is in closed position and a close command is
executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove
has elapsed. If the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output
remains active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed.

If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS =1) when a
command is executed the execute output pulse resets only when timer tOpenPulse
or tClosePulse has elapsed.

An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown in
figure 123 .

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE

tOpenPulse

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE

tOpenPulse

tStartMove timer

en05000099.vsd
IEC05000099 V1 EN-US

Figure 123: Open command with open position indication

Error handling M13487-48 v2

Depending on the error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will be set with
a value. Table 196 describes vendor specific cause values in addition to these specified in IEC
61850-8-1 standard. The list of values of the “cause” are in order of priority. The values are
available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE on the function block indicates the latest value of
the error during the command.

Table 196: Vendor specific cause values for Apparatus control in priority order
Apparatus control Description
function
–22 wrongCTLModel
–23 blockedForCommand
–24 blocked-for-open-command
–25 blocked-for-close-command
–30 longOperationTime
–31 switch-not-start-moving
Table continues on next page

248 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

Apparatus control Description

function
–32 persistent-intermediate-state
–33 switch-returned-to-initial-position
–34 switch-in-bad-state
–35 not-expected-final-position

10.3.9.3 Circuit switch SXSWI M16494-3 v4

The users of the Circuit switch (SXSWI) is other functions such as for example, switch controller,
protection functions, autorecloser function, or a 61850 client residing in another IED or the
operator place. SXSWI executes commands, evaluates block conditions and evaluates different
time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, SXSWI
performs the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an
appropriate "cause" value.

SXSWI has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter value can be
read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a binary input or remotely from the
operator place by configuring a signal from the Single Point Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO)
for example.

Local/Remote switch M16494-6 v3

One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXSWI to indicate the local/remote switch position
from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE it means that change of
position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command
from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of
position) from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are
rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in figure 124.

Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR

From I/O switchLR

FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level

en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN-US

Figure 124: Local/Remote switch

Blocking principles M16494-11 v4

SXSWI includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals is that they
will affect commands from all other clients for example, operators place, protection functions,
autorecloser and so on.

The blocking possibilities are:

Bay control REC650 249

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

• Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open command. Note that
this block signal also affects the input OPEN for immediate command.
• Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close command. Note that
this block signal also affects the input CLOSE for immediate command.
• Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values. Other
signals related to the position will be reset.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC 61850). If DO
Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated,
no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Substitution M16494-21 v3
The substitution part in SXSWI is used for manual set of the position for the switch. The typical
use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because the real process value is
erroneous of some reason. SXSWI will then use the manually entered value instead of the value for
positions determined by the process.

It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position

indication and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution is
enabled, the position values are blocked for updating . The substituted values are
stored in a non-volatile memory.

Time diagrams M16494-26 v4

There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate.
tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse is
sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position. Figure 125
explains these two timers during the execute phase.

EXE_CL AdaptivePulse = TRUE

Close pulse duration

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

if t1 > tStartMove then

tStartMove timer "switch-not-start-moving"
t1 attribute in 'cause' is set
tStartMove

if t2 > tIntermediate then

tIntermediate timer "persisting-intermediate-state"
t2 attribute in 'cause' is set
tIntermediate

en05000097.vsd

IEC05000097 V1 EN-US

Figure 125: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

250 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to be sent to
the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command can have
different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the configuration
parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 126 shows the principle of the execute output pulse. The
AdaptivePulse parameter will have affect on both execute output pulses.

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
IEC05000098 V1 EN-US

Figure 126: Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or
tClosePulse.

The execute output pulses are reset when:

• the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is
set to true
• the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
• an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has elapsed.

There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open position and an
open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position and a close command is
executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove
has elapsed. If the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output
remains active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed.

If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS =1) when a
command is executed the execute output pulse resets only when timer tOpenPulse
or tClosePulse has elapsed.

An example when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown in
figure 127.

Bay control REC650 251

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE

tOpenPulse

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE

tOpenPulse

tStartMove timer

en05000099.vsd
IEC05000099 V1 EN-US

Figure 127: Open command with open position indication

Error handling M16494-46 v3

Depending on the error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will be set with
a value. Table 197 describes vendor specific cause values in addition to these specified in IEC
61850-8-1 standard. The list of values of the “cause” are in order of priority. The values are
available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE on the function block indicates the latest value of
the error during the command.

Table 197: Values for "cause" signal in priority order

Apparatus control Description
function
–22 wrongCTLModel
–23 blockedForCommand
–24 blocked-for-open-command
–25 blocked-for-close-command
–30 longOperationTime
–31 switch-not-start-moving
–32 persistent-intermediate-state
–33 switch-returned-to-initial-position
–34 switch-in-bad-state
–35 not-expected-final-position

10.3.9.4 Bay control QCBAY M13446-4 v4

The functionality of the Bay control (QCBAY) function is not defined in the IEC 61850–8–1 standard,
which means that the function is a vendor specific logical node.

The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) and blocking
conditions to other functions within the bay for example, switch control functions, voltage control
functions and measurement functions.

252 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

Local panel switch M13446-7 v5

The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection. The switch connected
to this function can have three positions remote/local/off. The positions are here defined so that
remote means that operation is allowed from station/remote level and local from the IED level.
The local/remote switch is also on the control/protection IED itself, which means that the position
of the switch and its validity information are connected internally, and not via I/O boards. When
the switch is mounted separately from the IED the signals are connected to the function via I/O
boards.

When the local panel switch (or LHMI selection, depending on the set source to select this) is in Off
position, all commands from remote and local level will be ignored. If the position for the local/
remote switch is not valid the PSTO output will always be set to faulty state (3), which means no
possibility to operate.

To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch, the function
blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL are needed and connected to QCBAY.

Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) M13446-16 v5

The actual state of the operator place is presented by the value of the Permitted Source To
Operate, PSTO signal. The PSTO value is evaluated from the local/remote switch position
according to table 198. In addition, there is one setting parameter that affects the value of the
PSTO signal. If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set and LR-switch position is in Local or Remote
state, the PSTO value is set to 5 (all), that is, it is permitted to operate from both local and remote
level without any priority. When the external panel switch is in Off position the PSTO value shows
the actual state of switch that is, 0. In this case it is not possible to control anything.

Table 198: PSTO values for different Local panel switch positions
Local panel switch PSTO value AllPSTOValid Possible locations that shall be able
positions (setting to operate
parameter)
0 = Off 0 -- Not possible to operate
1 = Local 1 Priority Local Panel
1 = Local 5 No priority Local or Remote level without any
priority
2 = Remote 2 Priority Remote level
2 = Remote 5 No priority Local or Remote level without any
priority
3 = Faulty 3 -- Not possible to operate

Blockings M13446-50 v3
The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide the possibility
for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured within a complete bay.

The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:

• Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs related to apparatus
positions for all configured functions within the bay.
• Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all configured
functions within the bay.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC 61850–8–1). If DO
Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated,
no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

Bay control REC650 253

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level. The password
will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been defined in the IED.
Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the control without LogOn. The users
and passwords are defined in PCM600.

10.3.9.5 Local remote/Local remote control LOCREM/LOCREMCTRL M17087-3 v5

The function block Local remote (LOCREM) handles the signals coming from the local/remote
switch. The connections are seen in figure 128, where the inputs on function block LOCREM are
connected to binary inputs if an external switch is used. When the local HMI is used, the inputs are
not used and are set to FALSE in the configuration. The outputs from the LOCREM function block
control the output PSTO (Permitted Source To Operate) on Bay control (QCBAY).

LOCREM QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_ OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_ VALID LOC
BL_ UPD REM
BL_ CMD

LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1 HMICTR1
PSTO2 HMICTR2
PSTO3 HMICTR3
PSTO4 HMICTR4
PSTO5 HMICTR5
PSTO6 HMICTR6
PSTO7 HMICTR7
PSTO8 HMICTR8
PSTO9 HMICTR9
PSTO10 HMICTR10
PSTO11 HMICTR11
PSTO12 HMICTR12

IEC 09000208_1_en. vsd

IEC09000208 V2 EN-US

Figure 128: Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local HMI with one bay and one
screen page
The switching of the local/remote switch requires at least system operator level. The password
will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been defined in the IED.
Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the control without LogOn. The users
and passwords are defined in PCM600.

10.4 Interlocking

10.4.1 Functionality M15106-3 v6

The interlocking functionality blocks the possibility to operate high-voltage switching devices, for
instance when a disconnector is under load, in order to prevent material damage and/or
accidental human injury.

254 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

Each control IED has interlocking functions for different switchyard arrangements, each handling
the interlocking of one bay. The interlocking functionality in each IED is not dependent on any
central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the IEDs communicate via the station bus or by
using hard wired binary inputs/outputs.

The interlocking conditions depend on the primary bus configuration and status of any breaker or
switch at any given time.

10.4.2 Logical node for interlocking SCILO (3) IP14138-1 v2

10.4.2.1 Identification
GUID-3EC5D7F1-FDA0-4F0E-9391-08D357689E0C v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logical node for interlocking SCILO - 3

10.4.2.2 Functionality M15048-3 v5

The Logical node for interlocking SCILO(3) function is used to enable a switching operation if the
interlocking conditions permit. SCILO (3) function itself does not provide any interlocking
functionality. The interlocking conditions are generated in separate function blocks containing the
interlocking logic and provides SCILO(3) its input.

10.4.2.3 Function block M15049-3 v5

SCILO (3)
POSOPEN EN_OPEN
POSCLOSE EN_CLOSE
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN

ANSI09000083-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000083 V1 EN-US

Figure 129: SCILO (3) function block

10.4.2.4 Logic diagram M15086-3 v5

The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if the
interlocking conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch being controlled has its position
defined as open (via POSOPEN) for example, then the appropriate enable signal output (in this
case EN_OPEN) is false. The switch operation enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be true
at the same time only in the intermediate and bad position state of the switch (defined via
POSOPEN and POSCLOSE) and if they are enabled by the interlocking function. The position inputs
come from the logical nodes Circuit breaker/Circuit switch (SXCBR/SXSWI) and the enable
signals , OPEN_EN and CLOSE_EN come from the interlocking logic. The outputs are connected to
the logical node Switch controller (SCSWI). One instance per switching device is needed.

Bay control REC650 255

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

POSOPEN SCILO
POSCLOSE XOR NOT
AND EN_OPEN
OR
AND

OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN AND EN_CLOSE
OR
AND
en04000525_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000525 V1 EN-US

Figure 130: SCILO (3) function logic diagram

10.4.2.5 Signals
PID-1858-INPUTSIGNALS v18

Table 199: SCILO (3) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open position of switch device
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Closed position of switch device
OPEN_EN BOOLEAN 0 Open operation from interlocking logic is enabled
CLOSE_EN BOOLEAN 0 Close operation from interlocking logic is enabled

PID-1858-OUTPUTSIGNALS v18

Table 200: SCILO (3) Output signals

Name Type Description
EN_OPEN BOOLEAN Open operation at closed or intermediate or bad position is
enabled
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN Close operation at open or intermediate or bad position is
enabled

10.4.2.6 Settings
PID-1858-SETTINGS v11
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

10.4.3 Interlocking for busbar grounding switch BB_ES (3) IP14164-1 v4

256 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

10.4.3.1 Identification
GUID-F3CBAFDC-3723-429F-9183-45229A6F0A12 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Interlocking for busbar grounding BB_ES - 3
switch

10.4.3.2 Functionality M15015-3 v6

The interlocking for busbar grounding switch (BB_ES, 3) function is used for one busbar grounding
switch on any busbar parts according to figure 131.

89G

en04000504.vsd
ANSI04000504 V1 EN-US

Figure 131: Switchyard layout BB_ES (3)

10.4.3.3 Function block M15069-3 v5

BB_ES (3)
89G_OP 89GREL
89G_CL 89GITL
BB_DC_OP BBGSOPTR
VP_BB_DC BBGSCLTR
EXDU_BB

ANSI09000071-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000071 V1 EN-US

Figure 132: BB_ES (3) function block

10.4.3.4 Logic diagram M15103-3 v3

BB_ES
VP_BB_DC 89GREL
BB_DC_OP AND 89GITL
EXDU_BB NOT

89G_OP BBGSOPTR
89G_CL BBGSCLTR

en04000546_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000546 V1 EN-US

Bay control REC650 257

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

10.4.3.5 Signals
PID-1867-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 201: BB_ES (3) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
89G_OP BOOLEAN 0 Busbar grounding switch 89G is in open position
89G_CL BOOLEAN 0 Busbar grounding switch 89G is in closed position
BB_DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on this busbar part are open
VP_BB_DC BOOLEAN 0 Status for all disconnectors on this busbar part are valid
EXDU_BB BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bay containing all disconnectors
on this busbar part

PID-1867-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 202: BB_ES (3) Output signals

Name Type Description
89GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 89G is allowed
89GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 89G is not allowed
BBGSOPTR BOOLEAN 89G on this busbar part is in open position
BBGSCLTR BOOLEAN 89G on this busbar part is in closed position

10.4.3.6 Settings
PID-1867-SETTINGS v2
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

10.4.4 Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS (3) IP14154-1 v2

10.4.4.1 Identification
GUID-29EF1F25-E10A-4C82-A6B7-FA246D9C6CD2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS - 3

10.4.4.2 Functionality M15110-3 v6

The interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS ,3) function is used for one bus-section circuit
breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 133. The function can be used for different
busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit breaker.

258 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

189G 189 289 289G

152

389G 489G

A1A2_BS
en04000516_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000516 V1 EN-US

Figure 133: Switchyard layout A1A2_BS (3)

10.4.4.3 Function block M13535-3 v5

A1A2_BS (3)
152_OP 152OPREL
152_CL 152OPITL
189_OP 152CLREL
189_CL 152CLITL
289_OP 189REL
289_CL 189ITL
389G_OP 289REL
389G_CL 289ITL
489G_OP 389GREL
489G_CL 389GITL
S189G_OP 489GREL
S189G_CL 489GITL
S289G_OP S1S2OPTR
S289G_CL S1S2CLTR
BBTR_OP 189OPTR
VP_BBTR 189CLTR
EXDU_12 289OPTR
EXDU_89G 289CLTR
152O_EX1 VPS1S2TR
152O_EX2 VP189TR
152O_EX3 VP289TR
189_EX1
189_EX2
289_EX1
289_EX2

ANSI09000066-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000066 V1 EN-US

Figure 134: A1A2_BS (3) function block

Bay control REC650 259

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

10.4.4.4 Logic diagram M15098-3 v3

A1A2_BS
152_OP
152_CL XOR VP152
189_OP
189_CL XOR VP189
289_OP
289_CL XOR VP289
389G_OP
389G_CL XOR VP389G
489G_OP
489G_CL XOR VP489G
S1189G_OP
S1189G_CL XOR VPS1189G
S2289G_OP
S2289G_CL XOR VPS2289G
VP189
189_OP AND OR 152OPREL
152O_EX1 152OPITL
NOT
VP289
289_OP AND
152O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP AND
EXDU_12
152O_EX3

VP189 152CLREL
VP289 AND 152CLITL
NOT
VP152
VP389G AND OR 189REL
VP489G 189ITL
NOT
VPS1189G
152_OP
389G_OP
489G_OP
S1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1

VP389G
VPS1189G AND
389G_CL
S1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX2

en04000542_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000542 V1 EN-US

260 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

VP152
VP389G AND OR 289REL
VP489G 289ITL
NOT
VPS2289G
152_OP
389G_OP
489G_OP
S2289G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1

VP489G
VPS2289G AND
489G_CL
S2289G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX2

VP189 389GREL
VP289 AND 389GITL
189_OP NOT
489GREL
289_OP
489GITL
NOT

189_OP 189OPTR
189_CL 189CLTR
VP189 VP189TR

289_OP 289OPTR
289_CL 289CLTR
VP289 VP289TR
189_OP S1S2OPTR
289_OP OR S1S2CLTR
152_OP NOT

VP189 VPS1S2TR
VP289 AND
VP152

en04000543_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000543 V1 EN-US

10.4.4.5 Signals
PID-1871-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 203: A1A2_BS (3) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
152_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position
152_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position
189_OP BOOLEAN 0 189 is in open position
189_CL BOOLEAN 0 189 is in closed position
289_OP BOOLEAN 0 289 is in open position
289_CL BOOLEAN 0 289 is in closed position
389G_OP BOOLEAN 0 389G is in open position
389G_CL BOOLEAN 0 389G is in closed position
489G_OP BOOLEAN 0 489G is in open position
489G_CL BOOLEAN 0 489G is in closed position
S189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 S189G on bus section 1 is in open position
S189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 S189G on bus section 1 is in closed position
S289G_OP BOOLEAN 0 S289G on bus section 2 is in open position
S289G_CL BOOLEAN 0 S289G on bus section 2 is in closed position
BBTR_OP BOOLEAN 0 No busbar transfer is in progress
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 261

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

Name Type Default Description

VP_BBTR BOOLEAN 0 Status are valid for apparatuses involved in the busbar transfer
EXDU_12 BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bay connected to busbar 1 and 2
EXDU_89G BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from bays containing grounding switches
QC1 or QC2
152O_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus 152
152O_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus 152
152O_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus 152
189_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
189_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
289_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
289_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289

PID-1871-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 204: A1A2_BS (3) Output signals

Name Type Description
152OPREL BOOLEAN Opening of 152 is allowed
152OPITL BOOLEAN Opening of 152 is not allowed
152CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is allowed
152CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is not allowed
189REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is allowed
189ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is not allowed
289REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is allowed
289ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is not allowed
389GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 389G is allowed
389GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 389G is not allowed
489GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 489G is allowed
489GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 489G is not allowed
S1S2OPTR BOOLEAN No bus section connection between bus section 1 and 2
S1S2CLTR BOOLEAN Bus coupler connection between bus section 1 and 2 exists
189OPTR BOOLEAN 189 is in open position
189CLTR BOOLEAN 189 is in closed position
289OPTR BOOLEAN 289 is in open position
289CLTR BOOLEAN 289 is in closed position
VPS1S2TR BOOLEAN Status of the apparatuses between bus section 1 and 2 are valid
VP189TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed)
VP289TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 289 is valid (open or closed)

262 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

10.4.4.6 Settings
PID-1871-SETTINGS v2
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

10.4.5 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC (3) IP14159-1 v2

10.4.5.1 Identification
GUID-0A0229EB-5ECD-405C-B706-6A54CBBDB49D v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Interlocking for bus-section A1A2_DC - 3
disconnector

10.4.5.2 Functionality M13544-3 v6

The interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC, 3) function is used for one bus-section
disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 135. A1A2_DC (3) function can be used
for different busbars, which includes a bus-section disconnector.

WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

52

189G 289G

A1A2_DC en04000492_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000492 V1 EN-US

Figure 135: Switchyard layout A1A2_DC (3)

Bay control REC650 263

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

10.4.5.3 Function block M13541-3 v5

A1A2_DC (3)
089_OP 089OPREL
089_CL 089OPITL
S189G_OP 089CLREL
S189G_CL 089CLITL
S289G_OP DCOPTR
S289G_CL DCCLTR
S1DC_OP VPDCTR
S2DC_OP
VPS1_DC
VPS2_DC
EXDU_89G
EXDU_BB
089C_EX1
089C_EX2
089O_EX1
089O_EX2
089O_EX3

ANSI09000067-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000067 V1 EN-US

Figure 136: A1A2_DC (3) function block

10.4.5.4 Logic diagram M15099-3 v4

A1A2_DC
89_OP
VPQB VPDCTR
89_CL XOR
DCOPTR
DCCLTR
S1189G_OP
VPS1189G
S1189G_CL XOR
S2289G_OP
VPS2289G
S2289G_CL XOR

VPS1189G
VPS2289G AND OR
VPS1_DC 89OPREL
S1189G_OP NOT
89OPITL
S2289G_OP
S1DC_OP
EXDU_89G

EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX1

VPS1189
VPS2289G AND
VPS2_DC
S1189G_OP
S2289G_OP
S2DC_OP
EXDU_89G

EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX2

VPS1189G
VPS2289G AND
S1189G_CL
S2289G_CL
EXDU_89G
QBOP_EX3

en04000544_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000544 V1 EN-US

264 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

AND OR

NOT

AND

ANSI11000276-1-vsd

ANSI11000276 V1 EN-US

10.4.5.5 Signals
PID-1872-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 205: A1A2_DC (3) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
089_OP BOOLEAN 0 089 is in open position
089_CL BOOLEAN 0 089 is in closed position
S189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 S189G on bus section 1 is in open position
S189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 S189G on bus section 1 is in closed position
S289G_OP BOOLEAN 0 S289G on bus section 2 is in open position
S289G_CL BOOLEAN 0 S289G on bus section 2 is in closed position
S1DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on bus section 1 are in open position
S2DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on bus section 2 are in open position
VPS1_DC BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 1 are valid
VPS2_DC BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 2 are valid
EXDU_89G BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from bays containing grounding switches
QC1 or QC2
EXDU_BB BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from bays with disconnectors connected to
sections 1 and 2
089C_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External close condition for section disconnector 089
089C_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External close condition for section disconnector 089
089O_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector 089
089O_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector 089
089O_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector 089

Bay control REC650 265

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

PID-1872-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 206: A1A2_DC (3) Output signals

Name Type Description
089OPREL BOOLEAN Opening of 089 is allowed
089OPITL BOOLEAN Opening of 089 is not allowed
089CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 089 is allowed
089CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 089 is not allowed
DCOPTR BOOLEAN The bus section disconnector is in open position
DCCLTR BOOLEAN The bus section disconnector is in closed position
VPDCTR BOOLEAN Switch status of 089 is valid (open or closed)

10.4.5.6 Settings
PID-1872-SETTINGS v2
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

10.4.6 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC (3) IP14144-1 v2

10.4.6.1 Identification
GUID-8149EE0A-E2A4-431C-9D07-D1A0BD296743 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC - 3

10.4.6.2 Functionality M13555-3 v7

The interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC, 3) function is used for a bus-coupler bay connected
to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 137. The function can also be used for a single
busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar.

266 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)

189 289 2089 789

189G

152

289G

en04000514_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000514 V1 EN-US

Figure 137: Switchyard layout ABC_BC (3)

The interlocking functionality in 650 series can not handle the transfer bus WA7(C).

Bay control REC650 267

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

10.4.6.3 Function block M13552-3 v5

ABC_BC (3)
152_OP 152OPREL
152_CL 152OPITL
189_OP 152CLREL
189_CL 152CLITL
289_OP 189REL
289_CL 189ITL
789_OP 289REL
789_CL 289ITL
2089_OP 789REL
2089_CL 789ITL
189G_OP 2089REL
189G_CL 2089ITL
289G_OP 189GREL
289G_CL 189GITL
1189G_OP 289GREL
1189G_CL 289GITL
2189G_OP 189OPTR
2189G_CL 189CLTR
7189G_OP 22089OTR
7189G_CL 22089CTR
BBTR_OP 789OPTR
BC_12_CL 789CLTR
VP_BBTR 1289OPTR
VP_BC_12 1289CLTR
EXDU_89G BC12OPTR
EXDU_12 BC12CLTR
EXDU_BC BC17OPTR
152O_EX1 BC17CLTR
152O_EX2 BC27OPTR
152O_EX3 BC27CLTR
189_EX1 VP189TR
189_EX2 V22089TR
189_EX3 VP789TR
289_EX1 VP1289TR
289_EX2 VPBC12TR
289_EX3 VPBC17TR
2089_EX1 VPBC27TR
2089_EX2
789_EX1
789_EX2

ANSI09000069-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000069 V1 EN-US

Figure 138: ABC_BC (3) function block

268 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

10.4.6.4 Logic diagram M15095-3 v3

ABC_BC
152_OP
152_CL XOR VP152
189_OP
189_CL XOR VP189
2089_OP
2089_CL XOR VP2089
789_OP
789_CL XOR VP789
289_OP
289_CL XOR VP289
189G_OP
189G_CL XOR VP189G
289G_OP
289G_CL XOR VP289G
1189G_OP
1189G_CL XOR VP1189G
2189G_OP
2189G_CL XOR VP2189G
7189G_OP
7189G_CL XOR VP7189G
VP189
189_OP AND
152OPREL
OR
152O_EX1 152OPITL
NOT
VP2089
2089_OP AND
152O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP AND
EXDU_12
152O_EX3
VP189 152CLREL
VP289 AND 152CLITL
VP789 NOT
VP2089
en04000533_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000533 V1 EN-US

VP152
VP289 AND OR 189REL
VP189G 189ITL
VP289G NOT
VP1189G
152_OP
289_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP289
VP_BC_12 AND
289_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
189_EX2
VP189G
VP1189G AND
189G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX3

en04000534_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000534 V1 EN-US

Bay control REC650 269

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

VP152
VP189 AND OR 289REL
VP189G 289ITL
VP289G NOT
VP2189G
152_OP
189_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1
VP189
VP_BC_12 AND
189_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
289_EX2
VP189G
VP2189G AND
189G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX3

en04000535_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000535 V1 EN-US

VP152
VP2089 AND OR 789REL
VP189G 789ITL
VP289G NOT
VP7189G
152_OP
2089_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
7189G_OP
EXDU_89G
789_EX1
VP289G
VP7189G AND
289G_CL
7189G_CL
EXDU_89G
789_EX2
VP152
VP789 AND OR
2089REL
VP189G 2089ITL
VP289G NOT
VP2189G
152_OP
789_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
2089_EX1
VP289G
VP2189G AND
289G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
2089_EX2

en04000536_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000536 V1 EN-US

270 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

VP189 189GREL
VP2089 AND 189GITL
VP789 NOT
289GREL
VP289
189_OP NOT
289GITL
2089_OP
789_OP
289_OP
189_OP 189OPTR
189_CL 189CLTR
VP189 VP189TR
2089_OP 22089OTR
289_OP AND 22089CTR
VP2089 NOT
V22089TR
VP289 AND
789_OP 789OPTR
789_CL 789CLTR
VP789 VP789TR
189_OP 1289OPTR
289_OP OR 1289CLTR
VP189 NOT
VP1289TR
VP289 AND
152_OP BC12OPTR
189_OP OR BC12CLTR
2089_OP NOT
VP152
VPBC12TR
VP189 AND
VP2089
152_OP BC17OPTR
189_OP OR BC17CLTR
789_OP NOT
VP152
VPBC17TR
VP189 AND
VP789
152_OP BC27OPTR
289_OP OR BC27CLTR
789_OP NOT
VP152
VPBC27TR
VP289 AND
VP789

en04000537_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000537 V1 EN-US

10.4.6.5 Signals
PID-1873-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 207: ABC_BC (3) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
152_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position
152_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position
189_OP BOOLEAN 0 189 is in open position
189_CL BOOLEAN 0 189 is in closed position
289_OP BOOLEAN 0 289 is in open position
289_CL BOOLEAN 0 289 is in closed position
789_OP BOOLEAN 0 789 is in open position
789_CL BOOLEAN 0 789 is in closed position
2089_OP BOOLEAN 0 2089 is in open position
2089_CL BOOLEAN 0 2089 is in closed position
189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G is in open position
189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G is in closed position
289G_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G is in open position
289G_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G is in closed position
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 271

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

Name Type Default Description

1189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in open position
1189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in closed position
2189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in open position
2189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in closed position
7189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 7189G on busbar WA7 is in open position
7189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 7189G on busbar WA7 is in closed position
BBTR_OP BOOLEAN 0 No busbar transfer is in progress
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 Bus coupler connection exists between bus1 and bus2
VP_BBTR BOOLEAN 0 Status are valid for apparatuses involved in the busbar transfer
VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of bus coupler apparatuses between bus1 and bus 2 are
valid.
EXDU_89G BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bay containing grounding
switches
EXDU_12 BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bay connected to bus1 and bus2
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any other bus coupler bay
152O_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus 152
152O_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus 152
152O_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus 152
189_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
189_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
189_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
289_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
289_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
289_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
2089_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 2089
2089_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 2089
789_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 789
789_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 789

PID-1873-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 208: ABC_BC (3) Output signals

Name Type Description
152OPREL BOOLEAN Opening of 152 is allowed
152OPITL BOOLEAN Opening of 152 is not allowed
152CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is allowed
152CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is not allowed
189REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is allowed
189ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is not allowed
289REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is allowed
Table continues on next page

272 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

Name Type Description

289ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is not allowed
789REL BOOLEAN Switching of 789 is allowed
789ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 789 is not allowed
2089REL BOOLEAN Switching of 2089 is allowed
2089ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 2089 is not allowed
189GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is allowed
189GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is not allowed
289GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is allowed
289GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is not allowed
189OPTR BOOLEAN 189 is in open position
189CLTR BOOLEAN 189 is in closed position
22089OTR BOOLEAN 289 and 2089 are in open position
22089CTR BOOLEAN 289 or 2089 or both are not in open position
789OPTR BOOLEAN 789 is in open position
789CLTR BOOLEAN 789 is in closed position
1289OPTR BOOLEAN 189 or 289 or both are in open position
1289CLTR BOOLEAN 189 and 289 are not in open position
BC12OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA2
BC12CLTR BOOLEAN Connection exists via the own bus coupler between Bus1 and Bus2
BC17OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA7
BC17CLTR BOOLEAN Connection exists via the own bus coupler between Bus1 and Bus7
BC27OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between WA2 and WA7
BC27CLTR BOOLEAN Connection exists via the own bus coupler between Bus2 and bus7
VP189TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed)
V22089TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 289 and 2089 are valid (open or closed)
VP789TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 789 is valid (open or closed)
VP1289TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 and 289 are valid (open or closed)
VPBC12TR BOOLEAN Status of bus coupler apparatuses between bus1 and bus 2 are
valid.
VPBC17TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler apparatuses between Bus1 and Bus7 are
valid
VPBC27TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler apparatuses between Bus2 and Bus7 are
valid

10.4.6.6 Settings
PID-1873-SETTINGS v2
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

10.4.7 Interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter BH (3) IP14173-1 v3

Bay control REC650 273

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

10.4.7.1 Identification
GUID-03F1A3BB-4A1E-49E8-88C6-10B3876F64DA v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker BH_CONN - 3
diameter
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker BH_LINE_A - 3
diameter
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker BH_LINE_B - 3
diameter

10.4.7.2 Functionality M13570-3 v5

The interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter (BH_CONN(3), BH_LINE_A(3), BH_LINE_B(3))

functions are used for lines connected to a breaker-and-a-half diameter according to figure 139.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
189 289
189G 189G

152 152
289G 289G

689 689

389G 389G
BH_LINE_A BH_LINE_B

6189 6289
152

989 989
189G 289G
989G 989G

BH_CONN
en04000513_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000513 V1 EN-US

Figure 139: Switchyard layout breaker-and-a-half

M13570-7 v3
Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A (3) and BH_LINE_B (3)
are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN (3) is the connection between the two lines
of the diameter in the breaker-and-a-half switchyard layout.

274 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

10.4.7.3 Function block

M13582-3 v5

BH_CONN (3)
152_OP 152CLREL
152_CL 152CLITL
6189_OP 6189REL
6189_CL 6189ITL
6289_OP 6289REL
6289_CL 6289ITL
189G_OP 189GREL
189G_CL 189GITL
289G_OP 289GREL
289G_CL 289GITL
1389G_OP
1389G_CL
2389G_OP
2389G_CL
6189_EX1
6189_EX2
6289_EX1
6289_EX2

ANSI09000072-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000072 V1 EN-US

Figure 140: BH_CONN (3) function block

M13574-3 v5

BH_LINE_A (3)
152_OP 152CLREL
152_CL 152CLITL
689_OP 689REL
689_CL 689ITL
189_OP 189REL
189_CL 189ITL
189G_OP 189GREL
189G_CL 189GITL
289G_OP 289GREL
289G_CL 289GITL
389G_OP 389GREL
389G_CL 389GITL
989_OP 989REL
989_CL 989ITL
989G_OP 989GREL
989G_CL 989GITL
C152_OP 189OPTR
C152_CL 189CLTR
C6189_OP VP189TR
C6189_CL
C189G_OP
C189G_CL
C289G_OP
C289G_CL
1189G_OP
1189G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_89G
689_EX1
689_EX2
189_EX1
189_EX2
989_EX1
989_EX2
989_EX3
989_EX4
989_EX5
989_EX6
989_EX7

ANSI09000073-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000073 V1 EN-US

Figure 141: BH_LINE_A (3) function block

Bay control REC650 275

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

M13578-3 v5

BH_LINE_B (3)
152_OP 152CLREL
152_CL 152CLITL
689_OP 689REL
689_CL 689ITL
289_OP 289REL
289_CL 289ITL
189G_OP 189GREL
189G_CL 189GITL
289G_OP 289GREL
289G_CL 289GITL
389G_OP 389GREL
389G_CL 389GITL
989_OP 989REL
989_CL 989ITL
989G_OP 989GREL
989G_CL 989GITL
C152_OP 289OPTR
C152_CL 289CLTR
C6289_OP VP289TR
C6289_CL
C189G_OP
C189G_CL
C289G_OP
C289G_CL
2189G_OP
2189G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_89G
689_EX1
689_EX2
289_EX1
289_EX2
989_EX1
989_EX2
989_EX3
989_EX4
989_EX5
989_EX6
989_EX7

ANSI09000081-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000081 V1 EN-US

Figure 142: BH_LINE_B function block

276 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

10.4.7.4 Logic diagrams

M13577-1 v4

BH_CONN
152_OP
152_CL XOR VP152
6189_OP
6189_CL XOR VP6189
6289_OP
6289_CL XOR VP6289
189G_OP
189G_CL XOR VP189G
289G_OP
289G_CL XOR VP289G
1389G_OP
1389G_CL XOR VP1389G
2389G_OP
2389G_CL XOR VP2389G
VP6189 152CLREL
VP6289 AND 152CLITL
NOT
VP152
VP189G AND OR 6189REL
VP289G 61891ITL
NOT
VP1389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1389G_OP
6189_EX1
VP189G
VP1389G AND
189G_CL
1389G_CL
6189_EX2
VP152
VP189G AND OR 6289REL
VP289G 6289ITL
NOT
VP2389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2389G_OP
6289_EX1
VP289G
VP2389G AND
289G_CL
2389G_CL
6289_EX2
VP6189 189GREL
VP6289 AND NOT 189GITL
6189_OP 289GREL
6289_OP NOT
289GITL

en04000560_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000560 V1 EN-US

Bay control REC650 277

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

BH_LINE_A
152_OP
152_CL XOR VP152
189_OP
189_CL XOR VP189
689_OP
689_CL XOR VP689
989G_OP
989G_CL XOR VP989G
989_OP
989_CL XOR VP989
189G_OP
189G_CL XOR VP189G
289G_OP
289G_CL XOR VP289G
389G_OP
389G_CL XOR VP389G
C152_OP
C152_CL XOR VPC152
C189G_OP
C189G_CL XOR VPC189G
C289G_OP
C289G_CL XOR VPC289G
C6189_OP
C6189_CL XOR VPC6189
1189G_OP
1189G_CL XOR VP1189G
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON XOR VPVOLT
VP189 152CLREL
VP689 152CLITL
AND NOT
VP989
VP152
VP189G 689REL
AND OR
VP289G 689ITL
NOT
VP389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
689_EX1
VP289G
VP389G
AND
289G_CL
389G_CL
689_EX2
en04000554_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000554 V1 EN-US

278 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

VP152
VP189G AND OR 189REL
VP289G 189ITL
NOT
VP1189G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1

VP189G
VP1189G AND
189G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX2

VP189 189GREL
VP689 AND 189GITL
NOT
189_OP 289GREL
689_OP 289GITL
VP689 NOT
VP989 AND 389GREL
VPC6189 389GITL
NOT
689_OP
989_OP
C6189_OP
VP152 989REL
VP689 AND OR 989ITL
NOT
VP989G
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VPC152
VPC6189
VPC189G
VPC289G
989_EX1
689_OP
989_EX2 OR
152_OP
189G_OP AND
289G_OP
989_EX3

en04000555_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000555 V1 EN-US

C6189_OP
989_EX4
OR AND OR
C152_OP
C189G_OP AND
C289G_OP
989_EX5
989G_OP
389G_OP
989_EX6
VP989G
VP389G AND
989G_CL
389G_CL
989_EX7
VP989 989GREL
VPVOLT AND 989GITL
NOT
989_OP
VOLT_OFF
189_OP 189OPTR
189_CL 189CLTR
VP189 VP189TR

en04000556_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000556 V1 EN-US

Bay control REC650 279

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

BH_LINE_B
152_OP
152_CL XOR VP152
289_OP
289_CL XOR VP289
689_OP
689_CL XOR VP689
989G_OP
989G_CL XOR VP989G
989_OP
989_CL XOR VP989
189G_OP
189G_CL XOR VP189G
289G_OP
289G_CL XOR VP289G
389G_OP
389G_CL XOR VP389G
C152_OP
C152_CL XOR VPC152
C189G_OP
C189G_CL XOR VPC189G
C289G_OP
C289G_CL XOR VPC289G
C6289_OP
C6289_CL XOR VPC6289
2189G_OP
2189G_CL XOR VP2189G
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON XOR VPVOLT
VP289 152CLREL
VP689 AND 152CLITL
NOT
VP989
VP152
VP189G AND OR 689REL
VP289G 689ITL
VP389G NOT
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
689_EX1
VP289G
VP389G AND
289G_CL
389G_CL
689_EX2
en04000557_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000557 V1 EN-US

280 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

VP152
VP189G 289REL
AND OR
VP289G 289ITL
VP2189G NOT
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1

VP189G
VP2189G AND
189G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX2

VP289 189GREL
VP689 189GITL
AND NOT
289_OP 289GREL
689_OP 289GITL
VP689 NOT
VP989 389GREL
AND
VPC6289 389GITL
NOT
689_OP
989_OP
C6289_OP
VP152 989REL
VP689
AND OR 989ITL
VP989G NOT
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VPC152
VPC6289
VPC189G
VPC289G
989_EX1
689_OP
989_EX2
152_OP OR
189G_OP
AND
289G_OP
989_EX3

en04000558_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000558 V1 EN-US

C6289_OP
989_EX4
OR AND OR
C152_OP
C189G_OP
AND
C289G_OP
989_EX5
989G_OP
389G_OP
989_EX6
VP989G
VP389G AND
989G_CL
389G_CL
989_EX7
VP989 989GREL
VPVOLT AND NOT 989GITL
989_OP
VOLT_OFF
289_OP 289OPTR
289_CL 289CLTR
VP289 VP289TR

en04000559_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000559 V1 EN-US

Bay control REC650 281

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

10.4.7.5 Signals
PID-1876-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 209: BH_CONN (3) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
152_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position
152_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position
6189_OP BOOLEAN 0 6189 is in open position
6189_CL BOOLEAN 0 6189 is in closed position
6289_OP BOOLEAN 0 6289 is in open position
6289_CL BOOLEAN 0 6289 is in closed position
189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G is in open position
189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G is in closed position
289G_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G is in open position
289G_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G is in closed position
1389G_OP BOOLEAN 0 1389G on line 1 is in open position
1389G_CL BOOLEAN 0 1389G on line 1 is in closed position
2389G_OP BOOLEAN 0 2389G on line 2 is in open position
2389G_CL BOOLEAN 0 2389G on line 2 is in closed position
6189_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6189
6189_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6189
6289_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6289
6289_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6289

PID-1885-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 210: BH_LINE_A (3) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
152_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position
152_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position
689_OP BOOLEAN 0 689 is in open position
689_CL BOOLEAN 0 689 is in closed position
189_OP BOOLEAN 0 189 is in open position
189_CL BOOLEAN 0 189 is in closed position
189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G is in open position
189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G is in closed position
289G_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G is in open position
289G_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G is in closed position
389G_OP BOOLEAN 0 389G is in open position
389G_CL BOOLEAN 0 389G is in closed position
989_OP BOOLEAN 0 989 is in open position
Table continues on next page

282 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

Name Type Default Description

989_CL BOOLEAN 0 989 is in closed position
989G_OP BOOLEAN 0 989G is in open position
989G_CL BOOLEAN 0 989G is in closed position
C152_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 in module BH_CONN is in open position
C152_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
C6189_OP BOOLEAN 0 6189 in module BH_CONN is in open position
C6189_CL BOOLEAN 0 6189 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
C189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G in module BH_CONN is in open position
C189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G in module BH_CONN is in closed position
C289G_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G in module BH_CONN is in open position
C289G_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G in module BH_CONN is in closed position
1189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in open position
1189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in closed position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure
EXDU_89G BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from bay containing grounding switch QC11
689_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for disconnector 689
689_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for disconnector 689
189_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
189_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
989_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX5 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX6 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX7 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989

PID-1886-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 211: BH_LINE_B (3) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
152_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position
152_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position
689_OP BOOLEAN 0 689 is in open position
689_CL BOOLEAN 0 689 is in closed position
289_OP BOOLEAN 0 289 is in open position
289_CL BOOLEAN 0 289 is in closed position
189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G is in open position
189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G is in closed position
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 283

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

Name Type Default Description

289G_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G is in open position
289G_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G is in closed position
389G_OP BOOLEAN 0 389G is in open position
389G_CL BOOLEAN 0 389G is in closed position
989_OP BOOLEAN 0 989 is in open position
989_CL BOOLEAN 0 989 is in closed position
989G_OP BOOLEAN 0 989G is in open position
989G_CL BOOLEAN 0 989G is in closed position
C152_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 in module BH_CONN is in open position
C152_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
C6289_OP BOOLEAN 0 6289 in module BH_CONN is in open position
C6289_CL BOOLEAN 0 6289 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
C189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G in module BH_CONN is in open position
C189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G in module BH_CONN is in closed position
C289G_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G in module BH_CONN is in open position
C289G_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G in module BH_CONN is in closed position
2189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in open position
2189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in closed position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure
EXDU_89G BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from bay containing grounding switch
QC21
689_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for disconnector 689
689_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for disconnector 689
289_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
289_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
989_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX5 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX6 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX7 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989

284 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

PID-1876-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 212: BH_CONN (3) Output signals

Name Type Description
152CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is allowed
152CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is not allowed
6189REL BOOLEAN Switching of 6189 is allowed
6189ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 6189 is not allowed
6289REL BOOLEAN Switching of 6289 is allowed
6289ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 6289 is not allowed
189GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is allowed
189GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is not allowed
289GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is allowed
289GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is not allowed

PID-1885-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 213: BH_LINE_A (3) Output signals

Name Type Description
152CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is allowed
152CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is not allowed
689REL BOOLEAN Switching of 689 is allowed
689ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 689 is not allowed
189REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is allowed
189ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is not allowed
189GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is allowed
189GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is not allowed
289GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is allowed
289GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is not allowed
389GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 389G is allowed
389GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 389G is not allowed
989REL BOOLEAN Switching of 989 is allowed
989ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 989 is not allowed
989GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 989G is allowed
989GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 989G is not allowed
189OPTR BOOLEAN 189 is in open position
189CLTR BOOLEAN 189 is in closed position
VP189TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed)

Bay control REC650 285

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

PID-1886-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 214: BH_LINE_B (3) Output signals

Name Type Description
152CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is allowed
152CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is not allowed
689REL BOOLEAN Switching of 689 is allowed
689ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 689 is not allowed
289REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is allowed
289ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is not allowed
189GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is allowed
189GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is not allowed
289GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is allowed
289GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is not allowed
389GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 389G is allowed
389GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 389G is not allowed
989REL BOOLEAN Switching of 989 is allowed
989ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 989 is not allowed
989GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 989G is allowed
989GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 989G is not allowed
289OPTR BOOLEAN 289 is in open position
289CLTR BOOLEAN 289 is in closed position
VP289TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 289 is valid (open or closed)

10.4.7.6 Settings
PID-1876-SETTINGS v2
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

10.4.8 Interlocking for double CB bay DB (3) IP14167-1 v2

10.4.8.1 Identification
GUID-D6D10255-2818-44E4-A44E-DF623161C486 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_BUS_A - 3
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_BUS_B - 3
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_LINE - 3

286 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

10.4.8.2 Functionality M13585-3 v8

The interlocking for a double busbar double circuit breaker bay including DB_BUS_A (3), DB_BUS_B
(3) and DB_LINE (3) functions are used for a line connected to a double busbar arrangement
according to figure 143.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)

189 289
189G 489G

DB_BUS_A 152 252 DB_BUS_B

289G 589G

6189 6289
389G

DB_LINE
989

989G

en04000518_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000518 V1 EN-US

Figure 143: Switchyard layout double circuit breaker

Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined. DB_BUS_A (3)
handles the circuit breaker QA1 that is connected to busbar WA1 and the disconnectors and
earthing switches of this section. DB_BUS_B (3) handles the circuit breaker QA2 that is connected
to busbar WA2 and the disconnectors and earthing switches of this section.

Bay control REC650 287

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

10.4.8.3 Function block

M13591-3 v5

DB_BUS_A (3)
152_OP 152CLREL
152_CL 152CLITL
189_OP 6189REL
189_CL 6189ITL
6189_OP 189REL
6189_CL 189ITL
189G_OP 189GREL
189G_CL 189GITL
289G_OP 289GREL
289G_CL 289GITL
389G_OP 189OPTR
389G_CL 189CLTR
1189G_OP VP189TR
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
6189_EX1
6189_EX2
189_EX1
189_EX2

ANSI09000077-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000077 V1 EN-US

Figure 144: DB_BUS_A (3) function block

M13596-3 v5

DB_BUS_B (3)
252_OP 252CLREL
252_CL 252CLITL
289_OP 6289REL
289_CL 6289ITL
6289_OP 289REL
6289_CL 289ITL
489G_OP 489GREL
489G_CL 489GITL
589G_OP 589GREL
589G_CL 589GITL
389G_OP 289OPTR
389G_CL 289CLTR
2189G_OP VP289TR
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
6289_EX1
6289_EX2
289_EX1
289_EX2

ANSI09000078-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000078 V1 EN-US

Figure 145: DB_BUS_B (3) function block

288 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

M15107-3 v5

DB_LINE (3)
152_OP 989REL
152_CL 989ITL
252_OP 389GREL
252_CL 389GITL
6189_OP 989GREL
6189_CL 989GITL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
6289_OP
6289_CL
489G_OP
489G_CL
589G_OP
589G_CL
989_OP
989_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
989G_OP
989G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
989_EX1
989_EX2
989_EX3
989_EX4
989_EX5

ANSI09000082-1-en.vsd
ASNI09000082 V1 EN-US

Figure 146: DB_LINE (3) function block

Bay control REC650 289

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

10.4.8.4 Logic diagrams

M15105-1 v3

DB_BUS_A
152_OP
152_CL XOR VP152
6189_OP
6189_CL XOR VP6189
189_OP
189_CL XOR VP189
189G_OP
189G_CL XOR VP189G
289G_OP
289G_CL XOR VP289G
389G_OP
389G_CL XOR VP389G
1189G_OP
1189G_CL XOR VP1189G
VP6189 152CLREL
VP189 AND 152CLITL
NOT
VP152
VP189G AND OR 6189REL
VP289G 6189ITL
NOT
VP389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
6189_EX1
VP289G
VP389G AND
289G_CL
389G_CL
6189_EX2
VP152
VP189G AND OR 189REL
VP289G 189ITL
NOT
VP1189G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1

VP189G
VP1189G AND
189G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX2

en04000547_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000547 V1 EN-US

VP6189 189GREL
VP189 AND NOT 189GITL
6189_OP 289GREL
189_OP NOT
289GITL
189_OP 189OPTR
189_CL 189CLTR
VP189 VP189TR

en04000548_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000548 V1 EN-US

290 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

DB_BUS_B
252_OP
252_CL XOR VP252
6289_OP
6289_CL XOR VP6289
289_OP
289_CL XOR VP289
489G_OP
489G_CL XOR VP489G
589G_OP
589G_CL XOR VP589G
389G_OP
389G_CL XOR VP389G
2189G_OP
2189G_CL XOR VP2189G
VP6289 252CLREL
VP289 AND 252CLITL
NOT
VP252
VP489G AND OR 6289REL
VP589G 6289ITL
NOT
VP389G
252_OP
489G_OP
589G_OP
389G_OP
6289_EX1
VP589G
VP389G AND
589G_CL
389G_CL
6289_EX2
VP252
VP489G AND OR 289REL
VP589G 289ITL
NOT
VP2189G
252_OP
489G_OP
589G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1

VP489G
VP2189G AND
489G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX2

en04000552_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000552 V1 EN-US

VP6289 489GREL
VP289 AND NOT 489GITL
6289_OP 589GREL
289_OP 589GITL
NOT
289_OP 289OPTR
289_CL 289CLTR
VP289 VP289TR

en04000553_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000553 V1 EN-US

Bay control REC650 291

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

DB_LINE
152_OP
152_CL XOR VP152
252_OP
252_CL XOR VP252
6189_OP
6189_CL XOR VP6189
189G_OP
189G_CL XOR VP189G
289G_OP
289G_CL XOR VP289G
6289_OP
6289_CL XOR VP6289
489G_OP
489G_CL XOR VP489G
589G_OP
589G_CL XOR VP589G
989_OP
989_CL XOR VP989
389G_OP
389G_CL XOR VP389G
989G_OP
989G_CL XOR VP989G
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON XOR VPVOLT
VP152
VP252 AND OR 989REL
VP189G 989ITL
NOT
VP289G
VP389G
VP489G
VP589G
VP989G
152_OP
252_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
489G_OP
589G_OP
989G_OP
989_EX1

AND
en04000549_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000549 V1 EN-US

292 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

VP152
VP189G AND OR
VP289G
VP389G
VP989G
VP6289
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
989G_OP
6289_OP
989_EX2
VP252
VP6189 AND
VP389G
VP489G
VP589G
VP989G
252_OP
6189_OP
389G_OP
489G_OP
589G_OP
989G_OP
989_EX3
VP389G
VP989G AND
VP6189
VP6289
389G_OP
989G_OP
6189_OP
6289_OP
989_EX4
VP389G
VP989G AND
389G_CL
989G_CL
989_EX5

en04000550_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000550 V1 EN-US

VP6189
VP6289 AND 389GREL
VP989 389GITL
NOT
6189_OP
6289_OP
989_OP
VP989
VPVOLT AND 989GREL
989_OP 989GITL
NOT
VOLT_OFF

en04000551_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000551 V1 EN-US

10.4.8.5 Signals
PID-1891-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 215: DB_BUS_A (3) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
152_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position
152_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position
189_OP BOOLEAN 0 189 is in open position
189_CL BOOLEAN 0 189 is in closed position
6189_OP BOOLEAN 0 6189 is in open position
6189_CL BOOLEAN 0 6189 is in closed position
189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G is in open position
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 293

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

Name Type Default Description

189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G is in closed position
289G_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G is in open position
289G_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G is in closed position
389G_OP BOOLEAN 0 389G is in open position
389G_CL BOOLEAN 0 389G is in closed position
1189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in open position
1189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in closed position
EXDU_89G BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from bay containing grounding switch QC11
6189_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6189
6189_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6189
189_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
189_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189

PID-1892-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 216: DB_BUS_B (3) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
252_OP BOOLEAN 0 252 is in open position
252_CL BOOLEAN 0 252 is in closed position
289_OP BOOLEAN 0 289 is in open position
289_CL BOOLEAN 0 289 is in closed position
6289_OP BOOLEAN 0 6289 is in open position
6289_CL BOOLEAN 0 6289 is in closed position
489G_OP BOOLEAN 0 489G is in open position
489G_CL BOOLEAN 0 489G is in closed position
589G_OP BOOLEAN 0 589G is in open position
589G_CL BOOLEAN 0 589G is in closed position
389G_OP BOOLEAN 0 389G is in open position
389G_CL BOOLEAN 0 389G is in closed position
2189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in open position
2189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in closed position
EXDU_89G BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from bay containing grounding switch
QC21
6289_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6289
6289_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6289
289_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
289_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289

294 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

PID-1905-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 217: DB_LINE (3) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
152_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position
152_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position
252_OP BOOLEAN 0 252 is in open position
252_CL BOOLEAN 0 252 is in closed position
6189_OP BOOLEAN 0 6189 is in open position
6189_CL BOOLEAN 0 6189 is in closed position
189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G is in open position
189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G is in closed position
289G_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G is in open position
289G_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G is in closed position
6289_OP BOOLEAN 0 6289 is in open position
6289_CL BOOLEAN 0 6289 is in closed position
489G_OP BOOLEAN 0 489G is in open position
489G_CL BOOLEAN 0 489G is in closed position
589G_OP BOOLEAN 0 589G is in open position
589G_CL BOOLEAN 0 589G is in closed position
989_OP BOOLEAN 0 989 is in open position
989_CL BOOLEAN 0 989 is in closed position
389G_OP BOOLEAN 0 389G is in open position
389G_CL BOOLEAN 0 389G is in closed position
989G_OP BOOLEAN 0 989G is in open position
989G_CL BOOLEAN 0 989G is in closed position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure
989_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX5 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989

PID-1891-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 218: DB_BUS_A (3) Output signals

Name Type Description
152CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is allowed
152CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is not allowed
6189REL BOOLEAN Switching of 6189 is allowed
6189ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 6189 is not allowed
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 295

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

Name Type Description

189REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is allowed
189ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is not allowed
189GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is allowed
189GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is not allowed
289GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is allowed
289GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is not allowed
189OPTR BOOLEAN 189 is in open position
189CLTR BOOLEAN 189 is in closed position
VP189TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed)

PID-1892-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 219: DB_BUS_B (3) Output signals

Name Type Description
252CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 252 is allowed
252CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 252 is not allowed
6289REL BOOLEAN Switching of 6289 is allowed
6289ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 6289 is not allowed
289REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is allowed
289ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is not allowed
489GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 489G is allowed
489GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 489G is not allowed
589GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 589G is allowed
589GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 589G is not allowed
289OPTR BOOLEAN 289 is in open position
289CLTR BOOLEAN 289 is in closed position
VP289TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 289 is valid (open or closed)

PID-1905-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 220: DB_LINE (3) Output signals

Name Type Description
989REL BOOLEAN Switching of 989 is allowed
989ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 989 is not allowed
389GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 389G is allowed
389GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 389G is not allowed
989GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 989G is allowed
989GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 989G is not allowed

296 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

10.4.8.6 Settings
PID-1891-SETTINGS v2
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

10.4.9 Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE (3) IP14139-1 v2

10.4.9.1 Identification
GUID-BEA26EA4-F402-4385-9238-1361E862D987 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE - 3

10.4.9.2 Functionality M13561-3 v7

The interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE, 3) function is used for a line connected to a double busbar
arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 147. The function can also be used for a
double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar or a single busbar arrangement with/without
transfer busbar.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)

189 289 789

189G

152
289G

989
989G

en04000478_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000478 V1 EN-US

Figure 147: Switchyard layout ABC_LINE (3)

The interlocking functionality in 650 series can not handle the transfer bus WA7(C).

Bay control REC650 297

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

10.4.9.3 Function block M15108-3 v5

ABC_LINE (3)
152_OP 152CLREL
152_CL 152CLITL
989_OP 989REL
989_CL 989ITL
189_OP 189REL
189_CL 189ITL
289_OP 289REL
289_CL 289ITL
789_OP 789REL
789_CL 789ITL
189G_OP 189GREL
189G_CL 189GITL
289G_OP 289GREL
289G_CL 289GITL
989G_OP 989GREL
989G_CL 989GITL
1189G_OP 189OPTR
1189G_CL 189CLTR
2189G_OP 289OPTR
2189G_CL 289CLTR
7189G_OP 789OPTR
7189G_CL 789CLTR
BB7_D_OP 1289OPTR
BC_12_CL 1289CLTR
BC_17_OP VP189TR
BC_17_CL VP289TR
BC_27_OP VP789TR
BC_27_CL VP1289TR
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_12
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
EXDU_89G
EXDU_BPB
EXDU_BC
989_EX1
989_EX2
189_EX1
189_EX2
189_EX3
289_EX1
289_EX2
289_EX3
789_EX1
789_EX2
789_EX3
789_EX4

ANSI09000070-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000070 V1 EN-US

Figure 148: ABC_LINE (3) function block

298 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

10.4.9.4 Logic diagram M15089-3 v4

ABC_LINE
152_OP
152_CL XOR VP152
989_OP
989_CL XOR VP989
189_OP 152CLREL
189_CL XOR VP189 AND NOT
152CLITL
289_OP
289_CL XOR VP289
789_OP
789_CL XOR VP789
189G_OP
189G_CL XOR VP189G
289G_OP
289G_CL XOR VP289G
989G_OP
989G_CL XOR VP989G
1189G_OP
1189G_CL XOR VP1189G
2189G_OP
2189G_CL XOR VP2189G
7189G_OP
7189G_CL XOR VP7189G
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON XOR VPVOLT
VP152
VP189G AND OR 989REL
VP289G 989ITL
NOT
VP989G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
989G_OP
989_EX1
VP289G
VP989G AND
289G_CL
989G_CL
989_EX2

en04000527_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000527 V1 EN-US

Bay control REC650 299

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

VP152 189REL
AND OR
VP289
VP189G 189ITL
NOT
VP289G
VP1189G
152_OP
289_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1189G_OP
EXDU_89G

189_EX1

VP289 AND
VP_BC_12
289_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC

189_EX2

VP189G
AND
VP1189G
189G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G

189EX3

en04000528_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000528 V1 EN-US

300 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

VP152 289REL
AND OR
VP189
VP189G 289ITL
NOT
VP289G
VP2189G
152_OP
189_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G

289_EX1

VP189 AND
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC

289_EX2

VP189G
AND
VP2189G
189G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G

289_EX3

en04000529_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000529 V1 EN-US

Bay control REC650 301

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

VP989G 789REL
AND OR
VP7189G
VP_BB7_D 789ITL
NOT
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
989G_OP
7189G_OP
EXDU_89G

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB

BC_17_OP
BC_27_OP
EXDU_BC
789_EX1

VP152
VP189 AND
VP989G
VP989
VP7189G
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_17
152_CL
189_CL
989G_OP
989_CL
7189G_OP
EXDU_89G

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_CL

EXDU_BC

789_EX2

en04000530_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000530 V1 EN-US

302 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

VP152
VP289
AND OR
VP989G
VP989
VP7189G
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_27
152_CL
289_CL
989G_OP
989_CL
7189G_OP
EXDU_89G

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_27_CL
EXDU_BC
789_EX3
VP989G
VP7189G AND
989G_CL
7189G_CL
EXDU_89G
789_EX4
VP189 189GREL
VP289 189GITL
AND NOT
VP989
289GREL
189_OP
289_OP 289GITL
NOT
989_OP
VP789
VP989 989GREL
AND
VPVOLT 989GITL
789_OP NOT
989_OP
VOLT_OFF
en04000531_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000531 V1 EN-US

Bay control REC650 303

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

189_OP 189OPTR
189_CL 189CLTR
VP189 VP189TR
289_OP 289OPTR
289_CL 289CLTR
VP289 VP289TR
789_OP 789OPTR
789_CL 789CLTR
VP789 VP789TR
189_OP 1289OPTR
289_OP OR 1289CLTR
VP189 NOT
VP1289TR
VP289 AND

en04000532_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000532 V1 EN-US

10.4.9.5 Signals
PID-1878-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 221: ABC_LINE (3) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
152_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position
152_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position
989_OP BOOLEAN 0 989 is in open position
989_CL BOOLEAN 0 989 is in closed position
189_OP BOOLEAN 0 189 is in open position
189_CL BOOLEAN 0 189 is in closed position
289_OP BOOLEAN 0 289 is in open position
289_CL BOOLEAN 0 289 is in closed position
789_OP BOOLEAN 0 789 is in open position
789_CL BOOLEAN 0 789 is in closed position
189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G is in open position
189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G is in closed position
289G_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G is in open position
289G_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G is in closed position
989G_OP BOOLEAN 0 989G is in open position
989G_CL BOOLEAN 0 989G is in closed position
1189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in open position
1189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in closed position
2189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in open position
Table continues on next page

304 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

Name Type Default Description

2189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in closed position
7189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 7189G on busbar WA7 is in open position
7189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 7189G on busbar WA7 is in closed position
BB7_D_OP BOOLEAN 0 Disconnectors on busbar WA7 except in the own bay are open
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2
BC_17_OP BOOLEAN 0 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA7
BC_17_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA7
BC_27_OP BOOLEAN 0 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and WA7
BC_27_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and WA7
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure
VP_BB7_D BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of the disconnectors on busbar WA7 are valid
VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of bus coupler apparatuses between bus1 and bus 2 are
valid.
VP_BC_17 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler apparatuses between Bus1 and Bus7 are
valid
VP_BC_27 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler apparatus between Bus2 and Bus7 are
valid
EXDU_89G BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bay containing grounding
switches
EXDU_BPB BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bay with disconnectors on Bus7
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
989_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
989_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
189_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
189_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
189_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
289_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
289_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
289_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
789_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 789
789_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 789
789_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 789
789_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 789

Bay control REC650 305

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

PID-1878-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 222: ABC_LINE (3) Output signals

Name Type Description
152CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is allowed
152CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is not allowed
989REL BOOLEAN Switching of 989 is allowed
989ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 989 is not allowed
189REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is allowed
189ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is not allowed
289REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is allowed
289ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is not allowed
789REL BOOLEAN Switching of 789 is allowed
789ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 789 is not allowed
189GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is allowed
189GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is not allowed
289GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is allowed
289GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is not allowed
989GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 989G is allowed
989GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 989G is not allowed
189OPTR BOOLEAN 189 is in open position
189CLTR BOOLEAN 189 is in closed position
289OPTR BOOLEAN 289 is in open position
289CLTR BOOLEAN 289 is in closed position
789OPTR BOOLEAN 789 is in open position
789CLTR BOOLEAN 789 is in closed position
1289OPTR BOOLEAN 189 or 289 or both are in open position
1289CLTR BOOLEAN 189 and 289 are not in open position
VP189TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed)
VP289TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 289 is valid (open or closed)
VP789TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 789 is valid (open or closed)
VP1289TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 and 289 are valid (open or closed)

10.4.9.6 Settings
PID-1878-SETTINGS v2
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

10.4.10 Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO (3) IP14149-1 v2

306 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

10.4.10.1 Identification
GUID-AD839CAA-531B-43BC-B508-39AED3D0A97D v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO - 3

10.4.10.2 Functionality M13567-3 v6

The interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO, 3) function is used for a transformer bay
connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 149. The function is used when
there is no disconnector between circuit breaker and transformer. Otherwise, the interlocking for
line bay (ABC_LINE, 3) function can be used. This function can also be used in single busbar
arrangements.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)

189 289
189G

152 AB_TRAFO

289G

389G

252 252 and 489G are not

used in this interlocking
489G

389 489

en04000515_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000515 V1 EN-US

Figure 149: Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO (3)

Bay control REC650 307

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

10.4.10.3 Function block M13565-3 v5

AB_TRAFO (3)
152_OP 152CLREL
152_CL 152CLITL
189_OP 189REL
189_CL 189ITL
289_OP 289REL
289_CL 289ITL
189G_OP 189GREL
189G_CL 189GITL
289G_OP 289GREL
289G_CL 289GITL
389_OP 189OPTR
389_CL 189CLTR
489_OP 289OPTR
489_CL 289CLTR
389G_OP 1289OPTR
389G_CL 1289CLTR
1189G_OP VP189TR
1189G_CL VP289TR
2189G_OP VP1289TR
2189G_CL
BC_12_CL
VP_BC_12
EXDU_89G
EXDU_BC
152_EX1
152_EX2
152_EX3
189_EX1
189_EX2
189_EX3
289_EX1
289_EX2
289_EX3

ANSI09000068-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000068 V1 EN-US

Figure 150: AB_TRAFO (3) function block

308 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

10.4.10.4 Logic diagram M15097-3 v3

AB_TRAFO
152_OP
152_CL XOR VP152
189_OP
189_CL XOR VP189
289_OP
289_CL XOR VP289
189G_OP
189G_CL XOR VP189G
289G_OP
289G_CL XOR VP289G
389_OP
389_CL XOR VP389
489_OP
489_CL XOR VP489
389G_OP
389G_CL XOR VP389G
1189G_OP
1189G_CL XOR VP1189G
2189G_OP
2189G_CL XOR VP2189G
VP189 152CLREL
VP289 AND 152CLITL
VP189G NOT
VP289G
VP389
VP489
VP389G
152_EX2
389G_OP
152_EX3 OR
189G_CL
289G_CL AND
389G_CL
152_EX1

en04000538_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000538 V1 EN-US

VP152
VP289 AND OR 189REL
VP189G
189ITL
VP289G NOT
VP389G
VP1189G
152_OP
289_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP289
VP389G AND
VP_BC_12
289_CL
389G_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
189_EX2
VP189G
VP289G AND
VP389G
VP1189G
189G_CL
289G_CL
389G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX3

en04000539_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000539 V1 EN-US

Bay control REC650 309

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

VP152
VP189 252REL
AND OR
VP189G 252ITL
VP289G NOT
VP389G
VP2189G
152_OP
189_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1
VP189
VP389G
AND
VP_BC_12
189_CL
389G_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
289_EX2
VP189G
VP289G
AND
VP389G
VP2189G
189G_CL
289G_CL
389G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX3

en04000540_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000540 V1 EN-US

VP189 189GREL
VP289 AND 189GITL
NOT
VP389 289GREL
VP489
189_OP 289GITL
NOT
289_OP
389_OP
489_OP
189_OP 189OPTR
189_CL 189CLTR
VP189 VP189TR
289_OP 289OPTR
289_CL 289CLTR
VP289 VP289TR
189_OP 1289OPTR
289_OP OR 1289CLTR
NOT
VP189 VP1289TR
VP289 AND

en04000541_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000541 V1 EN-US

10.4.10.5 Signals
PID-1879-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 223: AB_TRAFO (3) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
152_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position
152_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position
189_OP BOOLEAN 0 189 is in open position
189_CL BOOLEAN 0 189 is in closed position
289_OP BOOLEAN 0 289 is in open position
289_CL BOOLEAN 0 289 is in closed position
Table continues on next page

310 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

Name Type Default Description

189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G is in open position
189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G is in closed position
289G_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G is in open position
289G_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G is in closed position
389_OP BOOLEAN 0 389 is in open position
389_CL BOOLEAN 0 389 is in closed position
489_OP BOOLEAN 0 489 is in open position
489_CL BOOLEAN 0 489 is in closed position
389G_OP BOOLEAN 0 389G is in open position
389G_CL BOOLEAN 0 389G is in closed position
1189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 1189G on busbar WA1 is in open position
1189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 1189G on busbar WA1 is in closed position
2189G_OP BOOLEAN 0 2189G on busbar WA2 is in open position
2189G_CL BOOLEAN 0 2189G on busbar WA2 is in closed position
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2
VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of bus coupler apparatuses between bus1 and bus 2 are
valid.
EXDU_89G BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bay containing grounding
switches
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
152_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for breaker 152
152_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for breaker 152
152_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for breaker 152
189_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
189_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
189_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
289_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
289_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
289_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289

PID-1879-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 224: AB_TRAFO (3) Output signals

Name Type Description
152CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is allowed
152CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is not allowed
189REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is allowed
189ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is not allowed
289REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is allowed
289ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is not allowed
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 311

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

Name Type Description

189GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is allowed
189GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is not allowed
289GREL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is allowed
289GITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is not allowed
189OPTR BOOLEAN 189 is in open position
189CLTR BOOLEAN 189 is in closed position
289OPTR BOOLEAN 289 is in open position
289CLTR BOOLEAN 289 is in closed position
1289OPTR BOOLEAN 189 or 289 or both are in open position
1289CLTR BOOLEAN 189 and 289 are not in open position
VP189TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed)
VP289TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 289 is valid (open or closed)
VP1289TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 and 289 are valid (open or closed)

10.4.10.6 Settings
PID-1879-SETTINGS v2
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

10.4.11 Position evaluation POS_EVAL

10.4.11.1 Identification
GUID-3C4B9379-C861-406C-9295-0309014D548E v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Position evaluation POS_EVAL - -

10.4.11.2 Functionality GUID-C3D07B40-FF01-45C5-A083-EED5643A5FCC v3

Position evaluation (POS_EVAL) function converts the input position data signal POSITION,
consisting of value, time and signal status, to binary signals OPENPOS or CLOSEPOS.

The output signals are used by other functions in the interlocking scheme.

10.4.11.3 Function block GUID-B5EF4A28-9C9F-4558-8CD6-453FB480314B v1

POS_EVAL
POSITION OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS

IEC09000079_1_en.vsd
IEC09000079 V1 EN-US

Figure 151: POS_EVAL function block

312 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

10.4.11.4 Logic diagram GUID-F0EF8D38-031B-4A8E-BD7D-60314F5DCD59 v1

POS_EVAL
Position including quality POSITION OPENPOS
Open/close position of
CLOSEPOS switch device

IEC08000469-1-en.vsd
IEC08000469-1-EN V1 EN-US

Only the value, open/close, and status is used in this function. Time information is not used.

Input position (Value) Signal quality Output OPENPOS Output CLOSEPOS

0 (Breaker intermediate) Good 0 0
1 (Breaker open) Good 1 0
2 (Breaker closed) Good 0 1
3 (Breaker faulty) Good 0 0
Any Invalid 0 0
Any Oscillatory 0 0

10.4.11.5 Signals
PID-1880-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 225: POS_EVAL Input signals

Name Type Default Description
POSITION INTEGER 0 Position status including quality

PID-1880-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 226: POS_EVAL Output signals

Name Type Description
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Close position

10.4.11.6 Settings
PID-1880-SETTINGS v2
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

10.4.12 Operation principle M13528-4 v5

The interlocking function consists of software modules located in each control IED. The function is
distributed and not dependent on any central function. Communication between modules in
different bays is performed via the station bus.

The reservation function is used to ensure that HV apparatuses that might affect the interlock are
blocked during the time gap, which arises between position updates. This can be done by means
of the communication system, reserving all HV apparatuses that might influence the interlocking

Bay control REC650 313

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

condition of the intended operation. The reservation is maintained until the operation is
performed.

After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data on the status
of all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection. Other operators cannot
interfere with the reserved apparatus or the status of switching devices that may affect it.

The open or closed positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules distributed in
the control IEDs. Each module contains the interlocking logic for a bay. The interlocking logic in a
module is different, depending on the bay function and the switchyard arrangements, that is,
double-breaker or breaker-and-a-half bays have different modules. Specific interlocking
conditions and connections between standard interlocking modules are performed with an
engineering tool. Bay-level interlocking signals can include the following kind of information:

• Positions of HV apparatuses (sometimes per phase)

• Valid positions (if evaluated in the control module)
• External release (to add special conditions for release)
• Line voltage (to block operation of line grounding switch)
• Output signals to release the HV apparatus

The interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions within a bay as shown in figure
152.

Apparatus control
Interlocking
modules
modules in
SCILO SCSWI
other bays SXSWI

Apparatus control
modules
Interlocking SCILO SCSWI SXCBR 152
module

Apparatus control
modules
SCILO SCSWI SXSWI

en04000526_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000526 V1 EN-US

Figure 152: Interlocking module on bay level

Bays communicate via the station bus and can convey information regarding the following:

• Ungrounded busbars
• Busbars connected together
• Other bays connected to a busbar
• Received data from other bays is valid

Figure 153 illustrates the data exchange principle.

314 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

Station bus

Bay 1 Bay n Bus coupler

Disc 189 and 289 closed Disc 189 and 289 closed WA1 ungrounded
WA1 ungrounded
WA1 and WA2 interconn

...
WA1 not grounded WA1 not grounded
WA2 not grounded WA2 not grounded WA1 and WA2 interconn
WA1 and WA2 interconn WA1 and WA2 interconn in other bay

..
WA1
WA2
189 289 189 289 189 289 189G 289G
152

152 152

989 989

en05000494_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000494 V1 EN-US

Figure 153: Data exchange between interlocking modules

When invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control IED, or input board error are
used as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, a release for execution of the function
will not be given.

On the local HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the interlocking function
in cases where not all the data required for the condition is valid.

For all interlocking modules these general rules apply:

• The interlocking conditions for opening or closing of disconnectors and grounding switches
are always identical.
• Grounding switches on the line feeder end, for example, rapid grounding switches, are
normally interlocked only with reference to the conditions in the bay where they are located,
not with reference to switches on the other side of the line. So a line voltage indication may be
included into line interlocking modules. If there is no line voltage supervision within the bay,
then the appropriate inputs must be set to no voltage, and the operator must consider this
when operating.
• Grounding switches can only be operated on isolated sections for example, without load/
voltage. Circuit breaker contacts cannot be used to isolate a section, that is, the status of the
circuit breaker is irrelevant as far as the grounding switch operation is concerned.
• Disconnectors cannot break power current or connect different voltage systems.
Disconnectors in series with a circuit breaker can only be operated if the circuit breaker is
open, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel with other closed connections. Other
disconnectors can be operated if one side is completely isolated, or if the disconnectors
operate in parallel to other closed connections, or if they are grounding on both sides.
• Circuit breaker closing is only interlocked against running disconnectors in its bay or
additionally in a transformer bay against the disconnectors and grounding switch on the
other side of the transformer, if there is no disconnector between CB and transformer.
• Circuit breaker opening is only interlocked in a bus-coupler bay, if a bus bar transfer is in
progress.

To make the implementation of the interlocking function easier, a number of standardized and
tested software interlocking modules containing logic for the interlocking conditions are
available:

Bay control REC650 315

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

• Line for double and transfer busbars, ABC_LINE (3)

• Bus for double and transfer busbars, ABC_BC (3)
• Transformer bay for double busbars, AB_TRAFO (3)
• Bus-section breaker for double busbars, A1A2_BS (3)
• Bus-section disconnector for double busbars, A1A2_DC (3)
• Busbar grounding switch, BB_ES (3)
• Double CB Bay, DB_BUS_A(3), DB_LINE(3), DB_BUS_B(3)
• Breaker-and-a-half diameter, BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN, BH_LINE_B (3)

The interlocking conditions can be altered, to meet the customer specific requirements, by adding
configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration tool PCM600. The inputs Qx_EXy on the
interlocking modules are used to add these specific conditions.

The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at the transfer of
information from other bays. Required signals with designations ending in TR are intended for
transfer to other bays.

10.5 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI

presentation SLGGIO

10.5.1 Identification
SEMOD167845-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logic rotating switch for function SLGGIO - -
selection and LHMI presentation

10.5.2 Functionality SEMOD114908-4 v8

The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGGIO (or the selector
switch function block) is used to get an enhanced selector switch functionality compared to the
one provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware selector switches are used extensively by
utilities, in order to have different functions operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches are
however sources for maintenance issues, lower system reliability and an extended purchase
portfolio. The logic selector switches eliminate all these problems.

316 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

10.5.3 Function block SEMOD114954-4 v5

SLGGIO
BLOCK ^P01
PSTO ^P02
UP ^P03
DOWN ^P04
^P05
^P06
^P07
^P08
^P09
^P10
^P11
^P12
^P13
^P14
^P15
^P16
^P17
^P18
^P19
^P20
^P21
^P22
^P23
^P24
^P25
^P26
^P27
^P28
^P29
^P30
^P31
^P32
SWPOSN

IEC09000091_1_en.vsd
IEC09000091 V1 EN-US

Figure 154: SLGGIO function block

10.5.4 Signals
PID-1868-INPUTSIGNALS v14

Table 227: SLGGIO Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
UP BOOLEAN 0 Binary "UP" command
DOWN BOOLEAN 0 Binary "DOWN" command

PID-1868-OUTPUTSIGNALS v14

Table 228: SLGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
P01 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 1
P02 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 2
P03 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 3
P04 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 4
P05 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 5
P06 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 6
P07 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 7
P08 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 8
P09 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 9
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 317

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

Name Type Description

P10 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 10
P11 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 11
P12 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 12
P13 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 13
P14 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 14
P15 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 15
P16 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 16
P17 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 17
P18 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 18
P19 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 19
P20 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 20
P21 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 21
P22 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 22
P23 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 23
P24 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 24
P25 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 25
P26 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 26
P27 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 27
P28 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 28
P29 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 29
P30 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 30
P31 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 31
P32 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 32
SWPOSN INTEGER Switch position as integer value

10.5.5 Settings
PID-1868-SETTINGS v14

Table 229: SLGGIO Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Enable/Disable
Enabled
NrPos 2 - 32 - 1 32 Number of positions in the switch
OutType Pulsed - - Steady Output type, steady or pulse
Steady
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate pulse duration
tDelay 0.000 - s 0.010 0.000 Output time delay
60000.000
StopAtExtremes Disabled - - Disabled Stop when min or max position is reached
Enabled

318 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

10.5.6 Monitored data

PID-1868-MONITOREDDATA v16

Table 230: SLGGIO Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
SWPOSN INTEGER - - Switch position as integer value

10.5.7 Operation principle

SEMOD114931-4 v5
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO) function has two
operating inputs – UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on the UP input, the block will activate
the output next to the present activated output, in ascending order (if the present activated
output is 3 – for example and one operates the UP input, then the output 4 will be activated). When
a signal is received on the DOWN input, the block will activate the output next to the present
activated output, in descending order (if the present activated output is 3 – for example and one
operates the DOWN input, then the output 2 will be activated). Depending on the output settings
the output signals can be steady or pulsed. In case of steady signals, in case of UP or DOWN
operation, the previously active output will be deactivated. Also, depending on the settings one
can have a time delay between the UP or DOWN activation signal positive front and the output
activation.

Besides the inputs visible in the application configuration in the Application Configuration tool,
there are other possibilities that will allow an user to set the desired position directly (without
activating the intermediate positions), either locally or remotely, using a “select before execute”
dialog. One can block the function operation, by activating the BLOCK input. In this case, the
present position will be kept and further operation will be blocked. The operator place (local or
remote) is specified through the PSTO input. If any operation is allowed the signal INTONE from
the Fixed signal function block can be connected. SLGGIO function block has also an integer value
output, that generates the actual position number. The positions and the block names are fully
settable by the user. These names will appear in the menu, so the user can see the position names
instead of a number.

10.6 Selector mini switch VSGGIO

10.6.1 Identification
SEMOD167850-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Selector mini switch VSGGIO - -

10.6.2 Functionality SEMOD158756-5 v5

The Selector mini switch VSGGIO function block is a multipurpose function used for a variety of
applications, as a general purpose switch.

VSGGIO can be controlled from the menu or from a symbol on the single line diagram (SLD) on the
local HMI.

Bay control REC650 319

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

10.6.3 Function block GUID-3C15E653-9FD5-4712-8DBD-77E26319F295 v1

VSGGIO
BLOCK BLOCKED
PSTO POSITION
IPOS1 POS1
IPOS2 POS2
CMDPOS12
CMDPOS21

IEC09000341-1-en.vsd
IEC09000341 V1 EN-US

10.6.4 Signals
PID-1825-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 231: VSGGIO Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
IPOS1 BOOLEAN 0 Position 1 indicating input
IPOS2 BOOLEAN 0 Position 2 indicating input

PID-1825-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 232: VSGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The function is active but the functionality is blocked
POSITION INTEGER Position indication, integer
POS1 BOOLEAN Position 1 indication, logical signal
POS2 BOOLEAN Position 2 indication, logical signal
CMDPOS12 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 1 to position 2
CMDPOS21 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 2 to position 1

10.6.5 Settings
PID-1825-SETTINGS v13

Table 233: VSGGIO Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
CtlModel Dir Norm - - Dir Norm Specifies the type for control model
SBO Enh according to IEC 61850
Mode Steady - - Pulsed Operation mode
Pulsed
tSelect 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 30.000 Max time between select and execute
signals
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Command pulse lenght

320 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

10.6.6 Operation principle SEMOD158762-4 v3

Selector mini switch (VSGGIO) function can be used for double purpose, in the same way as switch
controller (SCSWI) functions are used:

• for indication on the single line diagram (SLD). Position is received through the IPOS1 and
IPOS2 inputs and distributed in the configuration through the POS1 and POS2 outputs, or to
IEC 61850 through reporting, or GOOSE.
• for commands that are received via the local HMI or IEC 61850 and distributed in the
configuration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21.
The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command from the local
HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command from the local
HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.

It is important for indication in the SLD that the a symbol is associated with a
controllable object, otherwise the symbol won't be displayed on the screen. A
symbol is created and configured in GDE tool in PCM600.

The PSTO input is connected to the Local remote switch to have a selection of operators place,
operation from local HMI (Local) or through IEC 61850 (Remote). An INTONE connection from
Fixed signal function block (FXDSIGN) will allow operation from local HMI.

As it can be seen, both indications and commands are done in double-bit representation, where a
combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the desired result.

The following table shows the relationship between IPOS1/IPOS2 inputs and the name of the
string that is shown on the SLD. The value of the strings are set in PST.

IPOS1 IPOS2 Name of displayed string Default string value

0 0 PosUndefined P00
1 0 Position1 P01
0 1 Position2 P10
1 1 PosBadState P11

10.7 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions DPGGIO

10.7.1 Identification
GUID-E16EA78F-6DF9-4B37-A92D-5C09827E2297 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
IEC 61850 generic communication DPGGIO - -
I/O functions

Bay control REC650 321

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

10.7.2 Functionality SEMOD55850-5 v4

The IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions DPGGIO function block is used to send double
indications to other systems or equipment in the substation using IEC61850. It is especially used
in the interlocking and reservation station-wide logics.

10.7.3 Function block SEMOD54710-4 v4

DPGGIO
OPEN POSITION
CLOSE
VALID

IEC09000075_1_en.vsd
IEC09000075 V1 EN-US

Figure 155: DPGGIO function block

10.7.4 Signals
PID-1881-INPUTSIGNALS v14

Table 234: DPGGIO Input signals

Name Type Default Description
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open indication
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close indication
VALID BOOLEAN 0 Valid indication

PID-1881-OUTPUTSIGNALS v14

Table 235: DPGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
POSITION INTEGER Double point indication

10.7.5 Settings
ABBD8E226199 v2
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

10.7.6 Operation principle SEMOD55861-5 v5

Upon receiving the input signals, the IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (DPGGIO)
function block will send the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system that requests
these signals. To be able to get the signals, PCM600 must be used to define which function block
in which equipment or system should receive this information.

322 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

10.8 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GGIO

10.8.1 Identification
SEMOD176456-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GGIO - -

10.8.2 Functionality SEMOD176462-4 v6

The Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GGIO function block is a collection of 8 single point
commands, designed to bring in commands from REMOTE (SCADA) to those parts of the logic
configuration that do not need extensive command receiving functionality (for example, SCSWI). In
this way, simple commands can be sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation. The
commands can be pulsed or steady with a settable pulse time.

10.8.3 Function block SEMOD176479-4 v4

SPC8GGIO
BLOCK ^OUT1
PSTO ^OUT2
^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT7
^OUT8

IEC09000086_1_en.vsd
IEC09000086 V1 EN-US

Figure 156: SPC8GGIO function block

10.8.4 Signals
PID-3852-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 236: SPC8GGIO Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 2 Operator place selection

PID-3852-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 237: SPC8GGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 323

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

Name Type Description

OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8

10.8.5 Settings
PID-3852-SETTINGS v1

Table 238: SPC8GGIO Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
Latched1 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 1
tPulse1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output 1 Pulse Time
Latched2 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 2
tPulse2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output 2 Pulse Time
Latched3 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 3
tPulse3 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output 3 Pulse Time
Latched4 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 4
tPulse4 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output 4 Pulse Time
Latched5 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 5
tPulse5 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output 5 Pulse Time
Latched6 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 6
tPulse6 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output 6 Pulse Time
Latched7 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 7
tPulse7 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output 7 Pulse Time
Latched8 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 8
tPulse8 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output 8 pulse time

10.8.6 Operation principle SEMOD176471-4 v5

The PSTO input selects the operator place (LOCAL, REMOTE or ALL). One of the eight outputs is
activated based on the command sent from the operator place selected. The settings Latchedx
and tPulsex (where x is the respective output) will determine if the signal will be pulsed (and how

324 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

long the pulse is) or latched (steady). BLOCK will block the operation of the function – in case a
command is sent, no output will be activated.

PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control functions. Although,
PSTO can be configured to use LOCAL or ALL operator places only, REMOTE
operator place is used in SPC8GGIO function.

10.9 Automation bits AUTOBITS

10.9.1 Identification
GUID-C3BB63F5-F0E7-4B00-AF0F-917ECF87B016 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
AutomationBits, command function
AUTOBITS - -
for DNP3

10.9.2 Functionality SEMOD158591-5 v6

The Automation bits function AUTOBITS is used to configure the DNP3 protocol command
handling. Each of the 3 AUTOBITS available has 32 individual outputs available, each can be
mapped as a binary output point in DNP3.

Bay control REC650 325

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

10.9.3 Function block SEMOD158603-4 v3

AUTOBITS
BLOCK ^CMDBIT1
PSTO ^CMDBIT2
^CMDBIT3
^CMDBIT4
^CMDBIT5
^CMDBIT6
^CMDBIT7
^CMDBIT8
^CMDBIT9
^CMDBIT10
^CMDBIT11
^CMDBIT12
^CMDBIT13
^CMDBIT14
^CMDBIT15
^CMDBIT16
^CMDBIT17
^CMDBIT18
^CMDBIT19
^CMDBIT20
^CMDBIT21
^CMDBIT22
^CMDBIT23
^CMDBIT24
^CMDBIT25
^CMDBIT26
^CMDBIT27
^CMDBIT28
^CMDBIT29
^CMDBIT30
^CMDBIT31
^CMDBIT32

IEC09000030-1-en.vsd
IEC09000030 V1 EN-US

Figure 157: AUTOBITS function block

10.9.4 Signals GUID-A43D3FA2-4188-4D5E-8413-94DE4FF43BB4 v1

PID-1812-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 239: AUTOBITS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection

PID-1812-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 240: AUTOBITS Output signals

Name Type Description
CMDBIT1 BOOLEAN Command out bit 1
CMDBIT2 BOOLEAN Command out bit 2
CMDBIT3 BOOLEAN Command out bit 3
CMDBIT4 BOOLEAN Command out bit 4
CMDBIT5 BOOLEAN Command out bit 5
Table continues on next page

326 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

Name Type Description

CMDBIT6 BOOLEAN Command out bit 6
CMDBIT7 BOOLEAN Command out bit 7
CMDBIT8 BOOLEAN Command out bit 8
CMDBIT9 BOOLEAN Command out bit 9
CMDBIT10 BOOLEAN Command out bit 10
CMDBIT11 BOOLEAN Command out bit 11
CMDBIT12 BOOLEAN Command out bit 12
CMDBIT13 BOOLEAN Command out bit 13
CMDBIT14 BOOLEAN Command out bit 14
CMDBIT15 BOOLEAN Command out bit 15
CMDBIT16 BOOLEAN Command out bit 16
CMDBIT17 BOOLEAN Command out bit 17
CMDBIT18 BOOLEAN Command out bit 18
CMDBIT19 BOOLEAN Command out bit 19
CMDBIT20 BOOLEAN Command out bit 20
CMDBIT21 BOOLEAN Command out bit 21
CMDBIT22 BOOLEAN Command out bit 22
CMDBIT23 BOOLEAN Command out bit 23
CMDBIT24 BOOLEAN Command out bit 24
CMDBIT25 BOOLEAN Command out bit 25
CMDBIT26 BOOLEAN Command out bit 26
CMDBIT27 BOOLEAN Command out bit 27
CMDBIT28 BOOLEAN Command out bit 28
CMDBIT29 BOOLEAN Command out bit 29
CMDBIT30 BOOLEAN Command out bit 30
CMDBIT31 BOOLEAN Command out bit 31
CMDBIT32 BOOLEAN Command out bit 32

10.9.5 Settings GUID-1EC62832-95A2-4A4B-B007-88B657A3B7D5 v1

PID-1812-SETTINGS v13

Table 241: AUTOBITS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled

10.9.6 Operation principle SEMOD158597-4 v4

Automation bits function (AUTOBITS) has 32 individual outputs which each can be mapped as a
Binary Output point in DNP3. The output is operated by a "Object 12" in DNP3. This object contains

Bay control REC650 327

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time. To operate an AUTOBITS output point,
send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off, pulse-On, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The remaining
parameters will be regarded were appropriate. ex: pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5
would give 5 positive 100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart.

There is a BLOCK input signal, which will disable the operation of the function, in the same way the
setting Operation: Enabled/Disabled does. That means that, upon activation of the BLOCK input,
all 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set to 0. The BLOCK acts like an overriding, the function still
receives data from the DNP3 master. Upon deactivation of BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs
will be set by the DNP3 master again, momentarily. For AUTOBITS , the PSTO input determines the
operator place. The command can be written to the block while in “Remote”. If PSTO is in “Local”
then no change is applied to the outputs.

For description of the DNP3 protocol implementation, refer to DNP3 communication protocol
manual.

10.10 Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD

10.10.1 Functionality GUID-973929FE-292B-42A5-ACF9-BC95E2B16AE1 v2

I103CMD is a command function block in control direction with pre-defined output signals. The
signals are in steady state, not pulsed, and stored in the IED in case of restart.

10.10.2 Function block GUID-C0680812-C488-4546-AA65-F590955DBF0C v1

I103CMD
BLOCK 16-AR
17-DIFF
18-PROT

IEC10000282-1-en.vsd
IEC10000282 V1 EN-US

Figure 158: I103CMD function block

10.10.3 Signals
PID-3568-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 242: I103CMD Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

PID-3568-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 243: I103CMD Output signals

Name Type Description
16-AR BOOLEAN Information number 16 disable/enable autorecloser
17-DIFF BOOLEAN Information number 17, block of differential protection
18-PROT BOOLEAN Information number 18, block of protection

328 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

10.10.4 Settings
PID-3568-SETTINGS v2

Table 244: I103CMD Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

10.11 IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD

10.11.1 Functionality GUID-19AD44B2-21D6-4DB0-AD74-1578DA30C100 v5

I103IEDCMD is a command block in control direction with defined IED functions. All outputs are
pulsed and they are NOT stored. Pulse length is fixed to 400ms.

10.11.2 Function block GUID-52D27CDA-8805-48FA-99BE-2E05A438B0C7 v1

I103IEDCMD
BLOCK 19-LEDRS
23-GRP1
24-GRP2
25-GRP3
26-GRP4

IEC10000283-1-en.vsd
IEC10000283 V1 EN-US

Figure 159: I103IEDCMD function block

10.11.3 Signals
PID-2650-INPUTSIGNALS v12

Table 245: I103IEDCMD Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

PID-2650-OUTPUTSIGNALS v12

Table 246: I103IEDCMD Output signals

Name Type Description
19-LEDRS BOOLEAN Information number 19, reset LEDs
23-GRP1 BOOLEAN Information number 23, activate setting group 1
24-GRP2 BOOLEAN Information number 24, activate setting group 2
25-GRP3 BOOLEAN Information number 25, activate setting group 3
26-GRP4 BOOLEAN Information number 26, activate setting group 4

Bay control REC650 329

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

10.11.4 Settings
PID-2650-SETTINGS v12

Table 247: I103IEDCMD Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 255 Function type (1-255)

10.12 Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRCMD

10.12.1 Functionality GUID-2989EAC8-20BE-46EE-93FE-C70188D0BC89 v1

I103USRCMD is a command block in control direction with user defined output signals. These
function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in the private range, and the
Information number parameter for each output signal.

10.12.2 Function block GUID-5EBEAED5-ABD9-4257-B879-DF7FD9F7805A v1

I103USRCMD
BLOCK ^OUTPUT1
^OUTPUT2
^OUTPUT3
^OUTPUT4
^OUTPUT5
^OUTPUT6
^OUTPUT7
^OUTPUT8

IEC10000284-1-en.vsd
IEC10000284 V1 EN-US

Figure 160: I103USRCMD function block

10.12.3 Signals
PID-2651-INPUTSIGNALS v12

Table 248: I103USRCMD Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

PID-2651-OUTPUTSIGNALS v12

Table 249: I103USRCMD Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Command output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Command output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Command output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Command output 4
Table continues on next page

330 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

Name Type Description

OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Command output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Command output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Command output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Command output 8

10.12.4 Settings
PID-2651-SETTINGS v12

Table 250: I103USRCMD Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
PulseMode Steady - - Pulsed Pulse mode
Pulsed
PulseLength 0.200 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo_1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for output 1 (1-255)
InfNo_2 1 - 255 - 1 2 Information number for output 2 (1-255)
InfNo_3 1 - 255 - 1 3 Information number for output 3 (1-255)
InfNo_4 1 - 255 - 1 4 Information number for output 4 (1-255)
InfNo_5 1 - 255 - 1 5 Information number for output 5 (1-255)
InfNo_6 1 - 255 - 1 6 Information number for output 6 (1-255)
InfNo_7 1 - 255 - 1 7 Information number for output 7 (1-255)
InfNo_8 1 - 255 - 1 8 Information number for output 8 (1-255)

10.13 Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103

I103GENCMD

10.13.1 Functionality GUID-729E9AFD-0468-4BBD-B54A-A6CDCC68A9B2 v2

I103GENCMD is used for transmitting generic commands over IEC 60870-5-103. The function has
two outputs signals CMD_OFF and CMD_ON that can be used to implement double-point
command schemes.

The I103GENCMD component can be configured as either 2 pulsed ON/OFF or 2 steady ON/OFF
outputs. The ON output is pulsed with a command with value 2, while the OFF output is pulsed
with a command value 1. If in steady mode is ON asserted and OFF deasserted with command 2
and vice versa with command 1. The I103GENCMD is retained, and a command in steady mode will
be reissued on restart.

The standard does not define the use of values 0 and 3. However, when connected to a switching
device, these values are transmitted.

Bay control REC650 331

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 10 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Control

10.13.2 Function block GUID-6EC8453E-0D00-4720-95A6-156C41CA46BB v1

I103GENCMD
BLOCK ^CMD_OFF
^CMD_ON

IEC10000285-1-en.vsd
IEC10000285 V1 EN-US

Figure 161: I103GENCMD function block

10.13.3 Signals
PID-3567-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 251: I103GENCMD Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command

PID-3567-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 252: I103GENCMD Output signals

Name Type Description
CMD_OFF BOOLEAN Command output OFF
CMD_ON BOOLEAN Command output ON

10.13.4 Settings
PID-3567-SETTINGS v2

Table 253: I103GENCMD Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
PulseLength 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for command output
(1-255)

10.14 IED commands with position and select for IEC

60870-5-103 I103POSCMD

10.14.1 Functionality GUID-1E40B94D-B6A6-42F0-8757-A47B8A3FA3CD v4

I103POSCMD has double-point position indicators that are getting the position value as an integer
(for example from the POSITION output of the SCSWI function block) and sending it over IEC
60870-5-103 (1=OPEN; 2=CLOSE). .The standard does not define the use of values 0 and 3 .
However, when connected to a switching device, these values are transmitted.

332 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 10
Control

The BLOCK input will block only the signals in monitoring direction (the position information), not
the commands via IEC 60870-5-103. The SELECT input is used to indicate that the monitored
apparatus has been selected (in a select-before-operate type of control)

10.14.2 Function block GUID-3A31C1F2-1FB5-4DB0-A698-AD3F55738DB1 v1

I103POSCMD
BLOCK
POSITION
SELECT

IEC10000286-1-en.vsd
IEC10000286 V1 EN-US

Figure 162: I103POSCMD function block

10.14.3 Signals
PID-2663-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 254: I103POSCMD Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command
POSITION INTEGER 0 Position of controllable object
SELECT BOOLEAN 0 Select of controllable object

10.14.4 Settings
PID-2663-SETTINGS v12

Table 255: I103POSCMD Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Fucntion type (1-255)
InfNo 160 - 196 - 4 160 Information number for command output
(1-255)

Bay control REC650 333

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
334
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 11
Logic

Section 11 Logic
11.1 Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC (94) GUID-B56D86A1-47D9-4B45-A90B-B622C3AE5D2D v2

11.1.1 Identification
SEMOD56226-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Tripping logic common 3-phase SMPPTRC 94
output
I->O

SYMBOL-K V1 EN-US

11.1.2 Functionality M12275-3 v8

A function block for protection tripping is provided for each circuit breaker involved in the tripping
of the fault. It provides a settable pulse prolongation to ensure a three-phase trip pulse of
sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for correct co-operation with autoreclosing
functions.

The trip function block also includes a settable latch functionality for breaker lock-out.

11.1.3 Function block M12638-3 v5

SMPPTRC (94)
BLOCK TRIP
TRINP_3P CLLKOUT
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT

ANSI09000284-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000284 V1 EN-US

Figure 163: SMPPTRC (94) function block

11.1.4 Signals
PID-1133-INPUTSIGNALS v17

Table 256: SMPPTRC (94) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
TRINP_3P BOOLEAN 0 Trip all phases
SETLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for setting the circuit breaker lockout function
RSTLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout function

Bay control REC650 335

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Logic

PID-1133-OUTPUTSIGNALS v17

Table 257: SMPPTRC (94) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
CLLKOUT BOOLEAN Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)

11.1.5 Settings
PID-1133-SETTINGS v17

Table 258: SMPPTRC (94) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Enabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
tTripMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Minimum duration of trip output signal

Table 259: SMPPTRC (94) Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TripLockout Disabled - - Disabled On: Activate output (CLLKOUT) and trip
Enabled latch, Off: Only output
AutoLock Disabled - - Disabled On: Lockout from input (SETLKOUT) and
Enabled trip, Off: Only input

11.1.6 Operation principle M12255-3 v8

The duration of a trip output signal from tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC (94) is
settable (tTripMin). The pulse length should be long enough to secure the breaker opening.

For three-pole tripping logic common 3-phase output, SMPPTRC (94) has a single input (TRINP_3P)
through which all trip output signals from the protection functions within the IED, or from external
protection functions via one or more of the IEDs binary inputs, are routed. It has a single trip
output (TRIP) for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary outputs, as well as to other
functions within the IED requiring this signal.

ANSI05000789 V2 EN-US

Figure 164: Simplified logic diagram for three pole trip

In multi-breaker arrangements, one SMPPTRC (94) function block is used for each breaker.

336 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 11
Logic

Lockout can be activated either by activating the input (SETLKOUT) or automatically from the trip
input by setting AutoLock to Enabled. A Lockout condition will be indicated by activation of the
output (CLLKOUT). If lockout has been activated it can be reset by activating the input
(RSTLKOUT) or via the HMI.

If TripLockout is set to Enabled an active Lockout will latch the three-phase trip output. In this way
if both AutoLock and TripLockout are set to Enabled the trip will always be three-phase and sealed
in.

11.1.7 Technical data

M12380-1 v5

Table 260: SMPPTRC (94) technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Trip action 3-ph -
Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms

11.2 Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO

11.2.1 Identification
SEMOD167882-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO - -

11.2.2 Functionality M15321-3 v9

The 12 Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO function each with 32 inputs are used to route trip signals and
other logical output signals to the tripping logics SMPPTRC and SPTPTRC or to different output
contacts on the IED.

TMAGGIO 3 output signals and the physical outputs allows the user to adapt the signals to the
physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs for settable pulse or steady
output.

Bay control REC650 337

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Logic

11.2.3 Function block SEMOD54400-4 v5

TMAGGIO
INPUT1 OUTPUT1
INPUT2 OUTPUT2
INPUT3 OUTPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
IEC09000105 V1 EN-US

Figure 165: TMAGGIO function block

11.2.4 Signals
PID-1866-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 261: TMAGGIO Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
Table continues on next page

338 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 11
Logic

Name Type Default Description

INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16
INPUT17 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 17
INPUT18 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 18
INPUT19 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 19
INPUT20 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 20
INPUT21 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 21
INPUT22 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 22
INPUT23 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 23
INPUT24 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 24
INPUT25 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 25
INPUT26 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 26
INPUT27 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 27
INPUT28 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 28
INPUT29 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 29
INPUT30 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 30
INPUT31 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 31
INPUT32 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 32

PID-1866-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 262: TMAGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 17 to 32
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 1 to 32

11.2.5 Settings
PID-1866-SETTINGS v13

Table 263: TMAGGIO Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Enabled Operation Disable / Enable
Enabled
PulseTime 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Output pulse time
OnDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output on delay time
OffDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output off delay time
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 339

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Logic

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ModeOutput1 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 1, steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput2 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 2, steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput3 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 3, steady or pulsed
Pulsed

11.2.6 Operation principle SEMOD52537-5 v6

The trip matrix logic (TMAGGIO) block is provided with 32 input signals and 3 output signals. The
function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to provide grouping of connected
input signals to the three output signals from the function block.

Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules:

1. when any one of first 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1 the first output
signal (OUTPUT1) will get logical value 1.
2. when any one of second 16 inputs signals (INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical value 1 the second
output signal (OUTPUT2) will get logical value 1.
3. when any one of all 32 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value 1 the third output
signal (OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1.

By use of the settings ModeOutput1, ModeOutput2, ModeOutput3, PulseTime, OnDelay and

OffDelay the behavior of each output can be customized. The OnDelay is always active and will
delay the input to output transition by the set time. The ModeOutput for respective output
decides whether the output shall be steady with an drop-off delay as set by OffDelay or if it shall
give a pulse with duration set by PulseTime. Note that for pulsed operation and that the inputs are
connected in an OR-function, a new pulse will only be given on the output if all related inputs are
reset and then one is activated again. For steady operation the OffDelay will start when all related
inputs have reset. Detailed logical diagram is shown in figure 166

340 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 11
Logic

PulseTime
t
AND
ModeOutput1=Pulsed
Input 1
Output 1
OR
On Delay Time 1 0 AND
OR 0 Off Delay Time 1
Input 16

PulseTime
t
AND
ModeOutput2=Pulsed
Input 17 AND Output 2
OR
On Delay Time 2 0 AND
OR 0 Off Delay Time 2
Input 32

PulseTime
t
AND

ModeOutput3=Pulsed
Output 3
OR
On Delay Time 3 0 AND
OR 0 Off Delay Time 3

ANSI11000290-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000290 V1 EN-US

Figure 166: Trip matrix internal logic

Output signals from TMAGGIO are typically connected to other logic blocks or directly to output
contacts in the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit breaker(s) the pulse time delay
shall be set to approximately 0.150 seconds in order to obtain satisfactory minimum duration of
the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils.

11.3 Configurable logic blocks

11.3.1 Standard configurable logic blocks

11.3.1.1 Functionality M11396-4 v13

A number of logic blocks and timers are available for the user to adapt the configuration to the
specific application needs.

• OR function block. Each block has 6 inputs and two outputs where one is inverted.

• INVERTER function blocks that inverts the input signal.

• PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or limiting of
operation of outputs, settable pulse time.

Bay control REC650 341

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Logic

• GATE function block is used for whether or not a signal should be able to pass from the input
to the output.

• XOR function block. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.

• LOOPDELAY function block used to delay the output signal one execution cycle.

• TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the input signal. The
timer has a settable time delay and must be Enabled for the input signal to activate the
output with the appropriate time delay.

• AND function block. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one is inverted

• SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from two inputs
respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory setting controls
if the block's output should reset or return to the state it was, after a power interruption. The
SET input has priority if both SET and RESET inputs are operated simultaneously.

• RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from two inputs
respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory setting controls
if the block's output should reset or return to the state it was, after a power interruption. The
RESET input has priority if both SET and RESET are operated simultaneously.

Configurable logic Q/T

A number of logic blocks and timers, with the capability to propagate timestamp and quality of
the input signals, are available. The function blocks assist the user to adapt the IEDs configuration
to the specific application needs.

• ORQT OR function block that also propagates timestamp and quality of input signals. Each
block has six inputs and two outputs where one is inverted.

• INVERTERQT function block that inverts the input signal and propagates timestamp and
quality of input signal.

• PULSETIMERQT Pulse timer function block can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or
limiting of operation of outputs. The function also propagates timestamp and quality of input
signal.

• XORQT XOR function block. The function also propagates timestamp and quality of input
signals. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.

• TIMERSETQT function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the input signal.
The timer has a settable time delay. The function also propagates timestamp and quality of
input signal.

• ANDQT AND function block. The function also propagates timestamp and quality of input
signals. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one is inverted.

342 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 11
Logic

• SRMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from two inputs
respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory setting controls
if the block after a power interruption should return to the state before the interruption, or be
reset. The function also propagates timestamp and quality of input signal.

• RSMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from two inputs
respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory setting controls
if the block after a power interruption should return to the state before the interruption, or be
reset. The function also propagates timestamp and quality of input signal.

• INVALIDQT function which sets quality invalid of outputs according to a "valid" input. Inputs
are copied to outputs. If input VALID is 0, or if its quality invalid bit is set, all outputs invalid
quality bit will be set to invalid. The timestamp of an output will be set to the latest
timestamp of INPUT and VALID inputs.

• INDCOMBSPQT combines single input signals to group signal. Single position input is copied
to value part of SP_OUT output. TIME input is copied to time part of SP_OUT output. Quality
input bits are copied to the corresponding quality part of SP_OUT output.

• INDEXTSPQT extracts individual signals from a group signal input. Value part of single
position input is copied to SI_OUT output. Time part of single position input is copied to TIME
output. Quality bits in common part and indication part of inputs signal is copied to the
corresponding quality output.

11.3.1.2 OR function block

Identification GUID-69C40C61-427D-4EAA-B53D-DB720AFDA13A v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
OR Function block OR - -

Functionality M11449-3 v1
The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The OR
function block has six inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.

Function block GUID-7E0C103D-1072-4335-BF3A-CA644C1AF854 v2

OR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6

IEC09000288-1-en.vsd
IEC09000288 V1 EN-US

Figure 167: OR function block

Signals PID-1817-INPUTSIGNALS v15

Bay control REC650 343

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Logic

Table 264: OR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 6

PID-1817-OUTPUTSIGNALS v16

Table 265: OR Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings GUID-50A2CEA0-2781-4C5F-B184-F09FC666876F v1
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

11.3.1.3 Inverter function block INVERTER

Identification GUID-145EE7DB-A76B-44F8-B25A-B47A20206A49 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Inverter function block INVERTER - -

Function block GUID-536F7517-E4C0-49AD-BF0F-E10525292A0D v2

INVERTER
INPUT OUT

IEC09000287-1-en.vsd
IEC09000287 V1 EN-US

Figure 168: INVERTER function block

Signals PID-1815-INPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 266: INVERTER Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

PID-1815-OUTPUTSIGNALS v15

344 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 11
Logic

Table 267: INVERTER Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

Settings GUID-50A2CEA0-2781-4C5F-B184-F09FC666876F v1
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

11.3.1.4 PULSETIMER function block

Identification GUID-2109B7AF-2BF1-4327-82F3-44754C066F0F v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
PULSETIMER function block PULSETIMER - -

Functionality GUID-7A08F2DE-B6F3-456E-AB0C-F68B05C7AF90 v1
The pulse function can be used, for example for pulse extensions or limiting of operation of
outputs. The PULSETIMER has a settable length.

Function block GUID-9690C813-36BE-4C35-B7B1-D52ACEA00AB4 v2

PULSETIMER
INPUT OUT

IEC09000291-1-en.vsd
IEC09000291 V1 EN-US

Figure 169: PULSETIMER function block

Signals PID-1820-INPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 268: PULSETIMER Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

PID-1820-OUTPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 269: PULSETIMER Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

Settings PID-1820-SETTINGS v15

Table 270: PULSETIMER Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.000 - s 0.001 0.010 Pulse time length
90000.000

Bay control REC650 345

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Logic

11.3.1.5 Controllable gate function block GATE

Identification GUID-6D8202A9-77D9-49BE-B882-978688F5B01E v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Controllable gate function block GATE - -

Functionality GUID-363795D0-AAA9-47D9-8040-A3C602FA32AC v1
The GATE function block is used for controlling if a signal should pass from the input to the output
or not, depending on setting.

Function block GUID-CAB50E01-EA7A-47C3-A3BB-26B967908C4A v2

GATE
INPUT OUT

IEC09000295-1-en.vsd
IEC09000295 V1 EN-US

Figure 170: GATE function block

Signals PID-1814-INPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 271: GATE Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

PID-1814-OUTPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 272: GATE Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

Settings PID-1814-SETTINGS v15

Table 273: GATE Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled

11.3.1.6 Exclusive OR function block XOR

Identification GUID-84762172-8050-455D-8E17-D35A43430DF0 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Exclusive OR function block XOR - -

346 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 11
Logic

Functionality M11477-3 v3
The exclusive OR function (XOR) is used to generate combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. The output signal
is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are the same.

Function block GUID-488D9237-E3AE-4CE9-A0B4-DAB9D9DC1BB7 v2

XOR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT

IEC09000292-1-en.vsd
IEC09000292 V1 EN-US

Figure 171: XOR function block

Signals PID-1819-INPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 274: XOR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2

PID-1819-OUTPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 275: XOR Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings GUID-50A2CEA0-2781-4C5F-B184-F09FC666876F v1
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

11.3.1.7 Loop delay function block LOOPDELAY GUID-05D959B5-A55B-437C-8E8F-831A4A357E24 v1

GUID-16F24520-2194-4A4F-ACEF-DE09C4937800 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logic loop delay function block LOOPDELAY - -

GUID-64B24094-010D-4B8F-8B7B-DDD49499AAE5 v2
The Logic loop delay function block (LOOPDELAY) function is used to delay the output signal one
execution cycle.

Function block GUID-EE44CFDF-C8F7-4870-BD1C-98D9CD91FD97 v3

LOOPDELAY
INPUT OUT

IEC09000296-1-en.vsd
IEC09000296 V1 EN-US

Figure 172: LOOPDELAY function block

Bay control REC650 347

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Logic

Signals PID-1816-INPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 276: LOOPDELAY Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

PID-1816-OUTPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 277: LOOPDELAY Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal, signal is delayed one execution cycle

Settings GUID-DA453CDC-0262-43BB-9CEC-5E112A79175D v1
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

11.3.1.8 Timer function block TIMERSET

Identification GUID-FC02D235-639B-4353-BA1C-4B35AFFEAE7B v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Timer function block TIMERSET - -

Functionality GUID-A437F4E6-688E-4E23-BA1D-C063D897449A v1
The function block TIMERSET has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the input
signal. The timer has a settable time delay (t).

Input
tdelay
On

Off
tdelay

en08000289-2-en.vsd
IEC08000289 V1 EN-US

Figure 173: TIMERSET Status diagram

348 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 11
Logic

Function block GUID-41131A9B-B68C-426D-A742-E025063D31CF v2

TIMERSET
INPUT ON
OFF

IEC09000290-1-en.vsd
IEC09000290 V1 EN-US

Figure 174: TIMERSET function block

Signals PID-1818-INPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 278: TIMERSET Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

PID-1818-OUTPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 279: TIMERSET Output signals

Name Type Description
ON BOOLEAN Output signal, pick-up delayed
OFF BOOLEAN Output signal, drop-out delayed

Settings PID-1818-SETTINGS v15

Table 280: TIMERSET Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
t 0.000 - s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n
90000.000

11.3.1.9 AND function block

Identification GUID-7E8B6A42-EE26-462A-BE1B-DB8AA50AC368 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
AND function block AND - -

Functionality M11453-3 v3
The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The
AND function block has four inputs and two outputs.

Default value on all four inputs are logical 1 which makes it possible for the user to just use the
required number of inputs and leave the rest un-connected. The output OUT has a default value 0
initially, which suppresses one cycle pulse if the function has been put in the wrong execution
order.

Bay control REC650 349

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Logic

Function block GUID-E2A77ADC-F947-4041-AA41-1402070A0889 v2

AND
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4

IEC09000289-1-en.vsd
IEC09000289 V1 EN-US

Figure 175: AND function block

Signals PID-1400-INPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 281: AND Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 4

PID-1400-OUTPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 282: AND Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings GUID-50A2CEA0-2781-4C5F-B184-F09FC666876F v1
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

11.3.1.10 Set-reset memory function block SRMEMORY

Identification GUID-4659B1A1-B14C-4A8C-AB72-869949A6DAA0 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Set-reset memory function block SRMEMORY - -

Functionality GUID-C36DC217-8B3F-4217-A0F9-A3F6B0127CF9 v1
The Set-Reset function SRMEMORY is a flip-flop with memory that can set or reset an output from
two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORY function block has two outputs, where one is inverted.
The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruption will return the state it had
before or if it will be reset. For a Set-Reset flip-flop, SET input has higher priority over RESET input.

350 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 11
Logic

Table 283: Truth table for the Set-Reset (SRMEMORY) function block
SET RESET OUT NOUT
1 0 1 0
0 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
0 0 0 1

Function block GUID-8C725810-7036-4D06-ACD0-80D9FE835978 v2

SRMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC09000293-1-en.vsd
IEC09000293 V1 EN-US

Figure 176: SRMEMORY function block

Signals PID-1189-INPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 284: SRMEMORY Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

PID-1189-OUTPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 285: SRMEMORY Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings PID-1189-SETTINGS v15

Table 286: SRMEMORY Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

11.3.1.11 Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY

Identification GUID-778F02C0-F3F5-492C-9D72-1E499E01F838 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Reset-set with memory function RSMEMORY - -
block

Bay control REC650 351

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Logic

Functionality GUID-4C804DEA-3C83-4C20-82C6-BAD03BD48242 v3.1.1

The Reset-set with memory function block (RSMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory that can reset
or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORY function block has two outputs,
where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruption will
return the state it had before or if it will be reset. For a Reset-Set flip-flop, RESET input has higher
priority over SET input.

Table 287: Truth table for RSMEMORY function block

SET RESET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted last
value value
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 1

Function block GUID-50D5A4C0-59BF-44DE-86AC-47640ACD35A7 v3

RSMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC09000294-1-en.vsd
IEC09000294 V1 EN-US

Figure 177: RSMEMORY function block

Signals PID-1187-INPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 288: RSMEMORY Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

PID-1187-OUTPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 289: RSMEMORY Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings PID-1187-SETTINGS v15

Table 290: RSMEMORY Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Disabled - - Enabled Operating mode of the memory function
Enabled

352 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 11
Logic

11.3.2 Configurable logic Q/T

11.3.2.1 Functionality GUID-0CA6511A-E8BD-416E-9B59-5C6BD98C60B7 v2

A number of logic blocks and timers with the capability to propagate timestamp and quality of the
input signals are available. The function blocks assist the user to adapt the IEDs configuration to
the specific application needs.

11.3.2.2 ORQT function block

Identification GUID-C5375F01-5D15-4361-AB21-3CCF9975DBED v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
ORQT function block ORQT - -

Functionality GUID-F8AECD9C-83FC-4025-9AB5-809D88122277 v2
ORQT function block (ORQT) is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. ORQT function block has six inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.

Function block GUID-BCDFD5F0-4F30-4012-BA49-2E5C2115912E v2

ORQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6

IEC09000298-1-en.vsd
IEC09000298 V1 EN-US

Figure 178: ORQT function block

Signals PID-1080-INPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 291: ORQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 6

PID-1080-OUTPUTSIGNALS v15

Bay control REC650 353

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Logic

Table 292: ORQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings GUID-50A2CEA0-2781-4C5F-B184-F09FC666876F v1
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

11.3.2.3 INVERTERQT function block

Identification GUID-8D9260C0-3E0D-40DE-A521-70834662A4D0 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
INVERTERQT function block INVERTERQT - -

Function block GUID-06C5C594-E00B-4FD5-8B0F-4ED05DB348B6 v2

INVERTERQT
INPUT OUT

IEC09000299-1-en.vsd
IEC09000299 V1 EN-US

Figure 179: INVERTERQT function block

Signals PID-1079-INPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 293: INVERTERQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

PID-1079-OUTPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 294: INVERTERQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

Settings GUID-50A2CEA0-2781-4C5F-B184-F09FC666876F v1
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

11.3.2.4 Pulse timer function block PULSTIMERQT

Identification GUID-4D277839-1079-4137-BAEE-A2EF87B518BB v1

354 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 11
Logic

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Pulse timer function block PULSTIMERQT - -

Functionality GUID-D930E5A7-C564-4464-B97F-C72B4801C917 v2
Pulse timer function block (PULSETIMERQT) can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or
limiting of operation of outputs. The pulse timer has a settable length and will also propagate
quality and time.

When the input goes to 1 the output will be 1 for the time set by the time delay parameter t. Then
return to 0.

When the output changes value, the timestamp of the output signal is updated.

The supported “quality” state bits are propagated from the input each execution to the output. A
change of these bits will not lead to an updated timestamp on the output.

Function block GUID-A9E4A2DF-28A9-4082-A36D-964383F38896 v2

PULSETIMERQT
INPUT OUT

IEC09000304-1-en.vsd
IEC09000304 V1 EN-US

Figure 180: PULSETIMERQT function block

Signals PID-1081-INPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 295: PULSETIMERQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

PID-1081-OUTPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 296: PULSETIMERQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

Settings PID-1081-SETTINGS v15

Table 297: PULSETIMERQT Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.000 - s 0.001 0.010 Pulse time length
90000.000

11.3.2.5 XORQT function block

Identification GUID-59352F6F-DB9B-44F6-9EEE-E1D66BF5D9EB v1

Bay control REC650 355

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Logic

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
XORQT function block XORQT - -

Functionality GUID-62986D87-1690-499E-B8D3-1F51D2DA191E v2
The exclusive OR function (XORQT) function is used to generate combinatory expressions with
boolean variables. XORQT function has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is
inverted. The output signal is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are equal.

Function block GUID-A685524C-DF12-4BA8-A29C-A027CEAC75E5 v2

XORQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT

IEC09000300-1-en.vsd
IEC09000300 V1 EN-US

Figure 181: XORQT function block

Signals PID-1084-INPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 298: XORQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2

PID-1084-OUTPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 299: XORQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings GUID-50A2CEA0-2781-4C5F-B184-F09FC666876F v1
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

11.3.2.6 Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT

Identification GUID-72D9B585-CA00-483F-87B8-3655DF7E8A87 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT - -

Functionality GUID-3830BCA7-4876-481E-B5AC-2104675232E7 v2
The Settable timer function block (TIMERSETQT) has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs
related to the input signal. The timer has a settable time delay (t).

356 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 11
Logic

When the output changes value the timestamp of the output signal is updated. The supported
“quality” state bits are propagated from the input each execution to the output. A change of these
bits will not lead to an updated timestamp on the output.

Input
tdelay
On

Off
tdelay

en08000289-2-en.vsd
IEC08000289 V1 EN-US

Figure 182: TIMERSETQT function

Function block GUID-02F01170-B1B3-4B26-9C6B-313920CD23FF v2

TIMERSETQT
INPUT ON
OFF

IEC09000303-1-en.vsd
IEC09000303 V1 EN-US

Figure 183: TIMERSETQT function block

Signals PID-1083-INPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 300: TIMERSETQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

PID-1083-OUTPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 301: TIMERSETQT Output signals

Name Type Description
ON BOOLEAN Output signal, pick-up delayed
OFF BOOLEAN Output signal, drop-out delayed

Settings PID-1083-SETTINGS v15

Bay control REC650 357

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Logic

Table 302: TIMERSETQT Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
t 0.000 - s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n
90000.000

11.3.2.7 ANDQT function block

Identification GUID-FB97D3E7-629D-4B4A-9C1C-AFFD95B78A9A v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
ANDQT function block ANDQT - -

Functionality GUID-E3023D85-FDCC-4A5F-99B4-64DA7B4AC5BB v3
ANDQT function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. ANDQT
function block has four inputs and two outputs.

Default value on all four inputs are logical 1 which makes it possible for the user to just use the
required number of inputs and leave the rest un-connected. The output OUT has a default value 0
initially, which will suppress one cycle pulse if the function has been put in the wrong execution
order.

Function block GUID-4CEE3C76-A39D-4C33-AD55-88C570210F2B v2

ANDQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4

IEC09000297-1-en.vsd
IEC09000297 V1 EN-US

Figure 184: ANDQT function block

Signals PID-1078-INPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 303: ANDQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 4

PID-1078-OUTPUTSIGNALS v15

358 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 11
Logic

Table 304: ANDQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings GUID-50A2CEA0-2781-4C5F-B184-F09FC666876F v1
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

11.3.2.8 Set-reset function block SRMEMORYQT

Identification GUID-99C4F0EC-AEFF-4B69-B0FE-44159DFCCF00 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Set/reset logic component SRMEMORYQT - -

Functionality GUID-39060D4B-9AA7-4505-9487-88B2CBC534F0 v3
The Set-reset function (SRMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can set or reset an output
from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORYQT function block has two outputs, where one is
inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruption will return the
state it had before or if it will be reset.

SRMEMORYQT propagates quality and time as well as value.

Table 305: Truth table for SRMEMORYQT function block

SET RESET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted
value last value
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 0

If Memory parameter is Enabled, the output result is stored in semi-retained memory.

Function block GUID-C49281AE-3667-42C7-9168-F8DC31970FE7 v2

SRMEMORYQT
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC09000301-1-en.vsd
IEC09000301 V1 EN-US

Figure 185: SRMEMORYQT function block

Signals PID-1082-INPUTSIGNALS v15

Bay control REC650 359

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Logic

Table 306: SRMEMORYQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

PID-1082-OUTPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 307: SRMEMORYQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings PID-1082-SETTINGS v15

Table 308: SRMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

11.3.2.9 Reset-set function block RSMEMORYQT

Identification GUID-61630B53-7C1E-4656-8185-FC7619137106 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Reset/set logic component RSMEMORYQT - -

Functionality GUID-32A1B759-2ED8-45B3-8385-762167626CE2 v3.1.1

The Reset-set function (RSMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can reset or set an output
from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORYQT function block has two outputs, where one is
inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruption will return the
state it had before or if it will be reset. In RSMEMORYQT, the RESET input has priority over the SET
input..

Table 309: Truth table for RSMEMORYQT function block

SET RESET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted last
value value
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 1

RSMEMORYQT propagates quality and time as well as value.

360 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 11
Logic

Function block GUID-D29BFAD8-B1BD-43D4-B5C4-769A250745B8 v2

RSMEMORYQT
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC09000302-1-en.vsd
IEC09000302 V1 EN-US

Figure 186: RSMEMORYQT function block

Signals PID-1188-INPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 310: RSMEMORYQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

PID-1188-OUTPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 311: RSMEMORYQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings PID-1188-SETTINGS v15

Table 312: RSMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Disabled - - Enabled Operating mode of the memory function
Enabled

11.3.2.10 INVALIDQT function block

Identification GUID-F84B0F9A-5536-4E57-854C-9C9C5EED1FA1 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
INVALIDQT function block INVALIDQT - -

Bay control REC650 361

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Logic

Function block GUID-BDE95E52-D073-4216-B68E-8095B79C6C44 v2

INVALIDQT
INPUT1 OUTPUT1
INPUT2 OUTPUT2
INPUT3 OUTPUT3
INPUT4 OUTPUT4
INPUT5 OUTPUT5
INPUT6 OUTPUT6
INPUT7 OUTPUT7
INPUT8 OUTPUT8
INPUT9 OUTPUT9
INPUT10 OUTPUT10
INPUT11 OUTPUT11
INPUT12 OUTPUT12
INPUT13 OUTPUT13
INPUT14 OUTPUT14
INPUT15 OUTPUT15
INPUT16 OUTPUT16
VALID

IEC09000305-1-en.vsd
IEC09000305 V1 EN-US

Figure 187: INVALIDQT function block

GUID-8496F960-8E7B-40DA-B574-745B68E31946 v1
Function which sets quality invalid of outputs according to a "valid" input.

Inputs are copied to outputs. If input VALID is 0, or if its quality invalid bit is set, all outputs invalid
quality bit will be set. The timestamp of an output will be set to the latest timestamp of INPUT and
VALID input.

Signals PID-1106-INPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 313: INVALIDQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 InvalidLogic
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 16
VALID BOOLEAN 1 Inputs are valid or invalid

PID-1106-OUTPUTSIGNALS v9

362 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 11
Logic

Table 314: INVALIDQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Indication output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Indication output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Indication output 2
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Indication output 2
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Indication output 2
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Indication output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Indication output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Indication output 8
OUTPUT9 BOOLEAN Indication output 9
OUTPUT10 BOOLEAN Indication output 10
OUTPUT11 BOOLEAN Indication output 11
OUTPUT12 BOOLEAN Indication output 12
OUTPUT13 BOOLEAN Indication output 13
OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Indication output 14
OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Indication output 15
OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Indication output 16

Settings GUID-50A2CEA0-2781-4C5F-B184-F09FC666876F v1
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

11.3.2.11 Indication combining single position function block INDCOMBSPQT

Identification GUID-BEE987CB-EFD4-4E28-A180-1CB7964FD5BC v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Single indication signal combining INDCOMBSPQT - -
function block

Functionality GUID-EEBD65A5-394C-4ECD-BF6F-D556B610FC57 v1
Single position input is copied to value part of SP_OUT output. TIME input is copied to time part of
SP_OUT output. State input bits are copied to the corresponding state part of SP_OUT output. If
the state or value on the SP_OUT output changes, the Event bit in the state part is toggled.

Bay control REC650 363

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Logic

Function block GUID-DB1F51A7-25D7-4E71-935B-928D3535106D v2

INDCOMBSPQT
SP_IN* SP_OUT
TIME*
BLOCKED*
SUBST*
INVALID*
TEST*

IEC09000306-1-en.vsd
IEC09000306 V1 EN-US

Figure 188: INDCOMBSPQT function block

Signals PID-1601-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 315: INDCOMBSPQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SP_IN BOOLEAN 0 SP_OUT
TIME GROUP 0 SP_OUT
SIGNAL
BLOCKED BOOLEAN 0 SP_OUT
SUBST BOOLEAN 0 Substituted
INVALID BOOLEAN 0 SP_OUT
TEST BOOLEAN 0 SP_OUT

PID-1601-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 316: INDCOMBSPQT Output signals

Name Type Description
SP_OUT BOOLEAN SP_OUT

Settings GUID-50A2CEA0-2781-4C5F-B184-F09FC666876F v1
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

11.3.2.12 Indication extractor single position function block INDEXTSPQT

Identification GUID-52BB6C7E-9127-4B8F-816E-F840AEC32B8E v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Single indication signal extractor INDEXTSPQT - -
function block

Functionality GUID-9B700C69-4DAE-434A-BCE6-CE2D1139680A v1
Value part of single position input is copied to SI_OUT output.

Time part of single position input is copied to TIME output.

364 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 11
Logic

State bits in common part and indication part of inputs signal is copied to the corresponding
state output.

Function block GUID-0525A2AE-A669-4095-BE5C-89E36C9962E7 v2

INDEXTSPQT
SI_IN* SI_OUT
TIME
BLOCKED
SUBST
INVALID
TEST

IEC09000307-1-en.vsd
IEC09000307 V1 EN-US

Figure 189: INDEXTSPQT function block

Signals PID-1602-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 317: INDEXTSPQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SI_IN BOOLEAN 0 SI_OUT

PID-1602-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 318: INDEXTSPQT Output signals

Name Type Description
SI_OUT BOOLEAN SI_OUT
TIME GROUP SIGNAL Timestamp of input
BLOCKED BOOLEAN SP_OUT
SUBST BOOLEAN Substituted
INVALID BOOLEAN SP_OUT
TEST BOOLEAN SP_OUT

Settings GUID-50A2CEA0-2781-4C5F-B184-F09FC666876F v1
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

11.3.3 Technical data IP11362-1 v1

M11443-1 v12

Table 319: Configurable logic blocks

Logic block Quantity Range or value Accuracy
with cycle
time
5 ms 20 ms 100 ms
AND 60 60 160 - -
OR 60 60 160 - -
XOR 10 10 20 - -
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 365

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Logic

Logic block Quantity Range or value Accuracy

with cycle
time
5 ms 20 ms 100 ms
INVERTER 30 30 80 - -
SRMEMORY 10 10 20 - -
RSMEMORY 10 10 20 - -
GATE 10 10 20 - -
PULSETIMER 10 10 20 (0.000–90000.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms for
20 ms cycle time
TIMERSET 10 10 20 (0.000–90000.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms for
20 ms cycle time
LOOPDELAY 10 10 20

Table 320: Configurable logic Q/T

Logic block Quantity Range or value Accuracy
with cycle
time
20 ms 100 ms
ANDQT 20 100 - -
ORQT 20 100 - -
XORQT 10 30 - -
INVERTERQT 20 100 - -
RSMEMORYQT 10 30 - -
SRMEMORYQT 15 10 - -
PULSETIMERQT 10 30 (0.000– ± 0.5% ± 25 ms for 20 ms cycle time
90000.000) s
TIMERSETQT 10 30 (0.000– ± 0.5% ± 25 ms for 20 ms cycle time
90000.000) s
INVALIDQT 6 6 - -
INDCOMBSPQT 10 10 - -
INDEXTSPQT 10 10 - -

11.4 Fixed signals FXDSIGN

11.4.1 Identification
SEMOD167904-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Fixed signals FXDSIGN - -

366 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 11
Logic

11.4.2 Functionality M15322-3 v9

The Fixed signals function FXDSIGN generates nine pre-set (fixed) signals that can be used in the
configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in other function blocks to a certain
level/value, or for creating certain logic. Boolean, integer, floating point, string types of signals are
available.

11.4.3 Function block SEMOD54909-4 v4

FXDSIGN
OFF
ON
INTZERO
INTONE
INTALONE
REALZERO
STRNULL
ZEROSMPL
GRP_OFF

IEC09000037.vsd
IEC09000037 V1 EN-US

Figure 190: FXDSIGN function block

11.4.4 Signals
PID-1325-OUTPUTSIGNALS v17

Table 321: FXDSIGN Output signals

Name Type Description
OFF BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed off
ON BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed on
INTZERO INTEGER Integer signal fixed zero
INTONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed one
INTALONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed all ones
REALZERO REAL Real signal fixed zero
STRNULL STRING String signal with no characters
ZEROSMPL GROUP SIGNAL Channel id for zero sample
GRP_OFF GROUP SIGNAL Group signal fixed off

11.4.5 Settings
PID-1325-SETTINGS v10
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

11.4.6 Operation principle SEMOD54827-5 v4

There are nine outputs from FXDSIGN function block:

Bay control REC650 367

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Logic

• OFF is a boolean signal, fixed to OFF (boolean 0) value

• ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value
• INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0
• INTONE is an integer number, fixed to integer value 1
• INTALONE is an integer value FFFF (hex)
• REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed to 0.0 value
• STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value
• ZEROSMPL is a channel index, fixed to 0 value
• GRP_OFF is a group signal, fixed to 0 value

11.5 Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I

11.5.1 Identification
SEMOD175721-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I - -

11.5.2 Functionality SEMOD175725-4 v4

Boolean 16 to integer conversion function B16I is used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical)
signals into an integer.

11.5.3 Function block SEMOD175798-5 v4

B16I
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16

IEC09000035-1-en.vsd
IEC09000035 V1 EN-US

Figure 191: B16I function block

368 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 11
Logic

11.5.4 Signals
PID-1894-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 322: B16I Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16

PID-1894-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 323: B16I Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT INTEGER Output value

11.5.5 Settings ABBD8E241394 v3

The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600)

11.5.6 Monitored data

PID-1894-MONITOREDDATA v15

Table 324: B16I Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT INTEGER - - Output value

Bay control REC650 369

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Logic

11.5.7 Operation principle SEMOD175737-4 v5

The Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) will transfer a combination of up to 16 binary
inputs INx, where 1≤x≤16, to an integer. Each INx represents a value according to the table below
from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16. The sum of all the values
on the activated INx will be available on the output OUT as a sum of the integer values of all the
inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an integer. When all INx (where 1≤x≤16) are activated, that is =
Boolean 1, it corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. The B16I function is
designed for receiving up to 16 booleans input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze
the output at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block B16I for 1≤x≤16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output OUT on the
function block B16I

Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where 1≤x≤16) are active
that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to an integer by the
B16I function block.

370 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 11
Logic

11.6 Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node

representation B16IFCVI

11.6.1 Identification
SEMOD175757-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16IFCVI - -
with logic node representation

11.6.2 Functionality SEMOD175781-4 v5

Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function B16IFCVI is used to
transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. The block input will freeze the output
at the last value.

11.6.3 Function block SEMOD175801-5 v3

B16IFCVI
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16

IEC09000624-1-en.vsd
IEC09000624 V1 EN-US

Figure 192: B16IFCVI function block

11.6.4 Signals
PID-1895-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 325: B16IFCVI Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 371

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Logic

Name Type Default Description

IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16

PID-1895-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 326: B16IFCVI Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT INTEGER Output value

11.6.5 Settings ABBD8E241926 v2

The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600)

11.6.6 Monitored data

PID-1895-MONITOREDDATA v15

Table 327: B16IFCVI Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT INTEGER - - Output value

11.6.7 Operation principle SEMOD158425-4 v3.1.1

The Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function (B16IFCVI) will
transfer a combination of up to 16 binary inputs INx, where 1≤x≤16, to an integer. Each INx
represents a value according to the table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula:
INx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16. The sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available on the
output OUT as a sum of the integer values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an
integer. When all INx (where 1≤x≤16) are activated, that is = Boolean 1, it corresponds to that
integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. The B16IFCVI function is designed for receiving the

372 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 11
Logic

integer input from a station computer - for example, over IEC 61850. If the BLOCK input is
activated, it will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block B16IFCVI for 1≤x≤16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output OUT on the
function block B16IFCVI.

Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where 1≤x≤16) are active
that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to an integer by the
B16IFCVI function block.

11.7 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A

11.7.1 Identification
SEMOD167941-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A - -

11.7.2 Functionality SEMOD158373-5 v4

Integer to boolean 16 conversion function IB16A is used to transform an integer into a set of 16
binary (logical) signals.

Bay control REC650 373

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Logic

11.7.3 Function block SEMOD158389-4 v4

IB16A
BLOCK OUT1
INP OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16

IEC09000036-1-en.vsd
IEC09000036 V1 EN-US

Figure 193: IB16A function block

11.7.4 Signals
PID-1990-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 328: IB16A Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INP INTEGER 0 INP

PID-1990-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 329: IB16A Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16

374 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 11
Logic

11.7.5 Settings ABBD8E242451 v3

The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600)

11.7.6 Operation principle SEMOD158385-4 v4

With integer 15 on the input INP the OUT1 = OUT2 = OUT3= OUT4 =1 and the remaining OUTx = 0
for (5≤x≤16).

OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in accordance with the
table IB16A_1. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.

In the above example when integer 15 is on the input INP the OUT1 has a value =1, OUT2 has a value
=2, OUT3 has a value =4 and OUT4 has a value =8. The sum of these OUTx is equal to 1 + 2 + 4 + 8 =
15.

This follows the general formulae: The sum of the values of all OUTx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16 will be
equal to the integer value on the input INP.

The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion function (IB16A) will transfer an integer with a value between
0 to 65535 connected to the input INP to a combination of activated outputs OUTx where 1≤x≤16.
The sum of the values of all OUTx will then be equal to the integer on input INP. The values of the
different OUTx are according to the table below. When an OUTx is not activated, its value is 0.

When all OUTx where 1≤x≤16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that integer 65535
is connected to input INP. The IB16A function is designed for receiving the integer input locally. If
the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block IB16A for 1≤x≤16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output OUT on the
function block IB16A.

Name of OUTx Type Description Value when activated Value when

deactivated
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 2 0
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 4 0
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 8 0
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 16 0
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 32 0
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 64 0
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 128 0
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 256 0
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 512 0
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 1024 0
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 2048 0
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 4096 0
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 375

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Logic

Name of OUTx Type Description Value when activated Value when

deactivated
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14 8192 0
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15 16384 0
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all OUTx (where x = 1 to 16) are
active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest integer that can be converted by the IB16A function
block.

11.8 Integer to boolean 16 conversion with logic node

representation IB16FCVB

11.8.1 Identification
SEMOD167944-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16FCVB - -
with logic node representation

11.8.2 Functionality SEMOD158421-5 v5

Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function IB16FCVB is used to
transform an integer to 16 binary (logic) signals.

IB16FCVB function can receive remote values over IEC61850 when the operator position input
PSTO is in position remote. The block input will freeze the output at the last value.

11.8.3 Function block SEMOD158435-4 v3

IB16FCVB
BLOCK OUT1
PSTO OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16

IEC09000399-1-en.vsd
IEC09000399 V1 EN-US

Figure 194: IB16FCVB function block

376 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 11
Logic

11.8.4 Signals
PID-1980-INPUTSIGNALS v14

Table 330: IB16FCVB Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 1 Operator place selection

PID-1980-OUTPUTSIGNALS v14

Table 331: IB16FCVB Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16

11.8.5 Settings ABBD8E242982 v2

The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600)

11.8.6 Operation principle SEMOD176587-4 v3.1.1

An example is used to explain the principle of operation: With integer 15 sent to and received by
the IB16FCVB function on the IEC 61850 the OUTx changes from 0 to 1 on each of the OUT1; OUT2
OUT3 and OUT4. All other OUTx (5≤x≤16) remains 0. The boolean interpretation of this is
represented by the assigned values of each of the outputs OUT1 = 1; and OUT2 = 2; and OUT3= 4;
and OUT4 = 8. The sum of these OUTx (1≤x≤4) is equal to the integer 15 received via the IEC 61850
network. The remaining OUTx = 0 for (5≤x≤16).

Bay control REC650 377

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Logic

OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in accordance with the
Table 332. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.

The value of each OUTx for 1≤x≤16 (1≤x≤16) follows the general formulae: OUTx = 2x-1 The sum of
the values of all activated OUTx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16 will be equal to the integer value received over
IEC 61850 to the IB16FCVB_1 function block.

The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function (IB16FCVB) will
transfer an integer with a value between 0 to 65535 communicated via IEC 61850 and connected to
the IB16FCVB function block to a combination of activated outputs OUTx where 1≤x≤16. The values
represented by the different OUTx are according to Table 332. When an OUTx is not activated, its
value is 0.

The IB16FCVB function is designed for receiving the integer input from a station computer - for
example, over IEC 61850. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the logical outputs at the
last value.

Table 332: Outputs and their values when activated

Name of OUTx Type Description Value when activated Value when
deactivated
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 2 0
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 4 0
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 8 0
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 16 0
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 32 0
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 64 0
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 128 0
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 256 0
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 512 0
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 1024 0
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 2048 0
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 4096 0
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14 8192 0
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15 16384 0
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all OUTx (1≤x≤16) are active
equals 65535. This is the highest integer that can be converted to boolean by the IB16FCVB
function block.

The operator position input (PSTO) determines the operator place. The integer number that is
communicated to the IB16FCVB can only be written to the block while the PSTO is in position
“Remote”. If PSTO is in position ”Off” or ”Local”, then no changes are applied to the outputs.

378 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 11
Logic

11.9 Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and

overflow supervision TEIGGIO GUID-DB37ECF3-9189-46A5-89BD-6FE39613EF7E v1

11.9.1 Identification GUID-1913E066-37D1-4689-9178-5B3C8B029815 v1

Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device

identification identification number
Elapsed time integrator TEIGGIO - -

11.9.2 Functionality GUID-390D7433-0C1C-48B4-9A90-71AA148C3C35 v1

Elapsed Time Integrator (TEIGGIO) function is a function that accumulates the elapsed time when
a given binary signal has been high.

The main features of TEIGGIO are

• Applicable to long time integration (≤999 999.9 seconds).

• Supervision of limit transgression conditions and overflow.
• Possibility defining a warning or alarm with the resolution of 10 milliseconds.
• Retain the integration value at a warning/alarm/overflow.
• Possibilities for blocking and reset.
• Report the integrated time

11.9.3 Function block GUID-6D50A060-7751-405B-AEC1-FAE942EBDA64 v1

TEIGGIO
BLOCK WARNING
IN ALARM
RESET OVERFLOW
ACCTIME

IEC13000005-1-en.vsd
IEC13000005 V1 EN-US

Figure 195: TEIGGIO function block

11.9.4 Signals GUID-18B28B75-45AA-4C69-A2A6-6475966BFB29 v1

PID-3403-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 333: TEIGGIO Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Freeze the integration and block the other outputs
IN BOOLEAN 0 The input signal that is used to measure the elapsed time, when
its value is high
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset the integration time

Bay control REC650 379

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Logic

PID-3403-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 334: TEIGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
WARNING BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the warning limit
ALARM BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the alarm limit
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the overflow limit
ACCTIME REAL Integrated elapsed time in seconds

11.9.5 Settings GUID-7F971950-0DB6-4D9E-B4D7-CEF1E7AD078D v1

PID-3403-SETTINGS v2

Table 335: TEIGGIO Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 0-1 - 1 1 Disable/Enable Operation
tWarning 1.00 - 999999.99 s 0.01 600.00 Time limit for warning supervision
tAlarm 1.00 - 999999.99 s 0.01 1200.00 Time limit for alarm supervision

11.9.6 Operation principle GUID-04CC8365-DCDE-4DC7-BEF0-6EF8382305DD v1

The elapsed time integrator (TEIGGIO) provides

• time integration, accumulating the elapsed time when a given binary signal has been high.
• blocking and reset.
• supervision of limit transgression and overflow.
• retaining of the integrated value if any warning, alarm or overflow occurs.

Figure 196 describes the simplified logic of the function where the block “Time Integration“ covers
the logics for the first two items listed above while the block “Transgression Supervision Plus
Retain“ contains the logics for the last two.

380 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 11
Logic

Loop Delay

tOverflow
tWarning
OVERFLOW
tAlarm
Transgression Supervision WARNING
Plus Retain
ALARM

BLOCK
RESET ACCTIME
Time Integration
IN

Loop Delay

IEC12000195-2-en.vsd
IEC12000195 V2 EN-US

Figure 196: TEIGGIO Simplified logic

TEIGGIO main functionalities are

• integrate the elapsed time when IN has been high

• applicable to long time integration (≤999 999.9 seconds)
• output ACCTIME presents integrated value in seconds to all tools
• integrated value is retained in non-volatile memory, if any warning, alarm or overflow
occurs
• any retained value with a warning/alarm/overflow shall be available as the initiation
value for the integration followed by a restart.
• RESET: Reset the integration value. Consequently all other outputs are also reset
• unconditionally on the input IN value
• reset the value of the non-volatile memory to zero.
• BLOCK: Freeze the integration and block/reset the other outputs
• unconditionally on the signal value
• BLOCK request overrides RESET request.
• Monitor and report the conditions of limit transgression
• overflow if output ACCTIME > tOverflow
• alarm if ACCTIME > tAlarm
• warning if ACCTIME > tWarning.

The ACCTIME output represents the integrated time in seconds while tOverflow, tAlarm and
tWarning are the time limit parameters in seconds.

tAlarm and tWarning are user settable limits. They are also independent, that is, there is no check
if tAlarm > tWarning.

tAlarm and tWarning are possible to be defined with a resolution of 10 ms, depending on the level
of the defined values for the parameters.

tOverflow is for the overflow supervision with a default value tOverflow = 999 999.9 seconds. The
outputs freeze if an overflow occurs.

Bay control REC650 381

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 11 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Logic

11.9.6.1 Operation Accuracy GUID-E0772193-9F6E-43DA-B642-2923565E5D4C v1

The accuracy of TEIGGIO depends on essentially three factors

• task cycle time

• the pulse length
• the number of pulses, that is the number of rising and falling flank pairs

In principle, a shorter task cycle time, longer integrated time length or more pulses may lead to
reduced accuracy.

11.9.6.2 Memory storage GUID-6FDD6590-30F9-4CC1-AC9D-945544AB8688 v1

The value of the integrated elapsed time is retained in a non-volatile memory, only if any warning,
alarm or/and overflow occurs. Consequently there is a risk of data loss in the integrated time at a
power failure.

11.9.7 Technical data

GUID-B258726E-1129-47C9-94F9-BE634A2085FA v1.1.1

Table 336: TEIGGIO Technical data

Function Cycle time (ms) Range or value Accuracy
Elapsed time integration 5 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.05% or ±0.015 s
20 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.05% or ±0.04 s
100 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.05% or ±0.2 s

382 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

Section 12 Monitoring
12.1 Measurements

12.1.1 Functionality SEMOD54488-4 v8

Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and reporting to the
local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for example, via IEC 61850. The
possibility to continuously monitor measured values of active power, reactive power, currents,
voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital for efficient production, transmission and
distribution of electrical energy. It provides to the system operator fast and easy overview of the
present status of the power system. Additionally, it can be used during testing and commissioning
of protection and control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument
transformers (CTs and VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the measured value
from the IED with other independent meters the proper operation of the IED analog measurement
chain can be verified. Finally, it can be used to verify proper direction orientation for distance or
directional overcurrent protection function.

The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual hardware
(TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low limit, low limit, high
limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported, that is, the measured value
below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the impact of noise in the inputs. There are
no interconnections regarding any settings or parameters, neither between functions nor between
signals within each function.

Zero clampings are handled by ZeroDb for each signal separately for each of the functions. For
example, the zero clamping of U12 is handled by VLZeroDB in VMMXU, zero clamping of I1 is
handled by ILZeroDb in CMMXU.

Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level when change
in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all changes since the last time
value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value can also be based on periodic reporting.

The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system quantities:

• P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power

• PF: power factor
• V: phase-to-phase voltage magnitude
• I: phase current magnitude
• F: power system frequency

The output values are displayed in the local HMI under Main menu/Tests/Function status/
Monitoring/CVMMXN/Outputs

The measuring functions CMMXU, VNMMXU and VMMXU provide physical quantities:

Bay control REC650 383

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

• I: phase currents (magnitude and angle) (CMMXU)

• V: voltages (phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltage, magnitude and angle) (VMMXU,
VNMMXU)

It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5 presentation.
This is accomplished by angle and magnitude compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current
and at 100% of rated voltage.

The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual hardware, (TRM) and
the logic configuration made in PCM600.

The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequence component quantities:

• I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, magnitude and angle)

• V: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, magnitude and angle).

The CVMMXN function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamental frequency
phasors (DFT values) of the measured current respectively voltage signals. The measured power
quantities are available either, as instantaneously calculated quantities or, averaged values over a
period of time (low pass filtered) depending on the selected settings.

12.1.2 Measurements CVMMXN

12.1.2.1 Identification
GUID-D0F2F7C9-E41E-4E57-895E-01B2E2B198BF v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Measurements CVMMXN -
P, Q, S, I, U, f

SYMBOL-RR V1 EN-US

12.1.2.2 Function block GUID-AD65E370-C180-42BA-98D3-FC5A9C7CE88C v2

The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic
configuration made in PCM600.

384 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

CVMMXN
I3P* S
V3P* S_RANGE
P_INST
P
P_RANGE
Q_INST
Q
Q_RANGE
PF
PF_RANGE
ILAG
ILEAD
V
V_RANGE
I
I_RANGE
F
F_RANGE

ANSI10000051-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000051 V1 EN-US

Figure 197: CVMMXN function block

12.1.2.3 Signals
PID-3395-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 337: CVMMXN Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL

PID-3395-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 338: CVMMXN Output signals

Name Type Description
S REAL Apparent power magnitude of deadband value
S_RANGE INTEGER Apparent power range
P_INST REAL Active power
P REAL Active power magnitude of deadband value
P_RANGE INTEGER Active power range
Q_INST REAL Reactive power
Q REAL Reactive power magnitude of deadband value
Q_RANGE INTEGER Reactive power range
PF REAL Power factor magnitude of deadband value
PF_RANGE INTEGER Power factor range
ILAG BOOLEAN Current is lagging voltage
ILEAD BOOLEAN Current is leading voltage
U REAL Calculated voltage magnitude of deadband value
U_RANGE INTEGER Calcuated voltage range
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 385

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Type Description

I REAL Calculated current magnitude of deadband value
I_RANGE INTEGER Calculated current range
F REAL System frequency magnitude of deadband value
F_RANGE INTEGER System frequency range

12.1.2.4 Settings
PID-3395-SETTINGS v2

Table 339: CVMMXN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Mode A, B, C - - A, B, C Selection of measured current and voltage
Arone
Pos Seq
AB
BC
CA
A
B
C
PowAmpFact 0.000 - 6.000 - 0.001 1.000 Magnitude factor to scale power
calculations
PowAngComp -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Angle compensation for phase shift
between measured I & V
k 0.00 - 1.00 - 0.01 0.00 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement
SLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of SBase
SLowLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
SMin 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
SMax 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
SRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
PMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
PMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
PRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
QMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
QMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
QRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
Table continues on next page

386 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

PFMin -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Minimum value
PFMax -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Maximum value
PFRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UMin 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % ofVUBase
UMax 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of VBase
URepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
IMin 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IMax 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
FrMin 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
FrMax 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 70.000 Maximum value
FrRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband

Table 340: CVMMXN Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
SZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
SHiHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
SHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
PHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
SLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
PDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
PZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
PHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
PLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
PLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
PLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
QDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
QZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
QHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 387

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

QHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
QLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
QLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
QLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
UGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %VB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of VBase
PFDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
PFZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
IGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of IBase
PFHiHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 High High limit (physical value)
PFHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 0.800 High limit (physical value)
PFLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -0.800 Low limit (physical value)
PFLowLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
PFLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
UDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
UZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
UHiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of VBase
ULowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of VBase
ULowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of VBase
ULimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
IDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
IZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
IHiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
ILowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
ILowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
ILimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
FrDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
FrZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
FrHiHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 65.000 High High limit (physical value)
FrHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 63.000 High limit (physical value)
FrLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 47.000 Low limit (physical value)
FrLowLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 45.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
Table continues on next page

388 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

FrLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at
5% of Vn
UAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at
30% of Vn
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at
100% of Vn
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at
5% of In
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at
30% of In
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at
100% of In
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% of In
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 30% of In
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100% of In

12.1.2.5 Monitored data

PID-3395-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 341: CVMMXN Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
S REAL - MVA Apparent power magnitude of deadband
value
P REAL - MW Active power magnitude of deadband
value
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power magnitude of deadband
value
PF REAL - - Power factor magnitude of deadband
value
U REAL - kV Calculated voltage magnitude of
deadband value
I REAL - A Calculated current magnitude of deadband
value
F REAL - Hz System frequency magnitude of deadband
value

Bay control REC650 389

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

12.1.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU

12.1.3.1 Identification
GUID-3661D042-5B33-4F23-8F7A-E5BEFD575635 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Phase current measurement CMMXU -

SYMBOL-SS V1 EN-US

12.1.3.2 Function block GUID-27E7F0AE-F387-430D-86B8-C2CA1CAE6790 v2

The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic
configuration made in PCM600.

CMMXU
I3P* I_A
IA_RANGE
IA_ANGL
I_B
IB_RANGE
IB_ANGL
I_C
IC_RANGE
IC_ANGL

ANSI08000225-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000225 V1 EN-US

Figure 198: CMMXU function block

12.1.3.3 Signals
PID-1102-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 342: CMMXU Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL

PID-1102-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 343: CMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
I_A REAL IA Amplitude
IA_RANGE INTEGER Phase A current magnitude range
IA_ANGL REAL IA Angle
I_B REAL IB Amplitude
IB_RANGE INTEGER Phase B current magnitude range
IB_ANGL REAL IB Angle
Table continues on next page

390 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

Name Type Description

I_C REAL IC Amplitude
IC_RANGE INTEGER Phase C current magnitude range
IC_ANGL REAL IC Angle

12.1.3.4 Settings
PID-1102-SETTINGS v13

Table 344: CMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
ILDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
ILMax 0 - 500000 A 1 1300 Maximum value
ILRepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
ILAngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s

Table 345: CMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ILZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
ILHiHiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1200 High High limit (physical value)
ILHiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1100 High limit (physical value)
ILLowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
ILLowLowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)
ILMin 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Minimum value
ILLimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
IMagComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at
5% of In
IMagComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at
30% of In
IMagComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at
100% of In
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% of In
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 30% of In
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100% of In

Bay control REC650 391

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

12.1.3.5 Monitored data

PID-1102-MONITOREDDATA v15

Table 346: CMMXU Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
I_A REAL - A IA Amplitude
IA_ANGL REAL - deg IA Angle
I_B REAL - A IB Amplitude
IB_ANGL REAL - deg IB Angle
I_C REAL - A IC Amplitude
IC_ANGL REAL - deg IC Angle

12.1.4 Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU

12.1.4.1 Identification
GUID-726E0058-033D-4E90-870A-A870ADAD33B0 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU -

SYMBOL-UU V1 EN-US

12.1.4.2 Function block GUID-1F656A2A-B1F7-47E9-92F8-3061A5E95D76 v2

The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic
configuration made in PCM600.

VMMXU
V3P* V_AB
VAB_RANG
VAB_ANGL
V_BC
VBC_RANG
VBC_ANGL
V_CA
VCA_RANG
VCA_ANGL

ANSI08000223-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000223 V1 EN-US

Figure 199: VMMXU function block

392 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

12.1.4.3 Signals
PID-1231-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 347: VMMXU Input signals

Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL

PID-1231-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 348: VMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
V_AB REAL V_AB Amplitude
VAB_RANG INTEGER VAB Magnitude range
VAB_ANGL REAL VAB Angle
V_BC REAL V_BC Amplitude
VBC_RANG INTEGER VBC Magnitude range
VBC_ANGL REAL VBC Angle
V_CA REAL V_CA Amplitude
VCA_RANG INTEGER VCA Amplitude range
VCA_ANGL REAL VCA Angle

12.1.4.4 Settings
PID-1231-SETTINGS v13

Table 349: VMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disable / Enable
Enabled
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
VLDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
VLMax 0 - 4000000 V 1 170000 Maximum value
VLRepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
VLAngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s

Bay control REC650 393

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

Table 350: VMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
VLZeroDB 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
VLHiHilLim 0 - 4000000 V 1 160000 High High limit (physical value)
VLHiLim 0 - 4000000 V 1 150000 High limit (physical value)
VLLowLim 0 - 4000000 V 1 125000 Low limit (physical value)
VLowLowLim 0 - 4000000 V 1 115000 Low Low limit (physical value)
VLMin 0 - 4000000 V 1 0 Minimum value
VLLimHys 0.000 - 100.000 V 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits

12.1.4.5 Monitored data

PID-1231-MONITOREDDATA v15

Table 351: VMMXU Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
V_AB REAL - kV V_AB Amplitude
VAB_ANGL REAL - deg VAB Angle
V_BC REAL - kV V_BC Amplitude
VBC_ANGL REAL - deg VBC Angle
V_CA REAL - kV V_CA Amplitude
VCA_ANGL REAL - deg VCA Angle

12.1.5 Current sequence component measurement CMSQI

12.1.5.1 Identification
GUID-099E7FF0-840E-4808-B290-36366797E67B v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Current sequence component CMSQI -
measurement
I1, I2, I0

SYMBOL-VV V1 EN-US

12.1.5.2 Function block GUID-72FD5F62-BF43-4394-8ECF-E806CA4497F9 v1

The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic
configuration made in PCM600.

394 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

CMSQI
I3P* 3I0
3I0RANG
3I0ANGL
I1
I1RANG
I1ANGL
I2
I2RANG
I2ANGL

IEC08000221-2-en.vsd
IEC08000221 V2 EN-US

Figure 200: CMSQI function block

12.1.5.3 Signals
PID-1234-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 352: CMSQI Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL

PID-1234-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 353: CMSQI Output signals

Name Type Description
3I0 REAL 3I0 Amplitude
3I0RANG INTEGER 3I0 Magnitude range
3I0ANGL REAL 3I0 Angle
I1 REAL I1 Amplitude
I1RANG INTEGER I1Amplitude range
I1ANGL REAL I1 Angle
I2 REAL I2 Amplitude
I2RANG INTEGER I2 Magnitude range
I2ANGL REAL I2Angle

12.1.5.4 Settings
PID-1234-SETTINGS v13

Table 354: CMSQI Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disable / Enable
Enabled
3I0DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
3I0Min 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Minimum value
3I0Max 0 - 500000 A 1 3300 Maximum value
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 395

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

3I0RepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
3I0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
3I0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
I1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
I1Min 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Minimum value
I1Max 0 - 500000 A 1 1300 Maximum value
I1RepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
I2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
I2Min 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Minimum value
I2Max 0 - 500000 A 1 1300 Maximum value
I2RepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
I2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s

Table 355: CMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3I0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
3I0HiHiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 3600 High High limit (physical value)
3I0HiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 3300 High limit (physical value)
3I0LowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
3I0LowLowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)
I1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
I1HiHiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1200 High High limit (physical value)
I1HiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1100 High limit (physical value)
I1LowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
I1LowLowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)
I1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
I2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
I2HiHiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1200 High High limit (physical value)
Table continues on next page

396 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

I2HiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1100 High limit (physical value)
I2LowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
I2LowLowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)

12.1.5.5 Monitored data

PID-1234-MONITOREDDATA v15

Table 356: CMSQI Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3I0 REAL - A 3I0 Amplitude
3I0ANGL REAL - deg 3I0 Angle
I1 REAL - A I1 Amplitude
I1ANGL REAL - deg I1 Angle
I2 REAL - A I2 Amplitude
I2ANGL REAL - deg I2Angle

12.1.6 Voltage sequence measurement VMSQI

12.1.6.1 Identification
GUID-861F85E4-ED53-4DC3-8BD4-2783FB6B89AD v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Voltage sequence measurement VMSQI -

U1, U2, U0

SYMBOL-TT V1 EN-US

12.1.6.2 Function block GUID-ED3F0958-3043-4B59-BC68-9E1134835AEA v2

The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic
configuration made in PCM600.

VMSQI
V3P* 3V0
3V0RANG
3V0ANGL
V1
V1RANG
V1ANGL
V2
V2RANG
V2ANGL

ANSI08000224-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000224 V1 EN-US

Figure 201: VMSQI function block

Bay control REC650 397

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

12.1.6.3 Signals
PID-1235-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 357: VMSQI Input signals

Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL

PID-1235-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 358: VMSQI Output signals

Name Type Description
3V0 REAL 3U0 Amplitude
3V0RANG INTEGER 3V0 Magnitude range
3V0ANGL REAL 3U0 Angle
V1 REAL U1 Amplitude
V1RANG INTEGER V1 Magnitude range
V1ANGL REAL U1 Angle
V2 REAL U2 Amplitude
V2RANG INTEGER V2 Magnitude range
V2ANGL REAL U2 Angle

12.1.6.4 Settings
PID-1235-SETTINGS v13

Table 359: VMSQI Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
3V0DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
3V0Min 0 - 2000000 V 1 0 Minimum value
3V0Max 0 - 2000000 V 1 318000 Maximum value
3V0RepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
3V0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
3V0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
V1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
V1Min 0 - 2000000 V 1 0 Minimum value
V1Max 0 - 2000000 V 1 106000 Maximum value
Table continues on next page

398 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

V1RepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
V1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
V2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
V2Min 0 - 2000000 V 1 0 Minimum value
V2Max 0 - 2000000 V 1 106000 Maximum value
V2RepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
V2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
V2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s

Table 360: VMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3V0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
3V0HiHiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 288000 High High limit (physical value)
3V0HiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 258000 High limit (physical value)
3V0LowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 213000 Low limit (physical value)
3V0LowLowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 198000 Low Low limit (physical value)
V1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
V1HiHiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 96000 High High limit (physical value)
V1HiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 86000 High limit (physical value)
V1LowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 71000 Low limit (physical value)
V1LowLowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 66000 Low Low limit (physical value)
V1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
V2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
V2HiHiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 96000 High High limit (physical value)
V2HiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 86000 High limit (physical value)
V2LowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 71000 Low limit (physical value)
V2LowLowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 66000 Low Low limit (physical value)

Bay control REC650 399

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

12.1.6.5 Monitored data

PID-1235-MONITOREDDATA v15

Table 361: VMSQI Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3V0 REAL - kV 3U0 Amplitude
3V0ANGL REAL - deg 3U0 Angle
V1 REAL - kV U1 Amplitude
V1ANGL REAL - deg U1 Angle
V2 REAL - kV U2 Amplitude
V2ANGL REAL - deg U2 Angle

12.1.7 Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU

12.1.7.1 Identification
GUID-607EFE25-4C20-43AC-9259-82AAA966F22A v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU -

SYMBOL-UU V1 EN-US

12.1.7.2 Function block GUID-440B43E6-39FF-43A9-8E11-B45ACBCAC5CF v2

The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic
configuration made in PCM600.

VNMMXU
V3P* V_A
VA_RANGE
VA_ANGL
V_B
VB_RANGE
VB_ANGL
V_C
VC_RANGE
VC_ANGL

ANSI08000226-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000226 V1 EN-US

Figure 202: VNMMXU function block

400 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

12.1.7.3 Signals
PID-1236-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 362: VNMMXU Input signals

Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL

PID-1236-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 363: VNMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
V_A REAL V_A Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
VA_RANGE INTEGER V_A Amplitude range
VA_ANGL REAL V_A Angle, magnitude of reported value
V_B REAL V_B Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
VB_RANGE INTEGER V_B Amplitude range
VB_ANGL REAL V_B Angle, magnitude of reported value
V_C REAL V_C Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
VC_RANGE INTEGER V_C Amplitude range
VC_ANGL REAL VC Angle, magnitude of reported value

12.1.7.4 Settings
PID-1236-SETTINGS v13

Table 364: VNMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disbled/Enabled operation
Enabled
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
VDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
VMax 0 - 2000000 V 1 106000 Maximum value
VRepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
VLimHys 0.000 - 100.000 V 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
VAngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s

Bay control REC650 401

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

Table 365: VNMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
VZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
VHiHiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 96000 High High limit (physical value)
VHiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 86000 High limit (physical value)
VLowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 71000 Low limit (physical value)
VLowLowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 66000 Low Low limit (physical value)
VMin 0 - 2000000 V 1 0 Minimum value

12.1.7.5 Monitored data

PID-1236-MONITOREDDATA v15

Table 366: VNMMXU Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
V_A REAL - kV V_A Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
VA_ANGL REAL - deg V_A Angle, magnitude of reported value
V_B REAL - kV V_B Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
VB_ANGL REAL - deg V_B Angle, magnitude of reported value
V_C REAL - kV V_C Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
VC_ANGL REAL - deg VC Angle, magnitude of reported value

12.1.8 Operation principle

12.1.8.1 Measurement supervision SEMOD54417-130 v3

The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and further process
information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-processing blocks. The number of
processed alternate measuring quantities depends on the type of IED and built-in options.

The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:

• Locally by means of the local HMI

• Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM600 or over the station bus
• Internally by connecting the analog output signals to the Disturbance Report function

Phase angle reference SEMOD54417-303 v4

All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The General setting
parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference. The PhaseAngleRef is set in local HMI under:
Configuration/Analog modules/Reference channel service values.

402 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

Zero point clamping SEMOD54417-137 v3

Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the noise in the input
signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general setting (XZeroDb where X equals S,
P, Q, PF, V, I, F, IA, IB, IC, VA, VB, VC, VAB, VBC, VCA, I1, I2, 3I0, V1, V2 or 3V0). Observe that this
measurement supervision zero point clamping might be overridden by the zero point clamping
used for the measurement values within CVMMXN.

Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity SEMOD54417-140 v3

Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in each function block by means
of four defined operating thresholds, see figure 203. The monitoring has two different modes of
operating:

• Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or High-high limit
(XHiHiLim) pre-set values
• Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit (XLowLim) or Low-
low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.

X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 203.

X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit

X_RANGE= 1 Hysteresis
High limit

X_RANGE=0

X_RANGE=0 t

Low limit

X_RANGE=2

Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4

en05000657.vsd
IEC05000657 V1 EN-US

Figure 203: Presentation of operating limits

Each analog output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal
is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded, 3: High-high limit exceeded, 2:
below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). The output may be connected to a measurement
expander block (XP (RANGE_XP)) to get measurement supervision as binary signals.

The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 203.

The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between the
operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring channel
separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel.

Actual value of the measured quantity SEMOD54417-150 v3

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The measurement is
continuous for each measured quantity separately, but the reporting of the value to the higher
levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The following basic reporting modes are available:

Bay control REC650 403

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

• Cyclic reporting (Cyclic)

• Magnitude dead-band supervision (Dead band)
• Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)

Cyclic reporting SEMOD54417-158 v3

The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting (XRepTyp). The
measuring channel reports the value independent of magnitude or integral dead-band reporting.

In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when measured value
passes any of the defined threshold limits.

Y
Value Reported Value Reported
Value Reported Value Reported
(1st)

Y3 Value Reported
Y2 Y4

Y1 Y5

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)

t
Value 1

Value 2

Value 5
Value 3

Value 4

en05000500.vsd
(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt
IEC05000500 V1 EN-US

Figure 204: Periodic reporting

Magnitude dead-band supervision SEMOD54417-163 v5

If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change is larger than
the ±ΔY pre-defined limits that are set by user (UDbRepIn), then the measuring channel reports
the new value to a higher level. This limits the information flow to a minimum necessary.
Figure 205 shows an example with the magnitude dead-band supervision. The picture is
simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one
execution cycle from each other.

404 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

Value Reported
Y

Value Reported Value Reported

Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 DY
DY
Y2 DY
DY
DY
DY
Y1

99000529.vsd

IEC99000529 V1 EN-US

Figure 205: Magnitude dead-band supervision reporting

After the new value is reported, the ±ΔY limits for dead-band are automatically set around it. The
new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than defined by the ±ΔY set
limits.

Integral dead-band reporting SEMOD54417-167 v4

The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set limit
(XDbRepInt), figure 206, where an example of reporting with integral dead-band supervision is
shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a
time interval of one execution cycle from each other.

The last value reported, Y1 in figure 206 serves as a basic value for further measurement. A
difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly measured value and is multiplied
by the time increment (discrete integral). The absolute values of these integral values are added
until the pre-set value is exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new
base for the following measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).

The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with small
variations that can last for relatively long periods.

Bay control REC650 405

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

Y A1 >=
A >= pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value pre-set value
Y3 A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
Y2 A1 A2
A4 A6
Value Reported Y4 A3 A5 A7
(1st) Value
Value Reported Y5
A Reported Value
Reported Value
Y1 Reported

t
99000530.vsd

IEC99000530 V1 EN-US

Figure 206: Reporting with integral dead-band supervision

12.1.8.2 Measurements CVMMXN

Mode of operation SEMOD54417-174 v3

The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage
input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to measure and calculate above
mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on the available VT inputs connected to
the IED. The end user can freely select by a parameter setting, which one of the nine available
measuring modes shall be used within the function. Available options are summarized in the
following table:

Set value Formula used for complex, Formula used for voltage Comment
for three-phase power calculation and current magnitude
parameter calculation
“Mode”
1 A, B, C Used when three phase-to-
S = VA × I A* + VB × I B* + VC × I C* (
V = VA + VB + VC )/ 3 ground voltages are available

I =( I )/3
EQUATION1561 V1 EN-US

A
+ IB + IC
EQUATION1562 V1 EN-US

2 Arone Used when three two phase-to-

S = VAB × I A - VBC × I C
* *
(
V = VAB + VBC / 2 ) phase voltages are available

EQUATION1563 V1 EN-US (Equation 40)

I =( I A
+ IC / 2 )
EQUATION1564 V1 EN-US (Equation 41)
3 PosSeq Used when only symmetrical
S = 3 × VPosSeq × I PosSeq
*
V = 3 × VPosSeq three phase power shall be
measured
(Equation 42)
EQUATION1565 V1 EN-US
I = I PosSeq
EQUATION1566 V1 EN-US (Equation 43)
Table continues on next page

406 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

Set value Formula used for complex, Formula used for voltage Comment
for three-phase power calculation and current magnitude
parameter calculation
“Mode”

( )
4 AB Used when only VAB phase-to-
S = VAB × I A - I B
* *
V = VAB phase voltage is available

EQUATION1567 V1 EN-US (Equation 44) (

I = IA + IB / 2 )
EQUATION1568 V1 EN-US (Equation 45)

( )
5 BC Used when only VBC phase-to-
S = VBC × I B - I C
* *
V = VBC phase voltage is available

EQUATION1569 V1 EN-US (Equation 46) (

I = I B + IC / 2 )
EQUATION1570 V1 EN-US (Equation 47)

( )
6 CA Used when only VCA phase-to-
S = VCA × I C - I A
* *
V = VCA phase voltage is available

EQUATION1571 V1 EN-US (Equation 48) (

I = IC + I A / 2 )
EQUATION1572 V1 EN-US (Equation 49)
7 A Used when only VA phase-to-
S = 3 × VA × I A
*
V = 3 × VA ground voltage is available

(Equation 50)
EQUATION1573 V1 EN-US
I = IA
EQUATION1574 V1 EN-US (Equation 51)
8 B Used when only VB phase-to-
S = 3 × VB × I B
*
V = 3 × VB ground voltage is available

(Equation 52)
I = IB
EQUATION1575 V1 EN-US

EQUATION1576 V1 EN-US (Equation 53)

9 C Used when only VC phase-to-
S = 3 × VC × I C
*
V = 3 × VC ground voltage is available

(Equation 54)
I = IC
EQUATION1577 V1 EN-US

EQUATION1578 V1 EN-US (Equation 55)

* means complex conjugated value

It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes that is, 1 & 2 the measurement function
calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating modes that is, from 3 to 9 it calculates the
three-phase power under assumption that the power system is fully symmetrical. Once the
complex apparent power is calculated then the P, Q, S, & PF are calculated in accordance with the
following formulas:

P = Re( S )
EQUATION1403 V1 EN-US (Equation 56)

Bay control REC650 407

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

Q = Im( S )
EQUATION1404 V1 EN-US (Equation 57)

S = S = P +Q
2 2

EQUATION1405 V1 EN-US (Equation 58)

PF = cosj = P
S
EQUATION1406 V1 EN-US (Equation 59)

Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the function are
provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and voltage phasors. Binary
output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is lagging behind voltage phasor. Binary
output signal ILEAD is set to one when current phasor is leading the voltage phasor.

Each analog output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is
an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

Calibration of analog inputs SEMOD54417-293 v4

Measured currents and voltages used in the CVMMXN function can be calibrated to get class 0.5
measuring accuracy. This is achieved by magnitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of
rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in
between, see example in figure 207.

408 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

Magnitude
% of In compensation

+10
IMagComp5 Measured
IMagComp30 current

IMagComp100
5 30 100 % of In
0-5%: Constant
-10 5-30-100%: Linear
>100%: Constant

Degrees Angle
compensation

+10

IAngComp30 Measured
current
IAngComp5
IAngComp100
5 30 100 % of In

-10

ANSI05000652_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000652 V3 EN-US

Figure 207: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the
magnitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

Low pass filtering SEMOD54417-233 v3

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to
introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P, Q, S, V, I and power factor.
This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity.
Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:

X = k × X Old + (1 - k ) × X Calculated
EQUATION1407 V1 EN-US (Equation 60)

where:
X is a new measured value (that is P, Q, S, V, I or PF) to be given out from the function
XOld is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle

XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Bay control REC650 409

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is immediately given
out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay). When k is set to value bigger than
0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k shall be determined separately for every
application. Some typical value for k =0.14.

Zero point clamping SEMOD54417-250 v4

In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is not present,
the magnitude level for current and voltage measurement is forced to zero. When either current or
voltage measurement is forced to zero automatically the measured values for power (P, Q & S) and
power factor are forced to zero as well. Since the measurement supervision functionality, included
in the CVMMXN function, is using these values the zero clamping will influence the subsequent
supervision (observe the possibility to do zero point clamping within measurement supervision,
see section "Measurement supervision").

Compensation facility SEMOD54417-253 v4

In order to compensate for small magnitude and angular errors in the complete measurement
chain (CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors and so on.) it is possible to perform on site
calibration of the power measurement. This is achieved by setting the complex constant which is
then internally used within the function to multiply the calculated complex apparent power S. This
constant is set as magnitude (setting parameter PowMagFact, default value 1.000) and angle
(setting parameter PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for these two
parameters are done in such way that they do not influence internally calculated value (complex
constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for specific operating range (for example,
around rated power) can be done at site. However, to perform this calibration it is necessary to
have an external power meter with high accuracy class available.

Directionality SEMOD54417-256 v5
CTStartPoint defines if the CTs grounding point is located towards or from the protected object
under observation. If everything is properly set power is always measured towards protection
object.

Busbar

52
IED

P Q

Protected
Object
ANSI05000373_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000373 V2 EN-US

Figure 208: Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements

Practically, it means that active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow from
the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative values when they flow from
the protected object towards the busbar.

410 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

In some application, for example, when power is measured on the secondary side of the power
transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to have actually opposite
directional convention for active and reactive power measurements. This can be easily achieved by
setting parameter PowAngComp to value of 180.0 degrees. With such setting the active and
reactive power will have positive values when they flow from the protected object towards the
busbar.

Frequency SEMOD54417-261 v2
Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply obtained from the pre-
processing block and then just given out from the measurement block as an output.

12.1.8.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU SEMOD54417-264 v5

The Phase current measurement (CMMXU) function must be connected to three-phase current
input in the configuration tool to be operable. Currents handled in the function can be calibrated
to get better then class 0.5 measuring accuracy for internal use, on the outputs and IEC 61850.
This is achieved by magnitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current. The
compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see figure 207.

Phase currents (magnitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each magnitude output
has a corresponding supervision level output (Ix_RANGE). The supervision output signal is an
integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

12.1.8.4 Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU, VNMMXU SEMOD54417-268 v4

The voltage function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool to
be operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents when it comes to class 0.5
calibrations, see above.

The voltages (phase or phase-phase voltage, magnitude and angle) are available on the outputs
and each magnitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (Vxy_RANG). The
supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

12.1.8.5 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI SEMOD54417-299 v5

The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CMSQI) or voltage

(VMSQI) input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, other than X_RANG, are
calculated within the measuring blocks and it is not possible to calibrate the signals. Input signals
are obtained from the pre-processing block and transferred to corresponding output.

Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the outputs (voltage
and current, magnitude and angle). Each magnitude output has a corresponding supervision level
output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement
supervision".

Bay control REC650 411

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

12.1.9 Technical data

M12386-1 v10

Table 367: CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQI, VNMMXU

Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage (0.1-1.5) ×Vn ± 0.5% of Vn at V£Vn
± 0.5% of V at V > Vn

Connected current (0.2-4.0) × In ± 0.5% of In at I £ In

± 0.5% of I at I > In

Active power, P 0.1 x Vn< V < 1.5 x Vn ± 1.0% of Sn at S ≤ Sn

0.2 x In < I < 4.0 x In ± 1.0% of S at S > Sn

Reactive power, Q 0.1 x Vn< V < 1.5 x Vn ± 1.0% of Sn at S ≤ Sn

0.2 x In < I < 4.0 x In ± 1.0% of S at S > Sn

Apparent power, S 0.1 x Vn < V < 1.5 x Vn ± 1.0% of Sn at S ≤ Sn

0.2 x In< I < 4.0 x In ± 1.0% of S at S > Sn

Apparent power, S Three cos phi = 1 ± 0.5% of S at S > Sn

phase settings ± 0.5% of Sn at S ≤ Sn

Power factor, cos (φ) 0.1 x Vn < V < 1.5 x Vn < 0.02
0.2 x In< I < 4.0 x In

12.2 Event Counter CNTGGIO

12.2.1 Identification M14884-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Event counter CNTGGIO -
S00946 V1 EN-US

12.2.2 Functionality M13407-3 v7

Event counter CNTGGIO has six counters which are used for storing the number of times each
counter input has been activated.

12.2.3 Function block M13412-3 v4

CNTGGIO
BLOCK VALUE1
COUNTER1 VALUE2
COUNTER2 VALUE3
COUNTER3 VALUE4
COUNTER4 VALUE5
COUNTER5 VALUE6
COUNTER6
RESET

IEC09000090_1_en.vsd
IEC09000090 V1 EN-US

Figure 209: CNTGGIO function block

412 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

12.2.4 Signals
PID-1903-INPUTSIGNALS v14

Table 368: CNTGGIO Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
COUNTER1 BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter 1
COUNTER2 BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter 2
COUNTER3 BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter 3
COUNTER4 BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter 4
COUNTER5 BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter 5
COUNTER6 BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter 6
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function

PID-1903-OUTPUTSIGNALS v14

Table 369: CNTGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
VALUE1 INTEGER Output of counter 1
VALUE2 INTEGER Output of counter 2
VALUE3 INTEGER Output of counter 3
VALUE4 INTEGER Output of counter 4
VALUE5 INTEGER Output of counter 5
VALUE6 INTEGER Output of counter 6

12.2.5 Settings
PID-1903-SETTINGS v14

Table 370: CNTGGIO Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled

12.2.6 Monitored data

PID-1903-MONITOREDDATA v16

Table 371: CNTGGIO Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VALUE1 INTEGER - - Output of counter 1
VALUE2 INTEGER - - Output of counter 2
VALUE3 INTEGER - - Output of counter 3
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 413

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

VALUE4 INTEGER - - Output of counter 4
VALUE5 INTEGER - - Output of counter 5
VALUE6 INTEGER - - Output of counter 6

12.2.7 Operation principle

M13410-3 v5
Event counter (CNTGGIO) has six counter inputs. CNTGGIO stores how many times each of the
inputs has been activated. The counter memory for each of the six inputs is updated, giving the
total number of times the input has been activated, as soon as an input is activated.

To not risk that the flash memory is worn out due to too many writings, a mechanism for limiting
the number of writings per time period is included in the product. This however gives as a result
that it can take long time, up to several minutes, before a new value is stored in the flash memory.
And if a new CNTGGIO value is not stored before auxiliary power interruption, it will be lost.
CNTGGIO stored values in flash memory will however not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption.

The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all six counters are blocked.
The input can for example, be used for blocking the counters at testing.The function block has an
input RESET. At activation of this input all six counters are set to 0.

All inputs are configured via PCM600.

12.2.7.1 Reporting M13410-7 v3

The content of the counters can be read in the local HMI.

Reset of counters can be performed in the local HMI and a binary input.

Reading of content can also be performed remotely, for example from a IEC 61850 client. The value
can also be presented as a measuring value on the local HMI graphical display.

12.2.8 Technical data

M13416-1 v5

Table 372: CNTGGIO technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Counter value 0-100000 -
Max. count up speed 10 pulses/s (50% duty cycle) -

12.3 Function description GUID-F5DBFF76-09C1-441F-BD7D-2E25D119FD6A v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Limit counter L4UFCNT -

414 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

12.3.1 Limit counter L4UFCNT GUID-876F2D21-CC72-456A-8715-86E1E441EFB9 v1

12.3.2 Introduction GUID-6505F163-9E5A-454B-8182-911ABC3D7E76 v1

Limit counter (L4UFCNT) provides a settable counter with four independent limits where the
number of positive and/or negative flanks on the input signal are counted against the setting
values for limits. The output for each limit is activated when the counted value reaches that limit.

12.3.3 Principle of operation GUID-56D7A70E-C5AC-43E1-9586-3601E8B68763 v1

GUID-A6DDEA5C-F356-481B-A442-8C9B7CE5A8C1 v1
Limit counter (L4UFCNT) counts the number of positive and/or negative flanks on the binary input
signal depending on the function settings. L4UFCNT also checks if the accumulated value is equal
or greater than any of its four settable limits. The four limit outputs will be activated relatively on
reach of each limit and remain activated until the reset of the function. Moreover, the content of
L4UFCNT is stored in flash memory and will not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption.

12.3.3.1 Design GUID-2BC83034-21E5-407B-9E12-76258B78D20D v1

Figure Figure 1 illustrates the general logic diagram of the function.

BLOCK

INPUT
Operation
Counter
RESET
VALUE
Overflow
CountType Detection OVERFLOW

OnMaxValue

Limit LIMIT1 … 4
MaxValue Check

CounterLimit1...4
Error ERROR
Detection
InitialValue

IEC12000625_1_en.vsd
IEC12000625 V1 EN-US

Figure 210: Logic diagram

The counter can be initialized to count from a settable non-zero value after reset of the function.
The function has also a maximum counted value check. The three possibilities after reaching the
maximum counted value are:

• Stops counting and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
• Rolls over to zero and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
• Rolls over to zero and activates a pulsed overflow indication for the next count

Bay control REC650 415

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

The pulsed overflow output lasts up to the first count after rolling over to zero, as illustrated in
figure Figure 2.

Overflow indication

Actual value ... Max value -1® Max value ® Max value +1 ® Max value +2 ® Max value +3 ...

Counted value ... Max value -1® Max value ® 0 ® 1 ® 2 ...

IEC12000626_1_en.vsd
IEC12000626 V1 EN-US

Figure 211: Overflow indication when OnMaxValue is set to rollover pulsed

The Error output is activated as an indicator of setting the counter limits and/or initial value
setting(s) greater than the maximum value. The counter stops counting the input and all the
outputs except the error output remains at zero state. The error condition remains until the
correct settings for counter limits and/or initial value setting(s) are applied.

The function can be blocked through a block input. During the block time, input is not counted and
outputs remain in their previous states. However, the counter can be initialized after reset of the
function. In this case the outputs remain in their initial states until the release of the block input.

12.3.3.2 Reporting GUID-170722BE-8B37-482D-B16F-9611B228F853 v1

The content of the counter can be read on the local HMI.

Reset of the counter can be performed from the local HMI or via a binary input.

Reading of content and resetting of the function can also be performed remotely, for example
from a IEC 61850 client. The value can also be presented as a measurement on the local HMI
graphical display.

12.3.4 Function block GUID-DB345546-4AD3-4780-A78F-A3F3319195E6 v1

L4UFCNT function block

L4UFCNT
BLOCK ERROR
INPUT OVERFLOW
RESET LIMIT1
LIMIT2
LIMIT3
LIMIT4
VALUE

IEC12000029-1-en.vsd
IEC12000029 V1 EN-US

416 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

12.3.5 Signals
PID-3366-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 373: L4UFCNT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function

PID-3366-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 374: L4UFCNT Output signals

Name Type Description
ERROR BOOLEAN Error indication on counter limit and/or initial value settings
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Overflow indication on count of greater than MaxValue
LIMIT1 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to CounterLimit1
LIMIT2 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to CounterLimit2
LIMIT3 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to CounterLimit3
LIMIT4 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to CounterLimit4
VALUE INTEGER Counted value

12.3.6 Settings
PID-3366-SETTINGS v1

Table 375: L4UFCNT Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disable / Enable
On
CountType Set - - Set Select counting on positive and/or
Reset negative sides
DBLL or DLLB
CounterLimit1 1 - 65535 - 1 100 Value of the first limit
CounterLimit2 1 - 65535 - 1 200 Value of the second limit
CounterLimit3 1 - 65535 - 1 300 Value of the third limit
CounterLimit4 1 - 65535 - 1 400 Value of the fourth limit
MaxValue 1 - 65535 - 1 500 Maximum count value
OnMaxValue Stop - - Stop Select if counter stops or rolls over after
Rollover Steady reaching maxValue with steady or pulsed
Rollover Pulsed overflow flag
InitialValue 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Initial count value after reset of the
function

Bay control REC650 417

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

12.3.7 Monitored data

PID-3366-MONITOREDDATA v1

Table 376: L4UFCNT Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VALUE INTEGER - - Counted value

12.3.8 Technical data

GUID-0F2CF1BC-D6C6-43BB-AFB1-9C9A32632978 v1

Table 377: L4UFCNTtechnical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Counter value 0-65535 -
Max. count up speed 5-160 pulses/s -

12.4 Disturbance report

12.4.1 Functionality M12153-3 v9

Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary
system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the disturbance report
functionality.

Disturbance report DRPRDRE, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of all selected
analog input and binary signals connected to the function block with a, maximum of 40 analog and
96 binary signals.

The Disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions:

• Sequential of events
• Indications
• Event recorder
• Trip value recorder
• Disturbance recorder

The Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility regarding configuration,

initiating conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity.

A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the AnRADR or BnRBDR function blocks,

which are set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All connected signals from start of pre-fault
time to the end of post-fault time will be included in the recording.

Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade format as a
reader file HDR, a configuration file CFG, and a data file DAT. The same applies to all events, which
are continuously saved in a FIFO-buffer. The local HMI is used to get information about the
recordings. The disturbance report files may be uploaded to PCM600 for further analysis using the
disturbance handling tool.

418 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

12.4.2 Disturbance report DRPRDRE GUID-D24C5F43-6EC0-4B12-BB57-6C7B2C7B84B8 v2

12.4.2.1 Identification
M16055-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Disturbance report DRPRDRE - -

12.4.2.2 Function block

GUID-C23997FE-C6FA-473B-A0E7-3E8E980D2213 v2

DRPRDRE
DRPOFF
RECSTART
RECMADE
CLEARED
MEMUSED

IEC09000346-1-en.vsd
IEC09000346 V1 EN-US

Figure 212: DRPRDRE function block

12.4.2.3 Signals
PID-3391-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 378: DRPRDRE Output signals

Name Type Description
DRPOFF BOOLEAN Disturbance report function turned off
RECSTART BOOLEAN Disturbance recording started
RECMADE BOOLEAN Disturbance recording made
CLEARED BOOLEAN All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared
MEMUSED BOOLEAN More than 80% of memory used

12.4.2.4 Settings
PID-3391-SETTINGS v1

Table 379: DRPRDRE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Enable/Disable
Enabled
PreFaultRecT 0.05 - 9.90 s 0.01 0.10 Pre-fault recording time
PostFaultRecT 0.1 - 10.0 s 0.1 0.5 Post-fault recording time
TimeLimit 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.0 Fault recording time limit
PostRetrig Disabled - - Disabled Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not (Off)
Enabled
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 419

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

MaxNoStoreRec 10 - 100 - 1 100 Maximum number of stored disturbances
ZeroAngleRef 1 - 30 Ch 1 1 Trip value recorder, phasor reference
channel
OpModeTest Disabled - - Disabled Operation mode during test mode
Enabled

12.4.2.5 Monitored data

PID-3391-MONITOREDDATA v1

Table 380: DRPRDRE Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MemoryUsed INTEGER - % Memory usage (0-100%)
UnTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 1
activated
OvTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 1
activated
UnTrigStatCh2 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 2
activated
OvTrigStatCh2 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 2
activated
UnTrigStatCh3 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 3
activated
OvTrigStatCh3 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 3
activated
UnTrigStatCh4 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 4
activated
OvTrigStatCh4 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 4
activated
UnTrigStatCh5 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 5
activated
OvTrigStatCh5 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 5
activated
UnTrigStatCh6 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 6
activated
OvTrigStatCh6 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 6
activated
UnTrigStatCh7 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 7
activated
OvTrigStatCh7 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 7
activated
UnTrigStatCh8 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 8
activated
OvTrigStatCh8 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 8
activated
UnTrigStatCh9 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 9
activated
Table continues on next page

420 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

OvTrigStatCh9 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 9
activated
UnTrigStatCh10 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 10
activated
OvTrigStatCh10 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 10
activated
UnTrigStatCh11 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 11
activated
OvTrigStatCh11 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 11
activated
UnTrigStatCh12 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 12
activated
OvTrigStatCh12 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 12
activated
UnTrigStatCh13 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 13
activated
OvTrigStatCh13 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 13
activated
UnTrigStatCh14 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 14
activated
OvTrigStatCh14 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 14
activated
UnTrigStatCh15 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 15
activated
OvTrigStatCh15 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 15
activated
UnTrigStatCh16 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 16
activated
OvTrigStatCh16 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 16
activated
UnTrigStatCh17 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 17
activated
OvTrigStatCh17 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 17
activated
UnTrigStatCh18 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 18
activated
OvTrigStatCh18 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 18
activated
UnTrigStatCh19 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 19
activated
OvTrigStatCh19 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 19
activated
UnTrigStatCh20 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 20
activated
OvTrigStatCh20 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 20
activated
UnTrigStatCh21 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 21
activated
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 421

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

OvTrigStatCh21 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 21
activated
UnTrigStatCh22 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 22
activated
OvTrigStatCh22 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 22
activated
UnTrigStatCh23 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 23
activated
OvTrigStatCh23 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 23
activated
UnTrigStatCh24 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 24
activated
OvTrigStatCh24 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 24
activated
UnTrigStatCh25 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 25
activated
OvTrigStatCh25 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 25
activated
UnTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 26
activated
OvTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 26
activated
UnTrigStatCh27 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 27
activated
OvTrigStatCh27 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 27
activated
UnTrigStatCh28 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 28
activated
OvTrigStatCh28 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 28
activated
UnTrigStatCh29 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 29
activated
OvTrigStatCh29 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 29
activated
UnTrigStatCh30 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 30
activated
OvTrigStatCh30 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 30
activated
UnTrigStatCh31 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 31
activated
OvTrigStatCh31 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 31
activated
UnTrigStatCh32 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 32
activated
OvTrigStatCh32 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 32
activated
UnTrigStatCh33 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 33
activated
Table continues on next page

422 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

OvTrigStatCh33 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 33
activated
UnTrigStatCh34 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 34
activated
OvTrigStatCh34 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 34
activated
UnTrigStatCh35 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 35
activated
OvTrigStatCh35 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 35
activated
UnTrigStatCh36 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 36
activated
OvTrigStatCh36 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 36
activated
UnTrigStatCh37 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 37
activated
OvTrigStatCh37 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 37
activated
UnTrigStatCh38 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 38
activated
OvTrigStatCh38 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 38
activated
UnTrigStatCh39 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 39
activated
OvTrigStatCh39 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 39
activated
UnTrigStatCh40 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 40
activated
OvTrigStatCh40 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 40
activated
FaultNumber INTEGER - - Disturbance fault number

12.4.3 Analog input signals AxRADR GUID-C0CC3B8F-96A4-4313-8BD6-AFBA21CF919F v1

12.4.3.1 Identification
GUID-99A9E7DA-0CE9-40A2-9B07-A3D613C0957D v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Analog input signals A1RADR - -
Analog input signals A2RADR - -
Analog input signals A3RADR - -

Bay control REC650 423

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

12.4.3.2 Function block

GUID-773297FC-5979-4F93-B582-8BAD67A562C0 v2

A1RADR
^GRPINPUT1
^GRPINPUT2
^GRPINPUT3
^GRPINPUT4
^GRPINPUT5
^GRPINPUT6
^GRPINPUT7
^GRPINPUT8
^GRPINPUT9
^GRPINPUT10

IEC09000348-1-en.vsd
IEC09000348 V1 EN-US

Figure 213: A1RADR function block, analog inputs, example for A1RADR, A2RADR and A3RADR

12.4.3.3 Signals

A1RADR - A3RADR Input signals GUID-A9B7A83B-73C5-4E14-A7B6-260E3AAF6A66 v2

Tables for input signals for A1RADR, A2RADR and A3RADR are similar except for GRPINPUT number.

• A1RADR, GRPINPUT1 - GRPINPUT10

• A2RADR, GRPINPUT11 - GRPINPUT20
• A3RADR, GRPINPUT21 - GRPINPUT30

PID-2672-INPUTSIGNALS v12

Table 381: A1RADR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
GRPINPUT1 GROUP - Group signal for input 1
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT2 GROUP - Group signal for input 2
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT3 GROUP - Group signal for input 3
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT4 GROUP - Group signal for input 4
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT5 GROUP - Group signal for input 5
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT6 GROUP - Group signal for input 6
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT7 GROUP - Group signal for input 7
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT8 GROUP - Group signal for input 8
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT9 GROUP - Group signal for input 9
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT10 GROUP - Group signal for input 10
SIGNAL

424 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

12.4.3.4 Settings

A1RADR - A3RADR Settings GUID-ABD5390A-7090-4681-A65B-D709EB74C99F v2

Setting tables for A1RADR, A2RADR and A3RADR are similar except for channel numbers.

• A1RADR, channel01 - channel10

• A2RADR, channel11 - channel20
• A3RADR, channel21 - channel30

PID-2672-SETTINGS v12

Table 382: A1RADR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation01 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
Operation02 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
Operation03 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
Operation04 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
Operation05 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
Operation06 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
Operation07 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
Operation08 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
Operation09 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
Operation10 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
FunType1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 1
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 1
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 2
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 2
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 3
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 3
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 4
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 4
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 5
(IEC-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 425

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 5
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 6
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 6
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 7
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 7
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 8
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 8
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 9
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 9
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 10
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel10
(IEC-60870-5-103)

Table 383: A1RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NomValue01 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 1
UnderTrigOp01 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 1
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe01 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 1 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp01 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 1
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe01 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 1 in %
of signal
NomValue02 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 2
UnderTrigOp02 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel
Enabled 2 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe02 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 2 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp02 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 2
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe02 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 2 in %
of signal
NomValue03 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 3
UnderTrigOp03 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel
Enabled 3 (on) or not (off)
Table continues on next page

426 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UnderTrigLe03 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 3 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp03 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 3
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe03 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 3 in %
of signal
NomValue04 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 4
UnderTrigOp04 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel
Enabled 4 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe04 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 4 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp04 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 4
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe04 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 4 in %
of signal
NomValue05 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 5
UnderTrigOp05 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel
Enabled 5 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe05 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 5 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp05 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 5
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe05 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 5 in %
of signal
NomValue06 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 6
UnderTrigOp06 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel
Enabled 6 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe06 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 6 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp06 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 6
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe06 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 6 in %
of signal
NomValue07 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 7
UnderTrigOp07 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel
Enabled 7 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe07 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 7 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp07 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 7
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe07 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 7 in %
of signal
NomValue08 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 8
UnderTrigOp08 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel
Enabled 8 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe08 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 8 in
% of signal
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 427

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OverTrigOp08 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 8
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe08 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 8 in %
of signal
NomValue09 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 9
UnderTrigOp09 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel
Enabled 9 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe09 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 9 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp09 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 9
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe09 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 9 in %
of signal
NomValue10 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 10
UnderTrigOp10 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel
Enabled 10 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe10 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 10 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp10 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 10
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe10 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 10 in
% of signal

12.4.4 Analog input signals A4RADR GUID-A97D7A90-F348-433C-AB23-4D112DA56882 v1

12.4.4.1 Identification
GUID-4C00DB1D-8CE5-4A8B-BE76-D4EEA1E34D61 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Analog input signals A4RADR - -

12.4.4.2 Function block

GUID-A65D9F65-E013-4E56-B208-73A168634147 v2

A4RADR
^INPUT31
^INPUT32
^INPUT33
^INPUT34
^INPUT35
^INPUT36
^INPUT37
^INPUT38
^INPUT39
^INPUT40

IEC09000350-1-en.vsd
IEC09000350 V1 EN-US

Figure 214: A4RADR function block, derived analog inputs

428 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

Channels 31-40 are not shown in LHMI. They are used for internally calculated
analog signals.

12.4.4.3 Signals
PID-2681-INPUTSIGNALS v12

Table 384: A4RADR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT31 REAL 0 Analog channel 31
INPUT32 REAL 0 Analog channel 32
INPUT33 REAL 0 Analog channel 33
INPUT34 REAL 0 Analog channel 34
INPUT35 REAL 0 Analog channel 35
INPUT36 REAL 0 Analog channel 36
INPUT37 REAL 0 Analog channel 37
INPUT38 REAL 0 Analog channel 38
INPUT39 REAL 0 Analog channel 39
INPUT40 REAL 0 Analog channel 40

12.4.4.4 Settings
PID-2681-SETTINGS v12

Table 385: A4RADR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation31 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/off
Enabled
Operation32 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/off
Enabled
Operation33 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/off
Enabled
Operation34 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/off
Enabled
Operation35 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/off
Enabled
Operation36 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/off
Enabled
Operation37 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/off
Enabled
Operation38 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/off
Enabled
Operation39 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/off
Enabled
Operation40 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/off
Enabled
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 429

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

FunType31 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 31
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo31 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 31
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType32 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 32
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo32 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 32
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType33 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 33
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo33 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 33
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType34 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 34
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo34 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 34
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType35 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 35
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo35 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 35
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType36 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 36
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo36 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 36
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType37 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 37
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo37 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 37
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType38 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 38
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo38 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 38
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType39 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 39
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo39 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 39
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType40 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 40
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo40 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel40
(IEC-60870-5-103)

430 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

Table 386: A4RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NomValue31 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 31
UnderTrigOp31 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel
Enabled 31 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe31 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 31 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp31 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 31
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe31 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 31 in
% of signal
NomValue32 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 32
UnderTrigOp32 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel
Enabled 32 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe32 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 32 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp32 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 32
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe32 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 32 in
% of signal
NomValue33 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 33
UnderTrigOp33 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel
Enabled 33 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe33 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 33 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp33 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 33
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe33 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 33 in
% of signal
NomValue34 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 34
UnderTrigOp34 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel
Enabled 34 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe34 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 34 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp34 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 34
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe34 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 34 in
% of signal
NomValue35 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 35
UnderTrigOp35 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel
Enabled 35 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe35 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 35 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp35 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 35
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe35 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 35 in
% of signal
NomValue36 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 36
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 431

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UnderTrigOp36 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel
Enabled 36 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe36 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 36 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp36 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 36
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe36 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 36 in
% of signal
NomValue37 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 37
UnderTrigOp37 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel
Enabled 37 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe37 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 37 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp37 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 37
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe37 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 37 in
% of signal
NomValue38 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 38
UnderTrigOp38 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel
Enabled 38 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe38 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 38 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp38 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 38
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe38 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 38 in
% of signal
NomValue39 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 39
UnderTrigOp39 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel
Enabled 39 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe39 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 39 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp39 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 39
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe39 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 39 in
% of signal
NomValue40 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 40
UnderTrigOp40 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel
Enabled 40 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe40 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 40 in
% of signal
OverTrigOp40 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel
Enabled 40 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe40 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 40 in
% of signal

432 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

12.4.5 Binary input signals BxRBDR

12.4.5.1 Identification
GUID-54FEDE71-F81F-494D-B3CF-F6505FB4A071 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Binary input signals B1RBDR - -
Binary input signals B2RBDR - -
Binary input signals B3RBDR - -
Binary input signals B4RBDR - -
Binary input signals B5RBDR - -
Binary input signals B6RBDR - -

12.4.5.2 Function block

GUID-822EBFEB-BBBC-4C15-8D48-FF9D7C9B4185 v2

B1RBDR
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16

IEC09000352-1-en.vsd
IEC09000352 V1 EN-US

Figure 215: B1RBDR function block, binary inputs, example for B1RBDR - B6RBDR

12.4.5.3 Signals

B1RBDR - B6RBDR Input signals GUID-5A876202-57AB-49BA-8ED7-46BC2E1E5633 v2

Tables for input signals for B1RBDR - B6RBDR are all similar except for INPUT and description
number.

• B1RBDR, INPUT1 - INPUT16

• B2RBDR, INPUT17 - INPUT32
• B3RBDR, INPUT33 - INPUT48
• B4RBDR, INPUT49 - INPUT64
• B5RBDR, INPUT65 - INPUT80
• B6RBDR, INPUT81 - INPUT96

Bay control REC650 433

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

PID-2682-INPUTSIGNALS v12

Table 387: B1RBDR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 16

12.4.5.4 Settings

B1RBDR - B6RBDR Settings GUID-FB6A915F-46D5-4CA9-A83F-CC3F56A07FDA v2

Setting tables for B1RBDR - B6RBDR are all similar except for binary channel and description
numbers.

• B1RBDR, channel1 - channel16

• B2RBDR, channel17 - channel32
• B3RBDR, channel33 - channel48
• B4RBDR, channel49 - channel64
• B5RBDR, channel65 - channel80
• B6RBDR, channel81 - channel96

PID-2682-SETTINGS v12

Table 388: B1RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigDR01 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED01 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 1
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
TrigDR02 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
Table continues on next page

434 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SetLED02 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 2
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
TrigDR03 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED03 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 3
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
TrigDR04 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED04 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 4
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
TrigDR05 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED05 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 5
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
TrigDR06 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED06 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 6
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
TrigDR07 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED07 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 7
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
TrigDR08 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED08 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 8
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
TrigDR09 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED09 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 9
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
TrigDR10 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED10 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 10
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 435

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TrigDR11 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED11 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 11
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
TrigDR12 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED12 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 12
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
TrigDR13 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED13 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 13
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
TrigDR14 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED14 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 14
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
TrigDR15 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED15 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 15
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
TrigDR16 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED16 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 16
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
FunType1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 1
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 2 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 2
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 3 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 3
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 4 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

436 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 4
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 5 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 5
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 6 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 6
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 7 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 7
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 8 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 8
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 9 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 9
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 10 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 10
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType11 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 11 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo11 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 11
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType12 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 12 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo12 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 12
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType13 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 13 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo13 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 13
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType14 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 14 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo14 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 14
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType15 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 15 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo15 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 15
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType16 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 16 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo16 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 16
(IEC -60870-5-103)

Bay control REC650 437

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

Table 389: B1RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigLevel01 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 1
IndicationMa01 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 1
Show
TrigLevel02 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 2
IndicationMa02 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 2
Show
TrigLevel03 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 3
IndicationMa03 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 3
Show
TrigLevel04 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 4
IndicationMa04 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 4
Show
TrigLevel05 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 5
IndicationMa05 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 5
Show
TrigLevel06 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 6
IndicationMa06 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 6
Show
TrigLevel07 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 7
IndicationMa07 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 7
Show
TrigLevel08 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 8
IndicationMa08 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 8
Show
TrigLevel09 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 9
IndicationMa09 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 9
Show
TrigLevel10 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 10
IndicationMa10 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 10
Show
TrigLevel11 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 11
IndicationMa11 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 11
Show
TrigLevel12 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 12
Table continues on next page

438 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IndicationMa12 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 12
Show
TrigLevel13 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 13
IndicationMa13 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 13
Show
TrigLevel14 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 14
IndicationMa14 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 14
Show
TrigLevel15 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 15
IndicationMa15 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 15
Show
TrigLevel16 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 16
IndicationMa16 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 16
Show

12.4.6 Operation principle

M12155-6 v7
Disturbance report DRPRDRE is a common name for several functions to supply the operator,
analysis engineer, and so on, with sufficient information about events in the system.

The functions included in the disturbance report are:

• Sequential of events
• Indications
• Event recorder
• Trip value recorder
• Disturbance recorder

Figure 216 shows the relations between Disturbance Report, included functions and function
blocks. Sequential of events , Event recorder and Indications uses information from the binary
input function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value recorder uses analog information from the analog input
function blocks (AxRADR). Disturbance recorder DRPRDRE acquires information from both AxRADR
and BxRBDR.

Bay control REC650 439

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

A1-4RADR Disturbance Report

A4RADR DRPRDRE
Analog signals
Trip value rec

B1-6RBDR Disturbance
recorder

Binary signals B6RBDR

Sequential of
events
Event recorder

Indications

ANSI09000337-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000337 V1 EN-US

Figure 216: Disturbance report functions and related function blocks

The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings, each with the
data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The sequential of events function is working
continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording time, and so on. All information in
the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash memories. This implies that no information is
lost in case of loss of auxiliary power. Each report will get an identification number in the interval
from 0-999.

Disturbance report

Record no. N Record no. N+1 Record no. N+100

General dist. Trip Event Disturbance Event list

Indications
information values recordings recording (SOE)

en05000161_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000161 V1 EN-US

Figure 217: Disturbance report structure

Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded when the
memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is overwritten by the new one. The total recording
capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of sampling frequency, number of analog and
binary channels and recording time. In a 60 Hz system it is possible to record 80 where the
maximum recording time is 3.4 seconds. The memory limit does not affect the rest of the
disturbance report (Sequential of events, Event recorder, Indications and Trip value recorder).

440 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total recording

time. Long recording time will reduce the number of recordings to less than 100.

The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This might cause
disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk space.

12.4.6.1 Disturbance information M12155-175 v3

Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip values are
available on the local HMI. To acquire a complete disturbance report the user must use a PC and -
either the PCM600 Disturbance handling tool - or a FTP or MMS (over 61850) client. The PC can be
connected to the IED front, rear or remotely via the station bus (Ethernet ports).

12.4.6.2 Indications M12155-87 v4

Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of the
disturbance (not time-tagged), see Indication section for detailed information.

12.4.6.3 Event recorder M12155-89 v4

The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have occurred during
the disturbance. The information is available via the local HMI or PCM600, see Event recorder
section for detailed information.

12.4.6.4 Sequential of events M12155-177 v5

The sequetial of events may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list information
is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The oldest data is overwritten.
The logged signals may be presented via local HMI or PCM600, see Sequential of events section for
detailed information.

12.4.6.5 Trip value recorder M12155-91 v4

The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the fault and during the
fault, see Trip value recorder section for detailed information.

12.4.6.6 Disturbance recorder M12155-97 v4

Disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after the fault, see
Disturbance recorder section for detailed information.

12.4.6.7 Time tagging M12155-194 v1

The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time tagging within
the disturbance report

Bay control REC650 441

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

12.4.6.8 Recording times M12155-99 v4

Disturbance report DRPRDRE records information about a disturbance during a settable time
frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report. Disturbance recorder, event
recorder and indication function register disturbance data and events during tRecording, the total
recording time.

The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:

tRecording = PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on

which criterion stops the current disturbance recording

Trig point
TimeLimit

PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT

1 2 3

en05000487.vsd
IEC05000487 V1 EN-US

Figure 218: The recording times definition

PreFaultRecT, 1 Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operate time of
the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.
tFault, 2 Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any valid trigger
condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit the limit time).
PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all activated
triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.
TimeLimit Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was triggered.
The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does not reset within a
reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of a recording and prevents
subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances. Use the setting TimeLimit to set this
time.

12.4.6.9 Analog signals M12155-160 v7

Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder and triggering
of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved for external analog signals
from analog input modules via preprocessing function blocks (SMAI) and summation block
(3PHSUM). The last 10 channels may be connected to internally calculated analog signals available
as function block output signals (phase differential currents, bias currents and so on).

442 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

SMAI A1RADR
GRPNAME AI3P A2RADR
AI1NAME AI1 GRPINPUT1 A3RADR
External analog
AI2NAME AI2 GRPINPUT2
signals
AI3NAME AI3 GRPINPUT3
AI4NAME AI4 GRPINPUT4
AIN GRPINPUT5
GRPINPUT6
...

A4RADR

INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
Internal analog signals INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36

...

INPUT40

en05000653-2.vsd
IEC05000653 V2 EN-US

Figure 219: Analog input function blocks

The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after configuration) available
as an input signal on the AxRADR function block via the SMAI function block. The information is
saved at the Disturbance report base sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals
are updated according to the cycle time of the specific function. If a function is running at lower
speed than the base sampling rate, Disturbance recorder will use the latest updated sample until a
new updated sample is available.

Application configuration tool (ACT) is used for analog configuration of the Disturbance report.

The preprocessor function block (SMAI) calculates the residual quantities in cases where only the
three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). SMAI makes the information available as a group
signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual output (AIN-output). In situations where AI4-
input is used as an input signal the corresponding information is available on the non-calculated
output (AI4) on the SMAI function block. Connect the signals to the AxRADR accordingly.

For each of the analog signals, Operation = Enabled means that it is recorded by the disturbance
recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and triggers even if operation is
set to Disabled. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used as trigger conditions. The same
applies for the current signals.

If Operation = Disabled, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in graph. However,
Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported. The input channel can still be
used to trig the disturbance recorder.

If Operation = Enabled, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in graph.

The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect the entire
disturbance report when being used as triggers.

Bay control REC650 443

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

12.4.6.10 Binary signals M12155-162 v7

Up to 96 binary signals can be selected to be handled by disturbance report. The signals can be
selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal is selected to be recorded
when:

• the corresponding function block is included in the configuration

• the signal is connected to the input of the function block

Each of the 96 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report (Operation =
Operation—>TrigDR =Disabled). A binary signal can be selected to activate the yellow (PICKUP)
and red (TRIP) LED on the local HMI (SetLED = Disabled/Pickup/Trip/Pickup and Trip).

The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, sequential of events and the disturbance
recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers. The
indications are also selected from these 96 signals with local HMI IndicationMask=Show/Hide.

12.4.6.11 Trigger signals M12155-164 v2

The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the sequential of events, which
runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a complete disturbance
report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is fulfilled, there is no disturbance
report, no indications, and so on. This implies the importance of choosing the right signals as
trigger conditions.

A trigger can be of type:

• Manual trigger
• Binary-signal trigger
• Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)

Manual trigger M12155-167 v4

A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, PCM600 or via station bus (IEC
61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal is generated. This feature is
especially useful for testing.

Binary-signal trigger M12155-169 v4

Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger (Triglevel =
Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger from a logic zero, the
selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of the disturbance report.

Analog-signal trigger M12155-171 v5

All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded in the
disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp, OverTrigLe and
UnderTrigLe.

The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is found, the
absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average value is above the
threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a greater
than (>) sign with the user-defined name.

If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or undercurrent trigger,
this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name. The procedure is separately
performed for each channel.

444 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

This method of checking the analog trigger conditions gives a function which is insensitive to DC
offset in the signal. The operate time for this initiation is typically in the range of one cycle, 16 2/3
ms for a 60 Hz network.

All under/over trig signal information is available on the local HMI and PCM600.

12.4.6.12 Post Retrigger M12155-173 v5

Disturbance report function does not automatically respond to any new trig condition during a
recording, after all signals set as trigger signals have been reset. However, under certain
circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the post-fault recording, for instance by
automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.

In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (PostRetrig = Enabled)
during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording will start and, during a period,
run in parallel with the initial recording.

When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Disabled), a new recording will not start until
the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a new trig occurs during the
post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding recording a new complete recording will be
started.

Disturbance report function can handle maximum 3 simultaneous disturbance recordings.

12.4.7 Technical data

M12760-1 v7

Table 390: DRPRDRE technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Current recording - ± 1,0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
± 1,0% of I at I > Ir
Voltage recording - ± 1,0% of Vn at V≤ Vn
± 1,0% of Vat V> Vn

Pre-fault time (0.05–3.00) s -

Post-fault time (0.1–10.0) s -
Limit time (0.5–8.0) s -
Maximum number of recordings 100, first in - first out -
Time tagging resolution 1 ms See time
synchronization
technical data
Maximum number of analog inputs 30 + 10 (external + internally -
derived)
Maximum number of binary inputs 96 -
Maximum number of phasors in the Trip Value 30 -
recorder per recording
Maximum number of indications in a disturbance 96 -
report
Maximum number of events in the Event recording per 150 -
recording
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 445

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

Function Range or value Accuracy

Maximum number of events in the Sequence of events 1000, first in - first out -
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time 340 seconds (100 recordings) -
and maximum number of channels, typical value) at 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80
recordings) at 60 Hz
Sampling rate 1 kHz at 50 Hz -
1.2 kHz at 60 Hz
Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz -

12.5 Indications IP15762-1 v2

12.5.1 Functionality M12030-3 v6

To get fast, condensed and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the
secondary system it is important to know, for example binary signals that have changed status
during a disturbance. This information is used in the short perspective to get information via the
local HMI in a straightforward way.

There are three LEDs on the local HMI (green, yellow and red), which will display status information
about the IED and the Disturbance recorder function (triggered).

The Indication list function shows all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance
recorder function that have changed status during a disturbance.

12.5.2 Function block M12532-3 v4

The Indications function has no function block of it’s own.

12.5.3 Signals

12.5.3.1 Input signals M12533-12 v3

The Indications function logs the same binary input signals as the Disturbance report function.

12.5.4 Operation principle M12027-3 v7

The LED indications display this information:

Green LED:

Steady light In Service

Flashing light Internal fail
Dark No power supply

Yellow LED:

446 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

Function controlled by SetLEDn setting in Disturbance report function.

Red LED:

Function controlled by SetLEDn setting in Disturbance report function.

Indication list:

The possible indication signals are the same as the ones chosen for the disturbance report
function and disturbance recorder.

The indication function tracks 0 to 1 changes of binary signals during the recording period of the
collection window. This means that constant logic zero, constant logic one or state changes from
logic one to logic zero will not be visible in the list of indications. Signals are not time tagged. In
order to be recorded in the list of indications the:

• the signal must be connected to binary input BxRBDR function block

• the DRPRDRE parameter Operation must be set Enabled
• the DRPRDRE must be trigged (binary or analog)
• the input signal must change state from logical 0 to 1 during the recording time.

Indications are selected with the indication mask (IndicationMask) when setting the binary inputs.

The name of the binary signal that appears in the Indication function is the user-defined name
assigned at configuration of the IED. The same name is used in disturbance recorder function,
indications and event recorder function.

12.5.5 Technical data IP12753-1 v1

M13765-1 v4

Table 391: DRPRDRE technical data

Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of indications presented for single 96
disturbance
Maximum number of recorded disturbances 100

12.6 Event recorder IP14587-1 v2

12.6.1 Functionality M12033-3 v8

Quick, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the
secondary system is vital, for example, time-tagged events logged during disturbances. This
information is used for different purposes in the short term (for example corrective actions) and
in the long term (for example functional analysis).

The event recorder logs all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance recorder
function. Each recording can contain up to 150 time-tagged events.

The event recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED.

The event recording information is an integrated part of the disturbance record (Comtrade file).

Bay control REC650 447

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

12.6.2 Function block M12528-3 v3

The Event recorder has no function block of it’s own.

12.6.3 Signals

12.6.3.1 Input signals M12529-12 v2

The Event recorder function logs the same binary input signals as the Disturbance report function.

12.6.4 Operation principle M12034-3 v4

When one of the trig conditions for the disturbance report is activated, the event recorder logs
every status change in the 96 selected binary signals. The events can be generated by both internal
logical signals and binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main
processor module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly in each I/O module.
The events are collected during the total recording time (pre-, post-fault and limit time), and are
stored in the disturbance report flash memory at the end of each recording.

In case of overlapping recordings, due to PostRetrig = Enabled and a new trig signal appears
during post-fault time, events will be saved in both recording files.

The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the user-defined name
assigned when configuring the IED. The same name is used in the disturbance recorder function ,
indications and event recorder function.

The event record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information and managed via the
local HMI or PCM600.

Events can not be read from the IED if more than one user is accessing the IED
simultaneously.

12.6.5 Technical data IP11318-1 v1

M12702-1 v4

Table 392: DRPRDRE technical data

Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in disturbance report 150
Maximum number of disturbance reports 100
Resolution 1 ms
Accuracy Depending on time
synchronizing

448 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

12.7 Sequential of events IP14585-1 v4

12.7.1 Functionality M12412-6 v8

Continuous event-logging is useful for monitoring the system from an overview perspective and is
a complement to specific disturbance recorder functions.

The sequential of events logs all binary input signals connected to the Disturbance recorder
function. The list may contain up to 1000 time-tagged events stored in a FIFO-buffer.

12.7.2 Function block M12536-3 v4

The Sequential of events has no function block of it’s own.

12.7.3 Signals

12.7.3.1 Input signals M12537-16 v3

The Sequential of events logs the same binary input signals as configured for the Disturbance
report function.

12.7.4 Operation principle M12411-6 v6

When a binary signal, connected to the disturbance report function, changes status, the sequential
of events function stores input name, status and time in the sequential of events in chronological
order. The list can contain up to 1000 events from both internal logic signals and binary input
channels. If the list is full, the oldest event is overwritten when a new event arrives.

The list can be configured to show oldest or newest events first with a setting on the local HMI.

The sequential of events function runs continuously, in contrast to the event recorder function,
which is only active during a disturbance, and each event record is an integral part of its
associated DR.

The name of the binary signal that appears in the event recording is the user-defined name
assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the disturbance recorder function ,
indications and the event recorder function .

The sequential of events is stored and managed separate from the disturbance report
information.

12.7.5 Technical data IP11531-1 v1

M12700-1 v4

Table 393: DRPRDRE technical data

Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in the list 1000
Resolution 1 ms
Accuracy Depending on time synchronizing

Bay control REC650 449

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

12.8 Trip value recorder IP14588-1 v2

12.8.1 Functionality M12128-3 v7

Information about the pre-fault and fault values for currents and voltages are vital for the
disturbance evaluation.

The Trip value recorder calculates the values of all selected analog input signals connected to the
Disturbance recorder function. The result is magnitude and phase angle before and during the
fault for each analog input signal.

The trip value recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED.

The trip value recorder information is an integrated part of the disturbance record (Comtrade file).

12.8.2 Function block M12518-3 v3

The Trip value recorder has no function block of it’s own.

12.8.3 Signals

12.8.3.1 Input signals M12519-12 v4

The trip value recorder function uses analog input signals connected to A1RADR to A3RADR (not
A4RADR).

12.8.4 Operation principle M12130-3 v5

Trip value recorder calculates and presents both fault and pre-fault magnitudes as well as the
phase angles of all the selected analog input signals. The parameter ZeroAngleRef points out
which input signal is used as the angle reference.

When the disturbance report function is triggered the sample for the fault interception is searched
for, by checking the non-periodic changes in the analog input signals. The channel search order is
consecutive, starting with the analog input with the lowest number.

When a fault interception point is found, the Fourier estimation of the pre-fault values of the
complex values of the analog signals starts 1.5 cycle before the fault sample. The estimation uses
samples during one period. The post-fault values are calculated using the Recursive Least Squares
(RLS) method. The calculation starts a few samples after the fault sample and uses samples during
1/2 - 2 cycles depending on the shape of the signals.

If no starting point is found in the recording, the disturbance report trig sample is used as the
start sample for the Fourier estimation. The estimation uses samples during one cycle before the
trig sample. In this case the calculated values are used both as pre-fault and fault values.

The name of the analog signal that appears in the Trip value recorder function is the user-defined
name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the Disturbance recorder
function .

450 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

The trip value record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (LMBRFLO) and
managed in PCM600 or via the local HMI.

12.8.5 Technical data IP12677-1 v1

M13747-1 v5

Table 394: DRPRDRE technical data

Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs 30
Maximum number of disturbance reports 100

12.9 Disturbance recorder IP14589-1 v2

12.9.1 Functionality M12156-3 v9

The Disturbance recorder function supplies fast, complete and reliable information about
disturbances in the power system. It facilitates understanding system behavior and related
primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. Recorded information is used
for different purposes in the short perspective (for example corrective actions) and long
perspective (for example functional analysis).

The Disturbance recorder acquires sampled data from selected analog- and binary signals
connected to the Disturbance recorder function (maximum 40 analog and 96 binary signals). The
binary signals available are the same as for the event recorder function.

The function is characterized by great flexibility and is not dependent on the operation of
protection functions. It can record disturbances not detected by protection functions. Up to 9,9
seconds of data before the trigger instant can be saved in the disturbance file.

The disturbance recorder information for up to 100 disturbances are saved in the IED and the local
HMI is used to view the list of recordings.

12.9.2 Function block M12646-3 v3

The Disturbance recorder has no function block of it’s own.

12.9.3 Signals
M12649-12 v4
See Disturbance report for input and output signals.

12.9.4 Settings M12648-9 v5

See Disturbance report for settings.

Bay control REC650 451

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

12.9.5 Operation principle IP12020-1 v2

M12157-3 v4
Disturbance recording is based on the acquisition of binary and analog signals. The binary signals
can be either true binary input signals or internal logical signals generated by the functions in the
IED. The analog signals to be recorded are input channels from the Transformer Input Module
(TRM) through the Signal Matrix Analog Input (SMAI) and possible summation (Sum3Ph) function
blocks and some internally derived analog signals.

Disturbance recorder collects analog values and binary signals continuously, in a cyclic buffer. The
pre-fault buffer operates according to the FIFO principle; old data will continuously be overwritten
as new data arrives when the buffer is full. The size of this buffer is determined by the set pre-fault
recording time.

Upon detection of a fault condition (triggering), the disturbance is time tagged and the data
storage continues in a post-fault buffer. The storage process continues as long as the fault
condition prevails - plus a certain additional time. This is called the post-fault time and it can be
set in the disturbance report.

The above mentioned two parts form a disturbance recording. The whole memory, intended for
disturbance recordings, acts as a cyclic buffer and when it is full, the oldest recording is
overwritten. Up to the last 100 recordings are stored in the IED.

The time tagging refers to the activation of the trigger that starts the disturbance recording. A
recording can be trigged by, manual start, binary input and/or from analog inputs (over-/
underlevel trig).

A user-defined name for each of the signals can be set. These names are common for all functions
within the disturbance report functionality.

12.9.5.1 Memory and storage M12160-20 v4

The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total recording

time. Long recording time will reduce the number of recordings to less than 100.

The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This might cause
disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk space.

When a recording is completed, a post recording processing occurs.

This post-recording processing comprises:

• Saving the data for analog channels with corresponding data for binary signals
• Add relevant data to be used by the Disturbance handling tool (part of PCM 600)
• Compression of the data, which is performed without losing any data accuracy
• Storing the compressed data in a non-volatile memory (flash memory)

The recorded disturbance is now ready for retrieval and evaluation.

The recording files comply with the Comtrade standard IEC 60255-24 and are divided into three
files; a header file (HDR), a configuration file (CFG) and a data file (DAT).

452 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

The header file (optional in the standard) contains basic information about the disturbance, that
is, information from the Disturbance report sub-functions. The Disturbance handling tool use this
information and present the recording in a user-friendly way.

General:

• Station name, object name and unit name

• Date and time for the trig of the disturbance
• Record number
• Sampling rate
• Time synchronization source
• Recording times
• Activated trig signal
• Active setting group

Analog:

• Signal names for selected analog channels

• Information e.g. trig on analog inputs
• Primary and secondary instrument transformer rating
• Over- or Undertrig: level and operation
• Over- or Undertrig status at time of trig
• CT direction

Binary:

• Signal names
• Status of binary input signals

The configuration file is a mandatory file containing information needed to interpret the data file.
For example sampling rate, number of channels, system frequency, channel info etc.

The data file, which also is mandatory, containing values for each input channel for each sample in
the record (scaled value). The data file also contains a sequence number and time stamp for each
set of samples.

12.9.6 Technical data IP11472-1 v1

M12384-1 v5

Table 395: DRPRDRE technical data

Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs 40
Maximum number of binary inputs 96
Maximum number of disturbance reports 100
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum 340 seconds (100 recordings) at 50 Hz
number of channels, typical value) 280 seconds (80 recordings) at 60 Hz

Bay control REC650 453

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

12.10 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions SPGGIO

12.10.1 Identification
GUID-3F382942-F7B0-4E8A-B60A-93844C50B48E v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
IEC 61850 generic communication SPGGIO - -
I/O functions

12.10.2 Functionality SEMOD55713-5 v6

IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions SPGGIO is used to send one single logical signal to
other systems or equipment in the substation.

12.10.3 Function block GUID-DCE793C7-B3EA-4D75-BF05-FD92A6D0727C v1

SPGGIO
BLOCK
^IN

IEC09000237_en_1.vsd
IEC09000237 V1 EN-US

Figure 220: SPGGIO function block

12.10.4 Signals
PID-1822-INPUTSIGNALS v16

Table 396: SPGGIO Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN BOOLEAN 0 Input status

12.10.5 Settings
PID-1822-SETTINGS v10
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

12.10.6 Operation principle SEMOD55725-5 v5

Upon receiving a signal at its input, IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (SPGGIO)
function sends the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system that requests this signal.
To get the signal, PCM600 must be used to define which function block in which equipment or
system should receive this information.

454 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

12.11 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16

inputs SP16GGIO

12.11.1 Identification
GUID-856A4830-FFB4-40CE-9619-E42A74DFEF88 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
IEC 61850 generic communication SP16GGIO - -
I/O functions 16 inputs

12.11.2 Functionality GUID-57C173AB-E8FA-4E97-BA86-9A5588E0619B v3

IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16 inputs SP16GGIO function is used to send up to
16 logical signals to other systems or equipment in the substation.

12.11.3 Function block GUID-EEB6E300-E0AA-4603-A929-5ACC930599C8 v1

SP16GGIO
BLOCK
^IN1
^IN2
^IN3
^IN4
^IN5
^IN6
^IN7
^IN8
^IN9
^IN10
^IN11
^IN12
^IN13
^IN14
^IN15
^IN16

IEC09000238_en_1.vsd
IEC09000238 V1 EN-US

Figure 221: SP16GGIO function block

12.11.4 Signals
PID-3853-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 397: SP16GGIO Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 status
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 status
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 status
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 status
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 455

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Type Default Description

IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 status
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 status
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 status
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 status
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 status
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 status
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 status
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 status
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 status
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 status
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 status
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 status

12.11.5 Settings
PID-3853-SETTINGS v1
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

12.11.6 MonitoredData
PID-3853-MONITOREDDATA v1

Table 398: SP16GGIO Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT1 GROUP - - Output 1 status
SIGNAL
OUT2 GROUP - - Output 2 status
SIGNAL
OUT3 GROUP - - Output 3 status
SIGNAL
OUT4 GROUP - - Output 4 status
SIGNAL
OUT5 GROUP - - Output 5 status
SIGNAL
OUT6 GROUP - - Output 6 status
SIGNAL
OUT7 GROUP - - Output 7 status
SIGNAL
OUT8 GROUP - - Output 8 status
SIGNAL
OUT9 GROUP - - Output 9 status
SIGNAL
OUT10 GROUP - - Output 10 status
SIGNAL
Table continues on next page

456 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

OUT11 GROUP - - Output 11 status
SIGNAL
OUT12 GROUP - - Output 12 status
SIGNAL
OUT13 GROUP - - Output 13 status
SIGNAL
OUT14 GROUP - - Output 14 status
SIGNAL
OUT15 GROUP - - Output 15 status
SIGNAL
OUT16 GROUP - - Output 16 status
SIGNAL
OUTOR GROUP - - Output status logic OR gate for input 1 to
SIGNAL 16

12.11.7 Operation principle GUID-D09E740C-3E6B-436A-8CE7-F70A6DA47158 v1

Upon receiving signals at its inputs, IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16 inputs
(SP16GGIO) function will send the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system that
requests this signals. To be able to get the signal, one must use other tools, described in the
Engineering manual and define which function block in which equipment or system should receive
this information.

There are also 16 output signals that show the input status for each input as well as an OR type
output combined for all 16 input signals. These output signals are handled in PST.

12.12 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions MVGGIO

12.12.1 Identification
GUID-01F6727C-37E5-4C0F-B8C1-7CF25FD4BB09 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
IEC61850 generic communication MVGGIO - -
I/O functions

12.12.2 Functionality SEMOD55872-5 v8

IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) function is used to send the
instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the substation. It can
also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an analog value and to permit
measurement supervision on that value.

Bay control REC650 457

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

12.12.3 Function block GUID-D2B217DE-1911-4953-9C99-CF1D342894F7 v1

MVGGIO
BLOCK ^VALUE
^IN RANGE

IEC09000239-2-en.vsd

12.12.4 Signals
PID-2851-INPUTSIGNALS v12

Table 399: MVGGIO Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN REAL 0 Analog input value

PID-2851-OUTPUTSIGNALS v12

Table 400: MVGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
VALUE REAL Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE INTEGER Range

12.12.5 Settings
PID-2851-SETTINGS v12

Table 401: MVGGIO Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
BasePrefix micro - - unit Base prefix (multiplication factor)
milli
unit
kilo
Mega
Giga
Tera
MV db 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
MV zeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
MV hhLim -5000.00 - xBase 0.01 900.00 High High limit multiplied with the base
5000.00 prefix (multiplication factor)
MV hLim -5000.00 - xBase 0.01 800.00 High limit multiplied with the base prefix
5000.00 (multiplication factor)
MV lLim -5000.00 - xBase 0.01 -800.00 Low limit multiplied with the base prefix
5000.00 (multiplication factor)
MV llLim -5000.00 - xBase 0.01 -900.00 Low Low limit multiplied with the base
5000.00 prefix (multiplication factor)
MV min -5000.00 - xBase 0.01 -1000.00 Minimum value multiplied with the base
5000.00 prefix (multiplication factor)
Table continues on next page

458 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

MV max -5000.00 - xBase 0.01 1000.00 Maximum value multiplied with the base
5000.00 prefix (multiplication factor)
MV dbType Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
MV limHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)

12.12.6 Monitored data

PID-2851-MONITOREDDATA v12

Table 402: MVGGIO Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VALUE REAL - - Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE INTEGER 0=Normal - Range
1=High
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low

12.12.7 Operation principle SEMOD55936-5 v5

Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions
(MVGGIO) will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the range, as output values. In the
same time, it will send over IEC 61850-8-1 the value, to other IEC 61850 clients in the substation.

12.13 Measured value expander block MVEXP

12.13.1 Identification
GUID-4B87D3B1-D6A9-4C09-801D-AB952BB1ED44 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Measured value expander block MVEXP - -

12.13.2 Functionality SEMOD52450-4 v6

The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU),
current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI and VMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic
communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) are provided with measurement supervision functionality.
All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits: low-low limit, low limit, high limit
and high-high limit. The measure value expander block MVEXP has been introduced to enable
translating the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary signals: below low-
low limit, below low limit, normal, above high limit or above high-high limit. The output signals can
be used as conditions in the configurable logic or for alarming purpose.

Bay control REC650 459

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

12.13.3 Function block SEMOD54336-4 v3

MVEXP
RANGE* HIGHHIGH
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
LOWLOW

IEC09000215-1-en.vsd
IEC09000215 V1 EN-US

Figure 222: MVEXP function block

12.13.4 Signals GUID-8AFC0AEF-A8D9-4F31-873C-51FF237D540C v1

PID-1824-INPUTSIGNALS v17

Table 403: MVEXP Input signals

Name Type Default Description
RANGE INTEGER 0 Measured value range

PID-1824-OUTPUTSIGNALS v17

Table 404: MVEXP Output signals

Name Type Description
HIGHHIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is above high-high limit
HIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and high-high limit
NORMAL BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and low limit
LOW BOOLEAN Measured value is between low and low-low limit
LOWLOW BOOLEAN Measured value is below low-low limit

12.13.5 Settings
GUID-D79B1D37-A064-4BF0-B783-311F48BC4CB9 v1
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define (IBase), (VBase)
and (SBase).

12.13.6 Operation principle SEMOD52462-4 v4

The input signal must be connected to a range output of a measuring function block (CVMMXN,
CMMXU, VMMXU, VNMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQ or MVGGIO). The function block converts the input
integer value to five binary output signals according to table 405.

460 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

Table 405: Input integer value converted to binary output signals

Measured supervised below low- between low‐ between low between above high-high limit
value is: low limit low and low and high limit high-high
Output: limit and high limit
LOWLOW High
LOW High
NORMAL High
HIGH High
HIGHHIGH High

12.14 Fault locator LMBRFLO

12.14.1 Identification
M14892-1 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Fault locator LMBRFLO - -

12.14.2 Functionality M13970-3 v9

The Fault locator LMBRFLO in the IED is an essential complement to other monitoring functions,
since it measures and indicates the distance to the fault with great accuracy. It indicates the
distance to fault in kilometers or miles as selected by parameter setting.

The fault locator LMBRFLO function, supports kilometer and mile for the line length
unit. The fault distance will be presented with the same unit as the line length and
is mapped to IEC61850 -8-1 communication protocol, where the fault distance is
supposed to be in kilometer (km). Select the line length unit to kilometer for
compliance with IEC61850.

The accurate fault locator is an essential component to minimize the outages after a persistent
fault and/or to pin-point a weak spot on the line.

The fault locator is an impedance measuring function giving the distance to the fault as a relative
(in%) or an absolute value. The main advantage is the high accuracy achieved by compensating for
load current and for the mutual zero-sequence effect on double circuit lines.

The compensation includes setting of the remote and local sources and calculation of the
distribution of fault currents from each side. This distribution of fault current, together with
recorded load (pre-fault) currents, is used to exactly calculate the fault position. The fault can be
recalculated with new source data at the actual fault to further increase the accuracy.

Especially on heavily loaded long lines, where the source voltage angles can be up to 35-40 degrees
apart, the accuracy can be still maintained with the advanced compensation included in fault
locator.

Bay control REC650 461

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

12.14.3 Function block M16684-3 v6

LMBRFLO
PHSEL_A* CALCMADE
PHSEL_B* FLTDISTX
PHSEL_C* BCD_80
CALCDIST* BCD_40
BCD_20
BCD_10
BCD_8
BCD_4
BCD_2
BCD_1

ANSI09000621-2-en.vsd

ANSI09000621 V2 EN-US

Figure 223: LMBRFLO function block

12.14.4 Signals GUID-4426B242-BE9E-4D6A-8DFF-9EB9F728A36A v1

PID-3058-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 406: LMBRFLO Input signals

Name Type Default Description
PHSEL_A BOOLEAN 0 Phase selection phase A
PHSEL_B BOOLEAN 0 Phase selection phase B
PHSEL_C BOOLEAN 0 Phase selection phase C
CALCDIST BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to initiate fault distance calculation

PID-3058-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 407: LMBRFLO Output signals

Name Type Description
CALCMADE BOOLEAN Fault calculation made
FLT_X REAL Reactive distance to fault
BCD_80 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 80%
BCD_40 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 40%
BCD_20 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 20%
BCD_10 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 10%
BCD_8 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 8%
BCD_4 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 4%
BCD_2 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 2%
BCD_1 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 1%

462 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

12.14.5 Settings IP14083-1 v2

PID-3058-SETTINGS v2

Table 408: LMBRFLO Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
R1A 0.001 - 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 2.000 Source resistance A (near end)
X1A 0.001 - 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 12.000 Source reactance A (near end)
R1B 0.001 - 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 2.000 Source resistance B (far end)
X1B 0.001 - 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 12.000 Source reactance B (far end)
R1L 0.001 - 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 2.000 Positive sequence line resistance
X1L 0.001 - 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 12.500 Positive sequence line reactance
R0L 0.001 - 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 8.750 Zero sequence line resistance
X0L 0.001 - 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 50.000 Zero sequence line reactance
R0M 0.000 - 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 0.000 Zero sequence mutual resistance
X0M 0.000 - 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 0.000 Zero sequence mutual reactance
LineLengthUnit kilometer - - kilometer Line length unit
miles
LineLength 0.0 - 10000.0 - 0.1 40.0 Length of line

Table 409: LMBRFLO Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DrepChNoI_A 1 - 30 Ch 1 1 Recorder Input number recording phase
current, IA
DrepChNoI_B 1 - 30 Ch 1 2 Recorder Input number recording phase
current, IB
DrepChNoI_C 1 - 30 Ch 1 3 Recorder Input number recording phase
current, IC
DrepChNoIN 0 - 30 Ch 1 4 Recorder input number recording residual
current, IN
DrepChNoIP 0 - 30 Ch 1 0 Recorder input number recording 3I0 on
parallel line
DrepChNoV_A 1 - 30 Ch 1 5 Recorder Input number recording phase
voltage, VA
DrepChNoV_B 1 - 30 Ch 1 6 Recorder Input number recording phase
voltage, VB
DrepChNoV_C 1 - 30 Ch 1 7 Recorder Input number recording phase
voltage, VC

Bay control REC650 463

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

12.14.6 Monitored data GUID-3CA174EF-B0AD-4085-8084-477D0748CBF8 v1

PID-3058-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 410: LMBRFLO Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
FLT_REL REAL - - Distance to fault, relative
FLT_DIST REAL - - Distance to fault in line length unit
FLT_X REAL - Ohm Reactive distance to fault
FLT_R REAL - Ohm Resistive distance to fault
FLT_LOOP INTEGER 0=--- - Fault loop
1=L1-N
2=L2-N
3=L3-N
4=L1-L2
5=L2-L3
6=L3-L1
7=L1-L2-L3

12.14.7 Operation principle

M14982-4 v6
The Fault locator (LMBRFLO) in the IED is an essential complement to other monitoring functions,
since it measures and indicates the distance to the fault with high accuracy.

When calculating distance to fault, pre-fault and fault phasors of currents and voltages are
selected from the Trip value recorder data, thus the analog signals used by the fault locator must
be among those connected to the disturbance report function. The analog configuration (channel
selection) is performed using the parameter setting tool within PCM600.

The calculation algorithm considers the effect of load currents, double-end infeed and additional
fault resistance.

R1A+jX1A R1B+jX1B

R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L
DRPRDRE ANSI09000726-1-en.vsd
LMBRFLO
ANSI09000726 V1 EN-US

Figure 224: Simplified network configuration with network data, required for settings of the
fault location-measuring function
If source impedance in the near and far end of the protected line have changed in a significant
manner relative to the set values at fault location calculation time (due to exceptional switching
state in the immediate network, power generation out of order, and so on), new values can be
entered via the local HMI and a recalculation of the distance to the fault can be ordered using the
algorithm described below. It’s also possible to change fault loop. In this way, a more accurate
location of the fault can be achieved.

The function indicates the distance to the fault as a percentage of the line length, in kilometers or
miles as selected on the local HMI. LineLengthUnit setting is used to select the unit of length
either, in kilometer or miles for the distance to fault. Line length unit can also be configured using
PCM600. The fault location is stored as a part of the disturbance report information and managed
via the LHMI or PCM600.

464 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

12.14.7.1 Measuring Principle M14983-4 v2

For transmission lines with voltage sources at both line ends, the effect of double-end infeed and
additional fault resistance must be considered when calculating the distance to the fault from the
currents and voltages at one line end. If this is not done, the accuracy of the calculated figure will
vary with the load flow and the amount of additional fault resistance.

The calculation algorithm used in the fault locator in compensates for the effect of double-end
infeed, additional fault resistance and load current.

M14983-5 v1

12.14.7.2 Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault M14983-7 v4

Figure 225 shows a single-line diagram of a single transmission line, that is fed from both ends
with source impedances ZA and ZB. Assume that the fault occurs at a distance F from IED A on a
line with the length L and impedance ZL. The fault resistance is defined as RF. A single-line model is
used for better clarification of the algorithm.

A B
ZA IA pZL IB (1-p).ZL ZB

IF

VA RF

xx01000171_ansi.vsd
ANSI01000171 V1 EN-US

Figure 225: Fault on transmission line fed from both ends

From figure 225 it is evident that:

VA = IA × p × ZL + IF × RF

EQUATION1595 V1 EN-US (Equation 61)

Where:
IA is the line current after the fault, that is, pre-fault current plus current change due to the fault,

IF is the fault current and

p is a relative distance to the fault

The fault current is expressed in measurable quantities by:

Bay control REC650 465

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

IF A
IF = --------
DA
EQUATION96 V1 EN-US (Equation 62)

Where:
IFA is the change in current at the point of measurement, IED A and

DA is a fault current-distribution factor, that is, the ratio between the fault current at line end A and the total
fault current.

For a single line, the value is equal to:

( 1 – p ) × Z L + ZB
DA = -----------------------------------------
Z A + Z L + ZB
EQUATION97 V1 EN-US (Equation 63)

Thus, the general fault location equation for a single line is:

IFA
VA = IA × p × ZL + × RF
DA
EQUATION1596 V1 EN-US (Equation 64)

Table 411: Expressions for VA, IA and IFA for different types of faults

Fault type: VA IA IFA

AG VAA IAA + KN x INA
3
2 × D (IAA - I0 A )
EQUATION1597 V1 EN-US

BG VBA IBA + KN x INA

3
2 × D (IBA - I0 A )
EQUATION1598 V1 EN-US

CG VCA ICA + KN x INA

3
2 × D (ICA - I0 A )
EQUATION1599 V1 EN-US

ABC, AB, ABG VAA-VBA IAA - IBA DIABA

BC, BCG VBA-VCA IBA - ICA DICBA

CA, CAG VCA-VAA ICA - IAA DICAA

The KN complex quantity for zero-sequence compensation for the single line is equal to:

Z0L – Z 1L
K N = ------------------------
3 × Z1L
EQUATION99 V1 EN-US (Equation 65)

DI is the change in current, that is the current after the fault minus the current before the fault.

466 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

In the following, the positive sequence impedance for ZA, ZB and ZL is inserted into the equations,
because this is the value used in the algorithm.

For double lines, the fault equation is:

IFA
VA = IA × p × Z1L + × RF + I0P × Z0M
DA
EQUATION1600 V1 EN-US (Equation 66)

Where:
I0P is a zero sequence current of the parallel line,

Z0M is a mutual zero sequence impedance and

DA is the distribution factor of the parallel line, which is:

( 1 – p ) × ( ZA + ZA L + ZB ) + Z B
DA = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 × ZA + Z L + 2 × Z B
EQUATION101 V1 EN-US

The KN compensation factor for the double line becomes:

Z0L – Z 1L Z 0M I 0P
K N = ------------------------ + ----------------- × -------
3 × Z1L 3 × Z1L I 0A
EQUATION102 V1 EN-US (Equation 67)

From these equations it can be seen, that, if Z0m = 0, then the general fault location equation for a
single line is obtained. Only the distribution factor differs in these two cases.

Because the DA distribution factor according to equation 64 or 66 is a function of p, the general

equation 66 can be written in the form:

2
p – p × K1 + K2 – K3 × RF = 0
EQUATION103 V1 EN-US (Equation 68)

Where:

VA ZB
K1 = + +1
IA × ZL ZL + Z ADD
EQUATION1601 V1 EN-US (Equation 69)

VA æ ZB ö
K2 = ×ç + 1÷
IA × ZL è ZL + Z ADD ø
EQUATION1602 V1 EN-US (Equation 70)

Bay control REC650 467

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

IF A ZA + ZB
K 3 = ---------------- × æè --------------------------- + 1öø
I A × Z L Z 1 + ZA DD
EQUATION106 V1 EN-US (Equation 71)

and:

• ZADD = ZA + ZB for parallel lines.

• IA, IFA and VA are given in the above table.
• KN is calculated automatically according to equation 67.
• ZA, ZB, ZL, Z0L and Z0M are setting parameters.

For a single line, Z0M = 0 and ZADD = 0. Thus, equation 68 applies to both single and parallel lines.

Equation 68 can be divided into real and imaginary parts:

2
p – p × Re ( K 1 ) + Re ( K 2 ) – R F × Re ( K 3 ) = 0
EQUATION107 V1 EN-US (Equation 72)

– p × Im × ( K1 ) + Im × ( K 2 ) – R F × Im × ( K3 ) = 0
EQUATION108 V1 EN-US (Equation 73)

If the imaginary part of K3 is not zero, RF can be solved according to equation 73, and then inserted
to equation 72. According to equation 72, the relative distance to the fault is solved as the root of a
quadratic equation.

Equation 72 gives two different values for the relative distance to the fault as a solution. A
simplified load compensated algorithm, which gives an unequivocal figure for the relative distance
to the fault, is used to establish the value that should be selected.

If the load compensated algorithms according to the above do not give a reliable solution, a less
accurate, non-compensated impedance model is used to calculate the relative distance to the
fault.

12.14.7.3 The non-compensated impedance model M14983-121 v3

In the non-compensated impedance model, IA line current is used instead of IFA fault current:

VA = p × Z1L × IA + RF × IA
EQUATION1603 V1 EN-US (Equation 74)

Where:
IA is according to table 411.

The accuracy of the distance-to-fault calculation, using the non-compensated impedance model, is
influenced by the pre-fault load current. So, this method is only used if the load compensated
models do not function.

468 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

12.14.8 Technical data IP14084-1 v1

M14987-1 v4

Table 412: LMBRFLO technical data

Function Value or range Accuracy
Reactive and resistive reach (0.001-1500.000) Ω/phase ± 2.0% static accuracy
± 2.0% degrees static angular accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Vn
Current range: (0.5-30) x In

Phase selection According to input signals -

Maximum number of fault 100 -
locations

12.15 Station battery supervision SPVNZBAT

12.15.1 Identification GUID-2CE1CBF4-527A-4B42-B486-BA40FB3E2926 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Station battery supervision function SPVNZBAT U<> -

12.15.2 Function block GUID-2D375476-4711-436E-8B0D-1E012F76E5FC v3

SPVNZBAT
V_BATT AL_VLOW
BLOCK AL_VHI
PU_VLOW
PU_VHI

ANSI12000026-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000026 V1 EN-US

Figure 226: Function block

12.15.3 Functionality GUID-D435B51F-8B7F-472D-90E6-3257FFDC0570 v3

The station battery supervision function SPVNZBAT is used for monitoring battery terminal
voltage.

SPVNZBAT activates the start and alarm outputs when the battery terminal voltage exceeds the
set upper limit or drops below the set lower limit. A time delay for the overvoltage and
undervoltage alarms can be set according to definite time characteristics.

SPVNZBAT operates after a settable operate time and resets when the battery undervoltage or
overvoltage condition disappears after settable reset time.

Bay control REC650 469

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

12.15.4 Signals
PID-2853-INPUTSIGNALS v12

Table 413: SPVNZBAT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
V_BATT REAL 0.00 Battery terminal voltage that has to be supervised
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the output signals of the function

PID-2853-OUTPUTSIGNALS v12

Table 414: SPVNZBAT Output signals

Name Type Description
AL_VLOW BOOLEAN Alarm when voltage has been below low limit for a set time
AL_VHI BOOLEAN Alarm when voltage has exceeded high limit for a set time
PU_VLOW BOOLEAN Pick up signal when battery voltage drops below lower limit
PU_VHI BOOLEAN Pick up signal when battery voltage exceeds upper limit

12.15.5 Settings
PID-2853-SETTINGS v12

Table 415: SPVNZBAT Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Enabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
RtdBattVolt 20.00 - 250.00 V 1.00 110.00 Battery rated voltage
BattVoltLowLim 60 - 140 %Vbat 1 70 Lower limit for the battery terminal
voltage
BattVoltHiLim 60 - 140 %Vbat 1 120 Upper limit for the battery terminal
voltage
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Delay time for alarm
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset of alarm

12.15.6 Measured values

PID-2853-MEASUREDVALUES v3

Table 416: SPVNZBAT Measured values

Name Type Default Description
V_BATT REAL 0.00 Battery terminal voltage that has to be supervised
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the output signals of the function

470 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

12.15.7 Monitored Data

PID-2853-MONITOREDDATA v12

Table 417: SPVNZBAT Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
BATTVOLT REAL - kV Service value of the battery terminal
voltage

12.15.8 Operation principle GUID-EA09E2CE-9698-45AF-AB2D-2CBFB1509629 v3

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding
parameter values are Enable and Disable.

The function execution requires that at least one of the function outputs is
connected in configuration.

The operation of the station battery supervision function can be described by using a module
diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

Comparator
V<BattVoltLowLim PU_VLOW
0 0-tDelay
V_BATT AL_VLOW
0-tReset 0
Comparator
U<BattVoltHiLim PU_VHI

0 0-tDelay
AL_VHI
0-tReset 0
ANSI11000292-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000292 V1 EN-US

Figure 227: Functional module diagram

The battery rated voltage is set with the RtdBattVolt setting. The value of the BattVoltLowLim and
BattVoltHiLim settings are given in relative per unit to the RtdBattVolt setting.

It is possible to block the function outputs by the BLOCK input.

Low level detector

The level detector compares the battery voltage V_BATT with the set value of the BattVoltLowLim
setting. If the value of the V_BATT input drops below the set value of the BattVoltLowLim setting,
the pickup signal PU_VLOW is activated.

The measured voltage between the battery terminals V_BATT is available through the Monitored
data view.

High level detector

The level detector compares the battery voltage V_BATT with the set value of the BattVoltHiLim
setting. If the value of the V_BATT input exceeds the set value of the BattVoltHiLim setting, the
pickup signal PU_VHI is activated.

Bay control REC650 471

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

Time delay
When the operate timer has reached the value set by the tDelay setting, the AL_VLOW and AL_VHI
outputs are activated. If the voltage returns to the normal value before the module operates, the
reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by tReset, the operate timer resets
and the PU_VLOW and AL_VHI outputs are deactivated.

12.15.9 Technical data

GUID-F633E33E-D602-4C21-8E39-2EBC8DA19863 v4

Table 418: SPVNZBAT Technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Lower limit for the battery terminal (60-140) % of Vbat ± 1.0% of set battery voltage
voltage
Reset ratio, lower limit <105 % -
Upper limit for the battery terminal (60-140) % of Vbat ± 1.0% of set battery voltage
voltage
Reset ratio, upper limit >95 % -
Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 110 ms
Battery rated voltage 20-250V -

12.16 Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG (63) GUID-358AD8F8-AE06-4AEA-9969-46E5299D5B4B v3

12.16.1 Identification
GUID-AD96C26E-C3E5-4B21-9ED6-12E540954AC3 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG - 63

12.16.2 Functionality GUID-0692CD0D-F33E-4370-AC91-B216CAAAFC28 v4

Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG (63) is used for monitoring the circuit breaker condition.
Binary information based on the gas pressure in the circuit breaker is used as input signals to the
function. In addition, the function generates alarms based on received information.

472 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

12.16.3 Function block

GUID-94B75A6D-973D-4F1F-8643-F2128AD31CC4 v3

SSIMG (63)
BLOCK PRESSURE
BLK_ALM PRES_ALM
PRESSURE PRES_LO
TEMP TEMP
PRES_ALM TEMP_ALM
PRES_LO TEMP_LO
SET_P_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO

ANSI09000129-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000129 V1 EN-US

Figure 228: SSIMG (63) function block

12.16.4 Signals
GUID-89749F71-CAEB-4A57-A1F0-148CCF68E97E v2

Inputs PRESSURE and TEMP together with settings PressAlmLimit, PressLOLimit,

TempAlarmLimit and TempLOLimit are not supported in this release of 650 series.

PID-3232-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 419: SSIMG (63) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
PRESSURE REAL 0.0 Pressure input from CB
TEMP REAL 0.0 Temperature of the insulation medium from CB
PRES_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Pressure alarm signal
PRES_LO BOOLEAN 0 Pressure lockout signal
SET_P_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set pressure lockout
SET_T_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout
RESET_LO BOOLEAN 0 Reset pressure and temperature lockout

PID-3232-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 420: SSIMG (63) Output signals

Name Type Description
PRESSURE REAL Pressure service value
PRES_ALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
PRES_LO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level
TEMP REAL Temperature of the insulation medium
TEMP_ALM BOOLEAN Temperature above alarm level
TEMP_LO BOOLEAN Temperature above lockout level

Bay control REC650 473

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

12.16.5 Settings
PID-3232-SETTINGS v6

Table 421: SSIMG (63) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
PressAlmLimit 0.00 - 25.00 - 0.01 5.00 Alarm setting for pressure
PressLOLimit 0.00 - 25.00 - 0.01 3.00 Pressure lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature alarm level setting of the
medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature lockout level of the medium
tPressureAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for pressure alarm
tPressureLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for pressure lockout indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperature alarm
tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperture lockout
tResetPressAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for pressure alarm
tResetPressLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for pressure lockout
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture alarm

12.16.6 Operation principle GUID-359458EA-FFAA-4A44-A8E8-9469CA069C80 v5

Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG (63) is used to monitor gas pressure in the circuit
breaker. Two binary output signals are used from the circuit breaker to initiate alarm signals,
pressure below alarm level and pressure below lockout level. If the input signal PRES_ALM is high,
which indicate that the gas pressure in the circuit breaker is below alarm level, the function
initiates output signal PRES_ALM, pressure below alarm level, after a set time delay and indicate
that maintenance of the circuit breaker is required. Similarly, if the input signal PRES_LO is high,
which indicate gas pressure in the circuit breaker is below lockout level, the function initiates
output signal PRES_LO, after a time delay. The two time delay settings, tPressureAlarm and
tPressureLO, are included in order not to initiate any alarm for short sudden changes in the gas
pressure. If the gas pressure in the circuit breaker goes below the levels for more than the set time
delays the corresponding signals, PRES_ALM, pressure below alarm level and PRES_LO, pressure
below lockout level alarm will be obtained.

The input signal BLK_ALM is used to block the two alarms levels. The input signal BLOCK is used to
block both the alarms and the function.

12.16.7 Technical data

GUID-F034B396-6600-49EF-B0A5-8ED96766A6A0 v4

Table 422: SSIMG (63) Technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 110 ms

474 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

12.17 Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML (71) GUID-37669E94-4830-4C96-8A67-09600F847F23 v3

12.17.1 Identification
GUID-4CE96EF6-42C6-4F2E-A190-D288ABF766F6 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML - 71

12.17.2 Functionality GUID-3B1A665F-60A5-4343-85F4-AD9C066CBE8D v4

Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML (71) is used for monitoring the circuit breaker
condition. Binary information based on the oil level in the circuit breaker is used as input signals to
the function. In addition, the function generates alarms based on received information.

12.17.3 Function block GUID-AC82A86C-495D-4CBD-9BF9-3CC760591AA9 v3

SSIML (71)
BLOCK LEVEL
BLK_ALM LVL_ALM
LEVEL LVL_LO
TEMP TEMP
LVL_ALM TEMP_ALM
LEVEL_LO TEMP_LO
SET_L_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO

ANSI09000128-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000128 V1 EN-US

Figure 229: SSIML (71) function block

12.17.4 Signals
GUID-0C378BB3-2104-417F-94B5-16EFC55151FE v2

Inputs LEVEL and TEMP together with settings LevelAlmLimit, LevelLOLimit,

TempAlarmLimit and TempLOLimit are not supported in this release of 650 series.

PID-3233-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 423: SSIML (71) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
LEVEL REAL 0.0 Level input from CB
TEMP REAL 0.0 Temperature of the insulation medium from CB
LVL_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Level alarm signal
LEVEL_LO BOOLEAN 0 Level lockout signal
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 475

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Type Default Description

SET_L_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set level lockout
SET_T_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout
RESET_LO BOOLEAN 0 Reset level and temperature lockout

PID-3233-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 424: SSIML (71) Output signals

Name Type Description
LEVEL REAL Level service value
LVL_ALM BOOLEAN Level below alarm level
LVL_LO BOOLEAN Level below lockout level
TEMP REAL Temperature of the insulation medium
TEMP_ALM BOOLEAN Temperature above alarm level
TEMP_LO BOOLEAN Temperature above lockout level

12.17.5 Settings
PID-3233-SETTINGS v6

Table 425: SSIML (71) Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
LevelAlmLimit 0.00 - 25.00 - 0.01 5.00 Alarm setting for level
LevelLOLimit 0.00 - 25.00 - 0.01 3.00 Level lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature alarm level setting of the
medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature lockout level of the medium
tLevelAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for level alarm
tLevelLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for level lockout indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperature alarm
tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperture lockout
tResetLevelAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for level alarm
tResetLevelLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for level lockout
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture alarm

12.17.6 Operation principle GUID-F4340B59-90D0-4EA7-9FD8-F21D425C884A v5

Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML (71) is used to monitor oil level in the circuit breaker.
Two binary output signals are used from the circuit breaker to initiate alarm signals, level below
alarm level and level below lockout level. If the input signal LVL_ALM is high, which indicate that

476 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

the oil level in the circuit breaker is below alarm level, the output signal LVL_ALM, level below alarm
level, will be initiated after a set time delay and indicate that maintenance of the circuit breaker is
required. Similarly, if the input signal LVL_LO is high, which indicate oil level in the circuit breaker is
below lockout level, the output signal LVL_LO, will be initiated after a time delay. The two time
delay settings, tLevelAlarm and tLevelLockOut, are included in order not to initiate any alarm for
short sudden changes in the oil level. If the oil level in the circuit breaker goes below the levels for
more than the set time delays the corresponding signals, LVL_ALM, level below alarm level and
LVL_LO, level below lockout level alarm will be obtained.

The input signal BLK_ALM is used to block the two alarms levels. The input signal BLOCK is used to
block both the alarms and the function.

12.17.7 Technical data

GUID-83B0F607-D898-403A-94FD-7FE8D45C73FF v4

Table 426: SSIML(71) Technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 110 ms

12.18 Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR

12.18.1 Identification GUID-0FC081B2-0BC8-4EB8-9529-B941E51F18EE v6

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR - -

12.18.2 Functionality GUID-E1FD74C3-B9B6-4E11-AA1B-7E7F822FB4DD v9

The circuit breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR is used to monitor different parameters
of the circuit breaker. The breaker requires maintenance when the number of operations has
reached a predefined value. For proper functioning of the circuit breaker, it is essential to monitor
the circuit breaker operation, spring charge indication, breaker wear, travel time, number of
operation cycles and accumulated energy. The energy is calculated from the measured input
currents as a sum of I^2 t values. Alarms are generated when the calculated values exceed the
threshold settings.

The function contains a block alarm functionality.

The supervised and presented breaker functions include

• breaker open and close travel time

• spring charging time
• number of breaker operations
• accumulated IYt per phase with alarm and lockout
• remaining breaker life per phase
• breaker inactivity

Bay control REC650 477

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

12.18.3 Function block GUID-B002ED61-5092-4E9E-AEB6-E4A4310BDAF2 v8

SSCBR
I3P* TRVTOAL
BLOCK TRVTCAL
BLK_ALM SPRCHRAL
POSOPEN OPRALM
POSCLOSE OPRLOALM
ALMPRES IACCALM
LOPRES IACCLOAL
SPRCHRGN CBLIFEAL
SPRCHRGD NOOPRALM
CBCNTRST PRESALM
IACCRST PRESLO
SPCHTRST CBOPEN
TRVTRST CBINVPOS
52a

ANSI10000281-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000281 V1 EN-US

Figure 230: SSCBR function block

12.18.4 Signals
PID-1832-INPUTSIGNALS v14

Table 427: SSCBR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
ALMPRES BOOLEAN 0 Binary pressure alarm input
LOPRES BOOLEAN 0 Binary pressure input for lockout indication
SPRCHRGN BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charging started input
SPRCHRGD BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charged input
CBCNTRST BOOLEAN 0 Reset input for CB remaining life and operation counter
IACCRST BOOLEAN 0 Reset accumulated currents power
SPCHTRST BOOLEAN 0 Reset spring charge time
TRVTRST BOOLEAN 0 Reset travel time

PID-1832-OUTPUTSIGNALS v14

Table 428: SSCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
TRVTOAL BOOLEAN CB open travel time exceeded set value
TRVTCAL BOOLEAN CB close travel time exceeded set value
SPRCHRAL BOOLEAN Spring charging time has crossed the set value
OPRALM BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds alarm limit
Table continues on next page

478 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

Name Type Description

OPRLOALM BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds lockout limit
IACCALM BOOLEAN Accumulated currents power (Iyt),exceeded alarm limit
IACCLOAL BOOLEAN Accumulated currents power (Iyt),exceeded lockout limit
CBLIFEAL BOOLEAN Remaining life of CB exceeded alarm limit
NOOPRALM BOOLEAN CB 'not operated for long time' alarm
PRESALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
PRESLO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level
CBOPEN BOOLEAN CB is in open position
CBINVPOS BOOLEAN CB is in intermediate position
CBCLOSED BOOLEAN CB is in closed position

12.18.5 Settings
PID-1832-SETTINGS v14

Table 429: SSCBR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
AccDisLevel 5.00 - 500.00 A 0.01 10.00 RMS current setting below which energy
accumulation stops
CurrExp 0.00 - 2.00 - 0.01 2.00 Current exponent setting for energy
calculation
RatedFaultCurr 500.00 - 75000.00 A 0.01 5000.00 Rated fault current of the breaker
RatedOpCurr 100.00 - 5000.00 A 0.01 1000.00 Rated operating current of the breaker
AccCurrAlmLvl 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Setting of alarm level for accumulated
currents power
AccCurrLO 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Lockout limit setting for accumulated
currents power
DirCoef -3.00 - -0.50 - 0.01 -1.50 Directional coefficient for CB life
calculation
LifeAlmLevel 0 - 99999 - 1 5000 Alarm level for CB remaining life
OpNumRatCurr 1 - 99999 - 1 10000 Number of operations possible at rated
current
OpNumFaultCurr 1 - 10000 - 1 1000 Number of operations possible at rated
fault current
OpNumAlm 0 - 9999 - 1 200 Alarm limit for number of operations
OpNumLO 0 - 9999 - 1 300 Lockout limit for number of operations
tOpenAlm 0 - 200 ms 1 40 Alarm level setting for open travel time
tCloseAlm 0 - 200 ms 1 40 Alarm level setting for close travel time
OpenTimeCorr 0 - 100 ms 1 10 Correction factor for open travel time
CloseTimeCorr 0 - 100 ms 1 10 Correction factor for CB close travel time
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 479

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

DifTimeCorr -10 - 10 ms 1 5 Correction factor for time difference in
auxiliary and main contacts open time
tSprngChrgAlm 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 1.00 Setting of alarm for spring charging time
tPressAlm 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure alarm
TPressLO 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure lockout
AccEnerInitVal 0.00 - 9999.99 - 0.01 0.00 Accumulation energy initial value
CountInitVal 0 - 9999 - 1 0 Operation numbers counter initialization
value
CBRemLife 0 - 9999 - 1 5000 Initial value for the CB remaining life
estimates
InactDayAlm 0 - 9999 Day 1 2000 Alarm limit value of the inactive days
counter
InactDayInit 0 - 9999 Day 1 0 Initial value of the inactive days counter
InactHourAlm 0 - 23 Hour 1 0 Alarm time of the inactive days counter in
hours

12.18.6 Monitored data

PID-1832-MONITOREDDATA v15

Table 430: SSCBR Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CBOTRVT REAL - ms Travel time of the CB during opening
operation
CBCLTRVT REAL - ms Travel time of the CB during closing
operation
SPRCHRT REAL - s The charging time of the CB spring
NO_OPR INTEGER - - Number of CB operation cycle
NOOPRDAY INTEGER - - The number of days CB has been inactive
CBLIFE_A INTEGER - - CB Remaining life phase A
CBLIFE_B INTEGER - - CB Remaining life phase B
CBLIFE_C INTEGER - - CB Remaining life phase C
IACC_A REAL - - Accumulated currents power (Iyt), phase A
IACC_B REAL - - Accumulated currents power (Iyt), phase B
IACC_C REAL - - Accumulated currents power (Iyt), phase C

12.18.7 Operation principle GUID-3902D69C-1858-40DD-AD63-C33C381697BA v8

The circuit breaker condition monitoring function includes a number of metering and monitoring
subfunctions. The functions can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable. The operation counters are cleared when
Operation is set to Disabled.

480 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

The operation of the functions can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the
diagram are explained in the next sections.

CBOPEN
POSCLOSE Circuit 52a
POSOPEN breaker
status CBINVPOS
I_A
I_B
I3P
I_B Operation
NOOPRALM
monitoring
BLK_ALM
BLOCK

Breaker TRVTOAL
contact
travel time TRVTCAL
TRVTRST

OPRALM
Operation
counter
OPRLOALM

IACCALM
Accumula-
ted energy
IACCLOAL
IACCRST

Breaker
CBLIFEAL
life time
CBCNTRST

Spring
SPRCHRGN charge SPRCHRAL
SPRCHRGD indication
TRVTRST

Gas PRESALM
pressure
ALMPRES supervision PRELO
LOPRES
GUID-FE21BBDC-57A6-425C-B22B-8E646C1BD932-ANSI V1 EN-US

Figure 231: Functional module diagram

12.18.7.1 Circuit breaker status GUID-390A1250-B258-4023-9A7D-0D7E19E13A6C v8

The circuit breaker status subfunction monitors the position of the circuit breaker, that is,
whether the breaker is in an open, closed or intermediate position. The operation of the breaker
status monitoring can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are
explained in the next sections.

Bay control REC650 481

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

POSCLOSE CBOPEN
Contact
POSOPEN position CBINVPOS
indicator
I_A 52a
Phase
I_B current
I3P
I_C check

GUID-60ADC120-4B5A-40D8-B1C5-475E4634214B-ANSI V1 EN-US

Figure 232: Functional module diagram for monitoring circuit breaker status BLOCK and
BLK_ALM inputs

Phase current check

This module compares the three phase currents with the setting AccDisLevel. If the current in a
phase exceeds the set level, information about phase is reported to the contact position indicator
module.

Contact position indicator

The circuit breaker status is open if the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low, the POSOPEN input
is high and the current is zero. The circuit breaker is closed when the POSOPEN input is low and the
POSCLOSE input is high. The breaker is in the intermediate position if both the auxiliary contacts
have the same value, that is, both are in the logical level "0" or "1", or if the auxiliary input contact
POSCLOSE is low and the POSOPEN input is high, but the current is not zero.

The status of the breaker is indicated with the binary outputs CBOPEN, CBINVPOS and 52a for
open, error state and closed position respectively.

12.18.7.2 Circuit breaker operation monitoring GUID-6DAE4C6B-BD66-49CD-817D-08E4EBF47DE0 v5

The purpose of the circuit breaker operation monitoring subfunction is to indicate if the circuit
breaker has not been operated for a long time.

The operation of the circuit breaker operation monitoring can be described by using a module
diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-82C88B52-1812-477F-8B1A-3011A300547A V1 EN-US

Figure 233: Functional module diagram for calculating inactive days and alarm for circuit
breaker operation monitoring

Inactivity timer
The module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has remained inactive, that is, has
stayed in the same open or closed state. The calculation is done by monitoring the states of the
POSOPEN and POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts.

482 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

The inactive days NOOPRDAY is available through the Monitored data view. It is also possible to set
the initial inactive days by using the InactDayInit parameter.

Alarm limit check

When the inactive days exceed the limit value defined with the InactDayAlm setting, the NOOPRALM
alarm is initiated. The time in hours at which this alarm is activated can be set with the
InactHourAlm parameter as coordinates of UTC. The alarm signal NOOPRALM can be blocked by
activating the binary input BLOCK.

12.18.7.3 Breaker contact travel time GUID-3AF0EE8D-AA8E-4F83-9916-61B5D0D6B05B v7

The breaker contact travel time module calculates the breaker contact travel time for the closing
and opening operation. The operation of the breaker contact travel time measurement can be
described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next
sections.

GUID-4D82C157-53AF-40C9-861C-CF131B49072B V1 EN-US

Figure 234: Functional module diagram for breaker contact travel time

Travelling time calculator

The breaker contact travel time is calculated from the time between auxiliary contacts' state
change. The open travel time is measured between the opening of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact
and the closing of the POSOPEN auxiliary contact. Travel time is also measured between the
opening of the POSOPEN auxiliary contact and the closing of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact.

GUID-3AD25F5A-639A-4941-AA61-E69FA2357AFE V1 EN-US

There is a time difference t1 between the start of the main contact opening and the opening of the
POSCLOSE auxiliary contact. Similarly, there is a time gap t2 between the time when the POSOPEN

Bay control REC650 483

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

auxiliary contact opens and the main contact is completely open. Therefore, in order to
incorporate the time t1+t2, a correction factor needs to be added with tOpen to get the actual
opening time. This factor is added with the OpenTimeCorr (=t1+t2). The closing time is calculated
by adding the value set with the CloseTimeCorr (t3+t4) setting to the measured closing time.

The last measured opening travel time tTravelOpen and the closing travel time tTravelClose
are available through the Monitored data view on the LHMI or through tools via communications.

Alarm limit check

When the measured open travel time is longer than the value set with the tOpenAlm setting, the
TRVTOAL output is activated. Respectively, when the measured close travel time is longer than the
value set with the tCloseAlm setting, the TRVTCAL output is activated.

It is also possible to block the TRVTCAL and TRVTOAL alarm signals by activating the BLOCK input.

12.18.7.4 Operation counter GUID-D3481D26-2E42-455E-8DB2-91538421F3B1 v5

The operation counter subfunction calculates the number of breaker operation cycles. Both open
and close operations are included in one operation cycle. The operation counter value is updated
after each open operation.

The operation of the subfunction can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in
the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-FF1221A4-6160-4F92-9E7F-A412875B69E1 V1 EN-US

Figure 235: Functional module diagram for counting circuit breaker operations

Operation counter
The operation counter counts the number of operations based on the state change of the binary
auxiliary contacts inputs POSCLOSE and POSOPEN.

The number of operations NO_OPR is available through the Monitored data view on the LHMI or
through tools via communications. The old circuit breaker operation counter value can be taken
into use by writing the value to the CountInitVal parameter and can be reset by Clear CB wear in
the clear menu from LHMI.

Alarm limit check

The OPRALM operation alarm is generated when the number of operations exceeds the value set
with the OpNumAlm threshold setting. However, if the number of operations increases further and
exceeds the limit value set with the OpNumLO setting, the OPRLOALM output is activated.

The binary outputs OPRLOALM and OPRALM are deactivated when the BLOCK input is activated.

484 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

12.18.7.5 Accumulation of Iyt GUID-0163FF0F-6E18-4CDC-87AA-578304E0872E v7

Accumulation of the Iyt module calculates the accumulated energy.

The operation of the module can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the
diagram are explained in the next sections.

I_A
Accumula- IACCLOAL
I_B Alarm limit
I3P ted energy
check
I_C calculator IACCALM

POSCLOSE

IACCRST

BLOCK

BLK_ALM
GUID-DAC3746F-DFBF-4186-A99D-1D972578D32A-ANSI V1 EN-US

Figure 236: Functional module diagram for calculating accumulative energy and alarm

Accumulated energy calculator

This module calculates the accumulated energy Iyt [(kA)ys]. The factor y is set with the CurrExp
setting.

The calculation is initiated with the POSCLOSE input open events. It ends when the RMS current
becomes lower than the AccDisLevel setting value.

GUID-75502A39-4835-4F43-A7ED-A80DC7C1DFA2 V1 EN-US

Figure 237: Significance of theDiffTimeCorr setting

The DiffTimeCorr setting is used instead of the auxiliary contact to accumulate the energy from
the time the main contact opens. If the setting is positive, the calculation of energy starts after
the auxiliary contact has opened and when the delay is equal to the value set with the
DiffTimeCorr setting. When the setting is negative, the calculation starts in advance by the
correction time before the auxiliary contact opens.

The accumulated energy outputs IACC_A (_B, _C) are available through the Monitored data
view on the LHMI or through tools via communications. The values can be reset by setting the
Clear accum. breaking curr setting to on in the clear menu from LHMI.

Bay control REC650 485

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

Alarm limit check

The IACCALM alarm is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the value set with the
AccCurrAlmLvl threshold setting. However, when the energy exceeds the limit value set with the
AccCurrLO threshold setting, the IACCLOAL output is activated.

The IACCALM and IACCLOAL outputs can be blocked by activating the binary input BLOCK.

12.18.7.6 Remaining life of the circuit breaker GUID-C347406A-2B6F-42BD-B70B-51489AB51EAE v8.1.1

Every time the breaker operates, the life of the circuit breaker reduces due to wear off. The
breaker wear off depends on the tripping current. The remaining life of the breaker is estimated
from the circuit breaker trip curve provided by the manufacturer. The remaining life is
decremented at least by one when the circuit breaker is opened. The operation of the remaining
life of the circuit breaker subfunction can be described by using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

I_A
I_B CB life Alarm limit
I3P CBLIFEAL
estimator check
I_C

POSCLOSE

CBCNTRST

BLOCK

BLK_ALM
GUID-1565CD41-3ABF-4DE7-AF68-51623380DF29-ANSI V1 EN-US

Figure 238: Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit breaker

Circuit breaker life estimator

The circuit breaker life estimator module calculates the remaining life of the circuit breaker. If the
tripping current is less than the rated operating current set with the RatedOpCurr setting, the
remaining operation of the breaker reduces by one operation. If the tripping current is more than
the rated fault current set with the RatedFaultCurr setting, then remaining operations of the
circuit breaker are reduced by the OperNoRated/OperNoFault value. The remaining life due to the
tripping current in between these two values is calculated based on the trip curve given by the
manufacturer. The OpNumRatCurr and OPNumFaultCurr parameters set the number of operations
the breaker can perform at the rated current and at the rated fault current, respectively.

The remaining life is calculated separately for all three phases and it is available as a monitored
data value CBLIFE_A (_B, _C). The values can be cleared by setting the parameter CB wear
values in the clear menu from LHMI.

Clearing CB wear values also resets the operation counter.

Alarm limit check

When the remaining life of any phase drops below the LifeAlmLevel threshold setting, the
corresponding circuit breaker life alarm CBLIFEAL is activated.

486 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

It is possible to deactivate the CBLIFEAL alarm signal by activating the binary input BLOCK. The
old circuit breaker operation counter value can be taken into use by writing the value to the Initial
CB Rmn life parameter and resetting the value via the clear menu from LHMI.

It is possible to deactivate the CBLIFEAL alarm signal by activating the binary input BLOCK.

12.18.7.7 Circuit breaker spring charged indication GUID-F850A940-7890-4C37-8B31-6C7D5B30E582 v5

The circuit breaker spring charged indication subfunction calculates the spring charging time.

The operation of the subfunction can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in
the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-37EB9FAE-8129-45AB-B9F7-7F7DC829E3ED V1 EN-US

Figure 239: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker spring charged indication and
alarm

Spring charge time measurement

Two binary inputs, SPRCHRGN and SPRCHRGD, indicate spring charging started and spring charged,
respectively. The spring charging time is calculated from the difference of these two signal
timings.

The spring charging time SPRCHRT is available through the Monitored data view .

Alarm limit check

If the time taken by the spring to charge is more than the value set with the tSprngChrgAlm
setting, the subfunction generates the SPRCHRAL alarm.

It is possible to block the SPRCHRAL alarm signal by activating the BLOCK binary input.

12.18.7.8 Gas pressure supervision GUID-9D070D52-B499-4D45-9195-60181819184E v6

The gas pressure supervision subfunction monitors the gas pressure inside the arc chamber.

The operation of the subfunction can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in
the diagram are explained in the next sections.

Bay control REC650 487

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

ALMPRES 0-tPressAlm
PRESALM
0

LOPRES 0-TPressLO
PRESLO
BLOCK 0
BLK_ALM
ANSI11000293-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000293 V1 EN-US

Figure 240: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker gas pressure alarm
The gas pressure is monitored through the binary input signals LOPRES and ALMPRES.

Pressure alarm time delay

When the ALMPRES binary input is activated, the PRESALM alarm is activated after a time delay set
with the tPressAlm setting. The PRESALM alarm can be blocked by activating the BLOCK input.

If the pressure drops further to a very low level, the LOPRES binary input becomes high, activating
the lockout alarm PRESLO after a time delay set with the TPressLO setting. The PRESLO alarm can
be blocked by activating the BLOCK input.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the BLOCK input
deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The alarm signals from the function can be
blocked by activating the binary input BLK_ALM.

12.18.8 Technical data

GUID-B6799420-D726-460E-B02F-C7D4F1937432 v3

Table 431: SSCBR Technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Alarm levels for open and close (0-200) ms ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
travel time
Alarm levels for number of (0 - 9999) -
operations
Setting of alarm for spring charging (0.00-60.00) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
time
Time delay for gas pressure alarm (0.00-60.00) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
Time delay for gas pressure lockout (0.00-60.00) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms

12.19 Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS

12.19.1 Functionality GUID-557FB587-9127-4D99-B2C6-16445E06F220 v1

103MEAS is a function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on connected
signals.

488 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

The measurand reporting interval set for MMXU function blocks, using the xDbRepInt and
xAngDbRepInt settings, must be coordinated with the event reporting interval set for the IEC
60870-5-103 communication using setting CycMeasRepTime.

GUID-B8A3A04C-430D-4488-9F72-8529FAB0B17D V1 EN-US

Figure 241: Settings for CMMXU: 1

All input signals to IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS must be connected in application configuration.
Connect an input signals on IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS that is not connected to the corresponding
output on MMXU function, to outputs on the fixed signal function block.

12.19.2 Function block GUID-EC5F1C83-0F47-4548-86E3-FFE056571241 v1

I103MEAS
BLOCK
I_A
I_B
I_C
IN
V_A
V_B
V_C
V_AB
V_N
P
Q
F

ANSI10000287-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000287 V1 EN-US

Figure 242: I103MEAS function block

Bay control REC650 489

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

12.19.3 Signals
PID-3563-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 432: I103MEAS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
IL1 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase A
IL2 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase B
IL3 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase C
IN REAL 0.0 Service value for residual current IN
UL1 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase A
UL2 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase B
UL3 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase C
UL1L2 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase-phase AB
UN REAL 0.0 Service value for residual voltage VN
P REAL 0.0 Service value for active power
Q REAL 0.0 Service value for reactive power
F REAL 0.0 Service value for system frequency

12.19.4 Settings
PID-3563-SETTINGS v2

Table 433: I103MEAS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
MaxIL1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase A
MaxIL2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase B
MaxIL3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase C
MaxIN 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum residual current IN
MaxUL1 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase A
MaxUL2 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase B
MaxUL3 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase C
MaxUL1-UL2 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Maximum voltage for phase-phase AB
MaxUN 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum residual voltage VN
MaxP 0.00 - 2000.00 MW 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for active power
MaxQ 0.00 - 2000.00 MVA 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for reactive power
MaxF 45.0 - 66.0 Hz 1.0 51.0 Maximum system frequency

490 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

12.20 Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103MEASUSR

12.20.1 Functionality GUID-FC9ED4BD-F11C-4BDA-8CDB-3ACF00931D3A v1

I103MEASUSR is a function block with user defined input measurands in monitor direction. These
function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in the private range, and the
Information number parameter for each block.

12.20.2 Function block GUID-C234101E-F9B9-4DB0-874C-C51BB50588CB v1

I103MEASUSR
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9

IEC10000288-1-en.vsd
IEC10000288 V1 EN-US

Figure 243: I103MEASUSR function block

12.20.3 Signals
PID-2653-INPUTSIGNALS v12

Table 434: I103MEASUSR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
INPUT1 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 1
INPUT2 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 2
INPUT3 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 3
INPUT4 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 4
INPUT5 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 5
INPUT6 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 6
INPUT7 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 7
INPUT8 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 8
INPUT9 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 9

Bay control REC650 491

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

12.20.4 Settings
PID-2653-SETTINGS v12

Table 435: I103MEASUSR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 25 Function type (1-255)
InfNo 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for measurands
(1-255)
MaxMeasur1 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 1
MaxMeasur2 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 2
MaxMeasur3 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 3
MaxMeasur4 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 4
MaxMeasur5 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 5
MaxMeasur6 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 6
MaxMeasur7 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 7
MaxMeasur8 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 8
MaxMeasur9 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 9

12.21 Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103

I103AR

12.21.1 Functionality GUID-7A132276-35A2-402C-9722-6259D65998F5 v1

I103AR is a function block with defined functions for autorecloser indications in monitor direction.
This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information number parameter is
defined for each output signal.

12.21.2 Function block GUID-FAC5A3DF-73CB-4A39-A213-5C21ACA05756 v1

I103AR
BLOCK
16_ARACT
128_CBON
130_BLKD

IEC10000289-2-en.vsd
IEC10000289 V2 EN-US

Figure 244: I103AR function block

492 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

12.21.3 Signals
PID-3569-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 436: I103AR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
16_ARACT BOOLEAN 0 Information number 16, auto-recloser active
128_CBON BOOLEAN 0 Information number 128, circuit breaker on by auto-recloser
130_BLKD BOOLEAN 0 Information number 130, auto-recloser blocked

12.21.4 Settings
PID-3569-SETTINGS v1

Table 437: I103AR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

12.22 Function status ground-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF GUID-F23B392E-B55D-4BC3-A0A6-B7992D551092 v1

12.22.1 Functionality GUID-13F90E95-7C8C-4DCB-A9D8-2489B66DB81A v2

I103EF is a function block with defined functions for ground fault indications in monitor direction.
This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information number parameter is
defined for each output signal.

12.22.2 Function block GUID-25B47484-2976-4063-BD81-AE02D03B08B0 v1

I103EF
BLOCK
51_EFFW
52_EFREV

IEC10000290-1-en.vsd
IEC10000290 V1 EN-US

Figure 245: I103EF function block

12.22.3 Signals
PID-2655-INPUTSIGNALS v12

Table 438: I103EF Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
51_EFFW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 51, ground-fault forward
52_EFREV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 52, ground-fault reverse

Bay control REC650 493

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

12.22.4 Settings
PID-2655-SETTINGS v12

Table 439: I103EF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 160 Function type (1-255)

12.23 Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103

I103FLTPROT

12.23.1 Functionality GUID-6D52F442-1592-4BA7-919C-0CD79046CAE5 v1

I103FLTPROT is used for fault indications in monitor direction. Each input on the function block is
specific for a certain fault type and therefore must be connected to a correspondent signal
present in the configuration. For example: 68_TRGEN represents the General Trip of the device,
and therefore must be connected to the general trip signal SMPPTRC_TRIP or equivalent.

The delay observed in the protocol is the time difference in between the signal that is triggering
the Disturbance Recorder and the respective configured signal to the IEC 60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT.

12.23.2 Function block GUID-F0ED13B8-6B82-4CA7-8F22-C200C33EBB7E v2

I103FLTPROT
BLOCK
64_PU_A
65_PU_B
66_PU_C
67_STIN
68_TRGEN
69_TR_A
70_TR_B
71_TR_C
72_TRBKUP
73_SCL
74_FW
75_REV
76_TRANS
77_RECEV
78_ZONE1
79_ZONE2
80_ZONE3
81_ZONE4
82_ZONE5
84_STGEN
85_BFP
86_MTR_A
87_MTR_B
88_MTR_C
89_MTRN
90_IOC
91_IOC
92_IEF
93_IEF
ARINPROG
FLTLOC

ANSI10000291-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000291 V1 EN-US

Figure 246: I103FLTPROT function block

494 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

12.23.3 Signals
PID-2656-INPUTSIGNALS v12

Table 440: I103FLTPROT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting.
64_PU_A BOOLEAN 0 Information number 64, start phase A
65_PU_B BOOLEAN 0 Information number 65, start phase B
66_PU_C BOOLEAN 0 Information number 66, start phase C
67_STIN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 67, start residual current IN
68_TRGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 68, trip general
69_TR_A BOOLEAN 0 Information number 69, trip phase A
70_TR_B BOOLEAN 0 Information number 70, trip phase B
71_TR_C BOOLEAN 0 Information number 71, trip phase C
72_TRBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 72, back up trip I>>
73_SCL REAL 0 Information number 73, fault location in ohm
74_FW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 74, forward/line
75_REV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 75, reverse/busbar
76_TRANS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 76, signal transmitted
77_RECEV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 77, signal received
78_ZONE1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 78, zone 1
79_ZONE2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 79, zone 2
80_ZONE3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 80, zone 3
81_ZONE4 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 81, zone 4
82_ZONE5 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 82, zone 5
84_STGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 84, start general
85_BFP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 85, breaker failure
86_MTR_A BOOLEAN 0 Information number 86, trip measuring system phase A
87_MTR_B BOOLEAN 0 Information number 87, trip measuring system phase B
88_MTR_C BOOLEAN 0 Information number 88, trip measuring system phase C
89_MTRN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 89, trip measuring system neutral N
90_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 90, over current trip, stage low
91_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 91, over current trip, stage high
92_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 92, ground-fault trip, stage low
93_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 93, ground-fault trip, stage high
ARINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)
FLTLOC BOOLEAN 0 Faultlocator faultlocation valid (LMBRFLO-CALCMADE)

Bay control REC650 495

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

12.23.4 Settings
PID-2656-SETTINGS v12

Table 441: I103FLTPROT Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 128 Function type (1-255)

12.24 IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED

12.24.1 Functionality GUID-52AC7D0F-33C5-46FC-983E-5CB4B3517D88 v1

I103IED is a function block with defined IED functions in monitor direction. This block uses
parameter as FunctionType, and information number parameter is defined for each input signal.

12.24.2 Function block GUID-421D5C37-27A5-476A-A7D9-40E70AFDFDC8 v1

I103IED
BLOCK
19_LEDRS
21_TESTM
22_SETCH
23_GRP1
24_GRP2
25_GRP3
26_GRP4

IEC10000292-2-en.vsd
IEC10000292 V2 EN-US

Figure 247: I103IED function block

12.24.3 Signals
PID-3677-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 442: I103IED Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
19_LEDRS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 19, reset LEDs
21_TESTM BOOLEAN 0 Information number 21, test mode is active
22_SETCH BOOLEAN 0 Information number 22, setting changed
23_GRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 23, setting group 1 is active
24_GRP2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 24, setting group 2 is active
25_GRP3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 25, setting group 3 is active
26_GRP4 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 26, setting group 4 is active

496 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

12.24.4 Settings
PID-3677-SETTINGS v2

Table 443: I103IED Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

12.25 Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV

12.25.1 Functionality GUID-E7A28D8D-398E-437C-9B58-AE125BC38058 v1

I103SUPERV is a function block with defined functions for supervision indications in monitor
direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information number parameter
is defined for each output signal.

12.25.2 Function block GUID-69C2C974-2D64-4174-9F9A-15383C09050D v1

I103SUPERV
BLOCK
32_MEASI
33_MEASU
37_IBKUP
38_VTFF
46_GRWA
47_GRAL

IEC10000293-1-en.vsd
IEC10000293 V1 EN-US

Figure 248: I103SUPERV function block

12.25.3 Signals
PID-2658-INPUTSIGNALS v12

Table 444: I103SUPERV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
32_MEASI BOOLEAN 0 Information number 32, measurand supervision of I
33_MEASU BOOLEAN 0 Information number 33, measurand supervision of U
37_IBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 37, I high-high back-up protection
38_VTFF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 38, fuse failure VT
46_GRWA BOOLEAN 0 Information number 46, group warning
47_GRAL BOOLEAN 0 Information number 47, group alarm

Bay control REC650 497

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 12 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Monitoring

12.25.4 Settings
PID-2658-SETTINGS v12

Table 445: I103SUPERV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

12.26 Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRDEF

12.26.1 Functionality GUID-DADC9CE4-2E80-426C-A3B6-A8E8C7AC3CD4 v2

I103USRDEF is a function blocks with user defined input signals in monitor direction. These
function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in the private range, and the
information number parameter for each input signal.

I103USRDEF can be used, for example in mapping the INF numbers not supported directly by
specific function blocks, like: INF17, INF18, INF20 or INF35. After connecting the appropriate
signals to the I103USRDEF inputs, the user must also set the InfNo_x values in the settings.

GUID-391D4145-B7E6-4174-B3F7-753ADDA4D06F V1 EN-US

Figure 249: IEC 60870-5-103I103USRDEF:1

12.26.2 Function block GUID-B8312E77-514D-4117-BB31-B9907755580C v1

I103USRDEF
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8

IEC10000294-1-en.vsd
IEC10000294 V1 EN-US

Figure 250: I103USRDEF function block

498 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 12
Monitoring

12.26.3 Signals
PID-2659-INPUTSIGNALS v12

Table 446: I103USRDEF Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal Input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 8

12.26.4 Settings
PID-2659-SETTINGS v12

Table 447: I103USRDEF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 5 Function type (1-255)
InfNo_1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for binary input 1
(1-255)
InfNo_2 1 - 255 - 1 2 Information number for binary input 2
(1-255)
InfNo_3 1 - 255 - 1 3 Information number for binary input 3
(1-255)
InfNo_4 1 - 255 - 1 4 Information number for binary input 4
(1-255)
InfNo_5 1 - 255 - 1 5 Information number for binary input 5
(1-255)
InfNo_6 1 - 255 - 1 6 Information number for binary input 6
(1-255)
InfNo_7 1 - 255 - 1 7 Information number for binary input 7
(1-255)
InfNo_8 1 - 255 - 1 8 Information number for binary input 8
(1-255)

Bay control REC650 499

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
500
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 13
Metering

Section 13 Metering
13.1 Pulse counter PCGGIO

13.1.1 Identification
GUID-50478353-2EE5-45ED-8A89-4EB0A0F71314 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Pulse counter PCGGIO -

S00947 V1 EN-US

13.1.2 Functionality M13394-3 v6

Pulse counter (PCGGIO) function counts externally generated binary pulses, for instance pulses
coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy consumption values. The pulses
are captured by the BIO (binary input/output) module and then read by the PCGGIO function. A
scaled service value is available over the station bus.

13.1.3 Function block M13400-3 v4

PCGGIO
BLOCK INVALID
READ_VAL RESTART
BI_PULSE* BLOCKED
RS_CNT NEW_VAL
SCAL_VAL

IEC09000335-2-en.vsd
IEC09000335 V2 EN-US

Figure 251: PCGGIO function block

13.1.4 Signals
PID-1821-INPUTSIGNALS v18

Table 448: PCGGIO Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
READ_VAL BOOLEAN 0 Initiates an additional pulse counter reading
BI_PULSE BOOLEAN 0 Connect binary input channel for metering
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets pulse counter value

Bay control REC650 501

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 13 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Metering

PID-1821-OUTPUTSIGNALS v18

Table 449: PCGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
INVALID BOOLEAN The pulse counter value is invalid
RESTART BOOLEAN The reported value does not comprise a complete integration
cycle
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The pulse counter function is blocked
NEW_VAL BOOLEAN A new pulse counter value is generated
SCAL_VAL REAL Scaled value with time and status information

13.1.5 Settings
PID-1821-SETTINGS v18

Table 450: PCGGIO Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
EventMask NoEvents - - NoEvents Report mask for analog events from pulse
ReportEvents counter
CountCriteria Off - - RisingEdge Pulse counter criteria
RisingEdge
Falling edge
OnChange
Scale 1.000 - - 0.001 1.000 Scaling value for SCAL_VAL output to unit
90000.000 per counted value
Quantity Count - - Count Measured quantity for SCAL_VAL output
ActivePower
ApparentPower
ReactivePower
ActiveEnergy
ApparentEnergy
ReactiveEnergy
tReporting 1 - 3600 s 1 60 Cycle time for reporting of counter value

13.1.6 Monitored data

PID-1821-MONITOREDDATA v20

Table 451: PCGGIO Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CNT_VAL INTEGER - - Actual pulse counter value
SCAL_VAL REAL - - Scaled value with time and status
information

502 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 13
Metering

13.1.7 Operation principle

M13397-3 v4
The registration of pulses is done according to setting of CountCriteria parameter on one of the 9
binary input channels located on the BIO module. Pulse counter values are sent to the station HMI
with predefined cyclicity without reset.

The reporting time period can be set in the range from 1 second to 60 minutes and is synchronized
with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse counter values can be done with a
command (intermediate reading) for a single counter. All active counters can also be read by IEC
61850.

Pulse counter (PCGGIO) function in the IED supports unidirectional incremental counters. That
means only positive values are possible. The counter uses a 32 bit format, that is, the reported
value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a range 0...+2147483647. The counter value is stored in
semiretain memory.

The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Scaled Value (pulse count
x scale), Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality consists of:

• Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error)

• Wrapped around
• Blocked
• Adjusted

The transmission of the counter value can be done as a service value, that is, the value frozen in
the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the database. PCGGIO updates the value
in the database when an integration cycle is finished and activates the NEW_VAL signal in the
function block. This signal can be time tagged, and transmitted to the station HMI. This time
corresponds to the time when the value was frozen by the function.
M13399-3 v7
The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to logics, which are intended to be controlled
either from the station HMI or/and the local HMI. As long as the BLOCK signal is set, the pulse
counter is blocked. The signal connected to READ_VAL performs readings according to the setting
of parameter CountCriteria. The signal must be a pulse with a length >1 second.

The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the binary input
output module (BIO).

The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter.

Each PCGGIO function block has four binary output signals that can be used for event recording:
INVALID, RESTART, BLOCKED and NEW_VAL. These signals and the SCAL_VAL signal are accessable
over IEC 61850.

The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the binary input module, where the pulse counter
input is located, fails or has wrong configuration.

The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not comprise a
complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED start-up, in the first message
after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around during last integration cycle.

The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked. There are two
reasons why the counter is blocked:

• The BLOCK input is set, or

• The binary input module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative.

Bay control REC650 503

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 13 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Metering

The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was updated since last
report.

Note, the pulse is short, one cycle.

The SCAL_VAL signal consists of scaled value (according to parameter Scale), time and status
information.

13.1.8 Technical data

M13404-2 v4

Table 452: PCGGIO technical data

Function Setting range Accuracy
Cycle time for report of (1–3600) s -
counter value

13.2 Energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR

13.2.1 Identification
SEMOD175537-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Energy calculation and demand ETPMMTR -
handling
Wh
IEC10000169 V1 EN-US

13.2.2 Functionality SEMOD153641-8 v5

Outputs from the Measurements (CVMMXN) function can be used to calculate energy
consumption. Active as well as reactive values are calculated in import and export direction. Values
can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum demand power values are also calculated by the
function.

504 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 13
Metering

13.2.3 Function block SEMOD175502-4 v4

ETPMMTR
P ACCST
Q EAFPULSE
STACC EARPULSE
RSTACC ERFPULSE
RSTDMD ERRPULSE
EAFALM
EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
EAFACC
EARACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
MAXPAFD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
MAXPRRD
IEC09000104 V1 EN-US

Figure 252: ETPMMTR function block

13.2.4 Signals
PID-3577-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 453: ETPMMTR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
P REAL 0 Measured active power
Q REAL 0 Measured reactive power
STACC BOOLEAN 0 Start to accumulate energy values
RSTACC BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated enery reading
RSTDMD BOOLEAN 0 Reset of maximum demand reading

PID-3577-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 454: ETPMMTR Output signals

Name Type Description
ACCST BOOLEAN Start of accumulating energy values
EAFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward active energy pulse
EARPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse active energy pulse
ERFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward reactive energy pulse
ERRPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse reactive energy pulse
EAFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active forward energy exceed limit in set interval
EARALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in set interval
ERFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in set interval
ERRALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in set interval
EAFACC REAL Accumulated forward active energy value
EARACC REAL Accumulated reverse active energy value
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 505

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 13 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Metering

Name Type Description

ERFACC REAL Accumulated forward reactive energy value
ERRACC REAL Accumulated reverse reactive energy value
MAXPAFD REAL Maximum forward active power demand value for set interval
MAXPARD REAL Maximum reverse active power demand value for set interval
MAXPRFD REAL Maximum forward reactive power demand value for set interval
MAXPRRD REAL Maximum reactive power demand value in reverse direction

13.2.5 Settings
PID-3577-SETTINGS v1

Table 455: ETPMMTR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Enable/Disable
Enabled
StartAcc Disabled - - Disabled Activate the accumulation of energy values
Enabled
tEnergy 1 Minute - - 1 Minute Time interval for energy calculation
5 Minutes
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
30 Minutes
60 Minutes
180 Minutes
tEnergyOnPls 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Energy accumulated pulse ON time
tEnergyOffPls 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Energy accumulated pulse OFF time
EAFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active forward
accumulated energy value
EARAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active reverse
accumulated energy value
ERFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive forward
accumulated energy value
ERRAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive reverse
accumulated energy value

Table 456: ETPMMTR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
EALim 0.001 - MWh 0.001 1000000.000 Active energy limit
10000000000.00
0
ERLim 0.001 - MVArh 0.001 1000.000 Reactive energy limit
10000000000.00
0
EnZeroClamp Disabled - - Enabled Enable of zero point clamping detection
Enabled function
LevZeroClampP 0.001 - 10000.000 MW 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at active Power
Table continues on next page

506 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 13
Metering

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

LevZeroClampQ 0.001 - 10000.000 MVAr 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at reactive Power
DirEnergyAct Forward - - Forward Direction of active energy flow Forward/
Reverse Reverse
DirEnergyReac Forward - - Forward Direction of reactive energy flow Forward/
Reverse Reverse
EAFPrestVal 0.000 - MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward active
10000.000 energy
EARPrestVal 0.000 - MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse active
10000.000 energy
ERFPresetVal 0.000 - MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward reactive
10000.000 energy
ERRPresetVal 0.000 - MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse reactive
10000.000 energy

13.2.6 Monitored data

PID-3577-MONITOREDDATA v1

Table 457: ETPMMTR Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
EAFACC REAL - MWh Accumulated forward active energy value
EARACC REAL - MWh Accumulated reverse active energy value
ERFACC REAL - MVArh Accumulated forward reactive energy
value
ERRACC REAL - MVArh Accumulated reverse reactive energy value
MAXPAFD REAL - MW Maximum forward active power demand
value for set interval
MAXPARD REAL - MW Maximum reverse active power demand
value for set interval
MAXPRFD REAL - MVAr Maximum forward reactive power demand
value for set interval
MAXPRRD REAL - MVAr Maximum reactive power demand value in
reverse direction

13.2.7 Operation principle SEMOD175495-4 v4

The instantaneous output values of active and reactive power from the Measurements (CVMMXN)
function block are used and integrated over a selected time tEnergy to measure the integrated
energy. The energy values (in MWh and MVarh) are available as output signals and also as pulsed
output which can be connected to a pulse counter. Outputs are available for forward as well as
reverse direction. The accumulated energy values can be reset from the local HMI reset menu or
with input signal RSTACC.

The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the set time interval
tEnergy. The maximum values are updated every minute and stored in a register available over
communication and from outputs MAXPAFD, MAXPARD, MAXPRFD, MAXPRRD for the active and

Bay control REC650 507

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 13 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Metering

reactive power forward and reverse direction until reset with input signal RSTDMD or from the
local HMI reset menu.

CVMMXN ETPMMTR
P_INST P
Q_INST Q

STACC
TRUE
RSTACC
FALSE
RSTDMD
FALSE

IEC09000106.vsd
IEC09000106 V1 EN-US

Figure 253: Connection of Energy calculation and demand handling function (ETPMMTR) to
the Measurements function (CVMMXN)

13.2.8 Technical data

SEMOD153707-2 v4

Table 458: ETPMMTR technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Energy metering MWh Export/Import, MVArh Input from MMXU. No extra error at steady
Export/Import load

508 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 14
Station communication

Section 14 Station communication

14.1 DNP3 protocol GUID-54A54716-23BD-4E7C-8245-DE2B4C75E8DC v1

DNP3 (Distributed Network Protocol) is a set of communications protocols used to communicate

data between components in process automation systems. For a detailed description of the DNP3
protocol, see the DNP3 Communication protocol manual.

14.2 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

14.2.1 Identification
GUID-245D9755-5892-41DB-9BC9-FE3F5C024443 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
IEC 61850-8-1 communication IEC 61850-8-1 - -
protocol

14.2.2 Functionality M14787-3 v9

The IED supports the communication protocols IEC 61850-8-1 and DNP3 over TCP/IP. All
operational information and controls are available through these protocols. However, some
communication functions, for example, horizontal communication (GOOSE) between the IEDs, is
only enabled by the IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol.

The IED is equipped with optical Ethernet rear port(s) for the substation communication standard
IEC 61850-8-1. IEC 61850-8-1 protocol allows intelligent electrical devices (IEDs) from different
vendors to exchange information and simplifies system engineering. Peer-to-peer communication
according to GOOSE is part of the standard. Disturbance files uploading is provided.

Disturbance files are accessed using the IEC 61850-8-1 protocol. Disturbance files are also
available to any Ethernet based application via FTP in the standard Comtrade format. Further, the
IED can send and receive binary values, double point values and measured values (for example
from MMXU functions), together with their quality bit, using the IEC 61850-8-1 GOOSE profile. The
IED meets the GOOSE performance requirements for tripping applications in substations, as
defined by the IEC 61850 standard. The IED interoperates with other IEC 61850-compliant IEDs,
and systems and simultaneously reports events to five different clients on the IEC 61850 station
bus.

The Denial of Service functions DOSLAN1 and DOSFRNT are included to limit the inbound network
traffic. The communication can thus never compromise the primary functionality of the IED.

The event system has a rate limiter to reduce CPU load. The event channel has a quota of 10
events/second after the initial 30 events/second. If the quota is exceeded the event channel
transmission is blocked until the event changes is below the quota, no event is lost.

Bay control REC650 509

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 14 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Station communication

All communication connectors, except for the front port connector, are placed on integrated
communication modules. The IED is connected to Ethernet-based communication systems via the
fibre-optic multimode LC connector(s) (100BASE-FX).

The IED supports SNTP and IRIG-B time synchronization methods with a time-stamping accuracy
of ±1 ms.

• Ethernet based: SNTP and DNP3

• With time synchronization wiring: IRIG-B

The IED supports IEC 60870-5-103 time synchronization methods with a time stamping accuracy
of ±5 ms.

14.2.3 Communication interfaces and protocols GUID-35C845D3-574A-40D1-AEF1-9E0D330E31DE v4

Table 459: Supported station communication interfaces and protocols

Protocol Ethernet Serial
100BASE-FX LC Glass fibre (ST connector) EIA-485
IEC 61850–8–1 ● - -
DNP3 ● ● ●
IEC 60870-5-103 - ● ●
● = Supported

14.2.4 Settings
PID-3423-SETTINGS v2

Table 460: IEC61850-8-1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
PortSelGOOSE Front - - LAN1 Port selection for GOOSE communication
LAN1
PortSelMMS Front - - LAN1 Port selection for MMS communication
LAN1
Front+LAN1

14.2.5 Technical data

M15031-1 v6

Table 461: Communication protocol

Function Value
Protocol TCP/IP Ethernet
Communication speed for the IEDs 100 Mbit/s
Protocol IEC 61850–8–1
Table continues on next page

510 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 14
Station communication

Function Value
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
Protocol DNP3.0/TCP
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
Protocol, serial IEC 60870–5–103
Communication speed for the IEDs 9600 or 19200 Bd
Protocol, serial DNP3.0
Communication speed for the IEDs 300–115200 Bd

14.3 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking

14.3.1 Identification
GUID-88FF25EF-7B29-4DF1-A832-8AB41474B69C v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Horizontal communication via GOOSEINTLKR - -
GOOSE for interlocking CV

Bay control REC650 511

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 14 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Station communication

14.3.2 Function block SEMOD173210-4 v5

GOOSEINTLKRCV
BLOCK ^RESREQ
^RESGRANT
^APP1_OP
^APP1_CL
APP1VAL
^APP2_OP
^APP2_CL
APP2VAL
^APP3_OP
^APP3_CL
APP3VAL
^APP4_OP
^APP4_CL
APP4VAL
^APP5_OP
^APP5_CL
APP5VAL
^APP6_OP
^APP6_CL
APP6VAL
^APP7_OP
^APP7_CL
APP7VAL
^APP8_OP
^APP8_CL
APP8VAL
^APP9_OP
^APP9_CL
APP9VAL
^APP10_OP
^APP10_CL
APP10VAL
^APP11_OP
^APP11_CL
APP11VAL
^APP12_OP
^APP12_CL
APP12VAL
^APP13_OP
^APP13_CL
APP13VAL
^APP14_OP
^APP14_CL
APP14VAL
^APP15_OP
^APP15_CL
APP15VAL
COM_VAL

IEC09000099_1_en.vsd
IEC09000099 V1 EN-US

Figure 254: GOOSEINTLKRCV function block

14.3.3 Signals
PID-1437-INPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 462: GOOSEINTLKRCV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals

512 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 14
Station communication

PID-1437-OUTPUTSIGNALS v14

Table 463: GOOSEINTLKRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
RESREQ BOOLEAN Reservation request
RESGRANT BOOLEAN Reservation granted
APP1_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is open
APP1_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is closed
APP1VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is valid
APP2_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is open
APP2_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is closed
APP2VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is valid
APP3_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is open
APP3_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is closed
APP3VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is valid
APP4_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is open
APP4_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is closed
APP4VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is valid
APP5_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is open
APP5_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is closed
APP5VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is valid
APP6_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is open
APP6_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is closed
APP6VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is valid
APP7_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is open
APP7_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is closed
APP7VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is valid
APP8_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is open
APP8_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is closed
APP8VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is valid
APP9_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is open
APP9_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is closed
APP9VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is valid
APP10_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is open
APP10_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is closed
APP10VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is valid
APP11_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is open
APP11_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is closed
APP11VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is valid
APP12_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is open
APP12_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is closed
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 513

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 14 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Station communication

Name Type Description

APP12VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is valid
APP13_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is open
APP13_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is closed
APP13VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is valid
APP14_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is open
APP14_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is closed
APP14VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is valid
APP15_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is open
APP15_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is closed
APP15VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is valid
COM_VAL BOOLEAN Receive communication status is valid

14.3.4 Settings
PID-1437-SETTINGS v14

Table 464: GOOSEINTLKRCV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled

14.4 Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV

14.4.1 Identification
GUID-54434BF4-C8DC-4F7B-99B5-519EB15F2A47 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV - -

514 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 14
Station communication

14.4.2 Function block GUID-7E09B200-9BEC-4586-9F2F-7AC390959A44 v1

GOOSEBINRCV
BLOCK ^OUT1
OUT1VAL
^OUT2
OUT2VAL
^OUT3
OUT3VAL
^OUT4
OUT4VAL
^OUT5
OUT5VAL
^OUT6
OUT6VAL
^OUT7
OUT7VAL
^OUT8
OUT8VAL
^OUT9
OUT9VAL
^OUT10
OUT10VAL
^OUT11
OUT11VAL
^OUT12
OUT12VAL
^OUT13
OUT13VAL
^OUT14
OUT14VAL
^OUT15
OUT15VAL
^OUT16
OUT16VAL

IEC09000236_en.vsd
IEC09000236 V1 EN-US

Figure 255: GOOSEBINRCV function block

14.4.3 Signals
PID-1436-INPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 465: GOOSEBINRCV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals

PID-1436-OUTPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 466: GOOSEBINRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Binary output 1
OUT1VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Binary output 2
OUT2VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Binary output 3
OUT3VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 3
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 515

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 14 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Station communication

Name Type Description

OUT4 BOOLEAN Binary output 4
OUT4VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Binary output 5
OUT5VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Binary output 6
OUT6VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Binary output 7
OUT7VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Binary output 8
OUT8VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Binary output 9
OUT9VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Binary output 10
OUT10VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Binary output 11
OUT11VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Binary output 12
OUT12VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Binary output 13
OUT13VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Binary output 14
OUT14VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Binary output 15
OUT15VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Binary output 16
OUT16VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 16

14.4.4 Settings
PID-1436-SETTINGS v15

Table 467: GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled

14.4.5 Operation principle GUID-F147D9FD-F811-4432-A709-DFC9531830E5 v1

The OUTxVAL output, where 1≤x≤16, will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

516 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 14
Station communication

The OUTxVAL output contains both quality validity and communication validity since
GOOSEBINRCV function has no COMMVALID output.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a cross to receive
the binary values.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is restricted to a simple

level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the OUTxVAL output will be HIGH. If
quality data validity is INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD DATA
then the OUTxVAL output will be LOW.

14.5 GOOSE function block to receive a double point value

GOOSEDPRCV

14.5.1 Identification
GUID-8C11DB9A-7844-4E1F-A6BB-D97ECE350FC1 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEDPRCV - -
double point value

14.5.2 Functionality GUID-1D2DBC22-4F04-4809-B34E-8939D442C185 v2

GOOSEDPRCV is used to receive a double point value using IEC61850 protocol via GOOSE.

14.5.3 Function block GUID-ED277880-FB5D-4630-872F-9F343D449FFE v1

GOOSEDPRCV
BLOCK ^DPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000249-1-en.vsd
IEC10000249 V1 EN-US

Figure 256: GOOSEDPRCV function block

14.5.4 Signals
PID-2528-INPUTSIGNALS v14

Table 468: GOOSEDPRCV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Bay control REC650 517

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 14 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Station communication

PID-2528-OUTPUTSIGNALS v14

Table 469: GOOSEDPRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
DPOUT INTEGER Double point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for double point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for double point output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

14.5.5 Settings
PID-2528-SETTINGS v14

Table 470: GOOSEDPRCV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Enable/Disable
Enabled

14.5.6 Operation principle GUID-82A1C8A2-827A-40EF-8E58-F573E29E468E v2

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure condition
and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a cross to receive
the double point values.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is restricted to a simple

level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If
quality data validity is INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD DATA
then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

14.6 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value

GOOSEINTRCV

14.6.1 Identification
GUID-93A1E81B-1DE8-483A-BB3B-DB771EE66DC1 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive an GOOSEINTRCV - -
integer value

518 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 14
Station communication

14.6.2 Functionality GUID-27B1ED7A-C8E8-499E-89C1-C656FB0337F8 v2

GOOSEINTRCV is used to receive an integer value using IEC61850 protocol via GOOSE.

14.6.3 Function block GUID-56F0C9F7-98F3-4091-B071-53CA5074DC8F v1

GOOSEINTRCV
BLOCK ^INTOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000250-1-en.vsd
IEC10000250 V1 EN-US

Figure 257: GOOSEINTRCV function block

14.6.4 Signals
PID-2529-INPUTSIGNALS v14

Table 471: GOOSEINTRCV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

PID-2529-OUTPUTSIGNALS v14

Table 472: GOOSEINTRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
INTOUT INTEGER Integer output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for integer output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for integer output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

14.6.5 Settings
PID-2529-SETTINGS v14

Table 473: GOOSEINTRCV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Off/On
Enabled

14.6.6 Operation principle GUID-5BBDF772-3B3E-4F7C-ABE9-18CE3C1A2E2D v2

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure condition
and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

Bay control REC650 519

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 14 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Station communication

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a cross to receive
the integer values.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is restricted to a simple

level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If
quality data validity is INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD DATA
then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

14.7 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value

GOOSEMVRCV

14.7.1 Identification
GUID-B1FFBE08-C823-4A58-9FE0-A9A20DA6BB44 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEMVRCV - -
measurand value

14.7.2 Functionality GUID-759CB016-2B4D-4D98-82E1-592044983D53 v2

GOOSEMVRCV is used to receive measured value using IEC61850 protocol via GOOSE.

14.7.3 Function block GUID-A0B333CC-AEF4-40EA-B152-364648AB78D3 v1

GOOSEMVRCV
BLOCK ^MVOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000251-1-en.vsd
IEC10000251 V1 EN-US

Figure 258: GOOSEMVRCV function block

14.7.4 Signals
PID-2530-INPUTSIGNALS v14

Table 474: GOOSEMVRCV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

520 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 14
Station communication

PID-2530-OUTPUTSIGNALS v14

Table 475: GOOSEMVRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
MVOUT REAL Measurand value output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for measurand value output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for measurand value output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

14.7.5 Settings
PID-2530-SETTINGS v14

Table 476: GOOSEMVRCV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Enable/Disable
Enabled

14.7.6 Operation principle GUID-7B24A6D3-2E5F-4961-A0A6-86436373809E v2

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure condition
and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a cross to receive
the float values.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is restricted to a simple

level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If
quality data validity is INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD DATA
then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

14.8 GOOSE function block to receive a single point value

GOOSESPRCV

14.8.1 Identification
GUID-F2B30A70-842E-435E-8FAB-B1E58B9C0164 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSESPRCV - -
single point value

Bay control REC650 521

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 14 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Station communication

14.8.2 Functionality GUID-0C99A106-C131-45D3-9B81-6B188E35EB34 v2

GOOSESPRCV is used to receive a single point value using IEC61850 protocol via GOOSE.

14.8.3 Function block GUID-A414F31A-323F-4684-BADA-46F9C5E2B0E8 v1

GOOSESPRCV
BLOCK ^SPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000248-1-en.vsd
IEC10000248 V1 EN-US

Figure 259: GOOSESPRCV function block

14.8.4 Signals
PID-2527-INPUTSIGNALS v14

Table 477: GOOSESPRCV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

PID-2527-OUTPUTSIGNALS v14

Table 478: GOOSESPRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
SPOUT BOOLEAN Single point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for single point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for single point output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

14.8.5 Settings
PID-2527-SETTINGS v14

Table 479: GOOSESPRCV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Off/On
Enabled

14.8.6 Operation principle GUID-0E25A3FB-41BD-4EFE-9CA0-1262B9CD14CD v2

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure condition
and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

522 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 14
Station communication

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a cross to receive
the binary single point values.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is restricted to a simple

level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If
quality data validity is INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD DATA
then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

14.9 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

14.9.1 Functionality M11874-3 v5

IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial communication

exchanging information with a control system, and with a data transfer rate up to 19200 bit/s. In
IEC terminology, a primary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave. The
communication is based on a point-to-point principle. The master must have software that can
interpret IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.

Function blocks available for the IEC 60870–5–103 protocol are described in sections Control and
Monitoring.The Communication protocol manual for IEC 60870-5-103 includes the 650 series
vendor specific IEC 60870-5-103 implementation.

IEC 60870-5-103 protocol can be configured to use either the optical serial or RS485 serial
communication interface on the COM03 or the COM05 communication module. The functions
Operation selection for optical serial OPTICALPROT and Operation selection for RS485 RS485PROT
are used to select the communication interface.

See the Engineering manual for IEC103 60870-5-103 engineering procedures in

PCM600.

The function IEC60870-5-103 Optical serial communication, OPTICAL103, is used to configure the
communication parameters for the optical serial communication interface. The function
IEC60870-5-103 serial communication for RS485, RS485103, is used to configure the
communication parameters for the RS485 serial communication interface.

Bay control REC650 523

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 14 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Station communication

14.9.2 Settings
PID-3682-SETTINGS v1

Table 480: OPTICAL103 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SlaveAddress 1 - 255 - 1 1 Slave address
BaudRate 9600 Bd - - 9600 Bd Baudrate on serial line
19200 Bd
RevPolarity Disabled - - Enabled Invert polarity
Enabled
CycMeasRepTime 1.0 - 1800.0 s 0.1 5.0 Cyclic reporting time of measurments
MasterTimeDomain UTC - - UTC Master time domain
Local
Local with DST
TimeSyncMode IEDTime - - IEDTime Time synchronization mode
LinMastTime
IEDTimeSkew
EvalTimeAccuracy Disabled - - 5ms Evaluate time accuracy for invalid time
5ms
10ms
20ms
40ms
EventRepMode SeqOfEvent - - SeqOfEvent Event reporting mode
HiPriSpont

PID-3683-SETTINGS v1

Table 481: RS485103 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SlaveAddress 1 - 255 - 1 1 Slave address
BaudRate 9600 Bd - - 9600 Bd Baudrate on serial line
19200 Bd
CycMeasRepTime 1.0 - 1800.0 s 0.1 5.0 Cyclic reporting time of measurments
MasterTimeDomain UTC - - UTC Master time domain
Local
Local with DST
TimeSyncMode IEDTime - - IEDTime Time synchronization mode
LinMastTime
IEDTimeSkew
EvalTimeAccuracy Disabled - - 5ms Evaluate time accuracy for invalid time
5ms
10ms
20ms
40ms
EventRepMode SeqOfEvent - - SeqOfEvent Event reporting mode
HiPriSpont

14.10 IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication GUID-FF43A130-7D2D-4BA3-B51C-80398D73228F v2

524 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 14
Station communication

GUID-B0498301-D71F-4A3C-8F81-DEEB0D0359B9 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
System component for parallel PRPSTATUS - -
redundancy protocol

14.10.1 Functionality GUID-DB1872B8-E17F-428F-B767-56DC6F10DA95 v1

Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 Edition 2 is available as option in
the Customized 650 Ver 1.3 series IEDs, and the selection is made at ordering. Redundant station
bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 Edition 2 uses both ports LAN1A and LAN1B on the
COM03 module.

Select COM03 for redundant station bus according to IEC 62439-3 Edition 2
protocol, at the time of ordering.
IEC 62439-3 Edition 2 is NOT compatible with IEC 62439-3 Edition 1.

14.10.2 Principle of operation GUID-66363AA7-5E0F-4BA1-AE3E-4DEEBB7E61EB v1

The redundant station bus communication is configured using the local HMI, Main Menu/
Configuration/Communication/TCP-IP configuation/ETHLAN1_AB. The settings are also visible
in PST in PCM600.

The communication is performed in parallel, that is the same data package is transmitted on both
channels simultaneously. The received package identity from one channel is compared with the
data package identity from the other channel. If the identity is the same, the last package is
discarded.

PRPSTATUS supervises redundant communication on the two channels. If no data package has
been received on one or both channels within the last 10 s, the output LAN1-A and/or LAN1-B are
set to indicate error.

Bay control REC650 525

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 14 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Station communication

Station Control System

Redundancy
Supervision

Duo

Data Data

Switch A Switch B
1 2 1 2

Data Data

A B
IED
COM03

PRPSTATUS

IEC13000003-1-en.vsd
IEC13000003 V1 EN-US

Figure 260: Redundant station bus

14.10.3 Function block GUID-876EDB9C-BEF1-4DBE-967D-5BEEEA6AFF38 v3

PRPSTATUS
LAN1-A
LAN1-B

IEC13000011-1-en.vsd
IEC13000011 V1 EN-US

Figure 261: PRPSTATUS function block

PID-3425-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 482: PRPSTATUS Output signals

Name Type Description
LAN1-A BOOLEAN LAN1 channel A status
LAN1-B BOOLEAN LAN1 channel B status

526 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 14
Station communication

14.10.4 Setting parameters GUID-04F0F590-21F1-48D9-8D3E-CA9CEDE3478C v1

The PRPSTATUS function has no user settings.

However, the redundant communication is configured in the LHMI under Main menu/
Configuration/Communication/TCP-IP configuration/ETHLAN1_AB where Operation mode,
IPAddress and IPMask are configured.

14.11 Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG

14.11.1 Activity logging ACTIVLOG GUID-BED7C3D6-6BE3-4DAC-84B3-92239E819CC0 v1

ACTIVLOG contains all settings for activity logging.

There can be 6 external log servers to send syslog events to. Each server can be configured with IP
address; IP port number and protocol format. The format can be either syslog (RFC 5424) or
Common Event Format (CEF) from ArcSight.

14.11.2 Settings
PID-3428-SETTINGS v1

Table 483: ACTIVLOG Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ExtLogSrv1Type Disabled - - Disabled External log server 1 type
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv1Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 1 port number
ExtLogSrv1IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 1 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv2Type Disabled - - Disabled External log server 2 type
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv2Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 2 port number
ExtLogSrv2IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 2 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv3Type Disabled - - Disabled External log server 3 type
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv3Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 3 port number
ExtLogSrv3IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 3 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv4Type Disabled - - Disabled External log server 4 type
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv4Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 4 port number
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 527

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 14 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Station communication

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ExtLogSrv4IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 4 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv5Type Disabled - - Disabled External log server 5 type
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv5Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 5 port number
ExtLogSrv5IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 5 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv6Type Disabled - - Disabled External log server 6 type
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv6Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 6 port number
ExtLogSrv6IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 6 IP-address
Address

14.12 Generic security application component AGSAL

14.12.1 Generic security application AGSAL GUID-D0CE0102-C651-4914-8FBF-854151D7E360 v1

As a logical node AGSAL is used for monitoring security violation regarding authorization, access
control and inactive association including authorization failure. Therefore, all the information in
AGSAL can be configured to report to 61850 client.

14.13 Security events on protocols SECALARM

14.13.1 Security alarm SECALARM GUID-205B0024-DA06-4369-8707-5E1D2D035995 v1

14.13.2 Signals
PID-3430-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 484: SECALARM Output signals

Name Type Description
EVENTID INTEGER EventId of the generated security event
SEQNUMBER INTEGER Sequence number of the generated security event

14.13.3 Settings
PID-3430-SETTINGS v1

Table 485: SECALARM Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Enabled Operation On/Off
Enabled

528 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 15
Basic IED functions

Section 15 Basic IED functions

15.1 Self supervision with internal event list

15.1.1 Functionality M11399-3 v5

The Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG and SELFSUPEVLST function reacts to
internal system events generated by the different built-in self-supervision elements. The internal
events are saved in an internal event list presented on the LHMI and in PCM600 event viewer tool.

15.1.2 Internal error signals INTERRSIG

15.1.2.1 Identification
GUID-93B4C259-E394-4610-8D91-FFF95735324B v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Internal error signal INTERRSIG - -

15.1.2.2 Function block M11402-3 v5

INTERRSIG
FAIL
WARNING
TSYNCERR
RTCERR
DISABLE

ANSI09000334-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000334 V1 EN-US

Figure 262: INTERRSIG function block

15.1.2.3 Signals
PID-2823-OUTPUTSIGNALS v12

Table 486: INTERRSIG Output signals

Name Type Description
FAIL BOOLEAN Internal fail
WARNING BOOLEAN Internal warning
TSYNCERR BOOLEAN Time synchronization error
RTCERR BOOLEAN Real time clock error
DISABLE BOOLEAN Application Disable

Bay control REC650 529

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Basic IED functions

15.1.2.4 Settings
PID-1308-SETTINGS v9
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

15.1.3 Internal event list SELFSUPEVLST

15.1.3.1 Identification
GUID-2E680E7E-8D98-4989-A261-C50524D3D038 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Internal event list SELFSUPEVLST - -

15.1.3.2 Settings
PID-3427-SETTINGS v1
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

15.1.4 Operation principle

M11401-3 v9
The self-supervision operates continuously and includes:

• Normal micro-processor watchdog function.

• Checking of digitized measuring signals.
• Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.

The SELFSUPEVLST function status can be monitored from the local HMI, from the Event Viewer in
PCM600 or from a SMS/SCS system.

Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the self-supervision
function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Main menu/Diagnostics/Internal
events or Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/General. The information from the self-supervision
function is also available in the Event Viewer in PCM600. Both events from the Event list and the
internal events are listed in time consecutive order in the Event Viewer.

A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of the potential free change-over alarm
contact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. This output contact is activated
(where there is no fault) and deactivated (where there is a fault) by the Internal Fail signal, see
Figure 263. The software watchdog timeout and the undervoltage detection of the PSM will
deactivate the contact as well.

530 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 15
Basic IED functions

Power supply fault Power supply Fault

module

Watchdog I/O nodes

TX overflow
Master resp. Fault
Supply fault AND
ReBoot I/O
INTERNAL
FAIL

Internal Fail (CPU) Fault

CEM

I/O nodes = BIO

xxxx = Inverted signal

IEC09000390-1-en.vsd
IEC09000390 V1 EN-US

Figure 263: Hardware self-supervision, potential-free contact

Bay control REC650 531

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Basic IED functions

LIODEV FAIL
OR
LIODEV STOPPED S e.g.BIO1- ERROR
R
LIODEV STARTED

OR

WDOG STARVED SW Watchdog Error OR Internal Fail

RTE FATAL ERROR Runtime Exec Error

FTF FATAL ERROR File System Error OR

RTE APP FAILED S

Runtime App Error
R
RTE ALL APPS OK

GENTS RTC ERROR

S
Real Time Clock Error
GENTS RTC OK R

IEC 61850 NOT READY S

IEC 61850 Error
R OR Internal Warning
IEC 61850 READY DNP 3 Error

DNP 3 STARTUP
ERROR S
DNP 3 READY R

GENTS SYNC ERROR S

OR Time Synch Error
GENTS TIME RESET
R
GENTS SYNC OK

CHANGE LOCK ON S
Change lock
CHANGE LOCK OFF R
SETTINGS CHANGED Setting groups changed

SETTINGS CHANGED Settings changed

ANSI09000381-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000381 V2 EN-US

Figure 264: Self supervision, function block internal signals

Some signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block. The signals from INTERRSIG
function block are sent as events to the station level of the control system. The signals from the
INTERRSIG function block can also be connected to binary outputs for signalization via output
relays or they can be used as conditions for other functions if required/desired.

Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module in the Signal
Matrix tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained from the time
synchronization block INTERRSIG.

15.1.4.1 Internal signals M11401-173 v6

SELFSUPEVLST function provides several status signals, that tells about the condition of the IED.
As they provide information about the internal status of the IED, they are also called internal
signals. The internal signals can be divided into two groups.

532 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 15
Basic IED functions

• Standard signals are always presented in the IED, see Table 487.
• Hardware dependent internal signals are collected depending on the hardware configuration,
see Table 488.

Explanations of internal signals are listed in Table 489.

Table 487: SELFSUPEVLST standard internal signals

Name of signal Description
Internal Fail Internal fail status
Internal Warning Internal warning status
Real Time Clock Error Real time clock status
Time Synch Error Time synchronization status
Runtime App Error Runtime application error status
Runtime Exec Error Runtime execution error status
IEC61850 Error IEC 61850 error status
SW Watchdog Error SW watchdog error status
Setting(s) Changed Setting(s) changed
Setting Group(s) Changed Setting group(s) changed
Change Lock Change lock status
File System Error Fault tolerant file system status
DNP3 Error DNP3 error status

Table 488: Self-supervision's hardware dependent internal signals

Card Name of signal Description
PSM PSM-Error Power supply module error status
TRM TRM-Error Transformator module error status
COM COM-Error Communication module error status
BIO BIO-Error Binary input/output module error status
AIM AIM-Error Analog input module error status

Table 489: Explanations of internal signals

Name of signal Reasons for activation
Internal Fail This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are
active; Real Time Clock Error, Runtime App Error, Runtime Exec Error, SW
Watchdog Error, File System Error
Internal Warning This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are
active; IEC 61850 Error, DNP3 Error
Real Time Clock Error This signal will be active if there is a hardware error with the real time
clock.
Time Synch Error This signal will be active when the source of the time synchronization is
lost, or when the time system has to make a time reset.
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 533

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Basic IED functions

Name of signal Reasons for activation

Runtime Exec Error This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine failed to do some actions
with the application threads. The actions can be loading of settings or
parameters for components, changing of setting groups, loading or
unloading of application threads.
IEC61850 Error This signal will be active if the IEC 61850 stack did not succeed in some
actions like reading IEC 61850 configuration, startup, for example.
SW Watchdog Error This signal will be activated when the IED has been under too heavy load
for at least 5 minutes. The operating systems background task is used for
the measurements.
Runtime App Error This signal will be active if one or more of the application threads are not in
the state that Runtime Engine expects. The states can be CREATED,
INITIALIZED, RUNNING, for example.
Setting(s) Changed This signal will generate an internal event to the internal event list if any
setting(s) is changed.
Setting Group(s) Changed This signal will generate an internal event to the Internal Event List if any
setting group(s) is changed.
Change Lock This signal will generate an internal Event to the Internal Event List if the
Change Lock status is changed
File System Error This signal will be active if both the working file and the backup file are
corrupted and cannot be recovered.
DNP3 Error This signal will be active when DNP3 detects any configuration error during
startup.

15.1.4.2 Run-time model M11401-136 v5

The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different converters, one
with low amplification and one with high amplification, see Figure 265.

ADx
ADx_Low
x1

u1

x2

ADx
ADx_High Controller
x1

u1

x2

IEC05000296-3-en.vsd
IEC05000296 V3 EN-US

Figure 265: Simplified drawing of A/D converter for the IED.

The technique to split the analog input signal into two A/D converter(s) with different
amplification makes it possible to supervise the A/D converters under normal conditions where
the signals from the two A/D converters should be identical. An alarm is given if the signals are out
of the boundaries. Another benefit is that it improves the dynamic performance of the A/D
conversion.

534 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 15
Basic IED functions

The self-supervision of the A/D conversion is controlled by the ADx_Controller function. One of the
tasks for the controller is to perform a validation of the input signals. The ADx_Controller function
is included in all IEDs equipped with an analog input module. This is done in a validation filter
which has mainly two objects: First is the validation part that checks that the A/D conversion
seems to work as expected. Secondly, the filter chooses which of the two signals that shall be sent
to the CPU, that is the signal that has the most suitable signal level, the ADx_LO or the 16 times
higher ADx_HI.

When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison of the two A/D
converter channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will be informed and an alarm
will be given for A/D converter failure.

The ADx_Controller also supervise other parts of the A/D converter.

15.1.5 Technical data

M11963-1 v4

Table 490: Self supervision with internal event list

Data Value
Recording manner Continuous, event controlled
List size 40 events, first in-first out

15.2 Time synchronization IP1750-1 v1

15.2.1 Functionality M11344-3 v6

The time synchronization source selector is used to select a common source of absolute time for
the IED when it is a part of a control and a protection system. This makes it possible to compare
event and disturbance data between all IEDs in a station automation system.

Micro SCADA OPC server should not be used as a time synchronization source.

15.2.2 Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN

15.2.2.1 Identification
GUID-68BC32C7-88FB-4101-A245-A9DCCB6E70EF v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGE - -
N

Bay control REC650 535

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Basic IED functions

15.2.2.2 Settings
PID-2666-SETTINGS v12

Table 491: TIMESYNCHGEN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CoarseSyncSrc Disabled - - Disabled Coarse time synchronization source
SNTP
DNP
IEC60870-5-103
FineSyncSource Disabled - - Disabled Fine time synchronization source
SNTP
IRIG-B
SyncMaster Disabled - - Disabled Activate IED as synchronization master
SNTP-Server

15.2.3 Time synchronization via SNTP

15.2.3.1 Identification
GUID-9B753EC6-1AA2-4181-A97F-AF1C5DCA7D48 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Time synchronization via SNTP SNTP - -

15.2.3.2 Settings
PID-1935-SETTINGS v16

Table 492: SNTP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ServerIP-Add 0 - 255 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Server IP-address
Address
RedServIP-Add 0 - 255 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Redundant server IP-address
Address

15.2.4 Time system, summer time begin DSTBEGIN

15.2.4.1 Identification
GUID-78DA3FFB-315B-4B4A-9C75-E20D03C6AFFE v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Time system, summer time begins DSTBEGIN - -

536 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 15
Basic IED functions

15.2.4.2 Settings
PID-2597-SETTINGS v12

Table 493: DSTBEGIN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MonthInYear January - - March Month in year when daylight time starts
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time starts
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time starts
First
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay 00:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight
00:30 time starts
1:00
1:30
...
48:00

15.2.5 Time system, summer time ends DSTEND

15.2.5.1 Identification
GUID-755A8B4F-6452-44F6-9544-DC25C5650B01 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Time system, summer time ends DSTEND - -

Bay control REC650 537

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Basic IED functions

15.2.5.2 Settings
PID-2598-SETTINGS v12

Table 494: DSTEND Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MonthInYear January - - October Month in year when daylight time ends
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time ends
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time ends
First
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay 00:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight
00:30 time ends
1:00
1:30
...
48:00

15.2.6 Time zone from UTC TIMEZONE

15.2.6.1 Identification
GUID-6D1B8710-2BAB-4BF1-98E4-3A8F0B6BF8AC v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Time zone from UTC TIMEZONE - -

15.2.6.2 Settings
PID-1843-SETTINGS v15

Table 495: TIMEZONE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NoHalfHourUTC -24 - 24 - 1 0 Number of half-hours from UTC

538 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 15
Basic IED functions

15.2.7 Time synchronization via IRIG-B

15.2.7.1 Identification
GUID-0A8E1E7F-12A3-4B71-944D-BF8B38DC4F5E v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Time synchronization via IRIG-B IRIG-B - -

15.2.7.2 Settings
PID-1936-SETTINGS v15

Table 496: IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TimeDomain LocalTime - - LocalTime Time domain
UTC
Encoding IRIG-B - - IRIG-B Type of encoding
1344
1344TZ
TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ - - PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard
PlusTZ

15.2.8 Operation principle

15.2.8.1 General concepts M11346-77 v1

Time definitions M11346-80 v3

The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the time the clock is
intended to have. Clock accuracy indicates the increase in error, that is, the time gained or lost by
the clock. A disciplined clock knows its own faults and tries to compensate for them.

Design of the time system (clock synchronization) GUID-6014BF61-0C79-44AF-B8A8-1C9C0D3A2D56 v3

External Time tagging and general synchronization

synchronization
sources Commu Protection
Events
Disabled - nication and control
functions
SNTP
IRIG-B Time-
regulator
DNP SW- time
IEC60870-5-103

ANSI09000210-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000210 V1 EN-US

Figure 266: Design of time system (clock synchronization)

Bay control REC650 539

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Basic IED functions

Synchronization principle M11346-83 v3

From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure. A function is
synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower levels.

Synchronization from
a higher level

Function

Optional synchronization of
modules at a lower level

IEC09000342-1-en.vsd
IEC09000342 V1 EN-US

Figure 267: Synchronization principle

A function is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization messages from
a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the synchronization decreases as well. A
function can have several potential sources of synchronization, with different maximum errors.
This gives the function the possibility to choose the source with the best quality, and to adjust its
internal clock after this source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as:

• The maximum error of the last used synchronization message

• The time since the last used synchronization message
• The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the function.

15.2.8.2 Real-time clock (RTC) operation M11346-57 v2

The IED has a built-in real-time clock (RTC) with a resolution of one second. The clock has a built-in
calendar that handles leap years through 2038.

Real-time clock at power off M11346-60 v2

During power off, the system time in the IED is kept by a capacitor-backed real-time clock that will
provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the power is off, the time in the IED may
drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days, and after this time the time will be lost completely.

Real-time clock at startup M11346-63 v3

At IED startup, the internal time is free running. If the RTC is still alive since the last up time, the
time in the IED will be accurate (may drift 35 ppm), but if the RTC power has been lost during
power off (will happen after 5 days), the IED time will start at 01-01-1970. For more information,
please refer to section "Time synchronization startup procedure" and section "".

Time synchronization startup procedure M11346-66 v6

Coarse time synchronization is used to set the time on the very first message and if any message
has an offset of more than ten seconds. If no FineSyncSource is given, the CoarseSyncSource is
used to synchronize the time.

540 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 15
Basic IED functions

Fine time synchronization is used to set the time on the first message after a time reset or if the
source may always set the fine time, and the source gives a large offset towards the IED time.
After this, the time is used to synchronize the time after a spike filter, i.e. if the source glitches
momentarily or there is a momentary error, this is neglected. FineSyncSource that may always set
the time is only IRIG-B.

It is not recommended to use SNTP as both fine and coarse synchronization source, as some
clocks sometimes send out a bad message. For example, Arbiter clocks sometimes send out a
"zero-time message", which if SNTP is set as coarse synchronization source (with or without SNTP
as fine synchronization source) leads to a jump to "2036-02-07 06:28" and back. In all cases, except
for demonstration, it is recommended to use SNTP as FineSynchSource only.

Rate accuracy M11346-93 v2

In the IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is 100 ppm but if the IED is synchronized for a while, the
rate accuracy is approximately 1 ppm if the surrounding temperature is constant. Normally, it
takes 20 minutes to reach full accuracy.

Time-out on synchronization sources M11346-96 v2

All synchronization interfaces has a time-out and a configured interface must receive time-
messages regularly in order not to give an error signal (TSYNCERR). Normally, the time-out is set
so that one message can be lost without getting a TSYNCERR, but if more than one message is
lost, a TSYNCERR is given.

15.2.8.3 Synchronization alternatives M11346-3 v4

Two main alternatives of external time synchronization are available. The synchronization
message is applied either via any of the communication ports of the IED as a telegram message
including date and time or via IRIG-B.

Synchronization via SNTP M11346-33 v4.1.1

SNTP provides a ping-pong method of synchronization. A message is sent from an IED to an SNTP
server, and the SNTP server returns the message after filling in a reception time and a
transmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet network that connects IEDs together in
an IEC 61850 network. For SNTP to operate properly, there must be an SNTP server present,
preferably in the same station. The SNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that gives +/- 1 ms
accuracy for binary inputs. The IED itself can be set as an SNTP-time server.

SNTP provides complete time-information and can be used as both fine and coarse time synch
source. However SNTP shall normally be used as fine synch only.

SNTP server requirements GUID-588FCD12-C494-445E-8488-8287B34EFD9A v3

The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network, that is not more than 4-5 switches
or routers away from the IED. The SNTP server is dedicated for its task, or at least equipped with a
real-time operating system, that is not a PC with SNTP server software. The SNTP server should be
stable, that is, either synchronized from a stable source like GPS, or local without synchronization.
Using a local SNTP server without synchronization as primary or secondary server in a redundant
configuration is not recommended.

Synchronization via IRIG-B M11346-146 v5

IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local time of the year in
this format. The “B” in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second are transmitted, and the message is
sent every second. After IRIG-B there numbers stating if and how the signal is modulated and the
information transmitted.

Bay control REC650 541

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Basic IED functions

To receive IRIG-B there are one dedicated connector for the IRIG-B port. IRIG-B 00x messages can
be supplied via the galvanic interface, where x (in 00x) means a number in the range of 1-7.

If the x in 00x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains information of the year. If x is
0, 1, 2 or 3, the information contains only the time within the year, and year information has to
come from the tool or local HMI.

The IRIG-B input also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by IRIG-B clocks, as IRIG-B
previously did not have any year information. IEEE1344 is compatible with IRIG-B and contains year
information and information of the time-zone.

It is recommended to use IEEE 1344 for supplying time information to the IRIG-B module. In this
case, send also the local time in the messages.

Synchronization via DNP GUID-BA2ECD90-E5FD-43AA-B16C-DE92551F5732 v2

The DNP3 communication can be the source for the coarse time synchronization, while the fine
time synchronization needs a source with higher accuracy. See the communication protocol
manual for a detailed description of the DNP3 protocol.

Synchronization via IEC60870-5-103 GUID-71F6C2E9-9B0D-4205-80F9-8E6E2C0838E2 v2

The IEC60870-5-103 communication can be the source for the coarse time synchronization, while
the fine tuning of the time synchronization needs a source with higher accuracy. See the
communication protocol manual for a detailed description of the IEC60870-5-103 protocol.

15.2.9 Technical data IP9658-1 v1

M12331-1 v5

Table 497: Time synchronization, time tagging

Function Value
Time tagging resolution, events and sampled measurement values 1 ms
Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse synchronization), ± 1.0 ms typically
events and sampled measurement values
Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, sampled measurement values ± 1.0 ms typically

15.3 Parameter setting group handling

15.3.1 Functionality M12006-6 v5

Use the four different groups of settings to optimize the IED operation for different power system
conditions. Creating and switching between fine-tuned setting sets, either from the local HMI or
configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED that can be applied to a variety of
power system scenarios.

542 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 15
Basic IED functions

15.3.2 Setting group handling SETGRPS

15.3.2.1 Identification
GUID-BC373814-240A-46A3-BE62-7560BB0FD221 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Setting group handling SETGRPS - -

15.3.2.2 Settings
PID-3488-SETTINGS v1

Table 498: SETGRPS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ActiveSetGrp SettingGroup1 - - SettingGroup1 ActiveSettingGroup
SettingGroup2
SettingGroup3
SettingGroup4
MaxNoSetGrp 1-4 - 1 1 Max number of setting groups 1-4

15.3.3 Parameter setting groups ACTVGRP

15.3.3.1 Identification
GUID-7D90271D-F483-4AB6-A69A-BBF94E643EBA v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Parameter setting groups ACTVGRP - -

15.3.3.2 Function block

GUID-FDEE7E61-236D-4E2E-A182-7CCD3D8EFEC6 v2

ACTVGRP
ACTGRP1 GRP1
ACTGRP2 GRP2
ACTGRP3 GRP3
ACTGRP4 GRP4
GRP_CHGD

ANSI09000064-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000064 V1 EN-US

Figure 268: ACTVGRP function block

Bay control REC650 543

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Basic IED functions

15.3.3.3 Signals
PID-2137-INPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 499: ACTVGRP Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ACTGRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 1 as active
ACTGRP2 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 2 as active
ACTGRP3 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 3 as active
ACTGRP4 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 4 as active

PID-2137-OUTPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 500: ACTVGRP Output signals

Name Type Description
GRP1 BOOLEAN Setting group 1 is active
GRP2 BOOLEAN Setting group 2 is active
GRP3 BOOLEAN Setting group 3 is active
GRP4 BOOLEAN Setting group 4 is active
GRP_CHGD BOOLEAN Pulse when setting changed

15.3.3.4 Settings
PID-2137-SETTINGS v10
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

15.3.4 Operation principle

M12008-8 v9
Parameter setting groups (ACTVGRP) function has four functional inputs, each corresponding to
one of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these inputs changes the active
setting group. Five functional output signals are available for configuration purposes, so that
information on the active setting group is always available.

A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal computer,
remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by activating the corresponding
input to the ACTVGRP function block.

Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary inputs in the
IED. To do this PCM600 must be used.

The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when adaptive
functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups must be either
permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms.

More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower order setting
group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and group two are set to be
activated, group two will be the one activated.

544 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 15
Basic IED functions

Every time the active group is changed, the output signal GRP_CHGD is sending a pulse. This
signal is normally connected to a SP16GGIO function block for external communication.

The parameter MaxNoSetGrp defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to switch
between.

ACTIVATE GROUP 4
ACTIVATE GROUP 3
ACTIVATE GROUP 2
ACTIVATE GROUP 1

IOx-Bly1 ACTVGRP
Æ ACTGRP1 GRP1
IOx-Bly2
Æ ACTGRP2 GRP2
IOx-Bly3
Æ ACTGRP3 GRP3
IOx-Bly4
Æ ACTGRP4 GRP4

GRP_CHGD

ANSI09000063_1_en.vsd
ANSIC09000063 V1 EN-US

Figure 269: Connection of the function to external circuits

The above example also shows the five output signals, GRP1 to 4 for confirmation of which group
that is active, and the GRP_CHGD signal which is normally connected to a SP16GGIO function block
for external communication to higher level control systems.

15.4 Test mode functionality TESTMODE

15.4.1 Identification
GUID-0411129B-3A42-4A3B-A8E7-178D0EA5A7EA v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Test mode functionality TESTMODE - -

15.4.2 Functionality M4803-3 v8

When the Test mode functionality TESTMODE is activated, all the functions in the IED are
automatically blocked. Activated TESTMODE is indicating by a flashing yellow LED on the local
HMI. It is then possible to unblock every function(s) individually from the local HMI to perform
required tests.

When leaving TESTMODE, all blockings are removed and the IED resumes normal operation.
However, if during TESTMODE operation, power is removed and later restored, the IED will remain
in TESTMODE with the same protection functions blocked or unblocked as before the power was

Bay control REC650 545

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Basic IED functions

removed. All testing will be done with actually set and configured values within the IED. No
settings will be changed, thus mistakes are avoided.

Forcing of binary output signals is only possible when the IED is in test mode.

15.4.3 Function block SEMOD54888-4 v5

TESTMODE
INPUT ACTIVE
OUTPUT
SETTING
NOEVENT

IEC09000219-1.vsd
IEC09000219 V1 EN-US

Figure 270: TESTMODE function block

15.4.4 Signals GUID-551B53B7-5D36-4DB8-BEA6-20AAC0525DFA v1

PID-3491-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 501: TESTMODE Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Sets terminal in test mode when active

PID-3491-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 502: TESTMODE Output signals

Name Type Description
ACTIVE BOOLEAN IED in test mode when active
OUTPUT BOOLEAN Test input is active
SETTING BOOLEAN Test mode setting is (Enabled) or not (Disabled)
NOEVENT BOOLEAN Event disabled during testmode

15.4.5 Settings GUID-283C6180-A48B-413C-A2BF-9E15CF8B5D4E v1

PID-3491-SETTINGS v1

Table 503: TESTMODE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TestMode Disabled - - Disabled Test mode in operation (Enabled) or not
Enabled (Disabled)
EventDisable Disabled - - Disabled Event disable during testmode
Enabled
CmdTestBit Disabled - - Disabled Command bit for test required or not
Enabled during testmode

546 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 15
Basic IED functions

15.4.6 Operation principle IP12116-1 v3

M12015-4 v9
Put the IED into test mode to test functions in the IED. Set the IED in test mode by

• configuration, activating the input SIGNAL on the function block TESTMODE.

• setting TestMode to Enabled in the local HMI, under Main menu/Tests/IED test mode/
1:TESTMODE.

While the IED is in test mode, the output ACTIVE of the function block TESTMODE is activated. The
other outputs of the function block TESTMODE shows the cause of the "Test mode: Enabled" state
— input from configuration (OUTPUT signal is activated) or setting from local HMI (SETTING signal
is activated).

While the IED is in test mode, the yellow PICKUP LED will flash and all functions are blocked. Any
function can be unblocked individually regarding functionality and event signalling.

Forcing of binary output signals is only possible when the IED is in test mode.
M11828-3 v6
Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings from the local
HMI. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode (output ACTIVE is activated).
When leaving the test mode, and returning to normal operation, these blockings are disabled and
everything is set back to normal operation. All testing will be done with actually set and configured
parameter values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus no mistakes are possible.

The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the test mode, if the blockings were
not reset. The released function will return to blocked state if test mode is set to off.

The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no outputs will
be activated.

When a binary input is used to set the IED in test mode and a parameter, that
requires restart of the application, is changed, the IED will re-enter test mode and
all functions will be blocked, also functions that were unblocked before the change.
During the re-entering to test mode, all functions will be temporarily unblocked for
a short time, which might lead to unwanted operations. This is only valid if the IED
is set in TEST mode by a binary input, not by local HMI.

The TESTMODE function block might be used to automatically block functions when a test handle
is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact 29-30) or an FT switch
finger can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the TESTMODE function block.

Each of the functions includes the blocking from the TESTMODE function block.

The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus to prevent
filling station and SCADA databases with test events, for example during a commissioning or
maintenance test.

Bay control REC650 547

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Basic IED functions

15.5 Change lock function CHNGLCK

15.5.1 Identification
GUID-6039E749-18CB-46C4-A4AD-3A8F09378522 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Change lock function CHNGLCK - -

15.5.2 Functionality GUID-00784FC0-B39D-462D-854B-AAF62626DD0A v2

Change lock function CHNGLCK is used to block further changes to the IED configuration and
settings once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to block inadvertent IED
configuration changes beyond a certain point in time.

The change lock function activation is normally connected to a binary input.

GUID-8C333BC0-AA7A-4ED1-A772-18C22E8EEE62 v4
When CHNGLCK has a logical one on its input, then all attempts to modify the IED configuration
and setting will be denied and the message "Error: Changes blocked" will be displayed on the local
HMI; in PCM600 the message will be "Operation denied by active ChangeLock". The CHNGLCK
function should be configured so that it is controlled by a signal from a binary input card. This
guarantees that by setting that signal to a logical zero, CHNGLCK is deactivated. If any logic is
included in the signal path to the CHNGLCK input, that logic must be designed so that it cannot
permanently issue a logical one to the CHNGLCK input. If such a situation would occur in spite of
these precautions, then please contact the local ABB representative for remedial action.

15.5.3 Function block GUID-15AA1D42-912E-4085-8166-33FDC327CEB5 v2

CHNGLCK
LOCK* ACTIVE
OVERRIDE

IEC09000062-1-en.vsd
IEC09000062 V1 EN-US

Figure 271: CHNGLCK function block

15.5.4 Signals
PID-1645-INPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 504: CHNGLCK Input signals

Name Type Default Description
LOCK BOOLEAN 0 Activate change lock

PID-1645-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 505: CHNGLCK Output signals

Name Type Description
ACTIVE BOOLEAN Change lock active
OVERRIDE BOOLEAN Change lock override

548 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 15
Basic IED functions

15.5.5 Settings GUID-7BD56E56-4301-470E-A0D1-535376F2D66A v1

The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600)

15.5.6 Operation principle GUID-74581AA2-6EB4-4CFA-92DA-90FB89F9A62C v2

The Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is configured using ACT.

The function, when activated, will still allow the following changes of the IED state that does not
involve reconfiguring of the IED:

• Monitoring
• Reading events
• Resetting events
• Reading disturbance data
• Clear disturbances
• Reset LEDs
• Reset counters and other runtime component states
• Control operations
• Set system time
• Enter and exit from test mode
• Change of active setting group

The binary input signal LOCK controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT:

Binary input Function

1 Activated
0 Deactivated

15.6 IED identifiers TERMINALID

15.6.1 Identification
GUID-CEB88FE4-C94A-41DE-BA72-95322C31CA90 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
IED identifiers TERMINALID - -

15.6.2 Functionality M15324-3 v5

IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual IED in the system,
not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.

Bay control REC650 549

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Basic IED functions

Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.

15.6.3 Settings
PID-3540-SETTINGS v1

Table 506: TERMINALID Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
StationName 0 - 18 - 1 Station name Station name
StationNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Station number
ObjectName 0 - 18 - 1 Object name Object name
ObjectNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Object number
UnitName 0 - 18 - 1 Unit name Unit name
UnitNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Unit number
IEDMainFunType 0 - 255 - 1 0 IED main function type for IEC60870-5-103
TechnicalKey 0 - 18 - 1 AA0J0Q0A0 Technical key

15.7 Product information

15.7.1 Identification
GUID-2AF36251-BBC6-4674-BDA8-EF317F998409 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Product information PRODINF - -

15.7.2 Functionality GUID-D78786E6-C34A-4E63-9D1E-0582C8F1F7E1 v4

The Product identifiers function identifies the IED. The function has seven pre-set, settings that
are unchangeable but nevertheless very important:

• IEDProdType
• ProductVer
• ProductDef
• SerialNo
• OrderingNo
• ProductionDate

The settings are visible on the local HMI , under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/Product
identifiers

They are very helpful in case of support process (such as repair or maintenance).

550 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 15
Basic IED functions

15.7.3 Settings GUID-168CD792-8811-43B5-8760-74ED82DE17F7 v3

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

15.8 Primary system values PRIMVAL

15.8.1 Identification
GUID-B8B3535D-227B-4151-9E98-BEB85F4D54DE v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Primary system values PRIMVAL - -

15.8.2 Functionality M15288-3 v4

The rated system frequency and phasor rotation are set under Main menu/Configuration/ Power
system/ Primary values/PRIMVAL in the local HMI and PCM600 parameter setting tree.

15.8.3 Settings
PID-1626-SETTINGS v15

Table 507: PRIMVAL Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Frequency 50.0 - 60.0 Hz 10.0 50.0 Rated system frequency
PhaseRotation Normal=ABC - - Normal=ABC System phase rotation
Inverse=ACB

15.9 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI

15.9.1 Functionality SEMOD55744-4 v7

Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor function,
processes the analog signals connected to it and gives information about all aspects of the analog
signals connected, like the RMS value, phase angle, frequency, harmonic content, sequence
components and so on. This information is then used by the respective functions in ACT (for
example protection, measurement or monitoring).

The SMAI function is used within PCM600 in direct relation with the Signal Matrix tool or the
Application Configuration tool.

The SMAI function blocks for the 650 series of products are possible to set for two
cycle times either 5 or 20ms. The function blocks connected to a SMAI function
block shall always have the same cycle time as the SMAI block.

Bay control REC650 551

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Basic IED functions

15.9.2 Identification
GUID-A4B28B9E-4F08-403A-9014-B12D13FD1412 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI_20_x - -

15.9.3 Function block SEMOD55766-1 v2

SEMOD54868-4 v7

SMAI_20_1
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC AI3P
REVROT AI1
^GRP1_A AI2
^GRP1_B AI3
^GRP1_C AI4
^GRP1_N AIN

ANSI09000137-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000137 V1 EN-US

Figure 272: SMAI_20_1 function block

SMAI_20_2
BLOCK AI3P
REVROT AI1
^GRP2_A AI2
^GRP2_B AI3
^GRP2_C AI4
^GRP2_N AIN

ANSI09000138-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000138 V1 EN-US

Figure 273: SMAI_20_2 to SMAI_20_12 function block

Note that input and output signals on SMAI_20_2 to SMAI_20_12 are the same
except for input signals GRPx_A to GRPx_N where x is equal to instance number (2
to 12).

15.9.4 Signals
PID-1251-INPUTSIGNALS v19

Table 508: SMAI_20_1 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 1
DFTSPFC REAL 20.0 Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT
calculation
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 1
GRP1_A STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2 quantity
GRP1_B STRING - Second analog input used for phase B or BC quantity
GRP1_C STRING - Third analog input used for phase C or CA quantity
GRP1_N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity

552 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 15
Basic IED functions

PID-1251-OUTPUTSIGNALS v17

Table 509: SMAI_20_1 Output signals

Name Type Description
SPFCOUT REAL Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal DFT
reference function
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Grouped three phase signal containing data from inputs 1-4
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the first analog input
AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the second analog input
AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the third analog input
AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the fourth analog input
AIN GROUP SIGNAL Calculated residual quantity if inputs 1-3 are connected

PID-1262-INPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 510: SMAI_20_12 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 12
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 12
GRP12_A STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2 quantity
GRP12_B STRING - Second analog input used for phase B or BC quantity
GRP12_C STRING - Third analog input used for phase C or CA quantity
GRP12_N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity

PID-1262-OUTPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 511: SMAI_20_12 Output signals

Name Type Description
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Grouped three phase signal containing data from inputs 1-4
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the first analog input
AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the second analog input
AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the third analog input
AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the fourth analog input
AIN GROUP SIGNAL Calculated residual quantity if inputs 1-3 are connected

Bay control REC650 553

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Basic IED functions

15.9.5 Settings
PID-1251-SETTINGS v15

Table 512: SMAI_20_1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
DFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference for external output
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current

Table 513: SMAI_20_1 Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Negation Disabled - - Disabled Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of
VBase

554 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 15
Basic IED functions

GUID-E2FC0C08-0727-4458-A27C-D9F16EA97121 v1

Even if the AnalogInputType setting of a SMAI block is set to Current, the

MinValFreqMeas setting is still visible. This means that the minimum level for
current amplitude is based on VBase. For example, if VBase is 20000, the minimum
amplitude for current is 20000 * 10% = 2000. This has practical affect only if the
current measuring SMAI is used as a frequency reference for the adaptive DFT. This
is not recommended, see the Setting guidelines.

PID-1262-SETTINGS v15

Table 514: SMAI_20_12 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current

Table 515: SMAI_20_12 Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Negation Disabled - - Disabled Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of
VBase

GUID-E2FC0C08-0727-4458-A27C-D9F16EA97121 v1

Even if the AnalogInputType setting of a SMAI block is set to Current, the

MinValFreqMeas setting is still visible. This means that the minimum level for
current amplitude is based on VBase. For example, if VBase is 20000, the minimum
amplitude for current is 20000 * 10% = 2000. This has practical affect only if the
current measuring SMAI is used as a frequency reference for the adaptive DFT. This
is not recommended, see the Setting guidelines.

Bay control REC650 555

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Basic IED functions

15.9.6 Operation principle GUID-25F5C485-B652-4BEB-B30D-C496C746CD7D v1

Every SMAI can receive four analog signals (three phases and one neutral value), either voltage or
current. The AnalogInputType setting should be set according to the input connected. The signal
received by SMAI is processed internally and in total 244 different electrical parameters are
obtained for example RMS value, peak-to-peak, frequency and so on. The activation of BLOCK input
resets all outputs to 0.

SMAI_20 does all the calculation based on nominal 20 samples per line frequency period, this gives
a sample frequency of 1 kHz at 50 Hz nominal line frequency and 1.2 kHz at 60 Hz nominal line
frequency.

The output signals AI1...AI4 in SMAI_20_x function block are direct outputs of the connected
input signals GRPx_A, GRPx_B, GRPx_C and GRPx_N. GRPx_N is always the neutral current. If
GRPx_N is not connected, the output AI4 is zero. The AIN output is the calculated residual
quantity, obtained as a sum of inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B and GRPx_C but is equal to output AI4 if
GRPx_N is connected. The outputs signal AI1, AI2, AI3 and AIN are normally connected to the
analog disturbance recorder.

The SMAI function block always calculates the residual quantities in case only the
three phases (Ph-N) are connected (GRPx_N input not used).

The output signal AI3P in the SMAI function block is a group output signal containing all
processed electrical information from inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B, GRPx_C and GRPx_N. Applications
with a few exceptions shall always be connected to AI3P.

The input signal REVROT is used to reverse the phase order.

A few points need to be ensured for SMAI to process the analog signal correctly.

• It is not mandatory to connect all the inputs of SMAI function. However, it is very important
that same set of three phase analog signals should be connected to one SMAI function.
• The sequence of input connected to SMAI function inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B, GRPx_C and
GRPx_N should normally represent phase A, phase B, phase C and neutral currents
respectively.
• It is possible to connect analog signals available as Ph-N or Ph-Ph to SMAI. ConnectionType
should be set according to the input connected.
• If the GRPx_N input is not connected and all three phase-to-ground inputs are connected,
SMAI calculates the neutral input on its own and it is available at the AI3P and AIN outputs. It
is necessary that the ConnectionType should be set to Ph-N.
• If any two phase-to-ground inputs and neutral currents are connected, SMAI calculates the
remaining third phase-to-neutral input on its own and it is available at the AI3P output. It is
necessary that the ConnectionType should be set to Ph-N.
• If any two phase-to-phase inputs are connected, SMAI calculates the remaining third phase-
to-phase input on its own. It is necessary that the ConnectionType should be set to Ph-Ph.
• All three inputs GRPx_x should be connected to SMAI for calculating sequence components
for ConnectionType set to Ph-N.
• At least two inputs GRPx_x should be connected to SMAI for calculating the positive and
negative sequence component for ConnectionType set to Ph-Ph. Calculation of zero sequence
requires GRPx_N input to be connected.
• Negation setting inverts (reverse) the polarity of the analog input signal. It is recommended
that use of this setting is done with care, mistake in setting may lead to maloperation of
directional functions.

556 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 15
Basic IED functions

Frequency adaptivity

SMAI function performs DFT calculations for obtaining various electrical parameters. DFT uses
some reference frequency for performing calculations. For most of the cases, these calculations
are done using a fixed DFT reference based on system frequency. However, if the frequency of the
network is expected to vary more than 2 Hz from the nominal frequency, more accurate DFT
results can be obtained if the adaptive DFT is used. This means that the frequency of the network
is tracked and the DFT calculation is adapted according to that.

DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference need to be set appropriately for adaptive DFT calculations.

DFTRefExtOut: Setting valid only for the instance of function block SMAI_20_1. It decides the
reference block for external output SPFCOUT.

DFTReference: Reference DFT for the block. This setting decides DFT reference for DFT
calculations. DFTReference set to InternalDFTRef uses fixed DFT reference based on the set
system frequency. DFTReference set to DFTRefGrpX uses DFT reference from the selected group
block, when own group selected adaptive DFT reference will be used based on the calculated
signal frequency from own group. DFTReference set to External DFT Ref will use reference based
on input signal DFTSPFC.

Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value

InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. However, if it is necessary to use
frequency adaptive DFT (DFTReference set to other than default, referring current
measuring SMAI) when no voltages are available, note that the MinValFreqMeas
setting is still set in reference to VBase (of the selected GBASVAL group). This
means that the minimum level for the current amplitude is based on VBase. For
example, if VBase is 20000, the resulting minimum amplitude for current is 20000 *
10% = 2000.

MinValFreqMeas: The minimum value of the voltage for which the frequency is calculated,
expressed as percent of the voltage in the selected Global Base voltage group (GBASVAL:n, where
1<n<6).

Below example shows a situation with adaptive frequency tracking with one reference selected for
all instances. In practice each instance can be adapted to the needs of the actual application.

Bay control REC650 557

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Basic IED functions

Task time group 1 Task time group 2

(5ms) (20ms)
SMAI_20_1 SMAI_20_1
BLOCK SPFCOUT BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC AI3P DFTSPFC AI3P
REVROT AI1 REVROT AI1
^GRP1_A AI2 ^GRP1_A AI2
^GRP1_B AI3 ^GRP1_B AI3
^GRP1_C AI4 ^GRP1_C AI4
^GRP1_N AIN ^GRP1_N AIN

Task time group 1 (5ms) Task time group 2 (20ms)

SMAI instance 3 phase group SMAI instance 3 phase group
SMAI_20_1:1 1 SMAI_20_1:2 1
SMAI_20_2:1 2 SMAI_20_2:2 2
SMAI_20_3:1 3 SMAI_20_3:2 3
SMAI_20_4:1 4 SMAI_20_4:2 4
SMAI_20_5:1 5 SMAI_20_5:2 5
SMAI_20_6:1 6 DFTRefGrp7 SMAI_20_6:2 6
SMAI_20_7:1 7 SMAI_20_7:2 7
SMAI_20_8:1 8 SMAI_20_8:2 8
SMAI_20_9:1 9 SMAI_20_9:2 9
SMAI_20_10:1 10 SMAI_20_10:2 10
SMAI_20_11:1 11 SMAI_20_11:2 11
SMAI_20_12:1 12 SMAI_20_12:2 12

ANSI11000284-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000284 V1 EN-US

Figure 274: Configuration for using an instance in task time group 1 as DFT reference
Assume instance SMAI_20_7:1 in task time group 1 has been selected in the configuration to
control the frequency tracking (For the SMAI_20_x task time groups). Note that the selected
reference instance must be a voltage type.

For task time group 1 this gives the following settings:

For SMAI_20_1:1

DFTRefExtOut set to DFTRefGrp7 so as to route SMAI_20_7:1 reference to the SPFCOUT output,

DFTReference set to DFTRefGrp7 so that SMAI_20_7:1 is used as reference.

For SMAI_20_2:1 to SMAI_20_12:1

DFTReference set to DFTRefGrp7 so that SMAI_20_7:1 is used as reference.

For task time group 2 this gives the following settings:

For SMAI_20_1:2 to SMAI_20_12:2

DFTReference set to External DFT ref to use DFTSPFC input as reference.

558 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 15
Basic IED functions

15.10 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM

15.10.1 Identification
GUID-06105A66-A4ED-4752-9A4B-1355AEBB45BC v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM - -

15.10.2 Functionality SEMOD55976-4 v3

Summation block 3 phase function 3PHSUM is used to get the sum of two sets of three-phase
analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need it.

15.10.3 Function block SEMOD54885-4 v3

3PHSUM
BLOCK AI3P
REVROT AI1
^G1AI3P* AI2
^G2AI3P* AI3
AI4

IEC09000201_1_en.vsd
IEC09000201 V1 EN-US

Figure 275: 3PHSUM function block

15.10.4 Signals
PID-1250-INPUTSIGNALS v14

Table 516: 3PHSUM Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation
G1AI3P GROUP - Group 1 three phase analog input from first SMAI
SIGNAL
G2AI3P GROUP - Group 2 three phase analog input from second SMAI
SIGNAL

Bay control REC650 559

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Basic IED functions

PID-1250-OUTPUTSIGNALS v13

Table 517: 3PHSUM Output signals

Name Type Description
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of two connected three phase inputs
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 1 signals from both SMAI blocks
AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 2 signals from both SMAI blocks
AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 3 signals from both SMAI blocks
AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 4 signals from both SMAI blocks

15.10.5 Settings
PID-1250-SETTINGS v13

Table 518: 3PHSUM Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
SummationType Group1+Group2 - - Group1+Group2 Summation type
Group1-Group2
Group2-Group1
-(Group1+Group2)
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
External DFT ref

Table 519: 3PHSUM Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FreqMeasMinVal 5 - 200 % 1 10 Magnitude limit for frequency calculation
in % of Vbase

15.10.6 Operation principle SEMOD55749-4 v4

Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM receives the three-phase signals from Signal matrix for analog
inputs function (SMAI). In the same way, the BLOCK input will reset all the outputs of the function
to 0.

15.11 Global base values GBASVAL GUID-2FDB0A2C-10FE-4954-B6E4-9DA2EEEF1668 v1

15.11.1 Identification
GUID-0D5405BE-E669-44C8-A208-3A4C86D39115 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Global base values GBASVAL - -

560 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 15
Basic IED functions

15.11.2 Functionality GUID-D58ECA9A-9771-443D-BF84-8EF582A346BF v2

Global base values function (GBASVAL) is used to provide global values, common for all applicable
functions within the IED. One set of global values consists of values for current, voltage and
apparent power and it is possible to have six different sets.

This is an advantage since all applicable functions in the IED use a single source of base values.
This facilitates consistency throughout the IED and also facilitates a single point for updating
values when necessary.

Each applicable function in the IED has a parameter, GlobalBaseSel, defining one out of the six sets
of GBASVAL functions.

15.11.3 Settings GUID-C73A66FB-5D6E-4DC3-B8B5-046AEC2F1FDE v1

PID-2694-SETTINGS v12

Table 520: GBASVAL Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
VBase 0.05 - 1000.00 kV 0.05 132.00 Global base voltage
IBase 1 - 50000 A 1 1000 Global base current
SBase 0.050 - 5000.000 MVA 0.001 229.000 Global base apparent power

15.12 Authority check ATHCHCK

15.12.1 Identification
GUID-FBEF319B-94E6-41FB-BB9F-D870E0425128 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Authority check ATHCHCK - -

15.12.2 Functionality SEMOD117051-23 v4

To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are accessing the IED
are protected, by means of authorization handling. The authorization handling of the IED and the
PCM600 is implemented at both access points to the IED:

• local, through the local HMI

• remote, through the communication ports

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with PCM600 IED user management tool.

Bay control REC650 561

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Basic IED functions

IEC12000202-1-en.vsd
IEC12000202 V1 EN-US

Figure 276: PCM600 user management tool

15.12.3 Settings
PID-1484-SETTINGS v11
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

15.12.4 Operation principle GUID-B555EDD0-BAF1-4F0E-9162-BDB3A3468CF2 v6

There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different areas of the IED
and tools functionality. The pre-defined user types are given in Table 521.

Table 521: Pre-defined user types

User type Access rights
SystemOperator Control from local HMI, no bypass
ProtectionEngineer All settings
DesignEngineer Application configuration (including SMT, GDE and
CMT)
UserAdministrator User and password administration for the IED

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the IED User Management within
PCM600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the local HMI on the IED, there are no users,
groups or functions that can be defined on local HMI.

562 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 15
Basic IED functions

Only characters A - Z, a - z and 0 - 9 should be used in user names and passwords.

The maximum of characters in a password is 12.

At least one user must be included in the UserAdministrator group to be able to

write users, created in PCM600, to IED.

15.12.4.1 Authorization handling in the IED SEMOD176296-5 v7

At delivery the default user is the SuperUser. No Log on is required to operate the IED until a user
has been created with the IED User Management..

Once a user is created and written to the IED, that user can perform a Log on, using the password
assigned in the tool. Then the default user will be Guest.

If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will display a message box: “No user defined!”

If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Main menu/
Configuration/HMI/Screen/SCREEN:1) elapses, the IED returns to Guest state, when only reading
is possible. By factory default, the display timeout is set to 60 minutes.

If one or more users are created with the IED User Management and written to the IED, then, when
a user attempts a Log on by pressing the key or when the user attempts to perform an
operation that is password protected, the Log on window opens.

The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the key, one can change the
user name, by browsing the list of users, with the “up” and “down” arrows. After choosing the right
user name, the user must press the key again. When it comes to password, upon pressing the
key, the following characters will show up: “✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳”. The user must scroll for every letter
in the password. After all the letters are introduced (passwords are case sensitive) choose OK and
press the key again.

At successful Log on, the local HMI shows the new user name in the status bar at the bottom of
the LCD. If the Log on is OK, when required to change for example a password protected setting,
the local HMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the Log on has failed, an "Error Access Denied"
message opens. If a user enters an incorrect password three times, that user will be blocked for
ten minutes before a new attempt to log in can be performed. The user will be blocked from
logging in, both from the local HMI and PCM600. However, other users are to log in during this
period.

15.13 Authority management AUTHMAN

15.13.1 Identification
GUID-7925E6A3-301D-44A5-982F-167805EEA473 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Authority management AUTHMAN - -

Bay control REC650 563

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Basic IED functions

15.13.2 AUTHMAN GUID-AF7EDB44-42AA-4D49-BFA0-DA6A9B43973E v1

This function enables/disables the maintenance menu. It also controls the maintenance menu log
on time out.

15.13.3 Settings
PID-3513-SETTINGS v1

Table 522: AUTHMAN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MaintMenuEnable No - - Yes Maintenance menu enabled
Yes
AuthTimeout 10 Min - - 10 Min Authority blocking timeout
20 Min
30 Min
40 Min
50 Min
60 Min

15.14 FTP access with password FTPACCS

15.14.1 Identification
GUID-C037D0B0-1AA0-4592-9293-92C7EDED3261 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
FTP access with SSL FTPACCS - -

15.14.2 FTP access with SSL FTPACCS GUID-9E64EA68-6FA9-4576-B5E9-92E3CC6AA7FD v1

The FTP Client defaults to the best possible security mode when trying to negotiate with SSL.

The automatic negotiation mode acts on port number and server features. It tries to immediately
activate implicit SSL if the specified port is 990. If the specified port is any other, it tries to
negotiate with explicit SSL via AUTH SSL/TLS.

Using FTP without SSL encryption gives the FTP client reduced capabilities. This mode is only for
accessing disturbance recorder data from the IED.

If normal FTP is required to read out disturbance recordings, create a specific

account for this purpose with rights only to do File transfer. The password of this
user will be exposed in clear text on the wire.

564 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 15
Basic IED functions

15.14.3 Settings
PID-3398-SETTINGS v3

Table 523: FTPACCS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PortSelection None - - Front+LAN1 Port selection for communication
Front
LAN1
Front+LAN1
SSLMode FTP+FTPS - - FTPS Support for AUTH TLS/SSL
FTPS
TCPPortFTP 1 - 65535 - 1 21 TCP port for FTP and FTP with Explicit SSL
TCPPortFTPS 1 - 65535 - 1 990 TCP port for FTP with Implicit SSL

15.15 Authority status ATHSTAT

15.15.1 Identification
GUID-79C63688-4D7D-4954-AC3C-B9484D084F6F v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Authority status ATHSTAT - -

15.15.2 Functionality SEMOD158529-5 v5

Authority status ATHSTAT function is an indication function block for user log-on activity.

User denied attempt to log-on and user successful log-on are reported.

15.15.3 Function block SEMOD158547-4 v4

ATHSTAT
USRBLKED
LOGGEDON

IEC09000235_en_1.vsd
IEC09000235 V1 EN-US

Figure 277: ATHSTAT function block

15.15.4 Signals
PID-1844-OUTPUTSIGNALS v15

Table 524: ATHSTAT Output signals

Name Type Description
USRBLKED BOOLEAN At least one user is blocked by invalid password
LOGGEDON BOOLEAN At least one user is logged on

Bay control REC650 565

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Basic IED functions

15.15.5 Settings GUID-ECE18AA9-15CC-4522-AA31-78C4F0F052E4 v1

The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600)

15.15.6 Operation principle SEMOD158543-4 v4

Authority status (ATHSTAT) function informs about two events related to the IED and the user
authorization:

• the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was blocked (the
output USRBLKED)
• the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)

Whenever one of the two events occurs, the corresponding output (USRBLKED or LOGGEDON) is
activated.

15.16 Denial of service

15.16.1 Functionality GUID-407250CA-0076-41E1-AD2D-434077AC3F1D v3

The Denial of service functions (DOSLAN1 and DOSFRNT) are designed to limit overload on the IED
produced by heavy Ethernet network traffic. The communication facilities must not be allowed to
compromise the primary functionality of the device. All inbound network traffic will be quota
controlled so that too heavy network loads can be controlled. Heavy network load might for
instance be the result of malfunctioning equipment connected to the network.

15.16.2 Denial of service, frame rate control for front port DOSFRNT

15.16.2.1 Identification
GUID-09BC0991-6FA3-4137-9B7C-A42D5D60D925 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Denial of service, frame rate control DOSFRNT - -
for front port

15.16.2.2 Function block GUID-F5C2ECFE-460C-4916-8441-3D778672F8B5 v1

DOSFRNT
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM

IEC09000133-1-en.vsd
IEC09000133 V1 EN-US

Figure 278: DOSFRNT function block

566 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 15
Basic IED functions

15.16.2.3 Signals
PID-1611-OUTPUTSIGNALS v18

Table 525: DOSFRNT Output signals

Name Type Description
LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state

15.16.2.4 Settings GUID-2DD23D7A-007C-4819-8173-6C05399F9C6E v2

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

15.16.2.5 Monitored data

PID-1611-MONITOREDDATA v20

Table 526: DOSFRNT Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
State INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent 0-100
IPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of IP packets received in normal
mode
IPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of IP packets received in polled
mode
IPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of IP packets discarded
NonIPPackRecNor INTEGER - - Number of non IP packets received in
m normal mode
NonIPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of non IP packets received in
polled mode
NonIPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of non IP packets discarded

15.16.3 Denial of service, frame rate control for LAN1 port DOSLAN1

15.16.3.1 Identification
GUID-C8EAE89C-6916-435E-B343-41289CB10213 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Denial of service, frame rate control DOSLAN1 - -
for LAN1 port

Bay control REC650 567

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 15 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Basic IED functions

15.16.3.2 Function block GUID-E0F55F7F-EC3E-494A-9530-FF0837CF33C1 v1

DOSLAN1
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM

IEC09000134-1-en.vsd
IEC09000134 V1 EN-US

Figure 279: DOSLAN1 function block

15.16.3.3 Signals
PID-1614-OUTPUTSIGNALS v18

Table 527: DOSLAN1 Output signals

Name Type Description
LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state

15.16.3.4 Settings GUID-2DD23D7A-007C-4819-8173-6C05399F9C6E v2

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

15.16.3.5 Monitored data

PID-1614-MONITOREDDATA v20

Table 528: DOSLAN1 Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
State INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent 0-100
IPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of IP packets received in normal
mode
IPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of IP packets received in polled
mode
IPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of IP packets discarded
NonIPPackRecNor INTEGER - - Number of non IP packets received in
m normal mode
NonIPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of non IP packets received in
polled mode
NonIPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of non IP packets discarded

568 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 15
Basic IED functions

15.16.4 Operation principle GUID-94340D4F-4D32-409B-BA1A-BA49A0C3F297 v3

The Denial of service functions (DOSLAN1 and DOSFRNT) measures the IED load from
communication and, if necessary, limit it for not jeopardizing the IEDs control and protection
functionality due to high CPU load. The function has the following outputs:

• LINKUP indicates the Ethernet link status

• WARNING indicates that communication (frame rate) is higher than normal
• ALARM indicates that the IED limits communication

Bay control REC650 569

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
570
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 16
IED physical connections

Section 16 IED physical connections

16.1 Protective ground connections GUID-109D8403-5C3F-4E51-BA03-24BE9B05739F v5

The IED shall be grounded with a 6 Gauge flat copper cable.

The ground lead should be as short as possible, less than 59.06 inches (1500 mm).
Additional length is required for door mounting.

ANSI11000286 V2 EN-US

Figure 280: The protective ground pin is located to the left of connector X101 on the 3U full
19” case

16.2 Inputs

16.2.1 Measuring inputs GUID-00D2DE80-9DA7-45FB-AB5B-98E89E3A9220 v4

Table 529: Analog input modules TRM

Terminal TRM TRM TRM TRM
6I + 4U 8I + 2U 4I + 1I + 5U 4I + 6U
X101-1, 2 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A
X101-3, 4 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A
X101-5, 6 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A
X101-7, 8 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A
X101-9, 10 1/5A 1/5A 0.1/0.5A 100/220V
X102-1, 2 1/5A 1/5A 100/220V 100/220V
X102-3, 4 100/220V 1/5A 100/220V 100/220V
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 571

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 16 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
IED physical connections

Terminal TRM TRM TRM TRM

6I + 4U 8I + 2U 4I + 1I + 5U 4I + 6U
X102-5, 6 100/220V 1/5A 100/220V 100/220V
X102-7, 8 100/220V 100/220V 100/220V 100/220V
X102-9, 10 100/220V 100/220V 100/220V 100/220V

Table 530: Analog input modules AIM

Terminal AIM AIM
6I + 4U 4I + 1I + 5U
X103-1, 2 1/5A 1/5A
X103-3, 4 1/5A 1/5A
X103-5, 6 1/5A 1/5A
X103-7, 8 1/5A 1/5A
X103-9, 10 1/5A 0.1/0.5A
X104-1, 2 1/5A 100/220V
X104-3, 4 100/220V 100/220V
X104-5, 6 100/220V 100/220V
X104-7, 8 100/220V 100/220V
X104-9, 10 100/220V 100/220V

See the connection diagrams for information on the analog input module variant
included in a particular configured IED. The primary and secondary rated values of
the primary VT's and CT's are set for the analog inputs of the IED.

16.2.2 Auxiliary supply voltage input GUID-BA4C9A9B-0807-4887-8752-D4287A7448EA v1.1.1

The auxiliary voltage of the IED is connected to terminals X420-1 and X420-2/3. The terminals used
depend on the power supply.

The permitted auxiliary voltage range of the IED is marked on top of the IED's LHMI.

Table 531: Auxiliary voltage supply of 110...250 V DC or 100...240 V AC

Case Terminal Description
3U full 19” X420-1 - Input
X420-3 + Input

Table 532: Auxiliary voltage supply of 48-125 V DC

Case Terminal Description
3U full 19” X420-1 - Input
X420-2 + Input

572 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 16
IED physical connections

Table 533: Auxiliary voltage supply of 24-30 V DC

Case Terminal Description
3U full 19” X420-3 - Input
X420-2 + Input

The two LEDs next to X420 indicate the following conditions:

• Bat1 = input voltage (for example, station battery) is within the expected range.
• Rdy1 = output voltage of internal power supply is within the expected range (no IED internal
short circuit or overvoltage).

16.2.3 Binary inputs GUID-FEB48C47-F273-4632-AEDA-B1B97AB74900 v10

The binary inputs can be used, for example, to generate a blocking signal, to unlatch output
contacts, to trigger the digital fault recorder or for remote control of IED settings.

Each signal connector terminal is connected with one 14 or 16 Gauge wire.

Table 534: Binary inputs X304, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info

Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X304-1 Common - for inputs 1-3
X304-2 Binary input 1 + COM_101 BI1
X304-3 Binary input 2 + COM_101 BI2
X304-4 Binary input 3 + COM_101 BI3
X304-5 Common - for inputs 4-6
X304-6 Binary input 4 + COM_101 BI4
X304-7 Binary input 5 + COM_101 BI5
X304-8 Binary input 6 + COM_101 BI6
X304-9 Common - for inputs 7-9
X304-10 Binary input 7 + COM_101 BI7
X304-11 Binary input 8 + COM_101 BI8
X304-12 Binary input 9 + COM_101 BI9
X304-13 Common - for inputs 10-12
X304-14 Binary input 10 + COM_101 BI10
X304-15 Binary input 11 + COM_101 BI11
X304-16 Binary input 12 + COM_101 BI12

Bay control REC650 573

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 16 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
IED physical connections

Table 535: Binary inputs X324, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X324-1 - for input 1 BIO_3 BI1
X324-2 Binary input 1 + BIO_3 BI1
X324-3 -
X324-4 Common - for inputs 2-3
X324-5 Binary input 2 + BIO_3 BI2
X324-6 Binary input 3 + BIO_3 BI3
X324-7 -
X324-8 Common - for inputs 4-5
X324-9 Binary input 4 + BIO_3 BI4
X324-10 Binary input 5 + BIO_3 BI5
X324-11 -
X324-12 Common - for inputs 6-7
X324-13 Binary input 6 + BIO_3 BI6
X324-14 Binary input 7 + BIO_3 BI7
X324-15 -
X324-16 Common - for inputs 8-9
X324-17 Binary input 8 + BIO_3 BI8
X324-18 Binary input 9 + BIO_3 BI9

Table 536: Binary inputs X329, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X329-1 - for input 1 BIO_4 BI1
X329-2 Binary input 1 + BIO_4 BI1
X329-3 -
X329-4 Common - for inputs 2-3
X329-5 Binary input 2 + BIO_4 BI2
X329-6 Binary input 3 + BIO_4 BI3
X329-7 -
X329-8 Common - for inputs 4-5
X329-9 Binary input 4 + BIO_4 BI4
X329-10 Binary input 5 + BIO_4 BI5
X329-11 -
X329-12 Common - for inputs 6-7
X329-13 Binary input 6 + BIO_4 BI6
Table continues on next page

574 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 16
IED physical connections

Terminal Description PCM600 info

Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X329-14 Binary input 7 + BIO_4 BI7
X329-15 -
X329-16 Common - for inputs 8-9
X329-17 Binary input 8 + BIO_4 BI8
X329-18 Binary input 9 + BIO_4 BI9

Table 537: Binary inputs X334, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info

Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X334-1 - for input 1 BIO_5 BI1
X334-2 Binary input 1 + BIO_5 BI1
X334-3 -
X334-4 Common - for inputs 2-3
X334-5 Binary input 2 + BIO_5 BI2
X334-6 Binary input 3 + BIO_5 BI3
X334-7 -
X334-8 Common - for inputs 4-5
X334-9 Binary input 4 + BIO_5 BI4
X334-10 Binary input 5 + BIO_5 BI5
X334-11 -
X334-12 Common - for inputs 6-7
X334-13 Binary input 6 + BIO_5 BI6
X334-14 Binary input 7 + BIO_5 BI7
X334-15 -
X334-16 Common - for inputs 8-9
X334-17 Binary input 8 + BIO_5 BI8
X334-18 Binary input 9 + BIO_5 BI9

Table 538: Binary inputs X339, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X339-1 - for input 1 BIO_6 BI1
X339-2 Binary input 1 + BIO_6 BI1
X339-3 -
X339-4 Common - for inputs 2-3
Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 575

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 16 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
IED physical connections

Terminal Description PCM600 info

Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X339-5 Binary input 2 + BIO_6 BI2
X339-6 Binary input 3 + BIO_6 BI3
X339-7 -
X339-8 Common - for inputs 4-5
X339-9 Binary input 4 + BIO_6 BI4
X339-10 Binary input 5 + BIO_6 BI5
X339-11 -
X339-12 Common - for inputs 6-7
X339-13 Binary input 6 + BIO_6 BI6
X339-14 Binary input 7 + BIO_6 BI7
X339-15 -
X339-16 Common - for inputs 8-9
X339-17 Binary input 8 + BIO_6 BI8
X339-18 Binary input 9 + BIO_6 BI9

16.3 Outputs

16.3.1 Outputs for tripping, controlling and signalling GUID-F4C2CA65-C912-4023-B6A4-1BEEDFB9FEA9 v5

Output contacts PO1, PO2 and PO3 are power output contacts used, for example, for controlling
circuit breakers.

Each signal connector terminal is connected with one 14 or 16 Gauge wire. Use 12 or 14 Gauge wire
for CB trip circuit.

The connected DC voltage to outputs with trip circuit supervision (TCM) must have
correct polarity or the trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR function will not operate
properly.

Table 539: Output contacts X317, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
Power output 1, normally open (TCM)
X317-1 - PSM_102 BO1_PO_TCM
X317-2 +
Power output 2, normally open (TCM)
X317-3 - PSM_102 BO2_PO_TCM
X317-4 +
Table continues on next page

576 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 16
IED physical connections

Terminal Description PCM600 info

Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
Power output 3, normally open (TCM)
X317-5 - PSM_102 BO3_PO_TCM
X317-6 +
X317-7 Power output 4, normally open PSM_102 BO4_PO
X317-8
X317-9 Power output 5, normally open PSM_102 BO5_PO
X317-10
X317-11 Power output 6, normally open PSM_102 BO6_PO
X317-12

Table 540: Output contacts X321, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X321-1 Power output 1, normally open BIO_3 BO1_PO
X321-2
X321-3 Power output 2, normally open BIO_3 BO2_PO
X321-4
X321-5 Power output 3, normally open BIO_3 BO3_PO
X321-6

Table 541: Output contacts X326, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X326-1 Power output 1, normally open BIO_4 BO1_PO
X326-2
X326-3 Power output 2, normally open BIO_4 BO2_PO
X326-4
X326-5 Power output 3, normally open BIO_4 BO3_PO
X326-6

Bay control REC650 577

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 16 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
IED physical connections

Table 542: Output contacts X331, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X331-1 Power output 1, normally open BIO_5 BO1_PO
X331-2
X331-3 Power output 2, normally open BIO_5 BO2_PO
X331-4
X331-5 Power output 3, normally open BIO_5 BO3_PO
X331-6

Table 543: Output contacts X336, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X336-1 Power output 1, normally open BIO_6 BO1_PO
X336-2
X336-3 Power output 2, normally open BIO_6 BO2_PO
X336-4
X336-5 Power output 3, normally open BIO_6 BO3_PO
X336-6

16.3.2 Outputs for signalling GUID-9653033D-C46F-4EFC-9D04-8828257C0B34 v6

Signal output contacts are used for signalling on starting and tripping of the IED. On delivery from
the factory, the pickup and alarm signals from all the protection stages are routed to signalling
outputs. See connection diagrams.

Each signal connector terminal is connected with one 14 or 16 Gauge wire.

Table 544: Output contacts X317, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X317-13 Signal output 1, normally open PSM_102 BO7_SO
X317-14
X317-15 Signal output 2, normally open PSM_102 BO8_SO
X317-16
X317-17 Signal output 3, normally open PSM_102 BO9_SO
X317-18

578 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 16
IED physical connections

Table 545: Output contacts X321, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X321-7 Signal output 1, normally open BIO_3 BO4_SO
X321-8 Signal output 1
X321-9 Signal output 2, normally open BIO_3 BO5_SO
X321-10 Signal output 2
X321-11 Signal output 3, normally open BIO_3 BO6_SO
X321-12 Signal output 3
X321-13 Signal output 4, normally open BIO_3 BO7_SO
X321-14 Signal output 5, normally open BIO_3 BO8_SO
X321-15 Signal outputs 4 and 5, common
X321-16 Signal output 6, normally closed BIO_3 BO9_SO
X321-17 Signal output 6, normally open
X321-18 Signal output 6, common

Table 546: Output contacts X326, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X326-7 Signal output 1, normally open BIO_4 BO4_SO
X326-8 Signal output 1
X326-9 Signal output 2, normally open BIO_4 BO5_SO
X326-10 Signal output 2
X326-11 Signal output 3, normally open BIO_4 BO6_SO
X326-12 Signal output 3
X326-13 Signal output 4, normally open BIO_4 BO7_SO
X326-14 Signal output 5, normally open BIO_4 BO8_SO
X326-15 Signal outputs 4 and 5, common
X326-16 Signal output 6, normally closed BIO_4 BO9_SO
X326-17 Signal output 6, normally open
X326-18 Signal output 6, common

Bay control REC650 579

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 16 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
IED physical connections

Table 547: Output contacts X331, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X331-7 Signal output 1, normally open BIO_5 BO4_SO
X331-8 Signal output 1
X331-9 Signal output 2, normally open BIO_5 BO5_SO
X331-10 Signal output 2
X331-11 Signal output 3, normally open BIO_5 BO6_SO
X331-12 Signal output 3
X331-13 Signal output 4, normally open BIO_5 BO7_SO
X331-14 Signal output 5, normally open BIO_5 BO8_SO
X331-15 Signal outputs 4 and 5, common
X331-16 Signal output 6, normally closed BIO_5 BO9_SO
X331-17 Signal output 6, normally open
X331-18 Signal output 6, common

Table 548: Output contacts X336, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X336-7 Signal output 1, normally open BIO_6 BO4_SO
X336-8 Signal output 1
X336-9 Signal output 2, normally open BIO_6 BO5_SO
X336-10 Signal output 2
X336-11 Signal output 3, normally open BIO_6 BO6_SO
X336-12 Signal output 3
X337-13 Signal output 4, normally open BIO_6 BO7_SO
X336-14 Signal output 5, normally open BIO_6 BO8_SO
X336-15 Signal outputs 4 and 5, common
X336-16 Signal output 6, normally closed BIO_6 BO9_SO
X336-17 Signal output 6, normally open
X336-18 Signal output 6, common

16.3.3 IRF GUID-3A72AEE3-F3DA-422D-BDF3-DDB8079CD527 v5

The IRF contact functions as a change-over output contact for the self-supervision system of the
IED. Under normal operating conditions, the IED is energized and one of the two contacts is
closed. When a fault is detected by the self-supervision system or the auxiliary voltage is
disconnected, the closed contact drops off and the other contact closes.

Each signal connector terminal is connected with one 14 or 16 Gauge wire.

580 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 16
IED physical connections

Table 549: IRF contact X319

Case Terminal Description
3U full 19” X319-1 Closed; no IRF, and Vaux connected

X319-2 Closed; IRF, or Vaux disconnected

X319-3 IRF, common

16.4 Communication connections GUID-71083431-F4BB-447C-9E02-1A3CF9356EE5 v3

The IED's LHMI is provided with an RJ-45 connector. The connector is intended for configuration
and setting purposes.

Rear communication via the X1/LAN1 connector uses a communication module with the optical LC
Ethernet connection.

The HMI connector X0 is used for connecting an external HMI to the IED. The X0/HMI connector
must not be used for any other purpose.

Rear communication via the X8/EIA-485/IRIG-B connector uses a communication module with the
galvanic EIA-485 serial connection.

16.4.1 Ethernet RJ-45 front connection GUID-41708807-AB61-4004-ABA9-DEAE163CF2E5 v7

The IED's LHMI is provided with an RJ-45 connector designed for point-to-point use. The
connector is intended for configuration and setting purposes. The interface on the PC has to be
configured in a way that it obtains the IP address automatically if the DHCPServer is enabled in
LHMI. There is a DHCP server inside IED for the front interface only.

The events and setting values and all input data such as memorized values and disturbance
records can be read via the front communication port.

Only one of the possible clients can be used for parametrization at a time.

• PCM600
• LHMI

The default IP address of the IED through this port is 10.1.150.3.

The front port supports TCP/IP protocol. A standard Ethernet CAT 5 crossover cable is used with
the front port.

16.4.2 Station communication rear connection GUID-46903990-A933-45C8-B277-5B8E4DB4297E v4

The default IP address of the IED through the Ethernet connection is 192.168.1.10. The physical
connector is X1/LAN1. The interface speed is 100 Mbps for the 100BASE-FX LC alternative.

If the COM03 communication module is used, the X1/LAN1 A should be used. For redundant
kommunication, X1/LAN A and X2/LAN B should be used. LAN2 A is not used in this product.

Bay control REC650 581

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 16 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
IED physical connections

16.4.3 Optical serial rear connection GUID-232BC617-0DBD-44A3-ACCB-D8B6DE044976 v2

Serial communication can be used via optical connection in star topology. Connector type is glass
(ST connector). Connection's idle state is indicated either with light on or light off. The physical
connector is X9/Rx,Tx.

16.4.4 EIA-485 serial rear connection GUID-1EA106A1-986F-45DE-9D39-583571913CD6 v2

The communication module follows the EIA-485 standard and is intended to be used in multi-point
communication.

For the complete list of available connection diagrams, please refer to Section Connection
diagrams.

For four-wire connections, to terminate far end of the RS485 bus with the built-in 120 ohm
resistors, connect X8:4 – 11 for Tx and X8:2 – 9 for Rx. This can be set via the local HMI under
Configuration/Communication/Station communication/RS485 port/RS485GEN:1/WireMode =
Four-wire.

For two-wire connections, to terminate far end of the RS485 bus with the built-in 120 ohm
resistors, connect X8:4 - 11. This can be set via the local HMI under Configuration/
Communication/Station communication/RS485 port/RS485GEN:1/WireMode = Two-wire.

Configure one of the node on the bus with BIAS (On) in order to set the bus signals on a defined
level and non-floating which makes the bus more robust to disturbances. This can be set via the
local HMI under Configuration/Communication/Station communication/RS485 port/
RS485GEN:1/BIAS = On/Off.

To use the chassis grounds (grounding the cable shield, for example), the cable shield should be
grounded on one end at X8:8 (direct ground) and at the other end at X8:1 (via capacitor).

Termination of the RS485 bus is always recommended regardless of the cable

length.

16.4.5 Communication interfaces and protocols GUID-35C845D3-574A-40D1-AEF1-9E0D330E31DE v4

Table 550: Supported station communication interfaces and protocols

Protocol Ethernet Serial
100BASE-FX LC Glass fibre (ST connector) EIA-485
IEC 61850–8–1 ● - -
DNP3 ● ● ●
IEC 60870-5-103 - ● ●
● = Supported

582 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 16
IED physical connections

16.4.6 Recommended industrial Ethernet switches GUID-41F05A0B-D39C-4BF7-829A-EB37C5D37CF4 v5

ABB recommends ABB industrial Ethernet switches.

16.5 Connection diagrams GUID-53126BA1-8E1D-47FD-A056-525144631393 v1

The connection diagrams are delivered on the IED Connectivity package DVD as part of the
product delivery.

The latest versions of the connection diagrams can be downloaded from

http://www.abb.com/substationautomation.

Connection diagrams for Customized products

Connection diagram, 650 series 1.3 1MRK006502-AD

Connection diagrams for Configured products

Connection diagram, REC650 1.3, (3Ph/1CBA) A01A 1MRK006502-DD

Connection diagram, REC650 1.3, (3Ph/1CBAB) A02A 1MRK006502-CD

Connection diagram, REC650 1.3, (BCAB) A07A 1MRK006502-BD

Bay control REC650 583

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
584
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 17
Labels

Section 17 Labels
17.1 Labels on IED GUID-74C803A6-79D3-46DC-AD6B-EAF2084E885A v1

Front view of IED

10

7
2
7

6
3

11

4
=IEC15000506=2=en=Original.vsdx
IEC15000506 V2 EN-US

Figure 281: Example of IED label

1 QR-code containing the complete ordering code 2

2 Power supply module (PSM)
3 mA input module (MIM)
4 Ordering and serial number
5 Manufacturer
6 Transformer designations
7 Transformer input module, rated currents and voltages
8 Optional, customer specific information
9 Order number, dc supply voltage and rated frequency
10 Product type, description and serial number
11 Product type

Bay control REC650 585

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 17 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Labels

Rear view of IED

IEC19000099-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000099 V1 EN-US

1 Caution label
2 Earthing
3 Warning label
4 Class 1 laser product label It is used when an optical SFP or an MR/LR LDCM is configured in
the product.

586 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 18
Technical data

Section 18 Technical data

18.1 Dimensions GUID-33B28FB3-7FCF-4DEC-A194-C79D725805D6 v8.1.1

Table 551: Dimensions of the IED - 3U full 19" rack

Description Value
Width 17.48 inches (444 mm)
Height 5.20 inches (132 mm), 3U
Depth 9.82 inches (249.5 mm)
Weight box <22.04 lbs (10 kg)

18.2 Power supply GUID-B8B53053-FE79-47B1-AEDB-904B91B54175 v7.1.1

Table 552: Power supply

Description 600PSM01 600PSM02 600PSM03
Vn 24, 30 V DC 48, 60, 110, 125 V DC 100, 110, 120, 220, 240 V
AC, 50 and 60 Hz
110, 125, 220, 250 V DC
Vnvariation 80...120% of Vn (24...30 V 80...120% of Vn (38.4...150 85...110% of Vn (85...264 V
DC) V DC) AC)
80...120% of Vn (88...300 V
DC)
Maximum load of auxiliary 35 W for DC
voltage supply 40 VA for AC
Ripple in the DC auxiliary Max 15% of the DC value (at frequency of 100 and 120 Hz)
voltage
Maximum interruption time 50 ms at Vn
in the auxiliary DC voltage
without resetting the IED
Resolution of the voltage 1 bit represents 0,5 V (+/- 1 bit represents 1 V (+/- 1 1 bit represents 2 V (+/- 1
measurement in PSM 1 VDC) VDC) VDC)
module

Bay control REC650 587

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 18 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Technical data

18.3 Energizing inputs GUID-80AA04F6-C989-4E8A-81C0-1A9A7458ADCC v7.1.1

Table 553: TRM — Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for transformer inputs
Description Value
Frequency
Rated frequency fr 50 or 60 Hz

Operating range fr ± 10%

Current inputs
Rated current Ir 0.1 or 0.5 A1) 1 or 5 A2)
Operating range 0 – 50 A 0 – 500 A
Thermal withstand 100 A for 1 s 500 A for 1 s *)
20 A for 10 s 100 A for 10 s
8 A for 1 min 40 A for 1 min
4 A continuously 20 A continuously
Dynamic withstand 250 A one half wave 1250 A one half wave
Burden < 1 mVA at Ir = 0.1 A < 10 mVA at Ir = 1 A

< 20 mVA at Ir = 0.5 A < 200 mVA at Ir = 5 A

*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.

Voltage inputs**)
Rated voltage Vr 100 or 220 V

Operating range 0 – 420 V

Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s
420 V continuously
Burden < 50 mVA at 100 V
< 200 mVA at 220 V
**) all values for individual voltage inputs
Note! All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated frequency

1) Residual current
2) Phase currents or residual current

18.4 Binary inputs GUID-247871FB-80C1-4D7F-B860-9E98BBEC9E23 v4

Table 554: Binary inputs

Description Value
Operating range Maximum input voltage 300 V DC
Rated voltage 24...250 V DC
Current drain 1.6...1.8 mA
Power consumption/input <0.38 W
Threshold voltage 15...221 V DC (parametrizable in the range in steps of 1% of
the rated voltage)

588 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 18
Technical data

18.5 Signal outputs GUID-CAD6026E-BF75-487E-BA91-CEF705FB65DB v3

Table 555: Signal output and IRF output

Description Value
Rated voltage 250 V AC/DC
Continuous contact carry 5A
Make and carry for 3.0 s 10 A
Make and carry 0.5 s 30 A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time ≤0.5 A/≤0.1 A/≤0.04 A
constant L/R<40 ms, at V< 48/110/220 V DC

18.6 Power outputs GUID-F773051A-F50F-4B12-8CB3-88936A687FDC v4

Table 556: Power output relays without TCM function

Description Value
Rated voltage 250 V AC/DC
Continuous contact carry 8A
Make and carry for 3.0 s 15 A
Make and carry for 0.5 s 30 A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time ≤1 A/≤0.3 A/≤0.1 A
constant L/R<40 ms, at V< 48/110/220 V DC

Table 557: Power output relays with TCM function

Description Value
Rated voltage 250 V DC
Continuous contact carry 8A
Make and carry for 3.0 s 15 A
Make and carry for 0.5 s 30 A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time ≤1 A/≤0.3 A/≤0.1 A
constant L/R<40 ms, at V< 48/110/220 V DC
Control voltage range 20...250 V DC
Current drain through the monitoring circuit ~1.0 mA
Minimum voltage over the TCS contact 20 V DC

Bay control REC650 589

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 18 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Technical data

18.7 Data communication interfaces GUID-D31978A8-DD9B-43C6-B066-57DBBF4EF2F4 v9

Table 558: Ethernet interfaces

Ethernet interface Protocol Cable Data transfer rate
100BASE-TX - CAT 6 S/FTP or better 100 MBits/s
100BASE-FX TCP/IP protocol Fibre-optic cable with LC 100 MBits/s
connector

Table 559: Fibre-optic communication link

Wave length Fibre type Connector Permitted path Distance
attenuation1)
1300 nm MM 62.5/125 μm LC <8 dB 2 km
glass fibre core

1) Maximum allowed attenuation caused by connectors and cable together

Table 560: X8/IRIG-B and EIA-485 interface

Type Protocol Cable
Tension clamp connection IRIG-B Shielded twisted pair cable
Recommended: CAT 5, Belden RS-485 (9841- 9844) or
Alpha Wire (Alpha 6222-6230)
Tension clamp connection IEC 68070–5–103 Shielded twisted pair cable
DNP3.0 Recommended: DESCAFLEX RD-H(ST)H-2x2x0.22mm2,
Belden 9729, Belden 9829

Table 561: IRIG-B

Type Value Accuracy
Input impedance 430 Ohm -
Minimum input voltage 4.3 V -
HIGH
Maximum input voltage 0.8 V -
LOW

Table 562: EIA-485 interface

Type Value Conditions
Minimum differential 1.5 V –
driver output voltage
Maximum output current 60 mA -
Minimum differential 0.2 V -
receiver input voltage
Table continues on next page

590 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 18
Technical data

Type Value Conditions

Supported bit rates 300, 600, 1200, 2400, -
4800, 9600, 19200, 38400,
57600, 115200
Maximum number of 650 32 -
IEDs supported on the
same bus
Max. cable length 925 m (3000 ft) Cable: AWG24 or better, stub lines shall be avoided

Table 563: Serial rear interface

Type Counter connector
Serial port (X9) Optical serial port, type ST for IEC 60870-5-103 and
DNP serial

Table 564: Optical serial port (X9)

Wave length Fibre type Connector Permitted path attenuation1)
820 nm MM 62,5/125 µm ST 6.8 dB (approx. 1700m length with 4 db / km
glass fibre core fibre attenuation)
820 nm MM 50/125 µm glass ST 2.4 dB (approx. 600m length with 4 db / km
fibre core fibre attenuation)

1) Maximum allowed attenuation caused by fibre

18.8 Enclosure class GUID-59B01F47-1193-4243-B78C-EC6149CFA107 v16

18.9 Ingress protection GUID-3E1C78D9-4FF6-46B5-9503-7357447D9012 v2

Table 565: Ingress protection

Description Value
IED front IP 54
IED rear IP 20
IED sides IP 40
IED top IP 40
IED bottom IP 20

Bay control REC650 591

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 18 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Technical data

18.10 Environmental conditions and tests GUID-8D1EE1BB-C9EF-4184-BB4D-AB32B86DBFCE v4

Table 566: Environmental conditions

Description Value
Operating temperature range -25...+55ºC (continuous)
Short-time service temperature range -40...+70ºC (<16h)
Note: Degradation in MTBF and HMI performance
outside the temperature range of -25...+55ºC
Relative humidity <93%, non-condensing
Atmospheric pressure 12.47...15.37 psi (86...106 kPa)
Altitude up to 6561.66 feet (2000 m)
Transport and storage temperature range -40...+85ºC

Table 567: Environmental tests

Description Type test value Reference
Cold tests operation 96 h at -25ºC IEC 60068-2-1/ANSI C37.90-2005
16 h at -40ºC (chapter 4)

storage 96 h at -40ºC
Dry heat tests operation 16 h at +70ºC IEC 60068-2-2/ANSI C37.90-2005
(chapter 4)

storage 96 h at +85ºC
Damp heat steady state 240 h at +40ºC IEC 60068-2-78
tests humidity 93%

cyclic 6 cycles at +25 to +55ºC IEC 60068-2-30

humidity 93...95%

592 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 19
IED and functionality tests

Section 19 IED and functionality tests

19.1 Electromagnetic compatibility tests GUID-2794AAD0-DBFE-476D-BAD1-A8D0ECFE9C9C v6

Table 568: Electromagnetic compatibility tests

Description Type test value Reference
100 kHz and 1 MHz burst IEC 61000-4-18, level 3
disturbance test IEC 60255-22-1
ANSI C37.90.1-2012
• Common mode 2.5 kV

• Differential mode 2.5 kV

Electrostatic discharge test IEC 61000-4-2, level 4

IEC 60255-22-2
ANSI C37.90.3-2001
• Contact discharge 8 kV

• Air discharge 15 kV

Radio frequency interference tests

• Conducted, common mode 10 V (emf), f=150 kHz...80 MHz IEC 61000-4-6 , level 3
IEC 60255-22-6
• Radiated, amplitude- 20 V/m (rms), f=80...1000 MHz and IEC 61000-4-3, level 3
modulated f=1.4...2.7 GHz IEC 60255-22-3
ANSI C37.90.2-2004
Fast transient disturbance tests IEC 61000-4-4
IEC 60255-22-4, class A
ANSI C37.90.1-2012
• Communication ports 4 kV

• Other ports 4 kV

Surge immunity test IEC 61000-4-5

IEC 60255-22-5
• Communication 1 kV line-to-ground

• Other ports 2 kV line-to-ground, 1 kV line-to-line

• Power supply 4 kV line-to-ground, 2 kV line-to-line

Power frequency (50 Hz) magnetic IEC 61000-4-8, level 5

field
• 3s 1000 A/m

• Continuous 100 A/m

Pulse magnetic field immunity test 1000A/m IEC 61000–4–9, level 5

Table continues on next page

Bay control REC650 593

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 19 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
IED and functionality tests

Description Type test value Reference

Damped oscillatory magnetic field 100A/m, 100 kHz and 1MHz IEC 6100–4–10, level 5
Power frequency immunity test IEC 60255-22-7, class A
IEC 61000-4-16
• Common mode 300 V rms

• Differential mode 150 V rms

Voltage dips and short Dips: IEC 60255-11

interruptionsc on DC power supply 40%/200 ms IEC 61000-4-11
70%/500 ms
Interruptions:
0-50 ms: No restart
0...∞ s : Correct behaviour at power
down
Voltage dips and interruptions on Dips: IEC 60255–11
AC power supply 40% 10/12 cycles at 50/60 Hz IEC 61000–4–11
70% 25/30 cycles at 50/60 Hz
Interruptions:
0–50 ms: No restart
0...∞ s: Correct behaviour at power
down
Electromagnetic emission tests EN 55011, class A
IEC 60255-25
ANSI C63.4, FCC
• Conducted, RF-emission
(mains terminal)

0.15...0.50 MHz < 79 dB(µV) quasi peak

< 66 dB(µV) average
0.5...30 MHz < 73 dB(µV) quasi peak
< 60 dB(µV) average
• Radiated RF-emission, ANSI

30 – 88 MHz < 39,08 dB(µV/m) quasi peak,

measured at 10 m distance
88 – 216 MHz < 43,52 dB(µV/m) quasi peak,
measured at 10 m distance
216 – 960 MHz < 46,44 dB(µV/m) quasi peak,
measured at 10 m distance
960 – 1000 MHz < 49,54 dB(µV/m) quasi peak,
measured at 10 m distance

594 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 19
IED and functionality tests

19.2 Insulation tests GUID-83755DD7-E73B-442B-A0DF-87D648F7CF01 v3

Table 569: Insulation tests

Description Type test value Reference
Dielectric tests: IEC 60255-5
ANSI C37.90-2005
• Test voltage 2 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min
1 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min, communication
Impulse voltage test: IEC 60255-5
ANSI C37.90-2005
• Test voltage 5 kV, unipolar impulses, waveform
1.2/50 μs, source energy 0.5 J
1 kV, unipolar impulses, waveform
1.2/50 μs, source energy 0.5 J,
communication
Insulation resistance measurements IEC 60255-5
ANSI C37.90-2005
• Isolation resistance >100 MΏ, 500 V DC

Protective bonding resistance IEC 60255-27

• Resistance <0.1 Ώ (60 s)

19.3 Mechanical tests GUID-F98A61B6-B290-43E5-BDF7-96FE3300F28E v3

Table 570: Mechanical tests

Description Reference Requirement
Vibration response tests IEC 60255-21-1 Class 1
(sinusoidal)
Vibration endurance test IEC60255-21-1 Class 1
Shock response test IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1
Shock withstand test IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1
Bump test IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1
Seismic test IEC 60255-21-3 Class 2

19.4 Product safety GUID-2AA791D9-FA91-4F1F-A31D-64412575CE81 v8

Table 571: Product safety

Description Reference
LV directive 2006/95/EC
Standard EN 60255-27 (2005)

Bay control REC650 595

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 19 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
IED and functionality tests

19.5 EMC compliance GUID-9B1F0C9F-664E-41C8-ADA3-4376E096A9C9 v4

Table 572: EMC compliance

Description Reference
EMC directive 2004/108/EC
Standard EN 50263 (2000)
EN 60255-26 (2007)

596 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

Section 20 Time inverse characteristics

20.1 Application GUID-E53AC2B7-C908-4FE9-A1F0-3052A6B3100F v1

In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections in different points in
the network different time delays for the different relays are normally used. The simplest way to
do this is to use definite time delay. In more sophisticated applications current dependent time
characteristics are used. Both alternatives are shown in a simple application with three
overcurrent protections connected in series.

IPickup IPickup IPickup

xx05000129_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000129 V1 EN-US

Figure 282: Three overcurrent protections connected in series

Stage 3

Time
Stage 2 Stage 2

Stage 1 Stage 1 Stage 1

Fault point
position

en05000130.vsd
IEC05000130 V1 EN-US

Figure 283: Definite time overcurrent characteristics

Bay control REC650 597

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 20 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

Time

Fault point
position

en05000131.vsd
IEC05000131 V1 EN-US

Figure 284: Inverse time overcurrent characteristics with inst. function

The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance time and still
assure the selectivity between protections.

To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the operation
time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of following factors, in a simple
case with two protections in series:

• Difference between pick-up time of the protections to be co-ordinated

• Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault
• Reset time of the protection
• Margin dependent of the time-delay inaccuracy of the protections

Assume we have the following network case.

A1 B1
Feeder

51 51

Time axis

t=0 t=t1 t=t2 t=t3

en05000132_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000132 V1 EN-US

Figure 285: Selectivity steps for a fault on feeder B1

where:
t=0 is The fault occurs
t=t1 is Protection B1 trips

t=t2 is Breaker at B1 opens

t=t3 is Protection A1 resets

598 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

In the case protection B1 shall operate without any intentional delay (instantaneous). When the
fault occurs the protections pickup to detect the fault current. After the time t1 the protection B1
send a trip signal to the circuit breaker. The protection A1 starts its delay timer at the same time,
with some deviation in time due to differences between the two protections. There is a possibility
that A1 will start before the trip is sent to the B1 circuit breaker.

At the time t2 the circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the fault current is
interrupted. The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ between different faults. The maximum opening
time can be given from manuals and test protocols. Still at t2 the timer of protection A1 is active.

At time t3 the protection A1 is reset, i.e. the timer is stopped.

In most applications it is required that the delay times shall reset as fast as possible when the
current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time shall be minimized.
In some applications it is however beneficial to have some type of delayed reset time of the
overcurrent function. This can be the case in the following applications:

• If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current relay, close to the faults, picks up and
resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the system.
• Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic reclosing to a
permanent fault.
• Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for other protection
functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to assure the release function.

20.2 Operation principle IP15777-1 v2

20.2.1 Mode of operation M16687-3 v5

The function can operate in a definite time-lag mode or in a current definite inverse time mode.
For the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC based standard curves are available.

If current in any phase exceeds the set pickup current value , a timer, according to the selected
operating mode, is started. The component always uses the maximum of the three phase current
values as the current level used in timing calculations.

In case of definite time-lag mode the timer will run constantly until the time is reached or until the
current drops below the reset value (pickup value minus the hysteresis) and the reset time has
elapsed.

The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 75.

Bay control REC650 599

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 20 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

æ ö
ç ÷
t [s ] = ç + B ÷ × td
A
ç P ÷
çç æç ö
i
÷ -C ÷÷
è è Pickupn ø ø
EQUATION1640 V1 EN-US (Equation 75)

where:
p, A, B, C are constants defined for each curve type,
Pickupn is the set pickup current for step n,
td is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current.

For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the set pickup
level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can be seen:

ææ P
ö
( t op - B × td ) × çç
i ö
÷
ç è Pickupn ø
- C ÷ = A × td
÷
è ø
EQUATION1642 V1 EN-US (Equation 76)

where:
top is the operating time of the protection

The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils according to
equation 77, in addition to the constant time delay:

t
ææ i ö
P
ö
òçç ÷
ç è Pickupn ø
0è
- C ÷ × dt ³ A × td
÷
ø
EQUATION1643 V1 EN-US (Equation 77)

For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.

600 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

n æ æ i ( j ) öP ö
Dt × å çç
ç Pickupn ø
j =1 è è
÷ - C ÷ ³ A × td
÷
ø
EQUATION1644 V1 EN-US (Equation 78)

where:
j=1 is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been detected,
that is, when

i
>1
Pickupn
EQUATION1646 V1 EN-US

Dt is the time interval between two consecutive executions of the

protection algorithm,
n is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip time
equation is fulfilled, that is, when a trip is given and
i (j) is the fault current at time j

For inverse time operation, the inverse time characteristic is selectable. Both the IEC and ANSI/
IEEE standardized inverse time characteristics are supported.

For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time-lag of operation, see figure 286.

Operate
time

tMin

Current
IMin
IEC05000133-3-en.vsd
IEC05000133 V2 EN-US

Figure 286: Minimum time-lag operation for the IEC curves

In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be set to the value
which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse time curve for measured current of

Bay control REC650 601

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 20 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

twenty times the set current pickup value. Note that the operating time value is dependent on the
selected setting value for time multiplier k.

In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two additional inverse
curves available; the RI curve and the RD curve.

The RI inverse time curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical ASEA relay RI. The
curve is described by equation 80:

æ ö
ç td ÷
t [s ] = ç ÷
çç 0.339 - 0.235 × Pickupn ÷÷
è i ø
EQUATION1647 V1 EN-US (Equation 80)

where:
Pickupn is the set pickup current for step n
td is set time multiplier for step n
i is the measured current

The RD inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflex protection RXIDG. The
curve enables a high degree of selectivity required for sensitive residual ground-fault current
protection, with ability to detect high-resistive ground faults. The curve is described by
equation 81:

æ i ö
[ ]
t s = 5.8 - 1.35 × ln ç ÷
è td × Pickupn ø
EQUATION1648 V1 EN-US (Equation 81)

where:
Pickupn is the set pickup current for step n,
td is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current

The timer will be reset directly when the current drops below the set pickup current level minus the
hysteresis.

20.3 Inverse time characteristics IP15797-1 v2

GUID-F7AA2194-4D1C-4475-8853-C7D064912614 v2

When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the operate time of the
stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set definite time delay.
Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is of utmost importance to set the
definite time delay for that stage to zero.

602 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

M12388-1 v11

Table 573: ANSI Inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01 -

æ A ö
t = ç P + B ÷ × td
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
EQUATION1651 V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0

ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02, tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02

Table 574: IEC Inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01 -

æ A ö
t = ç P ÷ × td
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
EQUATION1653 V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0

The parameter setting Characterist1 and 4/Reserved shall not be used, since this
parameter setting is for future use and not implemented yet.

Bay control REC650 603

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 20 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

Table 575: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy
RI type inverse characteristic td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

1
t = × td
0.236
0.339 -
I
EQUATION1656 V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

RD type logarithmic inverse td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

characteristic

æ
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In
I ö
÷
è td ø
EQUATION1657 V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

SEMOD116978-2 v6

Table 576: Inverse time characteristics for overvoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 ±5% +60 ms

td
t =
æ V - VPickup ö
ç ÷
è VPickup ø
EQUATION1661 V1 EN-US

V = Vmeasured

Type B curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

td × 480
t =
2.0
æ V - VPickup ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷ - 0.035
è VPickup ø
EQUATION1662 V1 EN-US

Type C curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

td × 480
t =
3.0
æ V - VPickup ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷ - 0.035
è VPickup ø
EQUATION1663 V1 EN-US

604 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

Table 577: Inverse time characteristics for undervoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 ±5% +60 ms

td
t =
æ VPickup - V ö
ç ÷
è VPickup ø
EQUATION1658 V1 EN-US

V = Vmeasured

Type B curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

td × 480
t = + 0.055
2.0
æ VPickup - V ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è VPickup ø
EQUATION1659 V1 EN-US

V = Vmeasured

Table 578: Inverse time characteristics for residual overvoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps ±5% +70 ms
of 0.01
td
t =
æ V - VPickup ö
ç ÷
è VPickup ø
EQUATION1661 V1 EN-US

V = Vmeasured

Type B curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps

of 0.01
td × 480
t =
2.0
æ V - VPickup ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷ - 0.035
è VPickup ø
EQUATION1662 V1 EN-US

Type C curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps

of 0.01
td × 480
t =
3.0
æ V - VPickup ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷ - 0.035
è VPickup ø
EQUATION1663 V1 EN-US

Bay control REC650 605

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 20 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

SEMOD118114-4 v4

A070750 V2 EN-US

Figure 287: ANSI Extremely inverse time characteristics

606 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

A070751 V2 EN-US

Figure 288: ANSI Very inverse time characteristics

Bay control REC650 607

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 20 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

A070752 V2 EN-US

Figure 289: ANSI Normal inverse time characteristics

608 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

A070753 V2 EN-US

Figure 290: ANSI Moderately inverse time characteristics

Bay control REC650 609

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 20 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

A070817 V2 EN-US

Figure 291: ANSI Long time extremely inverse time characteristics

610 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

A070818 V2 EN-US

Figure 292: ANSI Long time very inverse time characteristics

Bay control REC650 611

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 20 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

A070819 V2 EN-US

Figure 293: ANSI Long time inverse time characteristics

612 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

A070820 V2 EN-US

Figure 294: IEC Normal inverse time characteristics

Bay control REC650 613

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 20 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

A070821 V2 EN-US

Figure 295: IEC Very inverse time characteristics

614 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

A070822 V2 EN-US

Figure 296: IEC Inverse time characteristics

Bay control REC650 615

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 20 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

A070823 V2 EN-US

Figure 297: IEC Extremely inverse time characteristics

616 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

A070824 V2 EN-US

Figure 298: IEC Short time inverse time characteristics

Bay control REC650 617

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 20 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

A070825 V2 EN-US

Figure 299: IEC Long time inverse time characteristics

618 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

A070826 V2 EN-US

Figure 300: RI-type inverse time characteristics

Bay control REC650 619

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 20 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

A070827 V2 EN-US

Figure 301: RD-type inverse time characteristics

620 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

GUID-ACF4044C-052E-4CBD-8247-C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN-US

Figure 302: Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection

Bay control REC650 621

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 20 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

GUID-F5E0E1C2-48C8-4DC7-A84B-174544C09142 V1 EN-US

Figure 303: Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection

622 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

GUID-A9898DB7-90A3-47F2-AEF9-45FF148CB679 V1 EN-US

Figure 304: Inverse curve C characteristic of overvoltage protection

Bay control REC650 623

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 20 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

GUID-35F40C3B-B483-40E6-9767-69C1536E3CBC V1 EN-US

Figure 305: Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection

624 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

GUID-B55D0F5F-9265-4D9A-A7C0-E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN-US

Figure 306: Inverse curve B characteristic of undervoltage protection

Bay control REC650 625

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
626
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 21
Glossary

Section 21 Glossary
M14893-1 v11.1.1

AC Alternating current
ACC Actual channel
ACT Application configuration tool within PCM600
A/D converter Analog-to-digital converter
ADBS Amplitude deadband supervision
AI Analog input
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AR Autoreclosing
ASCT Auxiliary summation current transformer
ASD Adaptive signal detection
ASDU Application service data unit
AWG American Wire Gauge standard
BBP Busbar protection
BFOC/2,5 Bayonet fibre optic connector
BFP Breaker failure protection
BI Binary input
BOS Binary outputs status
BR External bistable relay
BS British Standards
CB Circuit breaker
CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephony. A
United Nations-sponsored standards body within the International
Telecommunications Union.
CCVT Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer
Class C Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI
CMPPS Combined megapulses per second
CMT Communication Management tool in PCM600
CO cycle Close-open cycle
COMTRADE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange format for
Disturbance recorder according to IEEE/ANSI C37.111, 1999 / IEC60255-24
COT Cause of transmission
CPU Central processing unit
CR Carrier receive
CRC Cyclic redundancy check
CROB Control relay output block

Bay control REC650 627

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 21 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Glossary

CS Carrier send
CT Current transformer
CU Communication unit
CVT or CCVT Capacitive voltage transformer
DAR Delayed autoreclosing
DARPA Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US developer of the
TCP/IP protocol etc.)
DBDL Dead bus dead line
DBLL Dead bus live line
DC Direct current
DFC Data flow control
DFT Discrete Fourier transform
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DI Digital input
DLLB Dead line live bus
DNP Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE Std 1815-2012
DR Disturbance recorder
DRAM Dynamic random access memory
DRH Disturbance report handler
DTT Direct transfer trip scheme
EHV network Extra high voltage network
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF Electromotive force
EMI Electromagnetic interference
EnFP End fault protection
EPA Enhanced performance architecture
ESD Electrostatic discharge
F-SMA Type of optical fibre connector
FAN Fault number
FCB Flow control bit; Frame count bit
FOX 20 Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech, data and
protection signals
FOX 512/515 Access multiplexer
FOX 6Plus Compact time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up to seven
duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers
FTP File Transfer Protocal
FUN Function type

628 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 21
Glossary

GCM Communication interface module with carrier of GPS receiver module

GDE Graphical display editor within PCM600
GI General interrogation command
GIS Gas-insulated switchgear
GOOSE Generic object-oriented substation event
GPS Global positioning system
GSAL Generic security application
GSE Generic substation event
HDLC protocol High-level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC standard
HFBR connector type Plastic fiber connector
HMI Human-machine interface
HSAR High speed autoreclosing
HV High-voltage
HVDC High-voltage direct current
IDBS Integrating deadband supervision
IEC International Electrical Committee
IEC 61869-2 IEC Standard, Instrument transformers
IEC 60870-5-103 Communication standard for protective equipment. A serial master/slave
protocol for point-to-point communication
IEC 61850 Substation automation communication standard
IEC 61850–8–1 Communication protocol standard
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEEE 802.12 A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on twisted-pair
or optical fiber cable
IEEE P1386.1 PCI Mezzanine Card (PMC) standard for local bus modules. References the
CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common Mezzanine Card) standard for
the mechanics and the PCI specifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest
Group) for the electrical EMF (Electromotive force).
IEEE 1686 Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs) Cyber Security
Capabilities
IED Intelligent electronic device
I-GIS Intelligent gas-insulated switchgear
Instance When several occurrences of the same function are available in the IED,
they are referred to as instances of that function. One instance of a
function is identical to another of the same kind but has a different
number in the IED user interfaces. The word "instance" is sometimes
defined as an item of information that is representative of a type. In the
same way an instance of a function in the IED is representative of a type of
function.
IP 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP protocol suite widely
used on Ethernet networks. IP is a connectionless, best-effort packet-
switching protocol. It provides packet routing, fragmentation and
reassembly through the data link layer.

Bay control REC650 629

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 21 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Glossary

2. Ingression protection, according to IEC standard

IP 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level
IP20- Protected against solid foreign objects of12.5mm diameter and
greater.
IP 40 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level IP40-Protected
against solid foreign objects of 1mm diameter and greater.
IP 54 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level
IP54-Dust-protected,protected against splashing water.
IRF Internal failure signal
IRIG-B: InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B, standard 200
ITU International Telecommunications Union
LAN Local area network
LCD Liquid crystal display
LDD Local detection device
LED Light-emitting diode
LNT LON network tool
MCB Miniature circuit breaker
MVAL Value of measurement
NCC National Control Centre
NOF Number of grid faults
NUM Numerical module
OCO cycle Open-close-open cycle
OCP Overcurrent protection
OLTC On-load tap changer
OTEV Disturbance data recording initiated by other event than start/pick-up
OV Over-voltage
Overreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition. For
example, a distance relay is overreaching when the impedance presented
to it is smaller than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to the
balance point, that is, the set reach. The relay “sees” the fault but perhaps
it should not have seen it.
PCI Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus
PCM600 Protection and control IED manager
PC-MIP Mezzanine card standard
POR Permissive overreach
POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip
Process bus Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity to the
measured and/or controlled components
PSM Power supply module
PST Parameter setting tool within PCM600

630 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
1MRK 511 287-UUS B Section 21
Glossary

PT ratio Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio

PUTT Permissive underreach transfer trip
RCA Relay characteristic angle
RISC Reduced instruction set computer
RMS value Root mean square value
RS422 A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data in point-to-
point connections
RS485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RTC Real-time clock
RTU Remote terminal unit
SA Substation Automation
SBO Select-before-operate
SC Switch or push button to close
SCL Short circuit location
SCS Station control system
SCADA Supervision, control and data acquisition
SCT System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850
SDU Service data unit
SMA connector Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with constant impedance.
SMT Signal matrix tool within PCM600
SMS Station monitoring system
SNTP Simple network time protocol – is used to synchronize computer clocks on
local area networks. This reduces the requirement to have accurate
hardware clocks in every embedded system in a network. Each embedded
node can instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the required
accuracy.
SOF Status of fault
SPA Strömberg protection acquisition, a serial master/slave protocol for point-
to-point communication
SRY Switch for CB ready condition
ST Switch or push button to trip
Starpoint Neutral/Wye point of transformer or generator
SVC Static VAr compensation
TC Trip coil
TCS Trip circuit supervision
TCP Transmission control protocol. The most common transport layer protocol
used on Ethernet and the Internet.
TCP/IP Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de facto
standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD Unix. TCP/IP was
developed by DARPA for Internet working and encompasses both network
layer and transport layer protocols. While TCP and IP specify two protocols

Bay control REC650 631

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 21 1MRK 511 287-UUS B
Glossary

at specific protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to the entire US

Department of Defense protocol suite based upon these, including Telnet,
FTP, UDP and RDP.
TEF Time delayed gound-fault protection function
TLS Transport Layer Security
TM Transmit (disturbance data)
TNC connector Threaded Neill-Concelman, a threaded constant impedance version of a
BNC connector
TP Trip (recorded fault)
TPZ, TPY, TPX, TPS Current transformer class according to IEC
TRM Transformer Module. This module transforms currents and voltages taken
from the process into levels suitable for further signal processing.
TYP Type identification
UMT User management tool
Underreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition. For
example, a distance relay is underreaching when the impedance presented
to it is greater than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to the
balance point, that is, the set reach. The relay does not “see” the fault but
perhaps it should have seen it. See also Overreach.
UTC Coordinated Universal Time. A coordinated time scale, maintained by the
Bureau International des Poids et Mesures (BIPM), which forms the basis of
a coordinated dissemination of standard frequencies and time signals.
UTC is derived from International Atomic Time (TAI) by the addition of a
whole number of "leap seconds" to synchronize it with Universal Time 1
(UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth's orbit, the rotational
axis tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing the Earth's irregular rotation, on
which UT1 is based. The Coordinated Universal Time is expressed using a
24-hour clock, and uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for aeroplane and
ship navigation, where it is also sometimes known by the military name,
"Zulu time." "Zulu" in the phonetic alphabet stands for "Z", which stands for
longitude zero.
UV Undervoltage
WEI Weak end infeed logic
VT Voltage transformer
3IO Three times zero-sequence current. Often referred to as the residual or the
ground-fault current
3VO Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as the residual
voltage or the neutral point voltage

632 Bay control REC650

Technical manual
© Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved
633
ABB AB
Grid Automation Products
SE-721 59 Västerås, Sweden
Phone +46 (0) 21 32 50 00
Scan this QR code to visit our website

www.abb.com/protection-control
1MRK 511 287-UUS

© Copyright 2013 ABB.

All rights reserved.